Microsoft Word 2013 Step by Step ebook

Microsoft Word 2013 Step by Step ebook
spine = 1.15”
—one step at a time!
Experience learning made easy—and quickly teach yourself
how to create great-looking documents with Microsoft
Word 2013. With Step by Step, you set the pace—building
and practicing the skills you need, just when you need them!
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
2
Work with Word on your PC or touch-enabled device
Master core tools for designing and editing docs
3
Manage page layout, style, and navigation
Organize content in tables, lists, and charts
Add pictures, diagrams, and other visuals
Create custom styles and templates
4
1 Follow the easy numbered steps
Microsoft Word 2013
The smart way to learn
Microsoft Word 2013
Build exactly the skills you need. Learn at the pace you want.
2 Use screenshots to check your work
Your Step by Step digital content includes:
• All the book’s practice files—ready to download at:
http://aka.ms/Word2013sbs/files
• Fully searchable ebook. See the instruction page at
the back of the book.
microsoft.com/mspress
ISBN: 978-0-7356-6912-3
U.S.A. $29.99
Canada $31.99
3 Get helpful tips and pointers
4 Build your skills hands-on with
Microsoft
Word 2013
®
ready-made practice files
Lambert
Cox
[Recommended]
Microsoft Office/
Microsoft Word
Joan Lambert and Joyce Cox
Practice files
plus ebook
PUBLISHED BY
Microsoft Press
A Division of Microsoft Corporation
One Microsoft Way
Redmond, Washington 98052-6399
Copyright © 2013 by Joyce Cox and Joan Lambert
All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without the written permission of the publisher.
Library of Congress Control Number: 2012956091
ISBN: 978-0-7356-6912-3
Printed and bound in the United States of America.
First Printing
Microsoft Press books are available through booksellers and distributors worldwide. If you need support related
to this book, email Microsoft Press Book Support at [email protected] Please tell us what you think of
this book at http://www.microsoft.com/learning/booksurvey.
Microsoft and the trademarks listed at http://www.microsoft.com/about/legal/en/us/IntellectualProperty/
Trademarks/EN-US.aspx are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. All other marks are property of
their respective owners.
The example companies, organizations, products, domain names, email addresses, logos, people, places, and
events depicted herein are fictitious. No association with any real company, organization, product, domain name,
email address, logo, person, place, or event is intended or should be inferred.
This book expresses the author’s views and opinions. The information contained in this book is provided without
any express, statutory, or implied warranties. Neither the authors, Microsoft Corporation, nor its resellers, or
distributors will be held liable for any damages caused or alleged to be caused either directly or indirectly by
this book.
Acquisitions Editor: Rosemary Caperton
Editorial Production: Online Training Solutions, Inc.
Technical Reviewer: Rob Carr
Copyeditor: Kathy Krause
Indexer: Jan Bednarczuk
Cover: Microsoft Press Brand Team
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Who this book is for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
How this book is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Download the practice files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Your companion ebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Get support and give feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Errata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
We want to hear from you . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Stay in touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
PART 1
Basic Word documents
1
Explore Microsoft Word 2013
3
Identifying new features of Word 2013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
If you are upgrading from Word 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
If you are upgrading from Word 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
If you are upgrading from Word 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Working in the Word 2013 user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Identifying program window elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sidebar: About buttons and arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Working with the ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sidebar: Adapting exercise steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Opening, navigating, and closing documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Viewing documents in different ways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Getting help with Word 2013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Contents iii
2
Enter, edit, and proofread text
51
Starting, entering text in, and saving documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Sidebar: Saving files to SkyDrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Sidebar: Document compatibility with earlier versions of Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Modifying text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Sidebar: Inserting one document into another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Sidebar: About the Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Finding and replacing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fine-tuning text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Sidebar: Installing Office tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Sidebar: Viewing document statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Sidebar: Modifying spelling and grammar checking settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Correcting spelling and grammatical errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3
Modify the structure and appearance of text
93
Applying styles to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Changing a document’s theme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Manually changing the look of characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Sidebar: Character formatting and case considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Manually changing the look of paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Sidebar: Finding and replacing formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Creating and modifying lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sidebar: Formatting text as you type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
iv Contents
4
Organize information in columns and tables
139
Presenting information in columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Creating tabbed lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Presenting information in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Sidebar: Performing calculations in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Sidebar: Other table layout options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Formatting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Sidebar: Quick Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
5
Add simple graphic elements
169
Inserting and modifying pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Sidebar: About online pictures and video clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Inserting screen clippings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Drawing and modifying shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Adding WordArt text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Sidebar: Formatting the first letter of a paragraph as a drop cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Sidebar: Inserting symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
6
Preview, print, and distribute documents
193
Previewing and adjusting page layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Controlling what appears on each page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Preparing documents for electronic distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Sidebar: Digitally signing documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Printing and sending documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Contents v
PART 2
Document enhancements
7
Insert and modify diagrams
223
Creating diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Modifying diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Creating picture diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
8
Insert and modify charts
245
Inserting charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Modifying charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Using existing data in charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
9
Add visual elements
265
Changing a document’s background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Adding watermarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Inserting preformatted document parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Sidebar: Drawing text boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Building equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Sidebar: Setting mathematical AutoCorrect options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
10
Organize and arrange content
297
Reorganizing document outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Arranging objects on the page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Using tables to control page layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
vi Contents
11
Create documents for use outside of Word
321
Saving Word documents in other formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Sidebar: Editing a PDF file in Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Designing accessible documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Creating and modifying web documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Creating and publishing blog posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
PART 3
Additional techniques
12
Link to information and content
347
Linking to external resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Embedding linked objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Inserting and linking to bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Displaying document information in fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
13
Reference content and content sources
373
Inserting and modifying footnotes and endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Creating and modifying tables of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Sidebar: Tables of authorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Sidebar: Tables of figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Creating and modifying indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Adding sources and compiling bibliographies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Contents vii
14
Work with mail merge
403
Preparing data sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Sidebar: Using an Outlook contacts list as a data source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Preparing main documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Merging main documents and data sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Sidebar: Printing envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Sending personalized email messages to multiple recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Creating and printing labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
15
Collaborate on documents
429
Adding and reviewing comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Tracking and managing document changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Comparing and merging documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Sidebar: Managing document versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Password-protecting documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Controlling changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Coauthoring documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Sidebar: Restricting who can do what to documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
16
Work in Word more efficiently
453
Creating custom styles and templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Creating and attaching templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Creating and modifying styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Creating custom building blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Changing default program options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Sidebar: Using add-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Customizing the ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Sidebar: Customizing the status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Key points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
viii Contents
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Word 2013 keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Perform common tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Work with documents and webpages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Edit and move text and graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Apply character and paragraph formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Work with mail merge and fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Use the Language bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Perform function key tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Office 2013 keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Display and use windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Use dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Use the Backstage view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Navigate the ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Change the keyboard focus without using the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Undo and redo actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Change or resize the font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Move around in text or cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Move around in and work in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Access and use panes and galleries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Access and use available actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Find and replace content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Use the Help window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Creating custom keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
About the authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
How to download your ebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Survey page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Contents ix
Introduction
Part of the Microsoft Office 2013 suite of programs, Microsoft Word 2013 is a sophisticated
word-processing program that helps you quickly and efficiently author, format, and publish
all the business and personal documents you are ever likely to need. Microsoft Word 2013
Step by Step offers a comprehensive look at the features of Word that most people will use
most frequently.
Who this book is for
Microsoft Word 2013 Step by Step and other books in the Step by Step series are designed
for beginning to intermediate-level computer users. Examples shown in the book generally
pertain to small and medium-sized businesses but teach skills that can be used in organizations of any size. Whether you are already comfortable working in Word and want to learn
about new features in Word 2013 or are new to Word, this book provides invaluable handson experience so that you can create and modify professional documents with ease.
How this book is organized
This book is divided into three parts. Part 1 teaches readers how to create, print, and distribute standard documents in Word 2013. Tutorials lead the reader through the process
of creating document elements such as formatted text, columns, lists, tables, and simple
graphics. Part 2 discusses ways of enhancing standard document content with diagrams,
charts, and other visual elements; organizing and arranging content; and saving Word files
in various formats. Part 3 delves into advanced techniques and tools that include creating
reference elements, creating mail merge documents, collaborating on document creation,
and customizing program functionality to fit the way you work. This three-part structure
allows readers who are new to the program to acquire basic skills and then build on them,
while readers who are comfortable with Word 2013 basics can focus on material that is of
the most interest to them.
Chapter 1 contains introductory information that will primarily be of interest to readers
who are new to Word or are upgrading from Word 2003 or an earlier version. If you have
worked with a more recent version of Word, you might want to skip directly to Chapter 2.
Introduction xi
This book has been designed to lead you step by step through all the tasks you’re most
likely to want to perform with Word 2013. If you start at the beginning and work your way
through all the exercises, you will gain enough proficiency to be able to create and work
with most types of Word documents. However, each topic is self-contained, so you can
jump in anywhere to acquire exactly the skills you need.
Download the practice files
Before you can complete the exercises in this book, you need to download the book’s practice files to your computer. These practice files can be downloaded from the following page:
http://aka.ms/Word2013sbs/files
IMPORTANT The Word 2013 program is not available from this website. You should purchase and
install that program before using this book.
If you would like to be able to refer to the completed versions of practice files at a later
time, you can save the practice files that you modify while working through the exercises in
this book. If you save your changes and later want to repeat the exercise, you can download
the original practice files again.
The following table lists the practice files for this book.
Chapter
File
Chapter 1: Explore Microsoft Word 2013
Prices.docx
Procedures.docx
Rules.docx
Chapter 2: Enter, edit, and proofread text
Brochure.docx
Letter.docx
Orientation.docx
Regulations.docx
Chapter 3: Modify the structure and appearance of text
Association.docx
BambooInformation.docx
BambooStyled.docx
Cottage.docx
Guidelines.docx
xii Introduction
Chapter
File
Chapter 4: Organize information in columns and tables
ConsultationA.docx
ConsultationB.docx
RepairCosts.docx
RoomPlanner.docx
Chapter 5: Add simple graphic elements
AgendaDraft.docx
Announcement.docx
Authors.docx
Joan.jpg
Joyce.jpg
OTSI-Logo.png
Chapter 6: Preview, print, and distribute documents
InfoSheetA.docx
InfoSheetB.docx
InfoSheetC.docx
OfficeInfo.docx
Chapter 7: Insert and modify diagrams
Garden.jpg
Neighborhood.docx
Park.jpg
Pond.jpg
ServiceA.docx
ServiceB.docx
Woods.jpg
Chapter 8: Insert and modify charts
CottageA.docx
CottageB.docx
CottageC.docx
Temperature.xlsx
Chapter 9: Add visual elements
AuthorsDraft.docx
Flyer.docx
MarbleFloor.jpg
OTSI-Logo.png
Welcome.docx
Chapter 10: Organize and arrange content
BambooInfo.docx
DeliveryTruckPurchase.docx
Loan.xlsx
LoanComparisons.docx
OfficeProcedures.docx
Introduction xiii
Chapter
File
Chapter 11: Create documents for use outside of Word
ParkingRules.docx
WebPlanner.docx
Chapter 12: Link to information and content
Conductors.docx
Conductors.pptx
ProceduresFields.docx
RulesBookmarks.docx
Symphony.docx
VisitorGuide.docx
Chapter 13: Reference content and content sources
BambooBibliography.docx
BambooInfoA.docx
BambooInfoB.docx
ProceduresContents.docx
RulesIndex.docx
Chapter 14: Work with mail merge
AnniversaryLetter.docx
CustomerList.xlsx
ThankYouEmail.docx
Chapter 15: Collaborate on documents
CompetitiveAnalysisA.docx
CompetitiveAnalysisB.docx
Loans.docx
ProceduresRestricted.docx
Service.docx
ServiceCP.docx
ServiceTA.docx
Chapter 16: Work in Word more efficiently
Agenda.docx
AuthorsBlank.docx
Bamboo.docx
RoomFlyer.docx
Your companion ebook
With the ebook edition of this book, you can do the following:
▪▪ Search the full text
▪▪ Print
▪▪ Copy and paste
To download your ebook, please see the instruction page at the back of the book.
xiv Introduction
Get support and give feedback
The following sections provide information about getting help with this book and
contacting us to provide feedback or report errors.
Errata
We’ve made every effort to ensure the accuracy of this book and its companion content. Any errors that have been reported since this book was published are listed on
our Microsoft Press site at oreilly.com, which you can find at:
http://aka.ms/Word2013sbs/errata
If you find an error that is not already listed, you can report it to us through the same page.
If you need additional support, email Microsoft Press Book Support at mspinput
@microsoft.com.
Please note that product support for Microsoft software is not offered through the
addresses above.
We want to hear from you
At Microsoft Press, your satisfaction is our top priority, and your feedback our most valuable
asset. Please tell us what you think of this book at:
http://www.microsoft.com/learning/booksurvey
The survey is short, and we read every one of your comments and ideas. Thanks in advance
for your input!
Stay in touch
Let’s keep the conversation going! We’re on Twitter at: http://twitter.com/MicrosoftPress.
Introduction xv
Basic Word
documents
1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
3
2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
51
3 Modify the structure and appearance
of text
93
4 Organize information in columns
and tables
139
5 Add simple graphic elements
169
6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
193
Chapter at a glance
Identify Identify new features of Word 2013,
page 6
Work Work in the Word 2013 user interface,
page 9
Navigate View Open, navigate, and close documents,
page 31
View documents in different ways,
page 37
Explore Microsoft
Word 2013
1
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Identify new features of Word 2013.
Work in the Word 2013 user interface.
Open, navigate, and close documents.
View documents in different ways.
Get help with Word 2013.
When you use a computer program to create, edit, and format text documents, you are
performing a task known as word processing. Part of the Microsoft Office 2013 suite of programs, Microsoft Word 2013 is one of the most sophisticated word-processing programs
available. By using Word, it is easy to efficiently create a wide range of business and personal documents, from the simplest letter to the most complex report. Word includes many
desktop publishing features that you can use to enhance the appearance of documents so
that they are visually appealing and easy to read.
You can use Word to:
▪▪ Create professional-looking documents that incorporate impressive graphics.
▪▪ Give documents a consistent look by applying styles and themes that control the font,
size, color, and effects of text and the page background.
▪▪ Store and reuse pre-formatted elements such as cover pages and sidebars.
▪▪ Create personalized mailings to multiple recipients without repetitive typing.
▪▪ Make information in long documents accessible by compiling tables of contents,
indexes, and bibliographies.
▪▪ Coauthor documents with team members.
▪▪ Safeguard documents by controlling who can make changes and the types of changes
that can be made, as well as by removing personal and confidential information.
3
For many people, Word is the first Office program they will use. All the Office 2013 programs share a common working environment, called the user interface, so you can apply
basic techniques that you learn in Word, such as those for creating and working with files,
to other Office programs.
In this chapter, you’ll learn about some of the different Word programs that are currently
available so you can identify the one you are using. Then you’ll get an overview of the new
features in recent versions of Word to help you identify changes if you’re upgrading from a
previous version. You’ll explore the program’s user interface, and open, navigate, view, and
close documents in various ways. Finally, you’ll explore how to get help with the program.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter01 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
Office 2013 encompasses a wide variety of programs, including Microsoft Access 2013,
Excel 2013, InfoPath 2013, Lync 2013, OneNote 2013, Outlook 2013, PowerPoint 2013,
Publisher 2013, and Word 2013. Office is available in various editions that include different
combinations of Office programs; you can also purchase most of the programs individually.
The programs in the Office suite are designed to work together to provide highly efficient
methods of getting things done. You can install one or more Office programs on your computer. Some programs have multiple versions designed for different platforms. Although
the core purpose of a program remains the same regardless of the platform on which it
runs, the available functionality and the way you interact with the program might be different. We provide a brief description of the different Word 2013 programs here so that you
can identify any differences between what appears on your screen and what’s described in
this book.
▪▪ Word 2013 standard desktop installation The program we work with and depict in
images throughout this book is a desktop installation of Word 2013, meaning that we
installed the program directly on our computers. The standard desktop installation
has all the available Word functionality. It is available as part of the Office 2013 suite
of programs, as a freestanding program, or as part of an Office 365 subscription that
allows users to install the desktop programs from the Internet.
TIP Office 365 is a cloud-based solution that provides a variety of products and ser-
vices through a subscription licensing program. Depending on the subscription plan
purchased, users will have access either to the full Word 2013 desktop installation
and Word Web App or only to Word Web App.
4 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
▪▪ Word 2013 RT Tablet-style computers that run Windows RT (a version of Windows 8
that runs only on devices that use a type of processor called an ARM processor) come
preloaded with Office Home & Student 2013 RT, which includes Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and OneNote.
The Office 2013 RT programs have the functionality of the full programs and also include a Touch Mode feature to help you work with the program and enter content by
tapping the screen with your finger or with a tool such as a stylus. When Touch Mode
is turned on, the user interface is slightly modified to simplify on-screen interactions,
and an on-screen keyboard is readily available for text input. (You can simplify your
interactions even further by attaching a keyboard and mouse to your Windows RT
computer and interacting with Office in the usual manner.)
▪▪ Word Web App Word Web App may be available in your web browser when you
are working with a document that is stored on a Microsoft SharePoint site or on a
Microsoft SkyDrive. You can review and edit a document by using the Web App, which
runs directly in your browser instead of on your computer. Web Apps are installed in
the online environment in which you’re working and are not part of the desktop version that you install directly on your computer. Word Web App is available as part of
Office 365 and SharePoint Online subscriptions, and is free on SkyDrive stor­age sites.
SEE ALSO For information about saving documents to SkyDrive and SharePoint sites,
see “Starting, entering text in, and saving documents” in Chapter 2, “Enter, edit, and
proofread text.”
Word Web App displays the contents of a document very much like the desktop application does. Although the Web App offers only a subset of the commands available in the full desktop application, it does provide the tools you need to edit, print,
and share documents. Commands that are not available in Word Web App are those
that control functionality, such as the commands for navigating by section or page;
finding and replacing content; inserting fancy graphic elements; changing document
design elements; controlling page breaks, line numbering, and hyphenation; arranging graphic elements on the page; working with reference elements; creating mail
merge documents; using the research and language tools; working with comments
and tracked changes; and working with multiple documents or document windows.
Both Word Web App and the desktop installation of the program might be available to you
in the online environment. When viewing a document in the Web App, you can click the
Edit Document menu and then choose the version you want to use by clicking Edit In Word
or Edit In Word Web App. If you’re editing a document in the Web App and find that you
need more functionality than is available, and you have the full version of Word installed on
your computer, you can click Open In Word to open the document in the full version.
Explore Microsoft Word 2013 5
1
Identifying new features of Word 2013
Word 2013 builds on previous versions to provide a powerful set of tools to meet all your
word-processing needs. If you’re upgrading to Word 2013 from a previous version, you’re
probably most interested in the differences between the old and new versions and how
they will affect you, and want to find out about them in the quickest possible way. The following sections list new features you will want to be aware of, depending on the version of
Word you are upgrading from. Start with the first section and work down to your previous
version to get the complete picture.
If you are upgrading from Word 2010
If you have been using Word 2010, you might be wondering how Microsoft could have
improved on what seemed like a pretty comprehensive set of features and tools. The new
features introduced between Word 2010 and Word 2013 include the following:
▪▪ Start screen When you start Word without opening a specific document, the Start
scree provides quick access to recent documents and and to document templates.
▪▪ Cloud access When you connect your Office or Word installation to a Microsoft ac-
count, you have the option of saving documents to your SkyDrive. After you save a
document in a SkyDrive folder or other shared location, you and your colleagues can
simultaneously work on one version of the document.
▪▪ Previous location bookmark When you close a document, Word marks the location
where you were working. The next time you open the document (even on a different
computer, if the document is saved in a shared location) a Resume Reading alert appears, to make it easy to return to that location.
▪▪ Smart guides When you place or move a graphic element on a page, on-screen
guides appear to help you align the graphic with other page elements such as margins and paragraphs.
▪▪ Read Mode This view, which replaces the Full Screen Reading view, provides a simpler interface for reviewing documents.
▪▪ Reply Comment With this new feature you can place comments next to the text
you’re discussing so it’s easy to track the conversation.
▪▪ Present Online Share your document with others even if they don’t have Word. As
you display the document on your screen, they can follow along in their browsers.
6 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
▪▪ Live Layout Text reflows instantly when you drag a photo, video, or shape to its new
position. When you release the mouse button, your object and surrounding text stay
where you want them.
▪▪ PDF Reflow When you open a PDF in Word, its paragraphs, lists, tables, and other
content act just like Word content.
If you are upgrading from Word 2007
In addition to the features listed in the previous section, if you’re upgrading from Word
2007, you’ll want to take note of the following features that were introduced in Word 2010:
▪▪ Backstage view All the tools you need to work with your files, as opposed to their
content, really are accessible from one location. You display the Backstage view by
clicking the File tab, which replaces the Microsoft Office Button.
▪▪ Customizable ribbon The logical next step in the evolution of the command center
that was introduced with Word 2007: create your own tabs and groups to suit the way
you work.
▪▪ Navigation pane The replacement for the Document Map not only provides a
means of navigating to any heading but also to any page or to any search term
you enter.
▪▪ Unsaved file recovery Word preserves temporary versions of your unsaved files so
that you can recover them if you need them.
▪▪ Paste preview No more trial and error when moving items to new locations. Preview what an item will look like in each of the available formats, and then pick the
one you want.
▪▪ Coauthoring A team of authors can work simultaneously on a document stored in a
SharePoint site document library or SkyDrive folder.
▪▪ Language support These days, more business is conducted internationally across
language lines than ever before. Not only can you easily tailor the language of your
working environment, but you can also use translation tools to collaborate with team
members in other countries.
▪▪ Graphics editing After inserting a picture, you can edit it in multiple ways. In addi-
tion to changing color, brightness, and contrast, you can remove the background and,
most exciting of all, apply artistic effects that make it appear like a watercolor, pencil
drawing, or pastel sketch.
Identifying new features of Word 2013 7
1
▪▪ Text effects WordArt has had a makeover. Not only can WordArt be used to create
distinctive headlines, but its effects can be used on any text.
▪▪ Screen shots and screen clippings You no longer need to go outside of Word when
you want to insert a screen image into a document. This capability is built into Word.
▪▪ Improved SmartArt Graphics tool You can include pictures in addition to text in
your SmartArt diagrams.
If you are upgrading from Word 2003
In addition to the features listed in the previous sections, if you’re upgrading from Word
2003, you’ll want to take note of the new features that were introduced in Word 2007. The
Word 2007 upgrade provided a more efficient working environment and included a long
list of new and improved features, including the following:
▪▪ The ribbon No more hunting through menus, submenus, and dialog boxes. This
interface organizes all the commands most people use most often, making them
quickly accessible from tabs at the top of the program window.
▪▪ Live Preview Review the effect of a style, theme, or other formatting option before
you apply it.
▪▪ Building blocks Think AutoText on steroids! Predefined building blocks include sets
of matching cover pages, quote boxes, sidebars, and headers and footers.
▪▪ Style sets and document themes Quickly change the look of a document by applying a different style set or theme, previewing its effect before making a selection.
▪▪ SmartArt Graphics tool Use this awesome diagramming tool to create sophisti­
cated diagrams with three-dimensional shapes, transparency, drop shadows, and
other effects.
▪▪ Improved charting Enter data in a linked Excel worksheet and watch as the data is
instantly plotted in the chart type of your choosing.
▪▪ Document cleanup Have Word check for and remove comments, hidden text, and
personal information stored as properties before you declare a document final.
▪▪ New file format The Microsoft Office Open XML Formats reduce file size and help
avoid loss of data.
8 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
Working in the Word 2013 user interface
The goal of the Microsoft Office working environment is to make working with Office documents, including Microsoft Word documents, Excel workbooks, PowerPoint presentations,
Outlook email messages, and Access database tables, as intuitive as possible.
As with all Office 2013 programs, the most common way to start Word is from the Start
screen (Windows 8) or the Start menu (Windows 7) that is displayed when you click at the
left end of the Windows Taskbar. When you start Word without opening a specific document, a program starting screen appears, from which you can create a new document or
open an existing one. Either way, when you’re working with a document, it is displayed in a
program window that contains all the tools you need to add and format content.
The Word 2013 program window, displaying a document and the standard program window elements.
Working in the Word 2013 user interface 9
1
Identifying program window elements
The program window contains the following elements:
▪▪ Title bar At the top of the program window, this bar displays the name of the active
document and provides tools for managing the program and the program window.
The title bar of a program window for an existing document.
At the left end of the title bar is the program icon, which you click to display commands to restore, move, size, minimize, maximize, and close the program window.
To the right of the program icon is the Quick Access Toolbar, which by default displays the Save, Undo, and Redo buttons. You can customize the Quick Access Toolbar
to display any commands you want.
TIP You might find that you work more efficiently if you organize the commands
you use frequently on the Quick Access Toolbar and then display it below the ribbon,
directly above the workspace. For information, see “Customizing the Quick Access
Toolbar” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more efficiently.”
At the right end of the title bar are five buttons: the Microsoft Word Help button that
opens the Word Help window; the Ribbon Display Options button that allows you to
entirely hide the ribbon, display only the ribbon tabs, or display the ribbon tabs and
commands; and the familiar Minimize, Maximize/Restore Down, and Close buttons.
▪▪ Ribbon Below the title bar. all the commands for working with a Word document
are gathered together in this central location so that you can work efficiently with the
program.
The ribbon, showing the Home tab.
10 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
TIP Don’t be alarmed if your ribbon looks different from those shown in our screens.
You might have installed programs that add their own tabs to the ribbon, or your
screen settings might be different. For more information, see “Working with the ribbon” later in this chapter.
Across the top of the ribbon is a set of tabs. Clicking a tab displays an associated set
of commands.
Commands related to managing Word and Word documents (rather than document
content) are gathered together in the Backstage view, which you display by clicking
the colored File tab located at the left end of the ribbon. Commands available in the
Backstage view are organized on pages, which you display by clicking the page tabs
in the colored left pane. You redisplay the document and the ribbon by clicking the
Back arrow located above the page tabs.
The Backstage view, where you can manage files and customize the program.
SEE ALSO For information about the functionality available in the Backstage view, see
Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute documents,” Chapter 15, “Collaborate on
documents,” and Chapter 16, “Work in Word more efficiently.”
Working in the Word 2013 user interface 11
1
Commands related to working with document content are represented as buttons on
the remaining tabs of the ribbon. The Home tab, which is active by default, contains
the commands most Word users will use most often. When a graphic element such as
a picture, table, or chart is selected in a document, one or more tool tabs might appear at the right end of the ribbon to make commands related to that specific object
easily accessible. Tool tabs are available only when the relevant object is selected.
TIP Some older commands no longer appear as buttons on the ribbon but are still
available in the program. You can make these commands available by adding them to
the Quick Access Toolbar. For more information, see “Customizing the Quick Access
Toolbar” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more efficiently.”
On each tab, buttons representing commands are organized into named groups. You
can point to any button to display a ScreenTip with the command name, a description of its function, and its keyboard shortcut (if it has one).
SEE ALSO For information about controlling the display and content of Screen-
Tips, see “Changing default program options” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more
efficiently.”
When a gallery contains more thumbnails than can be shown in the available ribbon
space, you can display more content by clicking the scroll arrow or More button located on the right edge of the gallery.
Related but less common commands are not represented as buttons in a group.
Instead, they’re available in a dialog box or pane, which you display by clicking the
dialog box launcher located in the lower-right corner of the group.
To the right of the groups on the ribbon is the Collapse The Ribbon button, which
is shaped like a chevron. Clicking this button hides the groups of buttons but leaves
the tab titles visible. When the groups are hidden, the Collapse The Ribbon button
changes to the Pin The Ribbon button, which is shaped like a pushpin. You can click
any tab title to temporarily display the groups, then click a ribbon command or click
away from the ribbon to hide the groups again, or click the Pin The Ribbon button to
permanently redisplay the groups.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+F1 to unpin or pin the ribbon. For more information about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end of this book.
12 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
About buttons and arrows
Some buttons include an arrow, which may be integrated with or separate from the
button. To determine whether a button and its arrow are integrated, point to the
button to activate it. If both the button and its arrow are shaded, clicking the button
displays options for refining the action of the button. If only the button or arrow is
shaded when you point to it, clicking the button carries out its current default action.
Clicking the arrow and then clicking the action you want carries out the action and
assigns it to the button.
The Draw A Shape button has an integrated arrow;
the Insert An App button has a separate arrow.
▪▪ Status bar Across the bottom of the program window, this bar displays information
about the current document and provides access to certain program functions.
The status bar.
By default, Word displays the Page Number, Word Count, Spelling And Grammar
Check, and Macro Recording indicators at the left end of the status bar. Each of these
indicators on the left displays at a glance the status of that feature; clicking any of
these indicators displays the related pane or dialog box.
TIP Clicking the Macro Recording button allows you to review the macros embedded
in a document. The subject of macros is beyond the scope of this book. For information, refer to Word Help.
At the right end of the status bar, Word displays by default the View Shortcuts, Zoom
Slider, and Zoom Level controls. The View Shortcuts toolbar includes buttons for the
three primary document content views. The Zoom Slider and Zoom Level controls
enable you to adjust the magnification of the active document.
SEE ALSO For information about the various ways you can view document content,
see “Viewing documents in different ways” later in this chapter. For information about
customizing the status bar, see the sidebar “Customizing the status bar” in Chapter 16,
“Work in Word more efficiently.”
Working in the Word 2013 user interface 13
1
The goal of all these user interface features is to make working on a document as intuitive
as possible. Commands for tasks you perform often are readily available, and even those
you might use infrequently are easy to find.
When a formatting option has several choices available, they are often displayed in a gallery
of images, called thumbnails, that provide a visual representation of each choice. When you
point to a thumbnail in a gallery, the Live Preview feature shows you what the active content will look like if you click the thumbnail to apply the associated formatting.
Live Preview shows the effect on the active content of applying the format you are pointing to.
You can display the content of the active document in five views: Draft view, Outline view,
Print Layout view, Read Mode view, and Web Layout view. All views are available from the
View tab; Read Mode, Print Layout, and Web Layout views are available from the View
Shortcuts toolbar on the status bar. You carry out most of the development work on a
document in Print Layout view, which is the default.
Working with the ribbon
As with all Office 2013 programs, the goal of the ribbon is to make working with document
content as intuitive as possible. The ribbon is dynamic, meaning that as its width changes,
its buttons adapt to the available space. As a result, a button might be large or small, it
might or might not have a label, or it might even change to an entry in a list.
14 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
For example, when sufficient horizontal space is available, the buttons on the Review tab
are spread out, and you can review the commands available in each group.
1
The Review tab at 1024 pixels wide.
If you decrease the horizontal space available to the ribbon, small button labels disappear
and entire groups of buttons might hide under one button that represents the entire group.
Clicking the group button displays a list of the commands available in that group.
The Review tab at 660 pixels wide.
When the ribbon becomes too narrow to display all the groups, a scroll arrow appears at its
right end. Clicking the scroll arrow displays the hidden groups.
The Review tab at 325 pixels wide.
The width of the ribbon depends on these three factors:
▪▪ Program window width Maximizing the program window provides the most space
for the ribbon. To maximize the window, click the Maximize button, drag the borders
of a non-maximized window, or drag the window to the top of the screen.
▪▪ Screen resolution Screen resolution is the size of your screen display expressed as
pixels wide × pixels high. The greater the screen resolution, the greater the amount of
information that will fit on one screen. Your screen resolution options are dependent
Working in the Word 2013 user interface 15
on the display adapter installed in your computer, and on your monitor. Common
screen resolutions range from 800 × 600 to 2560 × 1600. The greater the number of
pixels wide (the first number), the greater the number of buttons that can be shown
on the ribbon.
To change your screen resolution, first display the Screen Resolution control panel
item by using one of the following methods:
▪▪ Right-click the Windows desktop, and then click Screen Resolution.
▪▪ Enter screen resolution in Windows 8 Search, and then click Adjust screen
resolution in the Settings results.
▪▪ Open the Display control panel item, and then click Adjust resolution.
An easy way to do so is by right-clicking the Windows desktop, and then clicking
Screen Resolution. On the Screen Resolution page, click the Resolution arrow, click
or drag to select the screen resolution you want, and then click Apply or OK.
▪▪ The magnification of your screen display If you change the screen magnification
setting in Windows, text and user interface elements are larger and therefore more
legible, but fewer elements fit on the screen.
You can change the screen magnification from the Display control panel item.
In the Display window, you can choose one of the standard magnification options or change
the text size of specific elements.
16 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
You can open the Display window directly from Control Panel or by using one of the
following methods:
▪▪ Right-click the Windows desktop, click Personalize, and then in the lower-left
corner of the Personalization window, click Display.
▪▪ Enter display in Windows 8 Search, and then click Display in the Settings results.
To change the screen magnification to a magnification that is available in the Display
window, click that option. To select another magnification, click the Custom Sizing
Options link and then, in the Custom Sizing Options dialog box, click the magnification you want in the list or drag the ruler to change the magnification even more (the
cursor changes to a pointer to indicate that you’re dragging).
You can set the magnification as high as 500 percent by dragging
the ruler in the Custom Sizing Options dialog box.
After you click OK in the Custom Sizing Options dialog box, the custom magnification
is shown in the Display window along with any warnings about possible problems
that might occur if you select that magnification. Click Apply in the Display window
to apply the selected magnification.
Working in the Word 2013 user interface 17
1
Adapting exercise steps
The screen shots shown in this book were captured at a screen resolution of 1024 ×
768, at 100 percent magnification. If your settings are different, the ribbon on your
screen might not look the same as the one shown in this book. As a result, exercise
instructions that involve the ribbon might require a little adaptation. Our instructions
use this format:
▪▪ On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click the Chart button.
If the command is in a list, our instructions use this format:
▪▪ On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click the Find arrow and then, in the
Find list, click Go To.
If differences between your display settings and ours cause a button to appear differently on your screen than it does in this book, you can easily adapt the steps to locate
the command. First click the specified tab, and then locate the specified group. If a
group has been collapsed into a group list or under a group button, click the list or
button to display the group’s commands. If you can’t immediately identify the button
you want, point to likely candidates to display their names in ScreenTips.
In this book, we provide instructions based on traditional keyboard and mouse input
methods. If you’re using Word on a touch-enabled device, you might be giving commands by tapping with your finger or with a stylus. If so, substitute a tapping action
any time we instruct you to click a user interface element. Also note that when we tell
you to enter information in Word, you can do so by typing on a keyboard, tapping an
on-screen keyboard, or even speaking aloud, depending on your computer setup and
your personal preferences.
In this exercise, you’ll start Word, create a sample document, and explore the functionality
available from the ribbon and the Backstage view.
SET UP You don’t need any practice files to complete this exercise. Log on to your
computer, but don’t start Word. Then follow the steps.
1
Start Word by following the steps appropriate to your operating system.
▪▪ If your computer is running Windows 7, on the Start menu, click All Programs,
click Microsoft Office, and then click Microsoft Word 2013.
18 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
▪▪ If your computer is running Windows 8, click the program tile on the Windows
Start screen or press the Windows key, enter word to display the Search pane,
and then in the Apps search results list, click Word 2013.
Word starts and displays a list of recent documents in the left pane and document
templates in the right pane.
From the Word Start screen you can open an existing document or create a new one.
TROUBLESHOOTING Because the templates featured on the Start screen are dynamically updated to reflect seasonal offerings, the thumbnails on your Start screen might
be different from ours.
2
Scroll through the list to review the currently featured templates. Then press the Esc
key to create a new, blank document.
3
If the Word program window is not maximized, click the Maximize button near
the right end of the title bar to maximize it now. Notice that the Home tab displays
buttons related to working with document content, and that the buttons are
organized in five groups: Clipboard, Font, Paragraph, Styles, and Editing.
Working in the Word 2013 user interface 19
1
4
Point to each button on the Home tab to display information about the button in a
ScreenTip. Notice that some ScreenTips provide more information than the standard
button name, keyboard shortcut, and description.
TROUBLESHOOTING If your ribbon shows the tab names but no buttons, or doesn’t
show the tabs at all, click the Ribbon Display Options button, and then click Show
Tabs And Commands. Throughout this book, the exercise instructions assume that
the ribbon is displayed unless we explicitly tell you to hide it.
The ScreenTip for the Format Painter button displays the button’s name,
its keyboard shortcut, and its function.
TIP A button representing a command that cannot be performed on the selected
document element is inactive (gray), but pointing to it still displays its ScreenTip.
5
On the scroll bar to the right of the thumbnails in the Styles group, click the down
arrow to display the next row of paragraph style thumbnails.
6
At the bottom of the Styles scroll bar, click the More button to expand the entire
Styles gallery.
20 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
1
The expanded Styles gallery, showing the styles you can quickly apply to this document.
7
8
Press the Esc key to close the gallery without applying a style.
9
Drag the Styles pane by its header to the right side of the program window, releasing
the mouse button when the pane attaches to the edge of the window (this is called
docking).
In the lower-right corner of the Styles group, click the Styles dialog box launcher to
open the Styles pane. Notice that the pane displays a simple list of styles. If you’re
familiar with the styles in your document, you might find it more efficient to work
with an unformatted list like this. If not, you can select the Show Preview button at
the bottom of the pane to display visual previews of the styles in the same way that
they appear in the Styles gallery.
SEE ALSO For information about creating structure and ensuring consistency by using
styles, see “Applying styles to text” in Chapter 3, “Modify the structure and appearance of text.”
Working in the Word 2013 user interface 21
The Styles pane, showing the available styles and the style of the currently selected content.
10
Click the Close button (the X) in the upper-right corner of the Styles pane to close
the pane. Then click the Insert tab to display buttons related to all the items you can
insert into a document. Familiarize yourself with the types of content you can insert
into a document by reviewing the buttons in the 10 groups on this tab.
From the Insert tab, you can insert many different document and graphic elements.
22 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
11
Click the Design tab to display buttons related to the visual formatting of your
document. Familiarize yourself with these formatting options by reviewing the
buttons in the two groups on this tab.
1
From the Design tab, you can format thematic elements and apply visual effects to the
document pages.
12
In the Document Formatting group, click the Themes button to expand the gallery
of available themes.
The theme controls the color scheme, fonts, and special effects applied to the text of a
document.
Working in the Word 2013 user interface 23
13
In the Page Background group, click the Page Color button. In the Page Color
gallery, point to each swatch in the top row of the Theme Colors palette. Notice
that the page background changes to each color that you point to.
Formatting the page background doesn’t affect the background of other colored page elements.
14
Press Esc to close the gallery. Then click the Page Layout tab to display buttons
related to the physical layout of document elements. Familiarize yourself with these
options by reviewing the buttons in the three groups on this tab.
From the Page Layout tab, you can format the physical layout of the document contents.
15
In the lower-right corner of the Page Setup group, click the dialog box launcher to
open the Page Setup dialog box. Notice the three tabs at the top of this dialog box:
Margins, Paper, and Layout. Clicking a tab displays a page of related options.
SEE ALSO For information about using the Page Setup dialog box, see “Previewing
and adjusting page layout” in Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute documents.”
16
Click Cancel to close the dialog box. Then click the References tab to display buttons
related to reference information you can add to documents. Familiarize yourself with
these options by reviewing the buttons in the six groups on this tab.
From the References tab, you can insert reference elements and compile reference tables.
24 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
TIP You will usually add references to longer documents, such as reports.
17
Click the Mailings tab to display buttons related to creating mass mailings. Familiarize
yourself with these options by reviewing the buttons in the five groups on this tab.
1
From the Mailings tab, you can create mail merge letters, email messages, envelopes, labels,
and other documents.
18
Click the Review tab to display buttons related to proofreading documents, working
in other languages, adding comments, tracking and resolving document changes,
and protecting documents. Familiarize yourself with these options by reviewing the
buttons in the seven groups on this tab.
From the Review tab, you can proof and translate document contents, enter and review
comments, track and review changes, compare multiple versions of a document, and protect
a document from unauthorized changes.
19
Click the View tab to display buttons related to changing the view and other aspects
of the display. Familiarize yourself with these options by reviewing the buttons in the
five groups on this tab.
From the View tab, you can control the display of the document and of various Word elements,
display and arrange multiple document windows, and work with macros.
Let’s take a look at the Backstage view, where commands related to managing documents (such as creating, saving, and printing) are available.
20
Click the File tab to display the Info page of the Backstage view of Word 2013. The
middle pane provides commands for controlling who can work on the document,
removing properties (information that is associated with the document), and acces­
sing document versions (older copies of the document that you saved or that Word
automatically saved for you).
Working in the Word 2013 user interface 25
The right pane displays the associated properties, as well as dates of modification,
creation, and printing, and who created and edited the document.
The Info page of the Backstage view provides commands for viewing and managing the behindthe-scenes information about a document.
TIP When you’re coauthoring a shared document with other people, information
about the people working in the document and ways of contacting them also appears on the Info page. For information about coauthoring, see “Coauthoring documents” in Chapter 15, “Collaborate on documents.”
SEE ALSO For information about working with properties, see “Preparing documents
for electronic distribution” in Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute documents.”
21
In the left pane, click the New page tab. Notice that the templates that were available
on the Word Start screen are also available here. You can click links at the top of the
page to locate additional templates online.
26 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
1
The New page of the Backstage view provides access to document templates saved locally
(on your computer) and online.
TROUBLESHOOTING The thumbnails on your New page might be different from ours.
SEE ALSO For information about creating documents, see, “Starting, entering text in,
and saving documents” in Chapter 2, “Enter, edit, and proofread text.”
22
Click the Open page tab. This page displays locations from which you can open
existing documents as well as a list of the documents you recently worked on. The
content of the Places list varies based on your available resources. For example, if
your organization has a SharePoint site, that location may be available in the list—
if it isn’t, you can click Other Web Locations to locate the site.
TIP By default, the Recent Documents list displays a maximum of 20 documents. You
can change this number on the Advanced page of the Word Options dialog box.
Working in the Word 2013 user interface 27
The Open page of the Backstage view provides links to locations from which you can open
existing documents.
SEE ALSO For information about the Word Options dialog box, see “Changing default
program options” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more efficiently.” For information
about recovering unsaved documents, see the sidebar “Managing document versions” in Chapter 15, “Collaborate on documents.”
23
In the Open dialog box, click Cancel. Click the File tab to return to the Backstage
view, and then click the Save As page tab. (Because we haven’t yet saved this file, the
Save and Save As pages are identical.) Notice that the saving locations in the Places
list on this page are the same as those on the Open page, with the exception of
Recent Documents.
24
In the Places list, click Computer. In the right pane, Word provides a list of the
folders on your computer in which you have recently saved documents. Selecting a
folder in the Recent Folders list is an easy shortcut for locating a folder that you use
frequently, and it’s much simpler than having to browse through your computer’s
folder structure to find the location in which you want to save your document.
28 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
TIP When Computer is selected, clicking Browse in the right pane displays the Open
dialog box. The first time you use this command, the Open dialog box displays the
contents of your Documents library. If you display the dialog box again in the same
Word session, it displays the contents of whatever folder you last used. To open a
document from a different folder, use standard Windows techniques to navigate to
the folder and then double-click the name of the document you want to work with.
The Save As page of the Backstage view provides links to identify existing and new locations in
which to save documents.
25
Display the Print, Share, and Export pages to get an overview of the functionality
on these pages, which we discuss in depth in later chapters of this book. Then click
the Account page tab to display information about your installation of Word 2013.
Explore the options on this page.
SEE ALSO For information about printing, sharing, and exporting documents, see
Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute documents” and Chapter 11, “Create documents for use outside of Word.”
Working in the Word 2013 user interface 29
1
Note that you can choose a decorative Office background (we don’t show one in this
book to avoid cluttering up the images, but you might want to use one) and connect
to a variety of services.
The Account page of the Backstage view provides information about your installation or
subscription as well as links to connect Word to a variety of internal and external services.
26
Click the Options page tab to open the Word Options dialog box, in which you can
customize the way Word works to make it most efficient for your purposes. Briefly
explore the pages of this dialog box to note the available options, which we cover in
depth in later chapters.
SEE ALSO For information about the Word Options dialog box, see “Changing default
program options” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more efficiently.”
27
At the bottom of the Word Options dialog box, click Cancel to return to the current
document with the Home tab active on the ribbon.
+
CLEAN UP Leave the unsaved document open for the next exercise.
30 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
Opening, navigating, and closing
documents
If Word isn’t already running, you can start the program and simultaneously open an existing Word document from File Explorer by double-clicking the document’s file name.
TIP In Windows 8, File Explorer has replaced Windows Explorer. Throughout this book, we
refer to this browsing utility by its Windows 8 name. If your computer is running Windows 7,
use Windows Explorer instead.
If Word is already running, from the Start page, select an existing document in the Recent
pane, create a new document from a template, or click Open Other Documents to display
the Backstage view. rom the New page of the Backstage view, create a blank document or
a document based on a template, or click the Open page tab, select a location from the
Places pane, and navigate to and select a file to open.
TIP Clicking a file name and then clicking the Open arrow displays a list of alternative ways
in which you can open the document. To look through the document without making any
changes, you can open it as read-only, or you can open an independent copy of the document. If you’re concerned that a document might contain malicious content, you can open
it in Protected view. Your computer can then display but not interact with the document.
After an unexpected computer shutdown or other problem, you can tell Word to open the
document and attempt to repair any damage.
If you open a document that is too long to fit entirely on the screen, you can bring offscreen content into view without changing the location of the cursor by using the vertical
scroll bar that appears when you move the pointer.
▪▪ Click the scroll arrows to move up or down by one line.
▪▪ Click above or below the scroll box to move up or down one windowful.
▪▪ Drag the scroll box on the scroll bar to display the part of the document corresponding to the location of the scroll box. For example, dragging the scroll box to the
middle of the scroll bar displays the middle of the document.
▪▪ Right-click the scroll bar and then click Scroll Here, Top, Bottom, Page Up, Page Down,
Scroll Up, or Scroll Down.
If the document is too wide to fit on the screen, Word displays a horizontal scroll bar that
you can use in similar ways to move from side to side.
Opening, navigating, and closing documents 31
1
You can also move around in a document by moving the cursor. To place the cursor in a
specific location, you simply click there. You can also press keyboard shortcuts to move the
cursor. For example, pressing the Home key moves the cursor to the left end of a line, and
pressing Ctrl+Home moves it to the beginning of the document.
TIP The location of the cursor is displayed on the status bar. By default, the status bar tells
you which page the cursor is on, but you can also display the cursor’s location by section,
line number, and column, and in inches from the top of the page. Simply right-click the status bar, and then click the option you want to display.
The following table lists ways to use your keyboard to move the cursor.
Cursor movement
Key or keyboard shortcut
Left one character
Left Arrow
Right one character
Right Arrow
Up one line
Up Arrow
Down one line
Down Arrow
Up one paragraph
Ctrl+Up Arrow
Down one paragraph
Ctrl+Down Arrow
Left one word
Ctrl+Left Arrow
To the beginning of the current line
Home
To the end of the current line
End
To the beginning of the document
Ctrl+Home
To the end of the document
Ctrl+End
To the top of the window
Alt+Ctrl+Page Up
To the bottom of the window
Alt+Ctrl+Page Down
Up one screen
Page Up
Down one screen
Page Down
To the beginning of the previous page
Ctrl+Page Up
To the beginning of the next page
Ctrl+Page Down
To a previous revision
Shift+F5
Immediately after opening, to where you
were working when you last closed
Shift+F5
SEE ALSO For information about revisions, see “Tracking and managing document changes”
in Chapter 15, “Collaborate on documents.”
32 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
In a long document, you might want to move quickly among elements of a certain type; for
example, from graphic to graphic. From the Go To page of the Find And Replace dialog box,
you can select from a variety of browsing elements, including page, section, line, bookmark,
comment, footnote, endnote, field, table, graphic, equation, object, and heading. You can
also display the Navigation pane and move from heading to heading, from page to page,
or to the next search result.
SEE ALSO For information about using the Navigation pane to search for specific content in
a document, see “Finding and replacing text” in Chapter 2, “Enter, edit, and proofread text.”
If more than one document is open, you can close the active document without exiting
Word by clicking the Close button at the right end of the title bar. If only one document is
open, clicking the Close button closes the document and also exits Word. To close the only
open document but leave Word running, click Close in the Backstage view.
In this exercise, you’ll open an existing document and explore various ways of moving
around in it. Then you’ll close the document.
SET UP You need the Rules document located in the Chapter01 practice file folder to
complete this exercise. With the unsaved document from the previous exercise open in
Word, follow the steps.
1
From the Open page of the Backstage view, browse to the location where you saved
the practice files for this book. Open the Chapter01 folder and then double-click the
Rules document to open it in a new instance of Word.
TROUBLESHOOTING Don’t worry if an information bar below the ribbon tells you
that the document has been opened in Protected view. By default, Word opens any
document that originates from the Internet or a potentially unsafe location, including
email attachments, in Protected view. If you trust the file and want to work with it,
click the Enable Editing button on the information bar.
Opening, navigating, and closing documents 33
1
The status bar displays information about the document length.
2
In the second line of the document title, click at the right end of the paragraph to
position the cursor.
3
4
Press the Home key to move the cursor to the beginning of the line.
5
Press Ctrl+Right Arrow to move the cursor to the beginning of the word
Regulations.
6
7
8
9
Press the End key to move the cursor to the end of the line.
Press the Right Arrow key six times to move the cursor to the beginning of the
word and.
Press Ctrl+End to move the cursor to the end of the document.
Press Ctrl+Home to move the cursor to the beginning of the document.
Right-click the center of the vertical scroll bar, and then click Scroll Here to move to
the middle of the document.
34 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
TROUBLESHOOTING If the vertical scroll bar is not visible, move the pointer and it will
appear.
10
Click above the scroll box on the scroll bar to change the view of the document by
one windowful.
11
Drag the scroll box to the top of the scroll bar to display the beginning of the
document. Note that the location of the cursor has not changed—only the part
of the document that is visible.
12
On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click the Find arrow (not the button), and
then click Go To to display the Go To page of the Find and Replace dialog box.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+G to display the Go To page of the Find And
Replace dialog box.
From the Go To page, you can move between specific types of content.
13
With Page selected in the Go to what list, enter 3 in the Enter page number dialog
box, and then click Go To to move to the top of page 3. Then enter +3 in the Enter
page number box, and click Go To to move to the top of page 6.
14
Scroll through the Go to what list to view the other types of document elements you
can move among, and then click Comment. Notice that the input box title changes
to Enter reviewer’s name, and a list appears from which you can select a reviewer to
move among that person’s comments.
15
Close the Find and Replace dialog box, and then on the View tab, in the Show
group, select the Navigation Pane check box to open the Navigation pane on the
left side of the program window. Notice that Headings is selected at the top of the
pane. The Headings page of the Navigation pane displays an outline of the headings
in the document. The heading of the section containing the cursor is highlighted.
Opening, navigating, and closing documents 35
1
From the Navigation pane, you can move among headings, pages, or search results.
TIP The headings shown in the Navigation pane are based on headings formatted in
the document by using styles. For information about creating structure and ensuring
consistency by using styles, see “Applying styles to text” in Chapter 3, “Modify the
structure and appearance of text.”
16
In the Navigation pane, click the Landscaping heading to move the cursor directly to
the selected heading.
17
At the top of the Navigation pane, click Pages. On the Pages page, scroll through the
thumbnails to review the amount of visible detail, and then click the thumbnail for
page 5 to move the cursor directly to the top of the selected page.
18
At the right end of the Navigation pane title bar, click the Close button (the X) to
close the pane.
19
At the right end of the program window title bar, click the Close button to close the
Rules document.
36 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
20
If Document1 is not active, display that document. Click the File tab and then, in the
Backstage view, click Close. If Word asks whether to save changes to this document,
click Don’t Save. Notice that when Document1 closes, Word continues to run.
TROUBLESHOOTING In step 20, if you click the Close button at the right end of the
title bar instead of clicking Close in the Backstage view, you’ll close the open Word
document and exit the Word program. To continue working, start Word again.
+
CLEAN UP Leave Word running for the next exercise.
Viewing documents in different ways
In Word, you can display a document in a variety of views, each suited to a specific purpose.
You switch the view by clicking the buttons in the Views group on the View tab, or those on
the View Shortcuts toolbar in the lower-right corner of the program window.
▪▪ Print Layout view This view displays a document on the screen the way it will look
when printed. You can review elements such as margins, page breaks, headers and
footers, and watermarks.
▪▪ Read Mode view This view displays as much document content as will fit on the
screen at a size that is comfortable for reading. In this view, the ribbon is replaced by
one toolbar at the top of the screen with buttons for searching and navigating in the
document. You can view comments, but you can’t edit the document in this view.
▪▪ Web Layout view This view displays the document the way it will look when viewed
in a web browser. You can review backgrounds and other effects. You can also review
how text wraps to fit the window and how graphics are positioned.
▪▪ Outline view This view displays the structure of a document as nested levels of
headings and body text, and provides tools for viewing and changing the hierarchy.
SEE ALSO For information about displaying and modifying a document in Outline
view, see “Reorganizing document outlines” in Chapter 10, “Organize and arrange
content.” For information about web documents, see “Creating and modifying web
documents” in Chapter 11, “Create documents for use outside of Word.”
▪▪ Draft view This view displays the content of a document with a simplified layout
so that you can quickly enter and edit text. You cannot view layout elements such
as headers and footers.
Viewing documents in different ways 37
1
When you want to focus on the layout of a document, you can display rulers and gridlines
to help you position and align elements. Simply select the corresponding check boxes in
the Show group on the View tab. You can also adjust the magnification of the document by
using the tools available in the Zoom group on the View tab or the Zoom Level button or
Zoom Slider at the right end of the status bar. Clicking either the Zoom button or the Zoom
Level button displays a dialog box in which you can select or type a percentage; or you can
drag the Zoom Slider to the left or right or click the Zoom Out or Zoom In button on either
side of the slider to change the percentage incrementally.
SEE ALSO For information about controlling document gridlines, see “Arranging objects on
the page” in Chapter 10, “Organize and arrange content.”
You are not limited to working with one document at a time. You can easily switch between
open documents, and you can display more than one program window simultaneously.
If you want to work with different parts of the same document, you can open the active
document in a second window and display both, or you can split a single window into two
panes and scroll through the content in each pane independently.
TIP At the right end of the View tab is the Macros group, which includes commands for
viewing, recording, and pausing macros. A discussion of macros is beyond the scope of this
book. If you are interested in finding out about them, search for macros in Word Help.
Not represented on the View tab is a feature that can be invaluable when you are finetuning the layout of a document. Clicking the Show/Hide ¶ button in the Paragraph group
on the Home tab turns on and off the display of formatting marks and hidden characters.
Formatting marks, such as tabs, paragraph marks, page breaks, and section breaks, control
the layout of your document, and hidden characters provide the structure for behind-thescenes processes, such as indexing. When you are developing a document, you might want
to display these marks and characters.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+* to turn on and off the display of formatting marks and
hidden text. (You need to hold down the Shift key to activate the * key. So, in effect, you are
pressing Ctrl+Shift+8.)
TIP You can format any text as hidden text by selecting it, clicking the Font dialog box
launcher on the Home tab, selecting the Hidden check box, and clicking OK. When the
Show/Hide ¶ button is active, hidden text is visible and is identified in the document by
a dotted underline.
38 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
In this exercise, you’ll first learn one more way of opening an existing document. You’ll
explore various ways that you can customize Print Layout view to make the work of developing documents more efficient. Then you’ll switch to the other main views, noticing the
differences so that you have an idea of which one is most appropriate for which task. Finally,
you’ll switch between open documents and view a document in multiple windows at the
same time.
SET UP You need the Procedures and Prices documents located in the Chapter01
practice file folder to complete this exercise. With Word running, follow the steps.
1
On the Open page of the Backstage view, in the Places list, click Computer. Then in
the Recent Folders list, click the Chapter01 folder.
TROUBLESHOOTING If the Chapter01 folder doesn’t appear in the list, click the
Browse button and locate the folder.
2
In the Open dialog box displaying the contents of the Chapter01 folder, double-click
the Procedures document to open it in the existing instance of Word.
3
With the document displayed in Print Layout view (the default view), scroll through
the document.
Document headers and footers are visible in Page Layout view when page breaks are displayed.
Viewing documents in different ways 39
1
Notice that on all pages but the first, the printed document will have the title in the
header at the top of the page, the page number in the right margin, and the date in
the footer at the bottom of the page.
SEE ALSO For information about headers and footers, see “Inserting preformatted
document parts” in Chapter 9, ”Add visual elements.”
4
Point to the gap between any two pages, and when the pointer changes to two
opposing arrows, double-click the mouse button to hide the white space at the top
and bottom of each page and the gray space between pages. Then scroll through
the document again to review the change.
Hiding white space makes it quicker to scroll through a long document and easier to compare
the content on two pages.
5
Point to the line that separates one page from the next and double-click to restore
the space.
6
Press Ctrl+Home to move to the top of the document. At the right end of the status
bar, click the Zoom level button, which currently indicates that the document is dis­
played at 100 percent, to open the Zoom dialog box.
40 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
1
You can click a built-in zoom percentage or specify your own.
7
In the Zoom dialog box, click Many pages. Then click the monitor button, click the
second page thumbnail in the top row, and click OK to change the magnification so
that the two pages appear side by side. On the status bar, notice that the Zoom level
and Zoom slider indicators change to reflect the new magnification.
You can now scroll through the document two pages at a time.
Viewing documents in different ways 41
8
9
Press Page Down to display the third and fourth pages of the document.
On the View tab, in the Zoom group, click the Page Width button to display only
page 3, at a magnification level that leaves very little empty space at the sides of
the page.
10
On the View tab, in the Show group, select the Ruler check box to display rulers
above and to the left of the page. Notice that on the rulers, the content area of the
page is white and the margins are gray.
11
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Show/Hide ¶ button to make
formatting marks such as spaces, tabs, and paragraph marks visible.
You can display the formatting marks that control the layout of the content.
Now let’s display the document in a simple format that’s easy to read.
12
On the View Shortcuts toolbar, click the Read Mode button to simplify the program
window. On the View menu at the top of the Read Mode window, click Layout, and
then click Column Layout.
TIP If Column Layout is already selected, selecting it again will not change the layout.
13
On the View menu, click Column Width, and then click Narrow to display the
document in two columns. Then on the right side of the window, click the Forward
button to display the next two screens of the document.
42 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
1
You cannot edit content in Read Mode view.
14
Investigate the options on the Tools menu and View menu. Notice that you can set
the page color to Sepia or Inverse (white text on a black screen) if reading black text
on a white screen bothers your eyes. Then on the View menu, click Edit Document to
return to Print Layout view.
IMPORTANT In previous versions of Word, clicking the Close button in the upper-right
corner of the reading view (formerly known as Full Screen Reading view) returned you
to the previous view so you could edit the document. In Word 2013, clicking the Close
button in the upper-right corner of the window while in Read Mode view closes the
document.
Now let’s display the document as it will appear in a web browser.
15
Press Ctrl+Home to return to the beginning of the document. On the View Shortcuts
toolbar, click the Web Layout button. Then scroll through the document. Notice that
the text column fills the window, and there are no page breaks.
16
Press Ctrl+Home to return to the beginning of the document. On the View tab,
in the Views group, click the Draft button, and then scroll through the document.
Viewing documents in different ways 43
Notice that the basic content of the document appears without any extraneous
elements, such as margins and headers and footers. Only the horizontal ruler is
visible. The active area on the ruler indicates the width of the text column, dotted
lines indicate page breaks, and scrolling is quick and easy.
Draft view doesn’t display graphic elements.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you have configured the style area pane to appear in Outline
view and Draft view, it will be visible on the left side of the page. For information
about using the style area pane, see “Reorganizing document outlines” in Chapter 10,
“Organize and arrange content.”
Now let’s open a second document.
17
On the Open page of the Backstage view, in the left pane, click Computer. In the
Current Folder list, click Chapter01. Then in the Open dialog box, double-click the
Prices document to open it in its own program window.
Notice that the Prices document opens in Web Layout view; the last of the three main
views (those available from the View Shortcuts toolbar) that you used. Word remembers this setting.
18
In the Prices document, on the View Shortcuts toolbar, click the Print Layout button.
Notice that the telephone number in the body of the memo has a dotted underline,
which indicates that it is formatted as hidden.
TIP The Show/Hide ¶ setting stays active in Word when you open or start another
document. When you have multiple open documents, you can turn the setting on
or off for each individual document.
44 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
19
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Show/Hide ¶ button to hide
hidden text and formatting marks in this document. Notice that the telephone
number is no longer visible.
20
On the View tab, in the Window group, click the Switch Windows button and
then, in the list of open documents, click Procedures to redisplay the Procedures
document. Notice that it is still in Draft view with formatting marks and hidden text
turned on.
TIP You can control the view and formatting marks for each window separately.
21
On the View tab, in the Window group, click the Arrange All button to resize the
open windows and stack them one above the other. Notice that each window has
a ribbon, so you can work with each document independently.
You can display more than one window at the same time.
TIP The ribbons in each window take up a lot of screen space. To display more of
each document, click the Collapse The Ribbon button in each window to hide all
but the tab names.
Viewing documents in different ways 45
1
22
At the right end of the Procedures title bar, click the Close button. If Word prompts
you to save changes, click Don’t Save. Notice that the Prices document window
remains at half height.
23
At the right end of the Prices title bar, click the Maximize button to expand the
window to fill the screen.
24
On the View tab, in the Show group, clear the Ruler check box to turn off the rulers.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Prices document, but leave Word running for the next exercise.
Getting help with Word 2013
Whenever you have a question about Word 2013 that isn’t answered in this book, your
first recourse is the Word Help system. This system is a combination of articles, videos, and
training tools and information available from the Office website for reference when you are
online, and basic information stored on your computer for reference when you are offline.
TIP To switch between online and offline reference content, click the arrow to the right of
Word Help and then click Word Help From Office.com or Word Help From Your Computer.
You can print the information shown in the Help window by clicking the Print button on the
toolbar. You can change the font size of the topic by clicking the Use Large Text button on
the toolbar to the left of the Search Help box.
You can find Help resources in the following ways:
▪▪ To find out about an item on the screen, you can display a ScreenTip. For example, to
display a ScreenTip for a button, point to the button without clicking it. The ScreenTip
gives the button’s name, the associated keyboard shortcut if there is one, and unless
you specify otherwise, a description of what the button does when you click it. Some
ScreenTips also include enhanced information such as instructions and links to related
Help topics.
▪▪ In the Word program window, you can click the Microsoft Word Help button (the
question mark) near the right end of the title bar to display the Word Help window.
▪▪ In a dialog box, you can click the Help button (also a question mark) near the right
end of the dialog box title bar to open the Word Help window and display any available topics related to the functions of that dialog box.
46 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
In this exercise, you’ll explore the Word Help window and search for information about
printing and using SkyDrive.
SET UP You don’t need any practice files to complete this exercise. With Word running,
follow the steps.
1
Near the right end of the title bar, click the Microsoft Word Help button to open the
Word Help window.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press F1 to display the Word Help window.
Your Help window might look different from this because the Office website is regularly updated.
2
At the top of the Word Help window, enter printing in the Search box and then
click the Search button to display a list of topics related to printing Office documents.
Click the Print labels link to display the corresponding article.
Getting help with Word 2013 47
1
TIP Links to related articles are indicated by colored text. You can click section links
that appear at the beginning of an article to move directly to that section of the
article. You can click Show All at the beginning of an article to expand all collapsed
sections of the article.
A typical Help article.
3
Jump to related information by clicking any link identified by colored text.
48 Chapter 1 Explore Microsoft Word 2013
4
Enter SkyDrive in the Search box, and then press Enter to display topics related
to the search term. In the results list, click Share a document using SharePoint or
SkyDrive to display that topic.
5
At the left end of the toolbar, click the Back button to return to the topics you
previously displayed. When you finish exploring, close the Word Help window by
clicking the Close button in the upper-right corner.
+
CLEAN UP If you are finished using Word for now, close the program window.
Key points
▪▪ The core functionality of Word 2013 remains the same regardless of the version of the
program you are using. However, the available features and the way you interact with
the program might be different in different versions.
▪▪ The Word user interface provides intuitive access to all the tools you need to develop
a sophisticated document tailored to the needs of your audience.
▪▪ You can open more than one Word document, and you can view more than one
document at a time, but only one document can be active at a time.
▪▪ It’s easy to move the cursor by clicking in the text or by pressing keys and keyboard
shortcuts.
▪▪ When you save a Word document, you specify its location on the Save As page of the
Backstage view, and its name and file format in the Save As dialog box.
▪▪ You can view a document in a variety of ways, depending on your needs as you create
the document and on the purpose for which you are creating it.
▪▪ The Word Help window gives you instant access to current information and training
on most aspects of the program.
Key points 49
1
Chapter at a glance
Start Start, enter text in, and save documents,
page 52
Modify Modify text,
page 58
Find Correct Find and replace text,
page 68
Correct spelling and grammatical errors,
page 86
Enter, edit, and
proofread text
2
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Start, enter text in, and save documents.
Modify text.
Find and replace text.
Fine-tune text.
Correct spelling and grammatical errors.
Entering text into a Microsoft Word document is a simple matter of typing—whether on
a traditional keyboard or an on-screen keyboard—or in some cases, writing (on a tablet)
or speaking (into a microphone connected to your computer). However, even the most accurate typists occasionally make mistakes, also known as typos (for typographical errors),
and the accuracy of handwritten or spoken entry may be even less dependable. Unless the
documents you create are intended for no one’s eyes but your own, you will want to ensure
that they are not only correct but also professional. Word 2013 has several tools that make
creating professional documents easy and efficient, whether you are a novice or experienced writer.
▪▪ Editing tools These tools provide quick-selection techniques and drag-and-drop
editing to make it easy to move and copy text anywhere you want it.
▪▪ Search tools These tools can be used to locate and replace words, phrases, and
special characters, either one at a time or throughout a document.
SEE ALSO For information about using the search tools to find and replace format­
ting, see the sidebar “Finding and replacing formatting” in Chapter 3, “Modify the
structure and appearance of text.”
▪▪ Research tools These tools make it easy to find synonyms, look up information, and
translate words and phrases.
▪▪ AutoCorrect and Spelling And Grammar These features make it easy to correct
typos and grammatical errors before you share a document with others.
51
In this chapter, you’ll be introduced to several of the new and improved features of Word
2013. You’ll start by creating a blank document in which you will enter text. You’ll edit
the text in a document by inserting, deleting, copying, pasting, and moving it; and you’ll
learn about the options you have when relocating text. You’ll find and replace words and
phrases throughout a document and replace one phrase with another. Next, you’ll look up
the definition of a word, replace a word with a synonym, and locate translations for other
words. You’ll also personalize your AutoCorrect list and check the spelling and grammar of
a document.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter02 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
Starting, entering text in, and saving
documents
When you start Word 2013, you can open an existing document or create a new document.
When you create a new document—either a blank document or one based on a populated
template—a blinking cursor shows where the next character you enter will appear. When
the cursor reaches the right margin, the word you are entering moves to the next line. You
press the Enter key only to start a new paragraph, not a new line.
You can create a new document during a Word session from the New page of the Back­
stage view. The documents listed on the New page are based on templates, which are sets
of formats that have been saved in such a way that you can use them as patterns for new
documents. Some templates are installed on your computer with Office; many other templates are available online. To locate a template suitable for your purposes, enter a search
phrase in the Search Online Templates box and then click the Start Searching button, or
click a category in the Suggested Searches list below the box.
When you find a template you might want to use as the basis for your new document, clicking its thumbnail displays a preview and description of the document along with ratings
provided by people who have downloaded the template. You can then click the Create button in the preview pane to create the document.
TIP Double-clicking a template thumbnail creates the document without first displaying it
in the preview pane.
52 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
Each document you create is temporary, indicated by a file name such as Document1, until
you save it. To save a document for the first time, you click the Save button on the Quick
Access Toolbar or click Save in the Backstage view. Either action displays the Save As page
of the Backstage view, where you can choose a storage location, assign a name, attach
metadata tags, and specify a file type for the document.
When you choose a location on the Save As page, the Save As dialog box opens displaying
that location in the Address bar at the top of the dialog box. If you want to save the document in a folder other than the one shown in the Address bar, you can click the arrow or
chevrons in the Address bar or click locations in the Navigation pane on the left to display
the folder you want. If you want to create a folder in which to store the document, you can
click the New Folder button on the toolbar.
Saving a file from the Save As page of the Backstage view.
TROUBLESHOOTING If the Navigation pane is not open in the Save As dialog box, either
click the Browse Folders link in the lower-left corner of the dialog box or click Organize on
the toolbar, point to Layout, and then click Navigation Pane. (Only one of these options will
be available.)
Starting, entering text in, and saving documents 53
2
Saving files to SkyDrive
Whether you’re working in a corporate environment or at home, you have the option
of saving files to Microsoft SkyDrive. The SkyDrive location you save to might be part
of your company’s Microsoft SharePoint environment, or it might be a cloud-based
storage location that is associated with your Microsoft account. Saving a file in either
type of SkyDrive location provides the option of sharing the file with other people.
To save a document to SkyDrive, display the Save As page of the Backstage view, click
your SkyDrive, and then specify the SkyDrive folder in which you want to save the file.
If your SkyDrive doesn’t already appear in the list of locations, click Add A Place, click
SkyDrive, and then enter the credentials associated with the SkyDrive you want to
access.
When you save a Word document to SkyDrive, you and other people with whom you
share the document can work on it by using a local installation of Word or by using
Word Web App, which is available in the SkyDrive environment.
SEE ALSO For information about Word Web App, see Chapter 1, “Explore Microsoft
Word 2013.”
Microsoft provides 7 gigabytes (GB) of free SkyDrive storage to Microsoft account
holders. If you already have a Microsoft account, you can access your SkyDrive
­directly from any Office program, or from skydrive.live.com. If you don’t yet have
a Microsoft account, you can configure any existing email account as a Microsoft
­account at signup.live.com. (If you don’t yet have an email account that you want
to configure for this purpose, you can get a new account there too.)
SkyDrive Pro is available as part of a SharePoint 2013 environment, and your storage
there will be managed by your company or SharePoint provider.
After you save a document the first time, you can save changes simply by clicking the Save
button. The new version of the document then overwrites the previous version.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+S to save the current document. For more information
about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end of this book.
SEE ALSO For information about retrieving previous versions of documents, see the sidebar
“Managing document versions” in Chapter 15, “Collaborate on documents.”
54 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
If you want to save a separate version of a previously saved document, save the new version
with a different name in the same location or with the same name in a different location.
(You cannot store two files of the same type with the same name in the same folder.)
TIP By default, Word periodically saves the document you are working on in case the pro-
gram stops responding or your computer shuts down unexpectedly. To adjust the time
interval between automatic saves, display the Save page of the Word Options dialog box,
specify the period of time in the Save AutoRecover Information Every scroll box, and then
click OK.
In this exercise, you’ll create a blank document, enter text, and save the document in a
folder that you create.
SET UP You don’t need any practice files to complete this exercise; just follow the
steps.
1
If Word is not running, start Word and then double-click the Blank document
thumbnail in the right pane of the Start screen to create a blank document
temporarily named Document1. If Word is already running, double-click the Blank
document thumbnail on the New page of the Backstage view to create a blank
document.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you have already created documents in your current Word
session, the temporary file name will reflect the number of documents you’ve created
and will not match the images shown in this exercise.
2
Because we won’t be formatting the document content yet, click the Unpin the
ribbon button to hide the groups so we can concentrate on the content.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+F1 to pin or unpin the ribbon.
3
With the cursor at the beginning of the new document, enter Parks Appreciation
Day, and then press the Enter key to create a new paragraph.
4
Enter Help beautify our city by participating in the annual cleanup of Log
Drift Park, Swamp Creek Park, and Tall Tree Park. Volunteers will receive
a free T-shirt and barbeque lunch. Bring your own gardening tools and
gloves, and be ready to have fun! Notice that you did not need to press Enter
when the cursor reached the right margin, because the text automatically wrapped
to the next line.
Starting, entering text in, and saving documents 55
2
You press Enter at the end of each paragraph; the Word Wrap feature wraps each line within the
paragraph.
TIP If a wavy line appears under a word or phrase, Word is flagging a possible error.
For information about proofing errors, see “Correcting spelling and grammatical
errors” later in this chapter.
5
Press Enter, and then enter The Park Service Committee is coordinating group
participation in this event. If you are interested in spending time outdoors
with family and friends while improving the quality of our parks, contact
Nancy Anderson by email at [email protected]
Now let’s save the new document.
6
On the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Save button to display the Save As page of
the Backstage view. In the Places list, click the place where you saved the practice
files for this book. Then in the right pane, click the Browse button to open the Save
As dialog box. Notice that Word suggests the file name Parks Appreciation Day
based on the current file content.
7
Using standard Windows techniques, navigate to the practice file folders. Then
double-click the Chapter02 practice file folder.
8
In the Save As dialog box, on the toolbar, click the New folder button to create a
new folder. With the folder name selected for editing, enter My New Documents,
and then press Enter once to save the folder name and once to open the folder.
9
In the File name box, click anywhere in Parks Appreciation Day to select it, and then
replace the suggested name by typing My Announcement.
IMPORTANT Programs that run on the Windows operating systems use file name
extensions to identify different types of files. For example, the extension .docx identifies
Word 2013 documents. Windows 7 and Windows 8 do not display these extensions by
default, and you shouldn’t enter them in the Save As dialog box. When you save a file,
Word automatically adds whatever extension is associated with the file type selected in
the Save As Type list.
56 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
10
Click Save to close the dialog box and save the My Announcement document in the
My New Documents folder. Notice that the new file name appears on the program
window’s title bar.
11
Display the Info page of the Backstage view. Notice that the document’s current
location is shown below the file name.
2
The Info page displays the current file location.
12
Click the Save As page tab. In the Current Folder list, click My New Documents to
open the Save As dialog box to the current folder. In the Address bar of the Save
As dialog box, to the left of My New Documents, click Chapter02 to display the
contents of the Chapter02 practice file folder in which you created the My New
Documents folder.
13
Click Save to save a separate copy of the My Announcement document in
the Chapter02 folder. You now have two versions of the document saved
with the same name but in different folders.
SEE ALSO For information about saving a document in a different file format, see
“Saving Word documents in other formats” in Chapter 11, “Create documents for use
outside of Word.” For information about working with the file properties that appear
at the bottom of the Save As dialog box, see “Preparing documents for electronic
distribution” in Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute documents.”
+
CLEAN UP At the right end of the title bar, click the Close button to close the My
Announcement document.
Starting, entering text in, and saving documents 57
Document compatibility with earlier versions of Word
The Microsoft Office 2013 programs use file formats based on XML. By default, Word
2013 files are saved in the .docx format, which provides the following benefits:
▪▪ File size is smaller because files are compressed when saved, decreasing the
amount of disk space needed to store the file, and the amount of bandwidth
needed to send files in email, over a network, or across the Internet.
▪▪ Recovering at least some of the content of damaged files is possible because XML
files can be opened in a text program such as Notepad.
▪▪ Security is greater because .docx files cannot contain macros, and personal data
can be detected and removed from the file. (The .docm file format is designed for
documents that contain macros.)
Word 2003 and earlier versions of Word used the .doc file format. You can open .doc
files in Word 2013, but some Word 2013 features will be unavailable. When you open
a file created in an earlier version of Word (even a .docx file created in Word 2010),
the title bar displays [Compatibility Mode] to the right of the document name. You can
work in Compatibility mode, or you can convert the document to Word 2013 format
by clicking the Convert button on the Info page of the Backstage view, or by saving a
copy of the document with Word Document as the file type.
If you work with people who are using a version of Word earlier than 2007, they can
install the free Microsoft Office Compatibility Pack For Word, Excel, And PowerPoint
File Formats from the Microsoft Download Center at download.microsoft.com. The
Compatibility Pack doesn’t provide additional functionality in the older program version but it does enable users to open .docx files in the older version of Word.
SEE ALSO For more information about file formats, see “Saving Word documents in
other formats” in Chapter 11, “Create documents for use outside of Word.”
Modifying text
You’ll rarely write a perfect document that doesn’t require any editing. You’ll almost always
want to add or remove a word or two, change a phrase, or move text from one place to another. Or you might want to edit a document that you created for one purpose so that you
can use it for a different purpose. You can edit a document as you create it, or you can write
it first and then revise it.
58 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
Inserting one document into another
Sometimes you’ll want to insert the contents of one or more existing documents into
another document. For example, you might want to compile 12 monthly reports into
an annual report. It would be tedious to select and copy the text of each report and
then paste it into the annual report document. Instead, you can have Word insert the
existing documents for you. Here’s how:
1 In the target document, position the cursor where you want to insert the existing
document.
2 On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click the Object arrow (not the button) and then,
in the list, click Text from File.
3 In the Insert File dialog box that opens, browse to the source file you want, and then
double-click the file to insert its contents at the cursor.
Inserting text is easy; you click to position the cursor and then begin typing. Any existing
text to the right of the cursor moves to make room for the new text.
Deleting text is equally easy. If you want to delete only one or a few characters, you can
simply position the cursor and then press the Backspace or Delete key until the characters
are all gone. Pressing Backspace deletes the character to the left of the cursor; pressing
Delete deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
To delete more than a few characters efficiently, you need to know how to select text.
Selected text appears highlighted on the screen. You can drag through a section of text
to select it, or you can select specific items as follows:
▪▪ Word Double-click anywhere in the word. The word and the space immediately
following it are selected, but not any punctuation following the word.
▪▪ Sentence Hold down the Ctrl key and then click anywhere in the sentence. Word
selects all the characters in the sentence, from the first character through the space
following the ending punctuation mark.
TROUBLESHOOTING You cannot select a sentence by using this technique if other
text is already selected. This activates the non-adjacent multi-selection functionality
described at the end of this list.
▪▪ Paragraph Triple-click anywhere in the paragraph. Word selects the text of the paragraph and the paragraph mark.
Modifying text 59
2
▪▪ Adjacent words, lines, or paragraphs Position the cursor at the beginning of the
text you want to select, hold down the Shift key, and then press the arrow keys to
select one character or line at a time; hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys and press the
arrow keys to select one word at a time; or click at the end of the text that you want
to select.
▪▪ Non-adjacent words, lines, or paragraphs Make the first selection, and then hold
down the Ctrl key while selecting the next text block.
TIP When you select content, Word displays the Mini Toolbar, from which you can quickly
format the selection or perform other actions depending on the type of content you select.
For information about applying formatting from the Mini Toolbar, see “Manually changing the look of characters” in Chapter 3, “Modify the structure and appearance of text.” For
information about turning off the display of the Mini Toolbar, see “Changing default program options” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more efficiently.”
As an alternative way of selecting, you can use an area of the document’s left margin,
called the selection area, to select items. When the mouse pointer is in the selection area,
it changes to an arrow that points toward the upper-right corner of the page.
You can select specific items from the selection area as follows:
▪▪ Line Click in the selection area to the left of the line.
▪▪ Paragraph Double-click in the selection area to the left of the paragraph.
▪▪ Entire document Triple-click in the selection area.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+A to select all the content in the body of the
document.
Clicking once in the selection area while the pointer is pointing toward the text selects the adjacent line.
After selecting the text you want to delete, press either Backspace or Delete.
60 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
TIP To release a selection, click anywhere in the window other than the selection area.
If you want to move or copy the selected text, you have three options:
▪▪ Drag-and-drop editing Use this feature, which is frequently referred to simply as
dragging, when you need to move or copy text only a short distance—for example,
within a paragraph. Start by using any of the methods described previously to select
the text. Then point to the selection, hold down the mouse button, drag the text to
its new location (indicated by a dotted vertical line), and release the mouse button. To
copy the selection, hold down the Ctrl key while you drag.
▪▪ Cut, Copy, and Paste buttons Use this method when you need to move or copy
text between two locations that you cannot display at the same time—for example,
between pages or between documents. Select the text, and click the Cut or Copy
button in the Clipboard group on the Home tab. (The cut or copied item is stored in
an area of your computer’s memory called the Microsoft Office Clipboard, hence the
name of the group.) Then position the cursor in the new location and click the Paste
button to insert the selection. If you click the Paste arrow instead of the button, Word
displays options for pasting the selection.
Word offers several different methods of pasting content.
The available buttons depend on the format of the cut or copied selection (the
source) and the format of the place you’re pasting it (the destination). Pointing to a
button displays a preview of how the source content will look if you use that option
to paste it at the current location.
SEE ALSO For more information about working with cut and copied content, see the
sidebar “About the Clipboard” later in this chapter.
Modifying text 61
2
▪▪ Keyboard shortcuts When you’re working with a traditional keyboard and mouse,
or on a portable computer with an integrated mouse pad, it can be more efficient to
press combinations of keyboard keys to cut, copy, and paste selections rather than to
click buttons on the ribbon. The main keyboard shortcuts for editing tasks are shown
in the following table.
Task
Keyboard shortcut
Cut
Ctrl+X
Copy
Ctrl+C
Paste
Ctrl+V
Undo
Ctrl+Z
Repeat/Redo
Ctrl+Y
Using a keyboard shortcut to cut or copy a selection stores the item on the
Clipboard, just as if you had clicked the corresponding button.
TIP No matter which method you use, when you cut text, Word removes it from its original
location. When you copy text, Word leaves the text in the original location and repeats it in
the new location.
If you make a change to a document and then realize that you made a mistake, you can
easily reverse the change. You can undo your last editing action by clicking the Undo button on the Quick Access Toolbar. To undo an earlier action, click the Undo arrow and then
click that action in the list.
TIP Selecting an action from the Undo list undoes that action and all the editing actions
you performed after that one. You cannot undo only one action other than the last one you
performed.
If you make a change to a document and want to repeat that change elsewhere, you can
click the Repeat button on the Quick Access Toolbar. If the last task you performed was to
undo an action, the Repeat button is replaced by the Redo button. So if you change your
mind about whatever you undid, you can click the Redo button to return the text to its
previous state. You can’t redo multiple actions by clicking them in a list as you can with the
Undo button, but you can click the Redo button repeatedly until the text is restored to what
you want.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+Z to undo an action or Ctrl+Y to repeat or redo an action.
62 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
In this exercise, you’ll edit the text in a document. You’ll insert and delete text, undo the
deletion, copy and paste a phrase, and move a paragraph.
SET UP You need the Orientation document located in the Chapter02 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document in Print Layout view, and then follow the steps.
1
If the ribbon is unpinned (hidden), click the Ribbon Display Options button, and
then click Show Tabs and Commands. If formatting symbols such as spaces and
paragraph marks are not visible in the document, click the Show/Hide ¶ button in
the Paragraph group on the Home tab.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+* to turn on and off the display of formatting marks
and hidden text.
2
In the second bullet point after Project Goals, double-click the word natural to select
it, and then press Backspace to delete the selected word.
3
In the third bullet point, click to the left of the a in the word and, hold down the Shift
and Ctrl keys, and then press the Right Arrow key twice to select the words and
motivate and the following space.
Pressing Shift+Ctrl+Right Arrow selects one word to the right.
4
Press Delete to delete the selection.
Modifying text 63
2
5
In the fourth bullet point, double-click the word Forge, and then replace it by enter­
ing Build. Notice that you don’t have to enter a space after Build. Word inserts the
space for you.
TIP Word inserts and deletes spaces because the Use Smart Cut And Paste check box
is selected on the Advanced page of the Word Options dialog box. For information
about setting Word options, see “Changing default program options” in Chapter 16,
“Work in Word more efficiently.”
Now let’s copy and move text by using the Clipboard.
6
At the bottom of page 1, position the mouse pointer in the selection area to the left
of the first bullet point after Questions for Team Leaders. Then click to select the
paragraph.
7
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the Copy button to copy the
selection to the Clipboard.
8
At the top of page 2, click to the left of What in the first bullet point after Questions
for Department Reps. Then in the Clipboard group, click the Paste arrow to expand
the Paste Options menu. Notice that, because you’re pasting a list item into a list,
two of the three available buttons have list-related icons
The Paste Options menu includes buttons representing pasting options.
9
10
Point to each of the paste option buttons to review how the source text will look with
that paste option implemented.
Click the Merge List button to paste the copied bullet point into the second list and
retain its formatting. Then click the Paste Options button that appears below and
to the right of the inserted bullet point. Notice that most of the same paste options
64 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
that are available from the ribbon are also available from this menu; the Merge List
button is selected to indicate the option that was applied.
2
You can select paste options as part of the pasting process or after you paste the content.
TIP Notice that in the ScreenTip for each button, a single letter appears in parenthe-
ses after the button name. That single letter is the keyboard shortcut to invoke that
paste option from this menu or from the mini Paste Options menu that appears when
you paste any content into a document.
11
In the Set Up Team section, triple-click anywhere in the paragraph that begins
Explain the position’s responsibilities to select the entire paragraph.
12
In the Clipboard group, click the Cut button. Press the Up Arrow key to move to the
beginning of the preceding paragraph, and then in the Clipboard group, click the
Paste button to reverse the order of the two paragraphs.
TIP If you frequently edit documents, pressing Ctrl+X to cut, Ctrl+C to copy, and
Ctrl+V to paste will probably become second nature to you. Feel free to use keyboard
shortcuts in place of ribbon buttons while working through the exercises in this book.
13
On the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Undo arrow and then, in the Undo list, point
to the third action (Paste Merge List). Notice that the text at the bottom of the list
indicates that three actions will be undone if you click this list entry.
Selecting an action in the Undo list reverses that
action and all subsequent actions you performed.
Modifying text 65
14
In the Undo list, click Paste Merge List to undo the previous cut-and-paste operation
and the pasting of the copied text.
Now let’s move text without using the Clipboard.
15
In the Pre-Plan Project section, position the pointer in the selection area adjacent to
the bullet point that begins with If some employee input, and then double-click to
select the paragraph.
16
Point to the selection, hold down the mouse button, and then drag the paragraph
to the left of the word If at the beginning of the preceding bullet point. Release the
mouse button to switch the order of the bullet points.
17
With the text still selected, press the End key to release the selection and move the
cursor to the end of the paragraph.
18
Press the Spacebar, and then press Delete to delete the paragraph mark and merge
the two bullet points.
Two bullets have been combined into one.
+
CLEAN UP If you prefer to not show formatting symbols, turn them off. Then close
the Orientation document, saving your changes if you want to.
TIP Another way to ensure consistency in your documents while also saving time is to use
preformatted content objects called building blocks. Word 2013 comes with many built-in
building blocks for formatted items such as cover pages, headers and footers, tables, and
text boxes. You can also save your own building blocks. For more information, see “Inserting
preformatted document parts” in Chapter 9, “Add visual elements” and “Creating custom
building blocks” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more efficiently.”
66 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
About the Clipboard
You can view the items that have been cut or copied to the Clipboard by clicking the
Clipboard dialog box launcher on the Home tab to display the Clipboard pane.
2
The Clipboard stores items that have been cut or copied from any Office program.
You can work with items stored on the Clipboard pane in the following ways:
▪▪ To paste an individual item at the cursor, click the item; or point to the item, click
the arrow that appears, and then click Paste. To paste all the items stored on the
Clipboard at the same location, click the Paste All button.
▪▪ To remove an item from the Clipboard, point to the item in the Clipboard pane,
click the arrow that appears, and then click Delete. To remove all items from the
Clipboard, click the Clear All button.
You can control the behavior of the Clipboard pane by clicking Options at the bottom
of the pane and then clicking the display option you want.
Clipboard display options.
Modifying text 67
Finding and replacing text
One way to ensure that the text in your documents is consistent and accurate is to use the
Find feature to search for and review every occurrence of a particular word or phrase. For
example, if you are responsible for advertising a trademarked product, you can search your
marketing materials to check that every occurrence of the product’s name is correctly identified as a trademark.
Clicking the Find button in the Editing group on the Home tab displays the Results page of
the Navigation pane. As you enter characters in the search box at the top of the pane, Word
highlights all occurrences of those characters in the document and displays them on the
Results page.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+F to display the Results page of the Navigation pane and
activate the search box.
The Results page shows enough of the text surrounding
the search term to identify its context.
68 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
When you point to a search result on the Results page, a ScreenTip displays the number of
the page on which that result appears and the name of the heading preceding the search
result. You can click a search result to move directly to that location in the document.
TIP The Results page of the Navigation pane allows you to continue editing your document
as you normally would, while still having access to all the search results.
If you want to be more specific about the text you are looking for—for example, if you want
to look for occurrences that match the exact capitalization of your search term—click the
Search For More Things arrow at the right end of the search box in the Navigation pane
and then click Advanced Find to display the Find page of the Find And Replace dialog box.
Clicking More in the lower-left corner expands the dialog box to make additional search
options available.
You can make a search more specific by using the criteria in the Search Options area of the Find page.
In the expanded dialog box, you can do the following:
▪▪ Guide the direction of the search by selecting Down, Up, or All from the Search list.
▪▪ Locate only text that matches the capitalization of the search term by selecting the
Match Case check box.
Finding and replacing text 69
2
▪▪ Exclude occurrences of the search term that appear within other words by selecting
the Find Whole Words Only check box.
▪▪ Find two similar words, such as effect and affect, by selecting the Use Wildcards check
box and then including one or more wildcard characters in the search term. The two
most common wildcard characters are the following:
▪▪ ? Represents any single character in this location in the Find What text
▪▪ * Represents any number of characters in this location in the Find What text
TIP For a list of the available wildcards, select the Use Wildcards check box and then
click Special.
▪▪ Find occurrences of the search text that sound the same but are spelled differently,
such as there and their, by selecting the Sounds Like check box.
▪▪ Find occurrences of a particular word in any form, such as try, tries, and tried, by
selecting the Find All Word Forms check box.
▪▪ Locate formatting, such as bold, or special characters, such as tabs, by selecting them
from the Format or Special list.
SEE ALSO For information about finding and replacing formatting, see the sidebar
“Finding and replacing formatting” in Chapter 3, ”Modify the structure and appearance of text.”
▪▪ Locate words with the same beginning or end as the search term by selecting the
Match Prefix or Match Suffix check box.
▪▪ Locate words with different hyphenation or spacing by selecting the Ignore Punctuation Characters or Ignore White-Space Characters check box.
If you want to substitute a specific word or phrase for another, you can use the Replace feature. Clicking the Replace button in the Editing group on the Home tab displays the Replace
page of the Find And Replace dialog box.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+H to display the Replace page of the Find And Replace
dialog box.
TIP If the Navigation pane is open, you can click the Search For More Things arrow at the
right end of the search box and then click Replace. The Find And Replace dialog box opens
with the search term from the Navigation pane already in the Find What box.
70 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
2
Correcting errors and inconsistencies is easy with the Replace feature.
For each instance of the search term that Word locates, you can click one of the following
choices on the Replace page:
▪▪ Replace Replaces the selected occurrence with the text in the Replace With box and
moves to the next occurrence
▪▪ Replace All Replaces all occurrences with the text in the Replace With box
TIP Before clicking Replace All, ensure that the replacement is clearly defined. For
example, if you want to change trip to journey, be sure to tell Word to find only the
whole word trip; otherwise, triple could become journeyle.
▪▪ Find Next Finds the first occurrence or leaves the selected occurrence as it is and
locates the next one
As on the Find page, clicking More displays the options you can use to carry out more complicated replacement operations. Note that the settings in the Search Options area apply to
the search term and not to its replacement.
Finding and replacing text 71
In this exercise, you’ll find a phrase and make a correction to the text. Then you’ll replace
one phrase with another throughout the entire document.
SET UP You need the Regulations document located in the Chapter02 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, hide formatting marks if they are
displayed, and then follow the steps.
1
With the cursor at the beginning of the document, on the Home tab, in the Editing
group, click the Find button to display the Results page of the Navigation pane.
2
Enter Board in the search box. Notice that the Navigation pane displays 62 results,
and every occurrence of the search term in the document is highlighted.
You can scroll through the document to scan the highlighted results or click each match in the
Navigation pane to display its corresponding location in the document.
3
In the Navigation pane, click the Next button (the downward-pointing triangle)
to move to the second and third search results. Then scroll through the document
to show other highlighted results. Notice that on page 2, in section 4, Word has
highlighted the board portion of skateboards.
72 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
You need to restrict the search to the whole word Board.
4
In the Navigation pane, click the Search for more things button to expand a menu
of options for refining the search.
2
From this menu, you can locate specific types of objects and also refine text searches.
5
On the Search for more things menu, click Options to open the Find Options
dialog box.
The Find Options dialog box contains most options for refining the current search,
other than the style and special character options.
Finding and replacing text 73
6
In the dialog box, select the Match case and Find whole words only check boxes,
and then click OK. Enter Board in the search box again and scroll through the list of
results. Notice that the word skateboards is no longer highlighted.
Now let’s replace one word with another.
7
8
9
Press Ctrl+Home to move the cursor to the beginning of the document.
On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Replace to open the Find And Replace
dialog box with the Replace page active. Notice that the Find What box retains the
entry from the previous search, and the Match Case and Find Whole Words Only
options are still selected.
In the Search Options area, ensure that Down is selected in the Search list. Then click
Less to hide the Search Options area.
10
Enter Association Board in the Replace with box, and then click Find Next to
have Word highlight the first occurrence of Board. Notice that the Find and Replace
dialog box moves to the top of the program window so that the search result is
visible.
11
In the dialog box, click Replace to have Word replace the selected occurrence of
Board with Association Board and then find the next occurrence.
If you don’t want to replace an occurrence, click Find Next to skip it.
74 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
12
Having tested the replacement process, click Replace All. Because you clicked this
command partway through the document while performing a one-way search, Word
tells you how many replacements it made from the starting point forward and asks
whether to restart at the beginning.
2
You can restart a one-way search or replace operation.
TROUBLESHOOTING If All is selected in the Search list, the Replace All operation will
change the first instance of Association Board to Association Association Board. If a
replace operation doesn’t give you the results you want, close any open message
boxes or dialog boxes and then use the Undo command to undo the replacement
operations as necessary.
13
Click No to close the message box. Then close the Find and Replace dialog box.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Navigation pane. Then close the Regulations document, saving
your changes if you want to.
Fine-tuning text
Language is often contextual—you use different words and phrases in a marketing brochure than you would in a letter requesting immediate payment of an invoice or in an informal memo about a social gathering after work. To help ensure that you’re using the words
that best convey your meaning in any given context, you can look up definitions, synonyms,
and antonyms of words from within a document by using the built-in proofing tools.
TROUBLESHOOTING Before you can look up the meaning of a word, you must first install a
dictionary. Word will prompt you to do so if this is necessary.
You can install any of several free dictionaries from the Office Store. Your default dictionary
then provides definitions when you use the Define or Thesaurus feature. To look up the definition of a word, right-click the word and then click Define; or click anywhere in the word
and then click the Define button in the Proofing group on the Review tab.
Fine-tuning text 75
When the Dictionary pane is open, it displays definitions for whatever word
you select in the document or enter in the search box at the top of the pane.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+F7 to display definitions for the active word from the
default dictionary.
To manage installed dictionaries, click in the upper-right corner of the definition pane
(inside the frame below the pane title bar), click the arrow that appears, and then do
any of the following:
▪▪ Click a dictionary name to change the dictionary.
▪▪ Click Reload to refresh the content of the Dictionary pane.
▪▪ Click View Source to view the HTML code that calls the displayed dictionary entry.
▪▪ Click Lock to dock the Dictionary pane to the program window. (You must unlock
the pane before you can close it.)
76 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
Sometimes it’s difficult to think of the best word to use in a specific situation. You can
look up synonyms (words that have the same meaning) for a selected word by using the
Thesaurus feature. To look up alternatives for a word, right-click the word, and then click
Synonyms to display a list from which you can choose the one you want. Alternatively,
you can select (or click anywhere in) the word and then click the Thesaurus button in the
Proofing group on the Review tab. This opens the Thesaurus pane, displaying the selected
word in the Search For box, synonyms for that word, and the most common dictionary
definition.
If you install dictionaries for multiple languages, you can display definitions from other dictionaries by
clicking the language list at the bottom of the pane and then clicking the language you want.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Shift+F7 to open the Thesaurus pane and display synonyms for
the active word.
You can click a synonym to display its synonyms, and repeat that process until you find exactly the word you want. To replace the selected word with a synonym, point to your chosen synonym, click the arrow that appears, and then click Insert. If none of the suggested
synonyms meet your requirements, the word you’re using might not be the one you intend.
Fine-tuning text 77
2
You can use built-in and online tools to translate words and phrases, or even entire documents, into other languages. You can access these tools by clicking the Translate button in
the Language group on the Review tab and then, on the Translate menu, clicking the tool
you want to use.
▪▪ Mini Translator Click Mini Translator on the Translate menu to turn this handy
feature on or off (when it’s on, its icon on the Translate menu appears selected).
When the Mini Translator is turned on, you can point to a word or selected phrase
to display a translation in the specified language. From the Bilingual Dictionary
pane containing the translation, you can click the Expand button to display more
information and options in the Research pane. You can also copy the translated
word or phrase, or hear the original word or phrase spoken for you.
Using the Mini Translator is the quickest way to obtain the translation of a selection.
▪▪ Online bilingual dictionary To translate a selected word or phrase, click Translate
Selected Text on the Translate menu and then, in the Translation area of the Research
pane that appears, click the languages from and to which you want to translate. To
obtain the translation of a word that does not appear in the text of a document, display the Research pane, enter the word in the search box, specify the languages you
want, and then click the Start Searching button. Word consults the online bilingual
dictionary for the selected language and displays the result.
78 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
2
The available translation options vary depending on the language selected.
▪▪ Online machine translator To translate an entire document, click Translate Docu-
ment on the Translate menu. When Word displays a message that the document will
be sent for translation by the Microsoft Translator service (which is free), click Send.
The document and its translation then appear side by side in your web browser. You
can modify the translation languages in the boxes at the top of the webpage, and
point to any part of the translation to display the original text.
Fine-tuning text 79
You can use the free Microsoft Translator service to translate a document into more than
40 languages.
To change the default language used by the Mini Translator or the online machine translator, click Choose Translation Language on the Translate menu. Then in the Translation
Language Options dialog box, you can select different language pairs for each type of
translator.
You can translate from and to many languages, including Arabic, Chinese, Greek, Hebrew, Italian,
Japanese, Korean, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, and Swedish.
80 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
In this exercise, you’ll look up a word in the dictionary, replace a word with a synonym, and
experiment with the Mini Translator.
SET UP You need the Brochure document located in the Chapter02 practice file folder
to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
We will first check whether a dictionary has been installed, because you will need
one in order to complete the rest of the exercise. On the Review tab, in the Proofing
group, click the Define button to open the Dictionaries pane. If a dictionary has not
yet been installed, the pane displays a list of dictionaries that you can install from the
Office Store.
If a dictionary has not yet been installed, options are listed here.
SEE ALSO For information about the Office Store, see the sidebar “Installing Office
tools” later in this chapter.
Fine-tuning text 81
2
2
If the Dictionary pane displays a definition, skip to step 4. Otherwise, in the
Dictionaries pane, click the Download button below Bing Dictionary to install
the dictionary.
3
When a dictionary has been installed, the Dictionary pane lists definitions for the
word simple (the first word in the document). When the pane displays the definitions,
close the pane.
Now let’s find a synonym for a word.
4
5
In the second line of the first paragraph, double-click the word acclaimed.
6
In the synonym list, below much-admired, click commended. Notice that the
selected word replaces acclaimed in the search box at the top of the pane.
On the Review tab, in the Proofing group, click the Thesaurus button to open
the Thesaurus pane and display a list of synonyms for the word acclaimed. Scroll
through the list of synonyms and notice that an antonym appears at the bottom
of the list, so you can use the thesaurus to identify words that have the opposite
meaning as well as those with similar meanings.
The Thesaurus pane now lists synonyms for and a definition of the word commended.
82 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
7
Point to the word celebrated, click the arrow that appears to its right, and then click
Insert to replace the word acclaimed with celebrated in the document. Then close
the Thesaurus pane.
Now let’s translate a word.
8
In the Language group, click the Translate button, and then click Choose Translation
Language to open the Translation Language Options dialog box.
9
In the Choose Mini Translator language area, click the Translate to arrow, and click
French (France) in the list. Then click OK to close the dialog box.
10
In the Language group, click the Translate button, and then click Mini Translator
[French (France)] to turn on the Mini Translator.
11
In the last paragraph of the document, point to the word wardrobe, and then move
the pointer over the translucent box that appears above the word. Notice that the
Mini Translator appears, showing two French translations for the word wardrobe:
armoire and garde-robe.
12
In the Mini Translator box, click the Expand button to open the Research pane,
which displays the settings for translating from English into French.
13
In the Research pane, in the wardrobe translation below Bilingual Dictionary,
double-click the word armoire to select it.
14
15
16
Right-click the selection, and then click Copy.
17
Press the Esc key to close the shortcut menu and leave the word wardrobe in the text.
In the document, double-click the word wardrobe.
Right-click the selection, and then point to (don’t click) the Keep Text Only button
below the Paste Options heading. Notice that Word displays a live preview of what
the text will look like if you replace wardrobe with armoire.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Research pane, and turn off the Mini Translator by clicking
Mini Translator on the Translate menu. Then close the Brochure document, saving your
changes if you want to.
Fine-tuning text 83
2
Installing Office tools
When you use the proofing tools in Word 2013, they are actually displaying results
from a dictionary program (referred to as an app) that integrates with Word and connects to online resources. Many useful apps are available for Word and other Office
programs, including dictionaries, fax services, maps, newsfeeds, and social connectors.
To manage apps from within Word, click the Apps For Office button in the Apps group
on the Insert tab, and then in the Apps For Office window, click See All. Apps that are
installed on your computer appear in the My Apps list. You can locate apps that are
available for Word by clicking the Office Store button. Some apps can be installed
from directly within Word (for example, you can install a dictionary app from the
Dictionaries pane, the Spelling pane, or the Thesaurus pane).
If you no longer want to use an app, display the Apps For Office window and then
click the Manage My Apps link in the upper-right corner of the window. This signs you
in to the Office website using the Microsoft account associated with your Office installation and displays your personal My Apps For Office And SharePoint page. Select an
app on this page, and then click Hide to make the app unavailable.
Viewing document statistics
Word displays information about the size of a document at the left end of the status
bar. To show the number of words in only part of the document, such as a few paragraphs, simply select that part. You can review more statistics and specify the content
to include in the statistics in the Word Count dialog box, which you open by clicking
the Word Count indicator on the status bar or the Word Count button in the Proofing
group on the Review tab.
In addition to counting pages and words, Word counts characters, paragraphs, and lines.
84 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
Modifying spelling and grammar checking settings
Word saves your responses to suggested spelling and grammar changes with the document. If you choose to ignore a flagged error, the error will not be reflagged when
you run the spelling and grammar checker again.
You can specify the behavior of the spelling and grammar checker on the Proofing
page of the Word Options dialog box. In the Writing Style list, you can specify
whether the spelling and grammar checker also checks for style issues such as sentence structure, unclear phrasing, and wordiness. (Yes, it’s your own personal editor!)
To specify the types of errors that the spelling and grammar checker flags, click the
Settings button to the right of the Writing Style list. Not all grammar and style issues
are examined by default.
The default grammar options in Word 2013 are different from those in earlier
versions of Word. It’s a good idea to check these settings before you start.
To check the spelling and grammar of a document from scratch, click the Recheck
Document button on the Proofing page of the Word Options dialog box.
Fine-tuning text 85
2
Correcting spelling and grammatical errors
In the days of handwritten and typewritten documents, people might have tolerated a typographical or grammatical error or two because correcting such errors without creating
a mess was difficult. Word-processing programs such as Word have built-in spelling and
grammar checkers, so now documents that contain these types of errors are likely to reflect
badly on their creators.
TIP Although Word can help you eliminate misspellings and grammatical errors, its tools
are not infallible. You should always read through your document to catch any problems
that the Word tools can’t detect—for example, homonyms such as their, there, and they’re.
Word provides these three tools to help you with the chore of eliminating spelling and
grammar errors:
▪▪ AutoCorrect This feature corrects common spelling and grammatical errors, replaces
text codes with mathematical symbols, and automatically applies formatting based on
text cues. AutoCorrect has a built-in list of frequently misspelled words and their correct spellings. If you frequently misspell a word that AutoCorrect doesn’t change, you
can add it to the list in the AutoCorrect dialog box. If you deliberately enter a word
that is on the AutoCorrect list and don’t want to accept the AutoCorrect change, you
can reverse the correction by clicking the Undo button before you enter anything
else, or by pointing to the bar that appears below the word and then clicking Undo.
▪▪ Error indicators Word indicates possible spelling errors with red wavy underlines,
possible grammatical errors with green wavy underlines, and possible formatting
errors with blue wavy underlines. You can right-click an underlined word or phrase
to display suggested corrections and links to proofing resources.
▪▪ Spelling and grammar checker To check the spelling or grammar of selected text or
the entire document, click the Spelling & Grammar button in the Proofing group on
the Review tab. Word then works its way through the selection or the document and
displays the Spelling pane or Grammar pane if it encounters a potential error.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press F7 to start checking the spelling and grammar from
your current location in the document.
The pane that appears displays an explanation of the likely problem and suggests
corrections. You can implement a suggestion by double-clicking it.
86 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
2
The buttons in the Spelling pane reflect the type of error found.
In this exercise, you’ll change an AutoCorrect setting and add a word to the AutoCorrect
list. Then you’ll review and correct the spelling and grammar in a document and add terms
to the custom dictionary.
SET UP You need the Letter document located in the Chapter02 practice file folder to
complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
In the last line of the first paragraph, click immediately to the left of negative and
then enter coresponding, followed by a space. Notice that when you press the
Spacebar, the AutoCorrect function changes coresponding to corresponding.
2
In the Backstage view, click Options to display the Word Options dialog box, and
then click the Proofing page tab.
3
At the top of the Proofing page, click the AutoCorrect Options button to display
the AutoCorrect page of the AutoCorrect dialog box.
Correcting spelling and grammatical errors 87
A selected check box indicates a category of error that AutoCorrect will automatically correct.
TIP You can clear the check box of any error category you don’t want to automati-
cally change. For example, if you don’t want AutoCorrect to capitalize the first letter
that follows a period, clear the Capitalize First Letter Of Sentences check box.
4
In the Replace box, enter avalable. Notice that Word scrolls through the list below
the box to show the entry that is closest to what you entered.
5
6
Press the Tab key to move the cursor to the With box, and then enter available.
7
Position the cursor at the end of the second paragraph, press the Spacebar, and then
enter Sidney will not be avalable May 10-14. Notice that the misspelled word
avalable changes to available as soon as you enter the space following the word.
Click Add to add the entry to the correction list, click OK to close the AutoCorrect
dialog box, and then click OK to close the Word Options dialog box.
88 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
Now let’s correct one of the misspellings Word has identified.
8
In the first paragraph, right-click sorces, the first word with a red wavy underline, to
have Word list possible correct spellings for this misspelled word.
2
The shortcut menu also lists actions you might want to carry out, such as adding the word to the
dictionary.
SEE ALSO For information about the hyperlink option on the shortcut menu, see
“Linking to external resources” in Chapter 12, “Link to information and content.”
9
In the list, click sources to insert the correctly spelled word.
TIP Word’s grammar checker helps identify phrases and clauses that don’t follow
traditional grammatical rules, but it’s not always accurate. It’s easy to get in the habit
of ignoring green wavy underlines. However, it’s wise to scrutinize them all to be sure
that your documents don’t contain any embarrassing mistakes.
Now let’s check the spelling and grammar of the entire document.
10
Press Ctrl+Home to move to the beginning of the document. On the Review tab,
in the Proofing group, click the Spelling & Grammar button to open the Spelling
pane. Notice that the duplicated word to is highlighted in the first paragraph of the
document, and the Spelling pane indicates that the word is repeated.
TROUBLESHOOTING If the errors we mention don’t appear to be in the practice file,
display the Proofing page of the Word Options dialog box, , and then in the When
Correcting Spelling And Grammar In Word area, click Recheck Document. Click Yes to
reset the spelling and grammar checkers, and then click OK.
Correcting spelling and grammatical errors 89
Word highlights the duplicate word in the document.
11
In the Spelling pane, click Delete to delete the second instance of to and move to
the next word that Word does not recognize, commited.
12
With committed selected in the suggestions box, click Change to correct the
error and display the next possible error, which is marked as a grammar error. The
document author has used the wrong form of a word that has multiple spellings.
The Grammar pane displays the definitions of the original word and the suggested replacement.
13
In the Grammar pane, click Change to replace the selected word and display the
next possible error—the purchasing agent’s last name. Because Cristina’s full name is
likely to come up often in correspondence from this company, let’s add Potra to the
custom dictionary so that Word doesn’t flag it as an error in the future.
90 Chapter 2 Enter, edit, and proofread text
14
Near the top of the Spelling pane, below Potra, click the Add button. Word adds
the name to the dictionary and displays a message indicating that it has finished
checking the spelling and grammar of the document.
2
Word might suggest replacements that do not appear in the dictionary.
15
Click OK to close the message box.
TIP The grammar checker doesn’t always catch awkward phrasing. For example,
note the unmarked error (“to not only to”) in the second sentence of the first
paragraph of the Letter document. It’s a good example of why you should always
proofread your documents (or have someone else do it for you).
+
CLEAN UP Close the Letter document, saving your changes if you want to.
Key points
▪▪ You create simple Word documents by selecting a template and entering text at
the cursor.
▪▪ You can drag text from one location in a document to another.
▪▪ You can cut or copy text and paste it elsewhere in the same document or in a
different document. Cut and copied text is stored on the Clipboard.
▪▪ Undo one action or the last several actions you performed by clicking the Undo button (or its arrow) on the Quick Access Toolbar. Click the Redo button if you change
your mind again.
▪▪ You can find each occurrence of a word or phrase and replace it with another.
▪▪ Rely on AutoCorrect to correct common misspellings. Correct other spelling and
grammatical errors as you enter text, or by checking the entire document in one pass.
Key points 91
Chapter at a glance
Style Apply styles to text,
page 94
Color Change a document’s theme,
page 102
Format List Manually change the look of characters,
page 108
Create and modify lists,
page 130
Modify the structure
and appearance of text
3
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Apply styles to text.
Change a document’s theme.
Manually change the look of characters.
Manually change the look of paragraphs.
Create and modify lists.
The appearance of your documents helps to convey their message. Microsoft Word 2013
can help you develop professional-looking documents whose appearance is appropriate
to their contents. You can easily format words and paragraphs so that key points stand
out and the structure of your document is clear. You can also change the look of major
elements within a document by applying predefined sets of formatting called styles, and
you can change the look of selected text by applying predefined combinations called text
­effects. In addition, you can change the fonts, colors, and effects throughout a document
with one click by applying a theme.
In this chapter, you’ll first experiment with built-in styles and text effects, and then you’ll
change the theme applied to a document. You’ll change the look of individual words, and
then you’ll change the indentation, alignment, and spacing of individual paragraphs. You’ll
also add borders and shading to make paragraphs stand out. Finally, you’ll create and format both bulleted and numbered lists.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter03 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
93
Applying styles to text
You don’t have to know much about character and paragraph formatting to be able to
format your documents in ways that will make them easier to read and more professional
looking. With a couple of mouse clicks, you can easily change the look of words, phrases,
and paragraphs by using styles. More importantly, you can structure a document by applying styles that are linked to outline levels. In doing so, you build a document outline that is
reflected in the Navigation pane and can be used to create a table of contents.
SEE ALSO For information about tables of contents, see “Creating and modifying tables of
contents” in Chapter 13, “Reference content and content sources.”
Styles can include character formatting (such as font, size, and color), paragraph formatting
(such as line spacing and outline level), or a combination of both. Styles are stored in the
template that is attached to a document. By default, blank new documents are based on
the Normal template. The Normal template includes a standard selection of styles that fit
the basic needs of most documents. These styles include nine heading levels, various text
styles including those for multiple levels of bulleted and numbered lists, index and table of
contents entry styles, and many specialized styles such as those for hyperlinks, quotations,
placeholders, captions, and other elements.
By default, Word makes the most common predefined styles available in the Styles gallery
on the Home tab.
The Styles gallery in a new, blank document based on the Normal template.
94 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
Styles can be used for multiple purposes: to affect the appearance of the content, to build a
document outline, and to tag content as a certain type so that you can easily locate it.
3
Heading styles define a document’s outline.
Styles stored in a template are usually based on the Normal style and use only the default
body and heading fonts associated with the document’s theme, so they all go together well.
For this reason, formatting document content by using styles produces a harmonious effect. After you apply styles from the current style set, you can easily change the look of the
entire document by switching to a different style set, which associates different formatting
rules with the same styles. So if you have applied the Heading 1 style to a paragraph, you
can change its formatting simply by changing the style set.
SEE ALSO For information about document theme elements, see “Changing a document’s
theme,” later in this chapter.
Style sets are available from the Document Formatting menu on the Design tab.
Applying styles to text 95
Pointing to a style set in the gallery displays a live preview of the effects of
applying that style set to the entire document.
TIP Style sets provide a quick and easy way to change the look of an existing document.
You can also modify style definitions by changing the template on which the document is
based. For more information about styles and templates, see “Creating custom styles and
templates” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more efficiently.”
In this exercise, you’ll experiment with the styles in the Normal template and change the
look of a document by switching to a different style set.
SET UP You need the BambooInformation document located in the Chapter03 practice
file folder to complete this exercise. Open the document in Print Layout view, and then
follow the steps.
1
Scroll through the document to gain an overview of its contents. Notice that the
document begins with a centered title and subtitle, and there are several headings
throughout.
2
Display the Navigation pane. Notice that the Headings page of the Navigation pane
does not reflect the headings in the document.
3
On the Home tab, click the Styles dialog box launcher to display the Styles pane. If it
floats above the page, drag it by its title bar to the right edge of the program window
to dock it.
96 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
4
If necessary, change the zoom level of the page to fit the page content between the
Navigation pane and the Styles pane.
3
You’re ready to build a document structure by applying styles.
TIP Squiggly lines indicating possible grammatical errors might appear below some
words in this document. You can remove them by right-clicking each word and then
clicking Ignore.
5
Click anywhere in the document title, All About Bamboo, and then click in the first
heading, Moving to a New Home. In the Styles pane, notice that each of these
paragraphs is styled as Normal. Because the document headings do not have
heading styles applied to them, they do not appear in the Navigation pane.
6
Click again in the document title and then, in the Styles pane, click Title to apply the
style. Notice that Word applies the style to the entire paragraph even if you haven’t
selected it.
7
In the Styles pane, point to the Title style.
Applying styles to text 97
A ScreenTip displays a description of the font and paragraph formats associated with the style,
as well as the base style information.
8
Click anywhere in the Information Sheet paragraph and then, in the Styles pane,
click Subtitle to apply the style. Notice that the Navigation pane still contains no
headings. This is because the Title and Subtitle styles are not associated with outline
levels.
9
Select the bold heading Moving to a New Home. In the Styles pane, point to the
Heading 1 style to display a description of the style. Notice that the paragraph
description includes Outline Level: Level 1 to indicate that paragraphs with this style
appear at the first level of an outline.
10
In the Styles gallery, point to the Heading 1 style to display a live preview of the
selected text with that style. Notice the different result of pointing to the style in the
Styles gallery and in the Styles pane.
11
In the Styles gallery or in the Styles pane, click Heading 1 to apply the style. Notice
that the selected heading also appears in the Navigation pane.
Document headings provide not only an outline structure and formatting; you can
also use them to collapse entire sections. This is a nifty new feature in Word 2013.
Let’s try it.
98 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
12
In the document, point to the heading to display a downward-angled gray triangle
to its left. Then click the gray triangle to hide the content that follows the heading.
3
The gray triangle changes to a right-facing white triangle to indicate that content is hidden.
13
Click in the text above the heading. Notice that the white triangle remains visible to
the left of the heading to indicate that content associated with the heading is hidden.
14
Click the white triangle to the left of the heading to display the hidden document
content.
15
Select Staying Healthy, and click the Heading 1 style to apply it. Then select Keeping
Bugs at Bay and on the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Repeat button to apply
the same style to the selected text. This is a technique you can use to quickly apply
multiple instances of a style.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+Y to repeat the previous action. For more informa-
tion about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end of this book.
16
Display the page so that both underlined headings are visible. Select Mites, press
and hold the Ctrl key, and then select Mealy Bugs. With both headings selected, click
Heading 2 in the Styles gallery or Styles pane to simultaneously apply the style to
both selections.
Applying styles to text 99
Applying multiple heading styles creates a multilevel outline in the Navigation pane.
17
Notice that Heading 3 now appears in the Styles pane. The Normal template
contains many more headings than are currently displayed in the Styles pane or
Styles gallery. At the bottom of the Styles pane, click Options to open the Style Pane
Options dialog box. Notice that Show next heading when previous level is used is
selected by default; this is the setting that caused Heading 3 to appear in the Styles
pane after you applied the Heading 2 style.
Let’s look at the many styles that are available for use in this document.
18
In the Style Pane Options dialog box, click the Select styles to show arrow. Notice
that you can display all styles, all styles that are in the document template, all styles
that are currently being used, or a selection of “recommended” styles.
SEE ALSO For more information about working with styles and the Styles pane,
see “Creating custom styles and templates” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more
efficiently.”
100 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
3
You can choose to display any of four categories of styles in the Styles pane.
19
In the Select styles to show list, click All styles. In the Select how list is sorted list,
click Alphabetical. Then in the Style Pane Options dialog box, click OK to display
the full list of available styles in the Styles pane.
TIP To add any style from the Styles pane to the Styles gallery, point to the style
name, click the arrow that appears, and then click Add To Style Gallery.
20
Scroll through the Styles pane to view the wide range of available styles, and point to
any that interests you to display a description. Notice that many of the built-in styles
are intended for specific uses, such as the Index and TOC (table of contents) styles.
21
In the Navigation pane, just above the headings, click the Jump to the beginning
button to return to the document title.
Now we’ll apply some character styles to the document content, so we can see how
they change when we change the style set.
22
In the first paragraph of the document, select the company name Wide World
Importers. In the Styles group, click the More button to expand the Styles gallery,
and then click the Intense Reference thumbnail to apply the style.
23
In the second paragraph, near the end of the first sentence, select the word clumping
and apply the Emphasis style. Then, at the end of the sentence, apply the same style
to the word running. Notice that the application of these character styles does not
affect the Navigation pane contents.
Applying styles to text 101
24
Close the Navigation pane and the Styles pane. On the View tab, in the Zoom
group, click Multiple Pages to display both pages of the document in the window.
25
On the Design tab, in the Document Formatting gallery, point to each of the style
sets in the Built-In area to display a live preview of the effect of applying that style
set. Notice how the style set affects the appearance of the headings and text to
which you applied styles, and also how it affects the document length.
26
In the Document Formatting gallery, click the Basic (Elegant) thumbnail. Then on
the View tab, click Page Width to have a closer look at the changes. Notice that the
selected style set formats the font of the Title style as uppercase, and the font of the
Intense Reference style as “small caps” and underlined.
You can control the case of text by applying a style.
+
CLEAN UP Close the BambooInformation document, saving your changes if you
want to.
Changing a document’s theme
Every document you create is based on a template, and the look of the template is controlled by a theme. The theme is a combination of coordinated colors, fonts, and effects
that visually convey a certain tone. To change the look of a document, you can apply a
different theme by clicking the Themes button in the Document Formatting group on the
Design tab, and then making a selection in the Themes gallery.
102 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
3
The default installation of Word 2013 offers 21 themes to choose from.
If you like the background elements of one theme but not the colors or fonts, you can mix
and match theme elements. First apply the theme that most closely resembles the look you
want, and then select colors and fonts from the Theme Colors and Theme Fonts galleries in
the Document Formatting group.
In addition to colors and fonts, you can control more subtle elements such as paragraph
spacing and visual effects that are associated with a theme.
If you create a combination of theme elements that you would like to be able to use with
other documents, you can save the combination as a new theme. By saving the theme in
the default Document Themes folder, you make the theme available in the Themes gallery.
However, you don’t have to store custom themes in the Document Themes folder; you can
store them anywhere on your hard disk, on removable media, or in a network location. To
use a theme that is stored in a different location, click Browse For Themes at the bottom of
the Themes menu, locate the theme you want in the Choose Theme Or Themed Document
dialog box, and then click Open to apply that theme to the current document.
Changing a document’s theme 103
TIP The default Document Themes folder is stored within your user profile. On a default
freestanding installation, the folder is located at C:\Users\<user name>\AppData\Roaming­\
Microsoft\Templates\Document Themes. In a corporate environment with managed computer configurations, the user profile folder might be located elsewhere. To find the location of your Document Themes folder, click Save Current Theme at the bottom of the
Themes menu and then in the Save Current Theme dialog box, click the icon at the left end
of the address bar to display the full path to the Document Themes folder.
By default, Word applies the Office theme to all new, blank documents. In Word 2013, the
Office theme uses a primarily blue palette, the Calibri font for body text, and Calibri Light
for headings. You can make a different theme the default by applying the theme you want
and then clicking Set As Default in the Document Formatting group.
TIP If multiple people create corporate documents for your company, you can ensure that
everyone’s documents have a common look and feel by assembling a custom theme and
making it available to everyone. Use theme elements that reflect your corporate colors,
fonts, and visual style, and then save the theme to a central location or send the theme file
by email and instruct your colleagues to save it to the default Document Themes folder.
In this exercise, you’ll apply a theme to an existing document and change the colors and
fonts. Then you’ll save the new combination as a custom theme.
SET UP You need the BambooStyled document located in the Chapter03 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
On the Design tab, in the Document Formatting group, click the Themes button to
display the Themes menu.
2
Point to each thumbnail in turn to display a live preview of the theme. (Scroll through
the gallery so that you can explore all the themes.)
3
In the Themes gallery, click Facet to change the colors and fonts to those defined for
that theme. Notice that the font and character formatting controlled by the styles
and style set you applied to the document in the previous exercise do not change;
the title and first-level headings remain uppercase.
TIP If you have manually applied formatting to document content, the theme
does not override the manual formatting. To ensure that all document elements
are controlled by the theme, click Reset To The Default Style Set on the Document
Formatting menu.
104 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
4
In the Document Formatting group, click the Colors button to display the
Colors menu.
5
Point to any color palette that interests you to preview its effects on the document.
Notice that the first color in each palette is applied to the Title and Intense Reference
styles, and different shades of the third color are applied to the Subtitle, Heading 1,
and Heading 2 styles. Each color in the palette has a specific role assigned to it.
3
You can change the color palette of any theme.
6
In the Theme Colors gallery, click the Orange palette. The selected colors replace the
Facet colors, but nothing else in the document changes.
7
In the Document Formatting group, click the Fonts button to display the Theme
Fonts menu.
Changing a document’s theme 105
You can modify the theme by applying any font set.
8
Point to any font set that interests you to preview its effects on the document. Each
font set includes two fonts—the first is used for headings and the second for body
text. In some font sets, the heading and body fonts are the same.
9
In the Theme Fonts gallery, click Georgia. The selected fonts replace the Facet fonts,
but the colors and style elements remain the same.
Now that you’ve made some changes to the theme, let’s save the modified theme so
you can reuse it on other documents.
10
In the Document Formatting group, click the Themes button, and then at the
bottom of the menu, click Save Current Theme to display the contents of the
Document Themes folder in the Save Current Theme dialog box.
11
In the File name box, replace the suggested name with My Theme, and then
click Save.
106 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
12
Display the Themes menu. Notice that it now includes a Custom area that contains
your theme.
3
You can apply your custom theme to any document.
13
Click away from the menu to close it without making a selection.
+
CLEAN UP Close the BambooStyled document, saving your changes if you want to.
TIP If you want to delete the custom theme you created in this topic, open File Explorer,
navigate to the Document Themes folder, and delete the My Theme file, or, in Word, display
the Themes menu, right-click your custom theme, and click Delete. Note that the second
method removes the theme choice from the gallery but does not remove the theme file
from your Themes folder.
Changing a document’s theme 107
Manually changing the look of characters
Word 2013 makes changing the look of content in a styled document almost effortless. But
styles and themes can’t do everything. To be able to precisely control the look of your text,
you need to know how to manually change individual elements.
When you enter text in a document, it is displayed in a specific font. By default, the font
used for text in a new blank document is 11-point Calibri, but you can change the font of
any element at any time. The available fonts vary from one computer to another, depending
on the programs installed. Common fonts include Arial, Verdana, and Times New Roman.
You can vary the look of a font by changing the following attributes:
▪▪ Size Almost every font comes in a range of sizes, which are measured in points from
the top of letters that have parts that stick up (ascenders), such as h, to the bottom
of letters that have parts that drop down (descenders), such as p. A point is approximately 1/72 of an inch (about 0.04 centimeters).
▪▪ Style Almost every font has a range of font styles. The most common are regular
(or plain), italic, bold, and bold italic.
▪▪ Effects Fonts can be enhanced by applying effects, such as underlining, small capital
letters (small caps), or shadows.
▪▪ Color A palette of coordinated colors is available, and you can also specify custom
colors.
▪▪ Character spacing You can alter the spacing between characters by pushing them
apart or squeezing them together.
Although some attributes might cancel each other out, they are usually cumulative. For example, you might use a bold font style in various sizes and various shades of green to make
words stand out in a newsletter. Collectively, the font and its attributes are called character
formatting.
You apply character formatting from one of three locations:
▪▪ Mini Toolbar Several common formatting buttons are available on the Mini Toolbar
that appears when you select text.
The Mini Toolbar appears temporarily when you select text, becomes transparent when you
move the pointer away from the selected text, and then disappears entirely.
108 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
▪▪ Font group on the Home tab This group includes buttons for changing the font
and most of the font attributes you are likely to use.
The Font group.
▪▪ Font dialog box Less-commonly applied attributes such as small caps and special
underlining are available from the Font dialog box, which you display by clicking the
Font dialog box launcher.
Most font attributes are set from the Font page of the dialog box, except character spacing and
OpenType attributes, which are set on the Advanced page.
In addition to applying character formatting to change the look of characters, you can
apply predefined text effects to a selection to add more zing. Clicking the Text Effects
And Typography button in the Font group on the Home tab displays a gallery of effects
matched to the current theme colors.
Manually changing the look of characters 109
3
You can apply any predefined effect in the gallery to selected text,
or you can click options below the gallery and define a custom effect.
These effects are dramatic, so you’ll probably want to restrict their use to document titles
and similar elements to which you want to draw particular attention.
In this exercise, you’ll format the text in a document by changing its font, style, size, color,
and character spacing. You’ll experiment with highlighting and apply text effects. Then you’ll
return selected text to its original condition by clearing some formatting you no longer want.
SET UP You need the Guidelines document located in the Chapter03 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
2
In the second bullet point, click anywhere in the word natural.
On the Home tab, in the Font group, click the Underline button to underline the
word containing the cursor. Notice that you did not have to select the entire word.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+U to underline the active word or selection.
3
In the fourth bullet point, click anywhere in the word all, and then on the Quick
Access Toolbar, click the Repeat button. Word repeats the previous formatting
command. Again, although you did not select the entire word, it is now underlined.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+Y to repeat the previous command.
110 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
4
In the same bullet point, click anywhere in the word across. In the Font group, click
the Underline arrow and then click Thick underline (the third option) to apply a
thick underline to the word. Then click the next word, departments, and click the
Underline button (not the arrow). Notice that the thick underline has now been
assigned to the Underline button.
TIP You can choose an underline style and color from the Underline gallery or from
the Font dialog box.
5
Select the Employee Orientation heading, and leave the pointer in place to display
the Mini Toolbar.
6
On the Mini Toolbar, click the Bold button to apply bold formatting to the heading.
Notice that the active buttons on the Mini Toolbar and in the Font group on the
Home tab indicate the attributes applied to the selection.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+B to make the active word or selection bold.
The ribbon reflects the settings in the Mini Toolbar.
7
On the Mini Toolbar, click the Format Painter button.
TIP The Format Painter button is available in the Clipboard group on the Home tab.
Manually changing the look of characters 111
3
8
Move the pointer into the selection area to the left of the Guidelines subtitle,
and click the mouse button to apply the formatting of Employee Orientation to
Guidelines.
9
With Guidelines selected, on the Home tab, in the Font group, click the Font arrow
to expand the Font gallery.
Word comes with many fonts.
10
Scroll through the gallery of available fonts, press the letter I to move to the fonts
beginning with that letter, and then click Impact to apply that font to the Guidelines
heading.
TROUBLESHOOTING If Impact is not available, select any heavy font that catches your
attention.
11
In the Font group, click the Font Size arrow, and then in the list, click 20. The size of
the heading text decreases to 20 points.
112 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
TIP You can increase or decrease the font size in set increments by clicking the
Increase Font Size or Decrease Font Size buttons in the Font group or on the Mini
Toolbar, or by pressing Ctrl+> or Ctrl+<.
Next we’ll apply some font formatting that isn’t available from the ribbon.
12
With Guidelines still selected, click the Font dialog box launcher to open the Font
dialog box.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+Shift+F to display the Font dialog box.
13
14
On the Font page, in the Effects area, select the Small caps check box.
Click the Advanced tab to display character spacing and typographic features.
The Spacing option is currently set to Expanded.
TIP OpenType is a common scalable computer font format that incorporates options
to enhance the font’s ability to support advanced typographic capabilities and render
multiple languages gracefully.
Manually changing the look of characters 113
3
15
To the right of the Spacing list, in the By box, select 0.25 pt and enter 10 pt (the pt
stands for points). Then click OK. In the document, press the Home key to release
the selection. Notice that the manually formatted text appears in small capital letters
with the spacing between the characters expanded by 10 points.
You can expand and contract the spacing between letters to create different effects.
16
Select Employee Orientation. In the Font group, click the Font Color arrow, and then
in the Theme Colors palette, click the top green swatch (Green, Accent 6) to change
the color of the selected words.
TIP To apply the Font Color button’s current color, you can simply click the button
(not its arrow). If you want to apply a color that is not shown in the Theme Colors or
Standard Colors palette, click More Colors. In the Colors dialog box, click the color
you want in the honeycomb on the Standard page, or click the color gradient or enter values for a color on the Custom page.
17
Select Community Service Committee. In the Font group, click the Text Effects
and Typography button and then, in the gallery, point to each of the thumbnails
to preview its effect on the selected heading.
18
Below the gallery, click Outline, and then in the Theme Colors palette, click the
Green, Accent 6 square to outline the letters in the same color you applied to
Employee Orientation.
This is interesting, but let’s get a little fancier.
19
Click the Text Effects and Typography button, click Shadow, and then click Shadow
Options to display the Text Effects page of the Format Text Effects pane.
114 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
3
The Format Text Effects pane includes the Text Fill & Outline page and the Text Effects page.
20
In the Shadow settings, click the Presets button, and then in the Outer section of the
Presets gallery, click the thumbnail at the right end of the top row.
21
Click the Color button, and then in the Theme Colors palette, click the bottom green
swatch (Green, Accent 6, Darker 50%) to create a dark green shadow.
22
At the top of the Format Text Effects pane, click the Text Fill & Outline button to
display that page. Then click the Text Fill heading to expand those settings.
You can format characters with a solid or gradient fill.
Manually changing the look of characters 115
23
With Solid fill selected, click the Color button, and then in the Theme Colors palette,
click the top green swatch (Green, Accent 6).
24
Click the Text Outline heading to expand those settings. With Solid line selected,
click the Color button, and then in the Theme Colors palette, click the second green
swatch from the bottom (Green, Accent 6, Darker 25%). You have now applied three
text effects to the selected text using three shades of the same green. Notice that
there are many other options for formatting the text outline.
You can format characters with a solid or gradient outline of varying widths.
25
Close the Format Text Effects pane and click away from the selected heading to
review the effects of your changes.
26
In the first bullet point, select the phrase the concept of service. On the Mini
Toolbar, click the Text Highlight Color arrow, and click the Bright Green swatch in
116 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
the top row. The selected phrase is now highlighted in green, and the Text Highlight
Color button shows bright green as its active color.
TIP If you click the Text Highlight Color button without first making a selection, the
shape of the mouse pointer changes to a highlighter that you can drag across text.
Click the button again, or press Esc, to turn off the highlighter.
27
In the fifth bullet point, double-click the word brainstorming. Hold down the Ctrl
key, double-click planning, and then double-click leadership.
28
In the Font group, click the Change Case button, and then click UPPERCASE.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Shift+F3 to change the case of the selected text. Press
Shift+F3 multiple times to move through the case options (Sentence case, UPPERCASE, lowercase, and Capitalize Each Word). Note that the options vary based on the
selected text. If the selection ends in a period, Word does not include the Capitalize
Each Word option in the rotation. If the selection does not end in a period, Word
does not include Sentence case in the rotation.
29
In the document, click away from the bullet point to release the selection and review
the results. The selected words now appear in all capital letters.
Instead of retyping, you can have Word change the case of words.
TIP To remove all styles and formatting other than highlighting from selected text,
click the Clear Formatting button in the Font group. To remove only manually applied
formatting (and not styles) press Ctrl+Spacebar. To remove highlighting, select the
highlighted text and then in the Text Highlight Color menu, click No Color.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Guidelines document, saving your changes if you want to.
Manually changing the look of characters 117
3
Character formatting and case considerations
The way you use case and character formatting in a document can influence its visual
impact on your readers. Used judiciously, case and character formatting can make a
plain document look attractive and professional, but excessive use can make it look
amateurish and detract from the message. For example, using too many fonts in the
same document is the mark of inexperience, so don’t use more than two or three.
Bear in mind that lowercase letters tend to recede, so using all uppercase (capital) letters can be useful for titles and headings or for certain kinds of emphasis. However,
large blocks of uppercase letters are tiring to the eye.
TIP Where do the terms uppercase and lowercase come from? Until the advent of
computers, individual characters made of lead were assembled to form the words that
would appear on a printed page. The characters were stored alphabetically in cases,
with the capital letters in the upper case and the small letters in the lower case.
Manually changing the look of paragraphs
A paragraph is created by entering text and then pressing the Enter key. A paragraph can
contain one word, one sentence, or multiple sentences. You can change the look of a paragraph by changing its indentation, alignment, and line spacing, as well as the space before
and after it. You can also put borders around it and shade its background. Collectively, the
settings you use to vary the look of a paragraph are called paragraph formatting.
In Word, you don’t define the width of paragraphs and the length of pages by defining the
area occupied by the text; instead you define the size of the white space—the left, right,
top, and bottom margins—around the text. You click the Margins button in the Page Setup
group on the Page Layout tab to define these margins, either for the whole document or
for sections of the document.
SEE ALSO For information about setting margins, see “Previewing and adjusting page lay-
out” in Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute documents.” For information about sections, see “Controlling what appears on each page” in the same chapter.
Although the left and right margins are set for a whole document or section, you can
vary the position of the paragraphs between the margins. The quickest way to indent a
paragraph from the left is to click the Increase Indent button; clicking the Decrease Indent
button has the opposite effect.
118 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
TIP You cannot increase or decrease the indent beyond the margins by using the
Increase Indent and Decrease Indent buttons. If you do need to extend an indent
beyond the margins, you can do so by setting negative indentation measurements
in the Paragraph dialog box.
Another way to control the indentation of lines is by dragging markers on the horizontal
ruler to indicate where each line of text starts and ends. You can set four individual indent
markers for each paragraph:
▪▪ First Line Indent The paragraph’s first line of text begins at this marker.
▪▪ Hanging Indent The paragraph’s second and subsequent lines of text begin at this
marker at the left end of the ruler.
▪▪ Left Indent The left side of the paragraph aligns with this marker.
▪▪ Right Indent The paragraph text wraps when it reaches this marker at the right end
of the ruler.
You display the horizontal and vertical rulers by selecting the Ruler check box in the Show
group on the View tab.
You can manually change a paragraph’s indentation by moving the indent markers on the
horizontal ruler.
Setting a right indent indicates where the lines in a paragraph should end, but sometimes
you might want to specify where only one line should end. For example, you might want
to break a title after a specific word to make it look balanced on the page. You can end an
individual line by inserting a text wrapping break (more commonly known as a line break).
After positioning the cursor where you want the break to occur, click the Breaks button in
the Page Setup group on the Page Layout tab, and then click Text Wrapping. Word indicates the line break with a bent arrow (visible when hidden formatting symbols are shown).
Inserting a line break does not start a new paragraph, so when you apply paragraph formatting to a line of text that ends with a line break, the formatting is applied to the entire
paragraph, not only to that line.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Shift+Enter to insert a line break.
Manually changing the look of paragraphs 119
3
You can also determine the positioning of a paragraph between the left and right margins
by changing its alignment. There are four paragraph alignment options:
▪▪ Align Left Aligns each line of the paragraph at the left margin, with a ragged
right edge
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+L to left-align a paragraph.
▪▪ Center Aligns the center of each line in the paragraph between the left and right
margins, with ragged left and right edges
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+E to center-align a paragraph.
▪▪ Align Right Aligns each line of the paragraph at the right margin, with a ragged
left edge
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+R to right-align a paragraph.
▪▪ Justify Aligns each line between the margins and modifies the spacing within the
line to create even left and right edges
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+J to justify a paragraph.
TIP If you know that you want to create a centered paragraph, you don’t have to type the
text and then align the paragraph. You can use the Click And Type feature to create appropriately aligned text. Move the pointer to the center of a blank area of the page, and when
the pointer’s shape changes to an I-beam with centered text attached, double-click to insert
the cursor in a centered paragraph. Similarly, you can double-click at the left edge of the
page to enter left-aligned text and at the right edge to enter right-aligned text.
You can align lines of text in different locations across the page by using tab stops. The easiest way to set tab stops is to use the horizontal ruler. By default, Word sets left-aligned tab
stops every half inch (1.27 centimeters). To set a custom tab stop, start by clicking the Tab
button located at the left end of the ruler until the type of tab stop you want appears.
The tab options.
120 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
You have the following options:
▪▪ Left Tab Aligns the left end of the text with the tab stop
▪▪ Center Tab Aligns the center of the text with the tab stop
▪▪ Right Tab Aligns the right end of the text with the tab stop
▪▪ Decimal Tab Aligns the decimal point in the text (usually a numeric value) with the
tab stop
▪▪ Bar Tab Draws a vertical line at the position of the tab stop
After selecting the type of tab stop you want to set, simply click the ruler where you want
the tab stop to be. Word then removes any default tab stops to the left of the one you set.
The ruler displays the custom tab stops for the selected paragraph.
To change the position of an existing custom tab stop, drag it to the left or right on the
ruler. To delete a custom tab stop, drag it away from the ruler. Or, if you find it too difficult
to “grab” the tab stops on the ruler, you can set, clear, align, and format tab stops from the
Tab dialog box, which you open by clicking the Tabs button at the bottom of the Paragraph
dialog box. You might also work from this dialog box if you want to use tab leaders—visible
marks such as dots or dashes connecting the text before the tab with the text after it. For
example, tab leaders are useful in a table of contents to carry the eye from the text to the
page number.
To align the text to the right of the cursor with the next tab stop, press the Tab key. The text
is then aligned on the tab stop according to its type. For example, if you set a center tab
stop, pressing Tab moves the text so that its center is aligned with the tab stop.
Manually changing the look of paragraphs 121
3
You can specify the alignment and tab leader for each tab.
To make it obvious where one paragraph ends and another begins, you can add space between them. There are several methods for adjusting paragraph spacing within a document:
▪▪ To set the spacing for all paragraphs in a document, choose from the Paragraph
Spacing options in the Document Formatting group on the Design tab.
Each paragraph spacing option controls space around and within the paragraph.
122 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
▪▪ To set the spacing for only selected paragraphs, adjust the Spacing Before and
Spacing After settings in the Paragraph group on the Page Layout tab.
▪▪ To make a quick adjustment to selected paragraphs, click the paragraph spacing commands on the Line And Paragraph Spacing menu that is available in the Paragraph
group on the Home tab.
3
You can set internal line spacing or add or remove external space from this menu.
When you want to make several adjustments to the alignment, indentation, and spacing of
selected paragraphs, it is sometimes quicker to use the Paragraph dialog box than to click
buttons and drag markers. Clicking the Paragraph dialog box launcher on either the Home
tab or the Page Layout tab opens the Paragraph dialog box.
The Indents And Spacing page of the Paragraph dialog box.
Manually changing the look of paragraphs 123
You can do a lot with the options in the Paragraph dialog box, but to make a paragraph
really stand out, you might want to put a border around it or shade its background. (For
real drama, you can do both.) Clicking the Border arrow in the Paragraph group on the
Home tab displays a menu of border options. You can select a predefined border from
the Borders menu, or click Borders And Shading at the bottom of the menu to display the
Borders And Shading dialog box, in which you can select the style, color, width, and location of the border.
You can customize many aspects of the border. By clicking Options you can set the specific distance
between the paragraph text and border.
In this exercise, you’ll change text alignment and indentation, insert and modify tab stops,
modify paragraph and line spacing, and add borders and shading to paragraphs.
SET UP You need the Cottage document located in the Chapter03 practice file folder
to complete this exercise. Open the document, click the Show/Hide ¶ button to turn on
the display of formatting marks, and then follow the steps.
1
On the View tab, in the Show group, select the Ruler check box. Then adjust the
zoom level to display most or all of the paragraphs in the document.
124 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
TIP In the following steps, we give measurements in inches. If you’re using a different
measurement unit, you can substitute approximate measurements in those units. If
you want to change the measurement units Word uses, display the Advanced page of
the Word Options dialog box. Then in the Display area, click the units you want in the
Show Measurements In Units Of list, and click OK.
First we’ll modify the paragraph formatting.
2
Select the first two paragraphs (Welcome! and the next paragraph). Then on the
Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Center button to center the lines
between the margins.
TIP When applying paragraph formatting, you don’t have to select the entire
paragraph.
3
In the second paragraph, click to the left of your. Then on the Page Layout tab, in
the Page Setup group, click the Breaks button, and click Text Wrapping. Notice that
Word inserts a line break character and moves the part of the paragraph that follows
that character to the next line.
The bent arrow after cottage indicates that you have inserted a line break.
SEE ALSO For information about page and section breaks, see “Controlling what
appears on each page” in Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute documents.”
4
Click anywhere in the third paragraph, and then on the Home tab, in the Paragraph
group, click the Justify button. Word inserts space between the words in the lines of
the paragraph so that the edges of the paragraph are flush against both the left and
right margins.
5
With the cursor still in the third paragraph, on the horizontal ruler, drag the Left
Indent marker (the rectangle at the left margin) to the 0.5 inch mark. The First
Line Indent and Hanging Indent markers (the triangles) move with the Left Indent
marker.
Manually changing the look of paragraphs 125
3
6
At the right end of the ruler, drag the Right Indent marker (the triangle at the right
margin) to the 6 inch mark. The paragraph is now indented a half inch in from each
of the side margins.
Left and right indents are often used to make paragraphs such as quotations stand out.
7
Click in the Be careful paragraph, and then in the Paragraph group, click the
Increase Indent button.
Now we’ll override the default tab stops.
8
Select the Pillows, Blankets, Towels, and Dish towels paragraphs. Ensure that the
Left Tab marker is active at the top of the vertical ruler (if it’s not, click the tab stop
marker until the Left Tab stop appears), click the ruler at the 2 inch mark to insert a
custom left-aligned tab at that location on the ruler and void the default tab stops
prior to that location.
9
In the Pillows paragraph, click to the left of There, press Backspace to delete the
space, and then press the Tab key to align the description with the tab stop. Repeat
the process to insert tabs in each of the next three paragraphs. The part of each
paragraph that follows the colon is now aligned at the 2-inch mark, producing more
space than you need.
10
Select the four paragraphs containing tabs, and on the ruler, drag the custom Left
Tab stop from the 2 inch mark to the 1.25 inch mark.
TROUBLESHOOTING If your attempts to drag the tab stop result in placing an addi-
tional tab stop on the ruler, drag the extra tab stop away from the ruler to delete it.
11
With the four paragraphs still selected, on the ruler, drag the Hanging Indent marker
to the tab stop at the 1.25 inch mark (the Left Indent marker moves with it) to cause
the second line of the paragraphs to start in the same location as the first line. Then
press Home to release the selection so you can review the results.
126 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
You can use hanging indents to create table-like effects.
12
13
At the bottom of the document, select the three paragraphs containing dollar
amounts. At the top of the vertical ruler, click the Tab button three times to display
the Decimal Tab button, and then click the ruler at the 3 inch mark.
In each of the three paragraphs, replace the space to the left of the dollar sign with a
tab to align the prices on the decimal points.
Next, we’ll adjust the line spacing.
14
Select the Pillows paragraph, hold down the Ctrl key, and then select the Blankets,
Towels, Limousine winery tour, and In-home massage paragraphs.
15
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Line and Paragraph Spacing
button, and then click Remove Space After Paragraph. Then press the Home key
to review the results. Now only the last paragraphs of the two lists have extra space
after them.
Removing space from between list paragraphs makes them easier to read.
And finally, we’ll apply paragraph borders.
16
Move to the top of the document, and click anywhere in the Please take a few
minutes paragraph. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Border
arrow, and then click Outside Borders.
Manually changing the look of paragraphs 127
3
17
Click anywhere in the Be careful paragraph, click the Border arrow, and then at the
bottom of the list, click Borders and Shading to display the Borders page of the
Borders and Shading dialog box.
18
In the Setting area, click the 3-D icon to select that border style. Scroll through the
Style list and click the fourth style from the bottom (the wide gradient border). Then
click the Color arrow, and in the top row of the Theme Colors palette, click the Red,
Accent 2 swatch.
TIP If you want only one, two, or three sides of the selected paragraphs to have a
border, click the buttons surrounding the image in the Preview area to remove the
border from the other sides.
19
In the Borders and Shading dialog box, click the Shading tab.
You can use the options on this page to format the background of the selected paragraph.
20
Click the Fill arrow, and then in the Theme Colors palette, click the lightest-colored
square in the red column (Red, Accent 2, Lighter 80%). Then click OK to close the
Borders and Shading dialog box. A border surrounds the paragraph, and a light red
color fills its background. The border stretches all the way to the right margin.
128 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
21
To achieve a more balanced look, on the Page Layout tab (not the Home tab), in
the Paragraph group, enter .5” in the Right box and press Enter. Then on the Home
tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Center button. The paragraph is now centered
between the page margins and within its surrounding box.
22
In the Paragraph group, click the Show/Hide ¶ button to hide the formatting marks
to better display the results of your work.
3
A combination of a border and shading really makes text stand out. Don’t overdo it!
+
CLEAN UP Close the Cottage document, saving your changes if you want to.
Manually changing the look of paragraphs 129
Finding and replacing formatting
In addition to searching for words and phrases in the Find And Replace dialog box,
you can use the dialog box to search for a specific character format, paragraph format,
or style, and replace it with a different one.
SEE ALSO For information about finding and replacing text, see “Finding and replacing
text” in Chapter 2, “Enter, edit, and proofread text.”
To search for a specific format and replace it with a different format:
1 On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click the Replace button to display the
Replace tab of the Find and Replace dialog box, and then click More to expand
the dialog box.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+H to display the Replace tab of the Find And
Replace dialog box.
2 With the cursor in the Find what box, in the Replace section, click Format, and on
the Format menu, click either Font to open the Find Font dialog box, Paragraph
to open the Find Paragraph dialog box, or Style to open the Find Style dialog box.
3 In the dialog box, click the format or style you want to find, and then click OK.
4 Click in the Replace With text box, click Format, click Font, Paragraph, or Style,
click the format or style you want to substitute for the original format or style,
and then click OK.
5 Click Find Next to search for the first occurrence of the format or style, and
then click Replace to replace that one occurrence or Replace All to replace
every occurrence.
Creating and modifying lists
Lists are paragraphs that start with a character and are formatted with a hanging indent so
that the characters stand out on the left end of each list item. Fortunately, Word takes care
of the formatting of lists for you. You simply indicate the type of list you want to create.
When the order of items is not important—for example, for a list of people or supplies—
a bulleted list is the best choice. And when the order is important—for example, for the
steps in a procedure—you will probably want to create a numbered list.
You can format an existing set of paragraphs as a list or create the list as you enter information into the document.
130 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
To format a new list item as you enter content, start the paragraph as follows:
▪▪ Bulleted list Enter * (an asterisk) at the beginning of a paragraph, and then press
the Spacebar or the Tab key before entering the list item text.
▪▪ Numbered list Enter 1. (the number 1 followed by a period) at the beginning of
a paragraph, and then press the Spacebar or the Tab key before entering the list
item text.
When you start a list in this fashion, Word automatically formats it as a bulleted or numbered list. When you press Enter to start a new item, Word continues the formatting to the
new paragraph. Typing items and pressing Enter adds subsequent bulleted or numbered
items. To end the list, press Enter twice; or click the Bullets arrow or Numbering arrow in the
Paragraph group on the Home tab, and then in the library, click None.
TIP If you want to start a paragraph with an asterisk or number but don’t want to format
the paragraph as a bulleted or numbered list, click the AutoCorrect Options button that
appears after Word changes the formatting, and then in the list, click the appropriate Undo
option. You can also click the Undo button on the Quick Access Toolbar.
If you want to create a list that has multiple levels, start off by creating the list in the usual
way. Then when you want the next list item to be a level lower (indented more), press the
Tab key at the beginning of that paragraph, before you enter the lower-level list item text. If
you want the next list item to be a level higher (indented less), press Shift+Tab at the beginning of the paragraph. In the case of a bulleted list, Word changes the bullet character for
each item level. In the case of a numbered list, Word changes the type of numbering used,
based on a predefined numbering scheme.
If you create a set of paragraphs containing a series of items and then decide you want to
turn the set into a list, you can select the paragraphs and then click the Bullets, Numbering,
or Multilevel List button in the Paragraph group on the Home tab.
After you create a list, you can modify, format, and customize the list as follows:
▪▪ You can move items around in a list, insert new items, or delete unwanted items. If
the list is numbered, Word automatically updates the numbers.
▪▪ You can modify the indentation of the list by dragging the indent markers on the
horizontal ruler. You can change both the overall indentation of the list and the relationship of the first line to the other lines.
SEE ALSO For information about paragraph indentation, see “Manually changing the
look of paragraphs” earlier in this chapter.
Creating and modifying lists 131
3
▪▪ For a bulleted list, you can sort list items into ascending or descending order by clicking the Sort button in the Paragraph group on the Home tab.
▪▪ For a bulleted list, you can change the bullet symbol by clicking the Bullets arrow in
the Paragraph group and making a selection from the Bullets gallery. You can also
define a custom bullet (even a picture bullet) by clicking Define New Bullet.
▪▪ For a numbered list, you can change the number style by clicking the Numbering
­ rrow in the Paragraph group and making a selection from the Numbering gallery.
a
You can also define a custom style by clicking Define New Number Format.
▪▪ For a numbered list, you can start a list or part of a list at a predefined number by
clicking Set Numbering Value in the Numbering gallery and then entering the number you want in the Set Numbering Value dialog box.
You can start or restart a numbered list at any number.
▪▪ For a multilevel list, you can change the numbering pattern or bullets by clicking
the Multilevel List button in the Paragraph group and then clicking the pattern you
want, or you can define a custom pattern by clicking Define New Multilevel List.
In this exercise, you’ll create a bulleted list and a numbered list and then modify the lists in
various ways.
SET UP You need the Association document located in the Chapter03 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, display formatting marks and
­rulers, and then follow the steps.
1
Select the first four paragraphs below The rules fall into four categories, and then
on the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Bullets button to format the
selected paragraphs as a bulleted list.
2
With the paragraphs still selected, in the Paragraph group, click the Bullets arrow
to display the Bullets menu.
132 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
3
The Bullets menu offers several predefined bullet choices.
3
In the Bullets gallery, point to each bullet character under Bullet Library to display a
live preview in the document, and then click the bullet composed of four diamonds
to change the bullet character that begins each item in the selected list.
4
Select the two paragraphs below the Definitions heading, and then in the Paragraph
group, click the Numbering button to number the selected paragraphs sequentially.
You can choose the bullet characters and numbering style that suit your document.
Creating and modifying lists 133
5
Select the first four paragraphs below the General Rules heading, and then click the
Numbering button to format the paragraphs as a second numbered list. Notice that
the new list starts with the number 1.
6
Select the next three paragraphs, and then in the Paragraph group, click the Bullets
button to format the paragraphs as a bulleted list. Notice that Word uses the bullet
symbol you specified earlier.
The new bulleted list is meant to be a subset of the preceding numbered list item
and should be indented.
7
With the three bulleted items still selected, in the Paragraph group, click the Increase
Indent button to move the bulleted paragraphs to the right. Notice that because you
selected a custom bullet, the bullet character doesn’t change when the list items are
indented.
TIP You can also adjust the indent level of a selected bulleted list by dragging the
Left Indent marker on the ruler to the left or right. You can adjust the space between
the bullets and their text by dragging only the Hanging Indent marker.
8
Select the remaining three paragraphs, and then click the Numbering button.
Word restarts the numbered list from 1 and an AutoCorrect Options button appears temporarily
to the left of the list items.
134 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
You want the numbered list to continue the sequence of the previous numbered list.
9
Click the AutoCorrect Options button, and then click Continue Numbering.
TROUBLESHOOTING If the AutoCorrect Options button disappears, right-click the
number preceding the No Large Dogs list item, and then click Continue Numbering.
10
In the No large dogs numbered item, click to the left of Seeing, press Enter, and
then press Tab. Notice that Word first creates a new number 6 item and renumbers
all subsequent items. However, when you press Tab to make this a second-level item,
Word changes the 6 to an a, indents the item, and restores the original numbers to
the subsequent items.
11
Press the End key, and then press Enter to start a new list item. Enter The Board
12
Press Enter, and then press Shift+Tab. In the new first-level item, enter All pets must
reside within their Owners’ Apartments. Notice that the General Rules list is
now organized hierarchically.
reserves the right to make exceptions to this rule.
Word takes the work out of creating hierarchical lists.
13
Select the three bulleted paragraphs, and then in the Paragraph group, click the Sort
button to open the Sort Text dialog box.
Creating and modifying lists 135
3
Formatting text as you type
The Word list capabilities are only one example of the program’s ability to intuit how
you want to format an element based on what you type. You can learn more about
these and other AutoFormatting options by exploring the AutoCorrect dialog box,
which you can open from the Proofing page of the Word Options dialog box.
The AutoFormat As You Type page shows the options Word implements by default,
including bulleted and numbered lists.
You can select and clear options to control automatic formatting behavior.
One interesting option in this dialog box is Border Lines. When this check box is selected, typing three consecutive hyphens (-) or three consecutive underscores (_) and
pressing Enter draws a single line across the page. Typing three consecutive equal signs
(=) draws a double line, and typing three consecutive tildes (~) draws a zigzag line.
136 Chapter 3 Modify the structure and appearance of text
3
You can sort list items in ascending or descending order.
14
With the Ascending option selected, click OK to reorder the bulleted list items in
ascending alphabetical order.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Association document, saving your changes if you want to.
Key points
▪▪ Styles and style sets make it simple to apply combinations of character and paragraph
formatting to give your documents structure and a professional look.
▪▪ The same document can look very different depending on the theme applied to it.
Colors, fonts, and effects can be combined to create just the look you want.
▪▪ You can format characters with an almost limitless number of combinations of font,
size, font style, and effect. For best results, resist the temptation to use more than a
handful of combinations.
▪▪ You can change the look of paragraphs by varying their indentation, spacing, and
alignment and by setting tab stops and applying borders and shading. Use these
formatting options judiciously to create a balanced, uncluttered look.
▪▪ Bulleted and numbered lists are a great way to present information in an easy-toread, easy-to-understand format. If the built-in bulleted and numbered formats
don’t provide what you need, you can define your own formats.
Key points 137
Chapter at a glance
Organize Present information in columns,
page 140
Create Create tabbed lists,
page 147
Present Format Present information in tables,
page 149
Format tables,
page 161
Organize information in
columns and tables
4
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Present information in columns.
Create tabbed lists.
Present information in tables.
Format tables.
Information in documents is most commonly presented as paragraphs of text. To make a
text-heavy document more legible, you can arrange the text in two or more columns, or
you can display information in a table. For example, flowing text in multiple columns is a
common practice in newsletters, flyers, and brochures; and presenting information in tables
is common in reports.
When you need to present facts and figures in a document, using a table is often more
efficient than describing the data in a paragraph, particularly when the data consists of numeric values. Tables make the data easier to read and understand. A small amount of data
can be displayed in simple columns separated by tabs, which creates a tabbed list. A larger
amount of data, or more complex data, is better presented in a table, which is a structure of
rows and columns, frequently with row and column headings.
In this chapter, you’ll first create and modify columns of text. Then you’ll create a simple
tabbed list. Finally, you’ll create tables from scratch and from existing text, and format a
table in various ways.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter04 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
139
Presenting information in columns
By default, Microsoft Word 2013 displays text in one column that spans the width of the
page between the left and right margins. You can specify that text be displayed in two,
three, or more columns to create layouts like those used in newspapers and magazines.
When you format text to flow in columns, the text fills the first column on each page and
then moves to the top of the next column. When all the columns on one page are full, the
text moves to the next page. You can manually indicate where you want the text within
each column to end.
IMPORTANT Assistive devices such as screen readers do not always correctly process text that is
arranged in columns. Consider the limitations of these devices if you intend for your document to
meet accessibility requirements.
The Columns gallery in the Page Setup group on the Page Layout tab displays several standard options for dividing text into columns. You can choose one, two, or three columns of
equal width or two columns of unequal width. If the standard options don’t suit your needs,
you can specify the number and width of columns. The number of columns is limited by the
width and margins of the page. Each column must be at least a half inch (or 0.27 centimeter) wide.
The Columns gallery displays the predefined column options.
No matter how you set up the columns initially, you can change the layout or column
widths at any time.
You can format an entire document or a section of a document in columns. When you select
a section of text and format it in columns, Word inserts section breaks at the beginning and
140 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
end of the selected text to delineate the area in which the columnar formatting is applied.
Within the columnar text, you can insert column breaks to specify where you want to end
one column and start another. Section breaks and column breaks are visible when you display hidden formatting marks in the document.
SEE ALSO For information about formatting marks, see ”Viewing documents in different
ways” in Chapter 1, “Explore Microsoft Word 2013.”
TIP You can format the content within a specific section of a document independently of
other sections. For example, you can place a wide table in its own section and format the
page orientation of that section as landscape to accommodate the wider table. For more
information about sections, see “Controlling what appears on each page” in Chapter 6,
“Preview, print, and distribute documents.”
You apply character and paragraph formatting to columnar text in the same way you do to
any other text. Here are some formatting tips for columnar text:
▪▪ When presenting text in columns, you can justify the paragraphs to give the page a
clean and organized appearance.
SEE ALSO For information about justifying paragraphs, see “Manually changing the
look of paragraphs” in Chapter 3, “Modify the structure and appearance of text.”
▪▪ To more completely fill columns with text and lessen the amount of white space
within a line, you can have Word hyphenate the text and break longer words into
­syllables.
When hyphenating a document, you can specify whether you want
to allow stacked hyphens at the ends of consecutive lines of a paragraph.
Presenting information in columns 141
4
In this exercise, you’ll lay out the text in one section of a document in columns. You’ll justify
and hyphenate the text in the columns, and change the column spacing. You’ll then break a
column at a specific location.
SET UP You need the RoomPlanner document located in the Chapter04 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, display formatting marks and the
rulers, and then follow the steps.
1
Select the paragraphs that are between the empty paragraph marks—from the
paragraph that begins with Take a look through the paragraph that ends with
credit cards.
TIP If you want to format an entire document with the same number of columns,
you can simply click anywhere in the document—you don’t have to select the text.
2
On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click the Columns button, and
then in the Columns gallery, click Three to flow the selected text into three columns.
3
Press Ctrl+Home to return to the top of the document. Notice that a section break
precedes the columns.
A continuous section break changes the formatting of the subsequent text but keeps it on the
same page.
Now let’s align the content with the column edges to make it easier to read.
142 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
4
Click at the beginning of the first paragraph after the heading (the paragraph that
begins with With the Room Planner). Then press Shift+Ctrl+End to select the
content from that point to the end of the document.
5
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Justify button. Notice that Word
adjusts the spacing between words to align all the paragraphs in the document with
both the left and right margins.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+J to justify paragraphs. For more information about
keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end of this book.
There is too much white space between the columns; let’s widen the columns so
more content fits within each.
6
Scroll through the document to display the section break and columns, and then click
anywhere in the first column to display the column margins on the horizontal ruler.
On the ruler, the indent markers show the indentation of the active column.
TIP If the rulers aren’t turned on, select the Ruler check box in the Show group on
the View tab.
Presenting information in columns 143
4
7
On the Page Layout tab, at the bottom of the Columns gallery, click More Columns
to open the Columns dialog box. Notice that the spacing between columns is set to
the default distance of a half inch.
Because the Equal Column Width check box is selected, you can
adjust the width and spacing of only the first column.
TIP To separate the columns with vertical lines, select the Line Between check box. If
you need to fit a greater amount of content on a page, you can decrease the space
between columns and insert a vertical line to more clearly denote the separation.
8
In the Width and spacing area, in the Spacing box for column 1, enter or select 0.2”.
Notice that the Spacing measurement for column 2 also changes to 0.2”, and the
width of all three columns increases to 1.99”. The columns in the Preview thumbnail
reflect the new settings.
9
Click the Apply to arrow. Notice that you can choose to apply the change to the
entire section, the entire document, or from the current cursor location to the end
of the document.
10
In the Apply to box, click This section. Then click OK to apply the changes to the
columns in the document.
144 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
Wider columns display more content and generally look neater on the page.
11
In the Page Setup group, click the Hyphenation button, and then click Automatic to
hyphenate the text of the document.
Let’s make the note stand out from the surrounding text.
12
13
In the third column, click anywhere in the NOTE paragraph.
On the horizontal ruler, drag the Hanging Indent marker for the third column one
mark (0.125 in.) to the right to offset the note from the surrounding text by indenting
all but the first line of the paragraph.
You can change the indentation of individual paragraphs within a column.
Presenting information in columns 145
4
14
Scroll through the document to display the bottom of page 1. In the first column on
page 1, click at the beginning of the Take your Room Planner home paragraph.
15
In the Page Setup group, click the Breaks button, and then click Column to insert a
column break and move the text that follows to the top of the second column.
16
At the bottom of the third column on page 1, click at the beginning of the If
you’re not sure paragraph, and then on the Quick Access Toolbar, click the
Repeat Insertion button to insert another column break and move the text that
follows to the top of the first column on page 2.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+Y to repeat the previous action.
Consider manually breaking columns to even out the text at the end of a page.
+
CLEAN UP Close the RoomPlanner document, saving your changes if you want to.
146 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
Creating tabbed lists
If you have a relatively small amount of data to present, you might choose to display it in a
tabbed list, which arranges text in simple columns separated by tabs. You can align the text
within the columns by using left, right, centered, or decimal tab stops.
SEE ALSO For more information about setting tab stops, see “Manually changing the look
of paragraphs” in Chapter 3, “Modify the structure and appearance of text.”
When entering text in a tabbed list, inexperienced Word users have a tendency to press the
Tab key multiple times to align the columns of the list with the default tab stops. If you do
this, you have no control over the column widths, and changing the text between two tabs
might misalign the next section of text. To be able to fine-tune the columns, you need to
set custom tab stops rather than relying on the default ones.
When setting up a tabbed list, enter the text and press Tab only once between the items
that you want to appear in separate columns. Apply any necessary formatting so that you
can accurately set the column width. Then set the custom tab stops. Set left, right, centered,
and decimal tab stops to control the alignment of the column content, or set a bar tab to
visually separate list columns with a vertical line. By setting the tabs in order from left to
right, you can check the alignment of the text within each column as you go.
TIP It’s more efficient to make all character and paragraph formatting changes to the text
before setting tab stops. Otherwise, you might have to adjust the tab stops after applying
the formatting.
In this exercise, you’ll enter text separated by tabs, format the text, and then set custom tab
stops to create a tabbed list.
SET UP You need the ConsultationA document located in the Chapter04 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, display formatting marks and the
rulers, and then follow the steps.
1
2
Press Ctrl+End to move the cursor to the blank line at the end of the document.
Enter Location, press Tab, enter Discount Applies, press Tab, enter Hourly Rate,
and then press Enter.
Creating tabbed lists 147
4
3
Add three more lines to the list by typing the following text, pressing the Tab and
Enter keys where indicated. The tab characters push the items to the next default
tab stop, but because some items are longer than others, they do not line up.
In home Tab No Tab $50.00 Enter
Phone Tab Yes Tab $35.00 Enter
In store Tab Yes Tab $40.00 Enter
In a tabbed list, it’s important to press the Tab key only one time between columns.
4
Select the first line of the tabbed list, and then on the Mini Toolbar that appears,
click the Bold button to format the items as the column headings.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+B to apply bold.
5
6
Select all four lines of the tabbed list, including the headings.
7
In the Paragraph group, in the Spacing area, enter or select 0 pt in the After box.
On the Page Layout tab, in the Paragraph group, in the Indent area, enter or select
0.5” in the Left box.
148 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
8
Click the Tab button at the top of the vertical ruler until the Center Tab button is
active. (You will probably have to click only once.) Then click the 2.5 inch mark on the
horizontal ruler to set a center-aligned tab stop and center the items in the second
column of the tabbed list at that position.
9
Click the Tab button one time to activate the Right Tab button.
10
With the Right Tab button active, click the horizontal ruler at the 4.5 inch mark to set
a right-aligned tab stop and right-align the items in the third column of the tabbed
list at that position.
11
Press Home to move the cursor to the beginning of the tabbed list, and then hide
the formatting marks to display the results. Notice that the tabbed list now resembles
a simple table.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+* to toggle the display of formatting marks.
You have created a simple table-like layout with just a few clicks.
+
CLEAN UP Close the ConsultationA document, saving your changes if you want to.
Presenting information in tables
A table is a structure of vertical columns and horizontal rows. Each column and each row
can be identified by a heading, although some tables have only column headings or only
row headings. The box at the junction of each column and row is a cell in which you can
store data (text or numeric information).
You can create tables in a Word document in the following ways:
▪▪ To create a blank table of up to 10 columns and eight rows, click Table on the Insert
tab. This displays the Insert Table gallery and menu. The gallery is a simple grid that
represents columns and rows of cells. Pointing to a cell in the grid outlines the cells
that would be included in a table created by clicking that cell and displays a live
preview of the prospective table.
Presenting information in tables 149
4
The intended table dimensions (expressed as columns x rows) are shown in the gallery header.
Clicking a cell in the grid inserts an empty table the width of the text column. The
table has the number of rows and columns you indicated in the grid, with all the rows
one line high and all the columns of an equal width.
▪▪ To create a more customized empty table, click Insert Table on the Insert Table
menu. This displays the Insert Table dialog box, in which you can specify the number of columns and rows and the width of the table and its columns.
You can create a custom-width table from the Insert Table dialog box.
▪▪ To create a less clearly defined empty table, click Draw Table on the Insert Table menu.
This displays a pencil with which you can draw cells directly in the Word document to
create a table. The cells you draw connect by snapping to a grid, but you have some
control over the size and spacing of the rows and columns. After drawing a base table,
150 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
you can erase parts of it that you don’t want and adjust the table, column, and row
size by using tools on the Layout tool tab for tables.
You can draw a table directly on the page.
TIP When drawing a table, you can display the rulers or gridlines to help guide you
in placing the lines. For more information about rulers, see “Viewing documents in
different ways” in Chapter 1, “Explore Microsoft Word 2013.” For information about
controlling document gridlines, see “Arranging objects on the page” in Chapter 10,
“Organize and arrange content.”
IMPORTANT Assistive devices such as screen readers can usually access content in tables
created by using the Insert Table command, but not in manually drawn tables. Consider
the limitations of these devices if you intend for your document to meet accessibility
requirements.
SEE ALSO For information about drawing tables, see “Using tables to control page
layout” in Chapter 10, “Organize and arrange content.”
▪▪ To present data that already exists in the document (either as regular text or as a
tabbed list) as a table, select the data and then click Convert Text to Table on the
Insert Table menu. (Conversely, you can convert the active table to regular text by
clicking Convert to Text in the Data group on the Layout tool tab.)
▪▪ To create a table by entering data in a Microsoft Excel worksheet, click Excel Spread-
sheet on the Insert Table menu. Enter the data you want in the spreadsheet that
appears in the document—you can use Excel features such as functions and formulas
to create or manipulate the data. Format the data in Excel as you want it to appear in
Word. Then click in the document outside the spreadsheet window to insert a tablelike snapshot of the data. You can modify the data by double-clicking the table and
editing the content of the spreadsheet that opens.
IMPORTANT Inserting Excel spreadsheet content does not create a Word table, it creates
only a snapshot of the Excel content. You cannot work with the content in Word or use any
of the table tools we discuss in this chapter.
Presenting information in tables 151
4
Tables appear in the document as a set of cells, usually delineated by borders or gridlines.
(In some Quick Tables, borders and gridlines are turned off.) Each cell contains an end-ofcell marker, and each row ends with an end-of-row marker.
TROUBLESHOOTING Two separate elements in Word 2013 are named gridlines, and both
can be used in association with tables. From the Show group on the View tab, you can
display the document gridlines with which you can position content on the page. From the
Table group on the Layout tool tab, you can display the table gridlines that define the cells
of a table.
When you point to a table, a move handle appears in its upper-left corner and a size handle
in its lower-right corner. When the cursor is in a table, two Table Tools tabs—Design and
Layout—appear on the ribbon.
A table has its own controls and tool tabs.
TIP The end-of-cell markers and end-of-row markers are identical in appearance, and are
visible only when you display formatting marks in the document. The move handle and size
handle appear only in Print Layout view and Web Layout view.
After you create a table in Word, you can enter data (such as text, numbers, or graphics)
into the table cells. You can move and position the cursor by pressing the Tab key or the
arrow keys, or by clicking in a table cell. Pressing the Tab key moves the cursor to the next
cell; pressing Shift+Tab moves the cursor to the previous cell. Pressing Tab when the cursor is in the last cell of a row moves the cursor to the first cell of the next row. Pressing Tab
when the cursor is in the last cell of the last row adds a new row to the table and moves the
cursor to the first cell of that row.
You can modify a table’s structure by changing the size of the table, changing the size of
one or more columns or rows, or adding or removing rows, columns, or individual cells.
152 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
TIP To change a table’s structure, you often need to select the entire table or a specific col-
umn or row. The simplest way to select an entire table is to point to or click in the table so
that the move handle appears, and then click the move handle. To select a specific element,
position the cursor in the table, column, or row, click the Select button in the Table group
on the Layout tool tab, and then click the table element you want. Alternatively, you can
point to the top edge of a column or left edge of a row and, when the pointer changes to
an arrow, click to select the column or row.
The basic methods for manipulating a table or its contents are as follows:
▪▪ Insert rows or columns A new feature in Word 2013 makes it easier than ever to
insert a single row or column in an existing table. Simply point to the left edge of the
table where you want to insert a row, or to the top of the table where you want to
insert a column. A gray insertion indicator labeled with a plus sign appears as you approach a possible insertion point (after any existing row or column). When the insertion indicator turns blue, click to insert the row or column where indicated.
Inserting a row or column now takes only one click.
To insert one or more rows or columns, select the same number of existing rows
or columns adjacent to the location where you want to insert them. On the Mini
Toolbar that appears, click Insert and then click Insert Above, Insert Below, Insert
Left, or Insert Right. If the Mini Toolbar doesn’t appear, on the Layout tool tab, in
the Rows & Columns group, click the Insert Above, Insert Below, Insert Left, or
Insert Right button.
▪▪ Insert cells To insert one or more cells in a table, select the number of cells you
want to insert adjacent to the location where you want to insert them, click the
Rows & Columns dialog box launcher to open the Insert Cells dialog box, and
then specify the direction to move adjacent cells to accommodate the new cells.
Presenting information in tables 153
4
When inserting less than a full row or column you
must specify the movement of the surrounding cells.
▪▪ Delete table elements Select one or more rows, columns, or cells. On the Mini Tool-
bar that appears, or in the Rows & Columns group, click Delete, and then click Delete
Cells, Delete Columns, Delete Rows, or Delete Table.
You can now insert or delete table elements from the Mini Toolbar.
▪▪ Resize an entire table Point to the table, and then drag the size handle that appears
in its lower-right corner. Hold down the Shift key while dragging the size handle to
maintain the original aspect ratio of the table.
▪▪ Resize a single column or row Drag the right border of a column to the left or right
to manually set the width, or double-click the border to adjust it to the narrowest
width that fits its content. Drag the bottom border of a row up or down to manually
set the height, or use the commands in the Cell Size group on the Layout tool tab to
manage column width and row height.
▪▪ Move a table Point to the table, and then drag the move handle that appears in its
upper-left corner to a new location, or use the Cut and Paste commands in the Clipboard group on the Home tab to move the table.
▪▪ Merge cells Create cells that span multiple columns or rows by selecting the cells
you want to merge and clicking the Merge Cells button in the Merge group on the
154 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
Layout tool tab. For example, to center a title in the first row of a table, you can
merge all the cells in the row to create one merged cell that spans the table’s width.
▪▪ Split cells Divide one cell into multiple cells by clicking the Split Cells button in the
Merge group on the Layout tool tab and then specifying the number of columns and
rows into which you want to divide the cell.
▪▪ Sort information Click the Sort button in the Data group on the Layout tool tab to
sort the rows in ascending or descending order by the data in any column. For example, in a table that has the column headings Name, Address, ZIP Code, and Phone
Number, you can sort on any one of those columns to arrange the information in
alphabetical or numerical order.
4
Performing calculations in tables
When you want to perform calculations with the numbers in a Word table, you can
create a formula that uses a built-in mathematical function. You construct a formula by using the tools in the Formula dialog box, which you display by clicking the
Formula button in the Data group on the Layout tool tab.
A formula consists of an equal sign (=), followed by a function name (such as SUM),
followed by parentheses containing the location of the cells you want to use for the
calculation. For example, the formula =SUM(Left) totals the cells to the left of the cell
containing the formula.
To use a function other than SUM in the Formula dialog box, you click the function
you want in the Paste Function list. You can use built-in functions to perform a number of calculations, including averaging (AVERAGE) a set of values, counting (COUNT)
the number of values in a column or row, or finding the maximum (MAX) or minimum
(MIN) value in a series of cells.
Although formulas commonly refer to the cells above or to the left of the active cell,
you can also use the contents of specified cells or constant values in formulas. To
use the contents of a cell, you enter the cell address in the parentheses following the
function name. The cell address is a combination of the column letter and the row
number—for example, A1 is the cell at the intersection of the first column and the
first row. A series of cells in a row can be addressed as a range consisting of the first
cell and the last cell separated by a colon, such as A1:D1. For example, the formula
=SUM(A1:D1) totals the values in row 1 of columns A through D. A series of cells in a
column can be addressed in the same way. For example, the formula =SUM(A1:A4)
totals the values in column A of rows 1 through 4.
Presenting information in tables 155
In this exercise, you’ll work with two tables. First you’ll create an empty table, modify the
table layout, enter text in the table cells, and perform a calculation in the table by using a
formula. Then you’ll create a second table by converting an existing tabbed list, and modify
the table to fit its contents.
SET UP You need the ConsultationB document located in the Chapter04 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, display formatting marks and the
rulers, and then follow the steps.
1
Click to the left of the second blank paragraph below Please complete this form. On
the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click the Table button. Then in the Insert Table
gallery, point to (don’t click) the cell that is five columns to the right and five rows
down from the top to preview the effect of creating the table in the document.
You can preview the table with the number of columns and rows you have specified.
2
Click the cell to create a blank table consisting of five columns and five rows, with the
cursor located in the first cell. Because the table is active, Word displays the Design
and Layout tool tabs.
3
In the selection area to the left of the table, point to the first row of the table, and
then click once to select the five cells in the row. On the Layout tool tab, in the
Merge group, click the Merge Cells button to combine the five cells into one cell.
4
With the merged cell selected, in the Alignment group, click the Align Center
button. The end-of-cell marker moves to the exact center of the merged cell to
indicate that its content will be centered both horizontally and vertically.
156 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
5
Click in the merged cell, and then enter Consultation Estimate. The table now
appears to have a title.
Merged cells are often used for table titles and column headings.
6
7
8
9
Enter Type in the first cell in the second row, and then press Tab.
Enter Location, Consultant, Hourly Rate, and Total, pressing Tab after each entry
to create a row of column headings. Pressing Tab after the Total heading moves the
cursor to the first cell of the third row.
Select the column heading row, and then on the Mini Toolbar, click the Bold button.
In the third row, enter Window treatments, In home, Patrick Hines, $50.00, and
$50.00, pressing Tab after each entry to enter a complete row of data.
Now we’ll merge some cells to create Subtotal and Total rows.
10
Select the last two rows of the table. On the Mini Toolbar, click the Insert button,
and then click Insert Below to add two rows to the end of the table.
11
In the last row of the table, select the first four cells. On the Layout tool tab, in
the Merge group, click the Merge Cells button to combine the selected cells
into one cell.
12
In the merged cell, enter Subtotal. Then in the Alignment group, click the Align
Center Right button to move the word to the right edge of the cell.
13
Press Tab twice to create a new row with the same formatting as the Subtotal row.
When you add a new row, it has the same format as the one it is based on.
Presenting information in tables 157
4
14
Enter Add trip charge, press Tab two times, and then enter Total.
Next we’ll have Word calculate the Subtotal.
15
Click in the cell to the right of Subtotal. On the Layout tool tab, in the Data group,
click the Formula button to open the Formula dialog box, which already contains a
simple formula for adding the amounts in the rows above the cell.
You can easily create a formula to calculate a value in a table.
16
In the Formula dialog box, click OK to enter the formula in the Subtotal cell and
display the formula results, $50.00.
17
Click in the last cell of the table, and repeat the previous two steps to enter the
same formula in the Total cell. When you click OK, notice that the formula result
($50.00) doesn’t include the numbers that are included in the previous formula.
18
In the cell to the right of Add trip charge, enter $10.00. In the Total cell, rightclick the formula results, and then click Update Field to recalculate the results.
Hide formatting marks to display the results.
You can enter mathematical formulas in even a simple table like this one.
Now we’ll create a table by using a different method.
19
Scroll to the end of the document, and under the In-Home Trip Charge heading,
se­lect all the rows of the tabbed list beginning with Distance and ending with
$20.00.
158 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
20
On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click the Table button, and then click Con­
vert Text to Table to open the Convert Text to Table dialog box, which already
displays the number of columns and rows corresponding to the selected list.
4
You can cleanly convert content that is separated by paragraph marks,
tabs, commas, or any single character that you specify.
21
Verify that the Number of columns box displays 2, and then click OK to reformat the
tabbed list as a table with two columns and six rows.
22
Point to the top of the Distance column. When the pointer changes to a thick
downward-pointing arrow, click and drag to the right to select the two columns.
23
Point to the right border of the table. When the pointer changes to two opposing
arrows, double-click the border to resize the columns to fit their longest entries. Click
away from the table to release the selection and display the results.
It’s simple to convert a tabbed list to a tidy table.
TIP You can also adjust the column width by changing the Table Column Width
setting in the Cell Size group on the Layout tool tab.
+
CLEAN UP Close the ConsultationB document, saving your changes if you want to.
Presenting information in tables 159
Other table layout options
You can control many aspects of a table in the Table Properties dialog box, which you
display by clicking the Properties button in the Table group on the Layout tool tab.
You can set the following options:
▪▪ On the Table page, you can specify the width of the table and the way it interacts
with the surrounding text. From this page, you can also access border and shading
options, including the internal margins of table cells.
▪▪ On the Row page, you can specify the height of the selected rows, whether rows
can break across pages (in the event that the table is wider than the page), and
whether the header row is repeated at the top of each page when a table is longer
than one page.
TIP The Repeat As Header Row option applies to the entire table rather than the
selected row. The option is available only when the cursor is in the top row of the
table. Selecting this option helps readers of a document to more easily interpret
data in multi-page tables. It also allows assistive devices such as screen readers to
correctly interpret the table contents.
▪▪ On the Column page, you can set the width of each column.
▪▪ On the Cell page, you can set the width of selected cells and the vertical alignment
of text within them. Click the Options button on this page to set the internal margins and text wrapping of individual cells.
▪▪ On the Alt Text page, you can enter text that describes what the table is about. Alt
text may be displayed when a table can’t be displayed on the page, or when the
document is read aloud by an assistive device to a person who has a visual impairment. Including alt text or a table caption improves the accessibility of the table.
TIP You can also control cell width, alignment, and margins by using the settings
in the Cell Size and Alignment groups on the Layout tool tab.
160 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
Formatting tables
Manually formatting a table to best convey its data can be a process of trial and error. With
Word 2013, you can quickly get started by applying one of the table styles available in the
Table Styles gallery on the Design tool tab. The table styles include a variety of borders, colors, and other attributes that give the table a very professional appearance.
4
In Word 2013, the Table Styles gallery is divided into sections for plain tables, grid tables, and
list tables.
If you want to control the appearance of a table more precisely, you can use the commands
on the Design and Layout tool tabs to format the table elements. You can also separately
format the table content. As you saw in the previous exercise, you can apply character formatting to the text in tables just as you would to regular text, by clicking buttons on the
Mini Toolbar and in the Font, Paragraph, or Quick Styles groups on the Home tab.
Formatting tables 161
Quick Tables
In addition to inserting empty tables, you can insert any of the available Quick Tables,
which are predefined tables of formatted data that you can replace with your own information. Built-in Quick Tables include a variety of calendars and simple tables.
The Quick Tables gallery includes a selection of predefined tables such as this one.
To create a Quick Table:
1 On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click the Table button, and then click Quick
Tables to expand the Quick Tables gallery.
The predefined Quick Tables can be a convenient starting point.
162 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
2 Scroll through the gallery, noticing the types of tables that are available, and then click
the one you want.
By default, the Matrix Quick Table includes row and column headings, placeholder data, and no
summary data, such as totals.
3 Modify content and apply formatting to tailor the Quick Table to your needs.
You can easily customize a Quick Table.
You can also save a modified Quick Table, or any customized table, to the Quick Tables
gallery. Saving a table saves both the table structure and the table content to the gallery. You can then easily insert an identical table into any document.
To save a table to the Quick Tables gallery:
1 Select the table by using the table selector or the commands in the Table group on the
Layout tool tab.
2 On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click the Table button, click Quick Tables, and
then click Save Selection to Quick Tables Gallery.
3 In the Create new Building Block dialog box, assign a name to the table, and then
click OK.
When you exit Word, save the Building Blocks template when Word prompts you to do
so, to ensure that the table will be available in the Quick Tables gallery for future use.
SEE ALSO For information about building blocks, see “Inserting preformatted docu-
ment parts” in Chapter 9, “Add visual elements.”
Formatting tables 163
4
In this exercise, you’ll first apply a table style to a table. Then you’ll format a table row and
column. You’ll also apply character and paragraph formatting to various cells so that the
table’s appearance helps the reader understand its data.
SET UP You need the RepairCosts document located in the Chapter04 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, hide formatting marks and the
rulers, and then follow the steps.
1
Click anywhere in the table, and then on the Design tools tab, point to each thumb­
nail in the first row of the Table Styles gallery to display a live preview of the style.
2
In the Table Style Options group, select the Header Row and Total Row check boxes.
In the Table Styles gallery, notice that the table style thumbnails change to reflect
special formatting applied to the top and bottom rows.
3
In the Table Styles group, click the More button to expand the gallery of available
table styles. Scroll through the gallery and preview styles that you like. Notice
that the gallery is divided into three sections: Plain Tables, which have very little
formatting; Grid Tables, which include vertical separators between columns; and List
Tables, which don’t include vertical column separators.
4
When you finish exploring, click the second thumbnail in the third row of the List
Tables section (List Table 3 – Accent 1) to format the table to match the thumbnail.
Notice that the selected thumbnail moves to the visible row of the Table Style gallery
on the ribbon.
This table style applies formatting to the header and total rows and to the table text.
164 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
5
On the Design tool tab, select the First Column check box to change the formatting
applied to the first column. With the selected table style, the text of the first column
becomes bold. Let’s make the first column content stand out even more.
6
Expand the Table Styles gallery and notice that the thumbnails now show special
formatting applied to the first column. Point to various thumbnails to preview the
styles on the table. Then click the second thumbnail in the fifth row of the Grid
Tables section (Grid Table 5 Dark - Accent 1) to apply the style.
TIP If the first row of your table has several long headings that make it difficult to fit
the table on one page, you can turn the headings sideways. Simply select the heading row and click the Text Direction button in the Alignment group on the Layout
tool tab.
You can apply formatting to specific table elements by selecting them in the Table Style Options
groups.
The new style emphasizes the first row but makes it difficult to delineate between the
items and the Item column header. Let’s make two changes to fix that.
7
Select the first and last rows of the table. On the Design tool tab, in the Borders
group, click the Line Weight arrow, and then click 1 ½ pt to select a thicker border.
8
In the Borders group, click the Borders arrow and click Top Border. Then click the
Borders arrow and click Bottom Border to set off the header and total rows from the
surrounding text.
Formatting tables 165
4
9
10
In the table, select the list of items, from Elastomeric Decks through Fire Alarm
System (select only the entries in the first column and not the associated infor­
mation). In the Table Styles group, click the Shading arrow and then in the Theme
Colors palette, click the third swatch under the currently selected color (Blue,
Accent 1, Lighter 40%).
On the Home tab, in the Font group, click the Font Color arrow, and then click
Automatic. In the Font group, click the Bold button. Then click away from the
table to display the results.
You can customize aspects of a table style to meet your needs.
TIP If you will need to use this formatted table with different data in the future, you
can save it as a Quick Table.
+
CLEAN UP Close the RepairCosts document, saving your changes if you want to.
166 Chapter 4 Organize information in columns and tables
Key points
▪▪ To vary the layout of a document, you can divide text into columns. You can control the
number of columns, the width of the columns, and the space between the columns.
▪▪ To clearly present a simple set of data, you can use tabs to create a tabbed list, with
custom tab stops controlling the width and alignment of columns.
▪▪ You can create a table from scratch, or convert existing text to a table. You can
control the size of the table and its individual structural elements.
▪▪ By using the built-in table styles, you can quickly apply professional-looking cell and
character formatting to a table and its contents.
▪▪ You can enhance a table and its contents by applying text attributes, borders, and
shading.
Key points 167
4
Chapter at a glance
Decorate Insert and modify pictures,
page 170
Clip Insert screen clippings,
page 178
Draw Add Draw and modify shapes,
page 180
Add WordArt text,
page 185
Add simple graphic
elements
5
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Insert and modify pictures.
Insert screen clippings.
Draw and modify shapes.
Add WordArt text.
Many documents that you create in Microsoft Word 2013 contain only text. Others might
benefit from the addition of graphic elements to reinforce their concepts, to grab the
reader’s attention, or to make them more visually appealing. These graphic elements can
include a wide variety of objects and effects, including:
▪▪ Pictures These objects are created outside of Word—photographs from digital cameras, clip art images, or files created by using a computer graphics program. No matter what the origin of the picture, you can change its size and its position in relation
to other content after you insert it in the Word document. You can make additional
changes to most types of pictures from within Word, such as cropping the picture or
embellishing it by applying artistic effects.
▪▪ Drawing objects These objects are created within Word—text boxes, WordArt text,
diagrams, charts, shapes, and other such objects. As with pictures, you can size, move,
and format drawing objects from within Word.
SEE ALSO For information about diagrams, see Chapter 7, “Insert and modify dia-
grams.” For information about charts, see Chapter 8, “Insert and modify charts.”
In this chapter, you’ll first insert and modify pictures in a document. Then you’ll insert
screen clippings and shapes. Finally, you’ll have a bit of fun with WordArt.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter05 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
169
Inserting and modifying pictures
You can insert digital photographs or pictures created in almost any program into a Word
document. You specify the source of the picture you want to insert by clicking one of these
two buttons, which are located in the Illustrations group on the Insert tab:
▪▪ Pictures Click this button to insert a picture that is saved as a file on your computer,
on a network drive, or on a device (such as a digital camera) that is connected to your
computer.
▪▪ Online Pictures Click this button to insert a royalty-free clip art image from
Office.com, a web search result from Bing, or an image stored on your Microsoft
SkyDrive or another online source.
SEE ALSO For information about clip art, see the sidebar “About online pictures and
video clips” later in this chapter.
After you insert a picture in a document, you can modify the image by using commands on
the Format tool tab, which is displayed only when an object is selected.
The Format tool tab for pictures.
▪▪ The Adjust group contains commands that enable you to change the picture’s brightness and contrast, recolor it, apply artistic effects to it, and compress it to reduce the
size of the document containing it.
▪▪ The Picture Styles group offers a wide range of picture styles that you can apply to a
picture to change its shape and orientation, as well as add borders and picture effects.
▪▪ The Arrange group contains commands for specifying the relationship of the picture
to the page and to other elements on the page.
SEE ALSO For information about using the commands in the Arrange group, see
“Arranging objects on the page” in Chapter 10, “Organize and arrange content.”
▪▪ You can use the commands in the Size group for cropping and resizing pictures.
170 Chapter 5 Add simple graphic elements
In this exercise, you’ll insert a couple of photographs and resize and crop them. You’ll
modify one of them and then copy the modifications to the other one. Then you’ll insert
an illustration and apply an artistic effect to it.
SET UP You need the Authors document, the Joan and Joyce photographs, and the
OTSI-Logo image located in the Chapter05 practice file folder to complete this exercise.
Open the Authors document, display the rulers, and then follow the steps.
1
Scroll through the document to the section with the heading Joyce Cox. Click to the
left of the Joyce has over 30 years’ experience paragraph, press the Enter key to
create a blank paragraph, and then press the Up Arrow key to position the cursor in
the new paragraph.
2
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click the Pictures button to display the
Insert Picture dialog box. In the dialog box, navigate to the Chapter05 practice file
folder, and double-click the Joyce picture to insert the picture at the cursor. Notice
that the picture is selected. Handles surround the picture, a Layout Options button
appears to its right, and the Format tool tab appears on the ribbon.
When you select a picture, the tools for managing it become active.
TROUBLESHOOTING If Word inserts a frame the size of the picture but displays only a
sliver of the picture itself, the line spacing must be reset to accommodate the picture.
To correct this problem, click the Paragraph dialog box launcher, and in the Paragraph
dialog box, change the Line Spacing setting to Single.
Inserting and modifying pictures 171
5
TIP In this exercise, you insert pictures in blank paragraphs. By default, Word inserts
pictures in line with text, meaning that Word increases the line spacing to accommodate the picture. If you were to enter text adjacent to the picture, the bottom of
the picture would align with the bottom of the text on the same line. After you insert
a picture, you can change its position and the way text wraps around it by using the
options on the Layout Options menu or in the Arrange group on the Format tool tab.
SEE ALSO For more information about positioning objects and wrapping text around
them, see “Adding WordArt text” later in this chapter and “Arranging objects on the
page” in Chapter 10, “Organize and arrange content.”
3
Point to the size handle in the lower-right corner of the picture. When the pointer
changes to a double-headed arrow, drag up and to the left until the right side of the
picture aligns with the 1.75 inch mark on the horizontal ruler. Because the aspect
ratio of the picture is locked, the height and width change proportionally
TIP You can fine-tune the size of a graphic by adjusting the Shape Height and Shape
Width settings in the Size group on the Format tool tab.
4
On the Format tool tab, in the Size group, click the Crop button (not its arrow) to
activate crop handles around the picture.
5
On the bottom edge of the picture, point to the middle crop handle, and when the
pointer changes to a black T, drag upward until the picture is about 1 inch high.
Notice that the part of the picture you have marked to crop away is shaded.
When you release the mouse, the text moves to indicate its position after the crop.
TIP You can check the new dimensions of the picture in the Size group on the
Format tool tab before you commit to the crop.
6
Click away from the picture (or click the Crop button again) to complete the process.
172 Chapter 5 Add simple graphic elements
TIP In addition to cropping a picture manually, you can click the Crop arrow and
select from various options, including having Word crop a picture to fit a shape you
select, cropping to a precise aspect ratio, filling an area with a picture, or fitting a
picture to an area.
Now we’ll insert and format a second picture.
7
Scroll through the document to the section with the heading Joan Lambert. Click to
the left of the Joan has worked paragraph, press Enter to create a blank paragraph,
and then press the Up Arrow key to position the cursor in the new paragraph.
8
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click the Pictures button and then, in
the Insert Picture dialog box, double-click the Joan picture to insert it in the blank
paragraph.
9
10
On the Format tool tab, in the Size group, enter or select 1” in the Shape Width box.
11
With the picture still selected, in the Adjust group, click the Color button to expand
the gallery of color choices.
Click the Crop arrow, click Aspect Ratio, and then click 1:1 to place a square set of
crop handles in the center of the picture. Drag the picture down behind the crop
handles so the entire head and shoulders are visible, and click the Crop button to
complete the cropping process.
You can change the saturation and tone, as well as recolor the picture.
Inserting and modifying pictures 173
5
12
On the Color menu, below Recolor, click the second thumbnail in the first row
(Grayscale) to convert the picture color to shades of gray.
13
In the Adjust group, click the Corrections button to display the picture correction
options.
You can change the sharpness, brightness, and contrast of the inserted picture.
14
On the Corrections menu, in the Brightness/Contrast category, click the third
thumbnail in the fourth row (Brightness: 0% (Normal) Contrast: +20%) to remove
some of the gray overtones from the grayscaled picture.
15
In the Picture Styles group, click the More button to expand the gallery of available
picture styles.
TIP To move a picture within a document, simply drag it to where you want it. To
copy a picture, hold down the Ctrl key while you drag, releasing first the mouse button and then the Ctrl key. (If you release Ctrl first, Word will move the picture instead
of copying it.)
174 Chapter 5 Add simple graphic elements
You can apply frames, shadows, glows, and three-dimensional
effects from the Picture Styles gallery.
16
Point to each thumbnail in the Picture Styles gallery to preview the effect on the
selected picture (scroll down the page if necessary to display the picture and gallery
at the same time). Notice that the relationship of the text to the picture changes
depending on the style you select.
17
In the Picture Styles gallery, click the third thumbnail in the third row (Center
Shadow Rectangle) and then click away from the picture to display the effect.
This picture style gives the impression that the picture is indented from the left edge of the page.
18
Click the Joan picture to select it, and then on the horizontal ruler, drag the Left
Indent marker to the left to align the picture with the paragraph that follows it.
Inserting and modifying pictures 175
5
19
With the Joan picture still selected, on the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click
the Format Painter button. Then click the Joyce picture to copy the grayscale format,
color corrections, and picture style from one picture to the other.
Now we’ll insert and format a third image.
20
Scroll through the document to the section with the heading Online Training
Solutions, Inc. (OTSI). Click to the left of the OTSI specializes paragraph, press
Enter, and then press the Up Arrow key.
21
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click the Pictures button. Then in the
Insert Picture dialog box, double-click the OTSI-Logo graphic.
22
With the logo selected, on the Format tool tab, in the Adjust group, click the Artistic
Effects button.
23
In the Artistic Effects gallery, point to each thumbnail to preview its effect on the
logo, and then click the third thumbnail in the first row (Pencil Grayscale). Click away
from the picture to display the logo’s new hand-drawn effect.
You can use artistic effects to make pictures look like paintings, sketches, cutouts, and more.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Authors document, saving your changes if you want to.
176 Chapter 5 Add simple graphic elements
About online pictures and video clips
Clicking the Online Pictures button in the Illustration group on the Insert tab displays
the Insert Pictures window. From this window you can search for a royalty-free clip art
image on the Microsoft Office website, search for a published image on the Internet
by using Bing Image Search, or browse your SkyDrive for an image.
If you want to dress up a document with a graphic but you don’t have a suitable picture, you can use any of the clip art images available from the Microsoft Office website without requesting permission from the clip art creator. Clip art available from
Office.com includes illustrations and photographs that are free to use and available
without any copyright restrictions.
Using Bing Image Search returns images that are published on the Internet but that
might be otherwise copyrighted. If you want to use one of these images in any public
way, you must check the copyright information associated with the image.
If you want to insert a video clip (more likely in a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation
but also possible in a document), click Online Video in the Media group on the Insert
tab to open a Bing Video Search window. Entering a search term in this window returns matching videos that have been posted on the Internet. As with the Bing Image
Search results, these are not necessarily copyright-free.
When you search any of these sources, results matching your search term are displayed in the window. You can point to an image or video clip and click the View
Larger button to display a larger version.
When you view a larger version of a video clip, a Play button appears on the image;
you can click the Play button to play the entire video (including any associated audio)
in the window. Click an image or video clip to select it for insertion; to select multiple images or video clips, hold down the Ctrl or Shift key and select the other items
you want. Then click the Insert button to insert the selected item or items in your
document.
TIP If you already know the web address (embed code) of the video you want to
insert—for example, if you want to insert a video that you previously posted on
YouTube, you can enter the embed code for the video in the Insert Video window.
After you insert an image or video clip, you can format its appearance by using the
tools on the Format tool tab for pictures.
Inserting and modifying pictures 177
5
Inserting screen clippings
These days, many people rely on the Internet as a source of the information they use in
their daily lives. Sometimes that information is presented in a graphic that would be useful
in a Word document. Word 2013 includes a screen clipping tool that you can use to capture
an image of anything that is visible on your computer screen. You simply display the content you want to include in a document, open the document, and click the Screenshot button in the Illustrations group on the Insert tab. You can then insert a screen clipping in one
of two ways:
▪▪ Clicking a window thumbnail in the Screenshot gallery inserts a picture of that window
into the document at the cursor.
▪▪ Clicking Screen Clipping below the gallery enables you to drag across the part of
the screen you want to capture, so that only that part is inserted as a picture into
the document.
In this exercise, you’ll insert a screen clipping from a website into a document.
SET UP You need the AgendaDraft document located in the Chapter05 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
Press Ctrl+End to move to the end of the document, below the Directions to the
Bellevue Library heading. Then minimize the program window.
2
Start your web browser, and display a website from which you want to capture a
screen clipping. For this example, we used a map showing the location of a public
library. You might want to display a map of the location of your office or a local
landmark.
3
When the content you want to capture is displayed in your web browser, switch to
the AgendaDraft document. Then on the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click
the Screenshot button. On the Screenshot menu, the Available Windows gallery
displays currently open windows.
178 Chapter 5 Add simple graphic elements
You can capture and insert a screen shot of an open window by clicking it in the gallery.
4
On the Screenshot menu, click Screen Clipping to minimize the program window
and apply a translucent white layer over the entire screen.
TIP If you change your mind about capturing the screen clipping, press the Esc key
to remove the white layer.
5
Drag to select the area of the webpage you want. When you release the mouse
button, Word inserts the screen clipping into the document at the cursor.
You can format the screen clipping just as you would any other picture.
+
CLEAN UP Close the AgendaDraft document, saving your changes if you want to.
Inserting screen clippings 179
5
Drawing and modifying shapes
If you want to add visual interest and impact to a document but you don’t need anything as
fancy as a picture or a clip art image, you can draw a shape. Shapes can be simple, such as
lines, circles, or squares; or more complex, such as stars, hearts, and arrows.
To draw a shape directly on the page (Word’s default setting), you click the Shapes button
in the Illustrations group on the Insert tab, and then click the shape you want.
The Shapes menu includes a wide variety of shapes.
180 Chapter 5 Add simple graphic elements
After selecting the shape you want, you can do one of the following:
▪▪ Click the document to insert the selected shape at the default size and aspect ratio.
▪▪ Drag across the page to create a drawing the size and shape you want.
When you finish drawing the shape, it is automatically selected. Later, you can select the
shape by clicking it. While the shape is selected, you can move and size it, and you can
modify it by using commands on the Format tool tab to do the following:
▪▪ Change the shape to a different shape.
▪▪ Change the style, fill color, outline, and effects assigned to the shape, including the
three-dimensional aspect, or perspective, from which you are observing the shape.
TIP If you change the attributes of a shape—for example, its fill color and border
weight—and you want all the shapes you draw from now on in the same document
to have those attributes, right-click the shape, and then click Set As Default Shape.
▪▪ Specify the position of the shape on the page, and the way text wraps around the
shape.
TIP You can manually position a shape by dragging it, or you can select it and press
the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the shape in small increments.
▪▪ Control the order of the shape in a stack of shapes.
▪▪ Specify the shape’s alignment and angle of rotation.
▪▪ Precisely control the size of the shape.
TIP You can manually change the size and shape of an object by dragging its
handles.
You can right-click a shape and click Add Text to place a cursor in the center of the shape.
After you enter the text, you can format it with the commands in the WordArt Styles group
and control its direction and alignment with the commands in the Text group.
If you build a picture by drawing individual shapes, you can group them so that they act as
one object. If you move or size a grouped object, the shapes retain their positions in relation to each other. To break the bond, you ungroup the object.
Drawing and modifying shapes 181
5
If your picture consists of more than a few shapes, you might want to draw the shapes
on a drawing canvas instead of directly on the page. The drawing canvas keeps the parts
of the picture together, helps you position the picture, and provides a framelike boundary between your picture and the text on the page. To open a drawing canvas, you click
New Drawing Canvas at the bottom of the Shapes menu. You can then draw shapes on the
canvas in the usual ways. At any time, you can size and move the drawing canvas and the
shapes on it as one unit.
TIP If you prefer to always use the drawing canvas when creating pictures with shapes, display the Backstage view, click Options, and in the Word Options dialog box, click Advanced.
Then in the Editing Options area, select the Automatically Create Drawing Canvas When
Inserting AutoShapes check box, and click OK.
In this exercise, you’ll draw two shapes and a text box on a drawing canvas to create a logo.
Next, you’ll change the style of the shapes and the color of the text box. Then you’ll move
and resize the canvas.
SET UP You don’t need any practice files to complete this exercise. Open a blank document, display the rulers, and then follow the steps.
1
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click the Shapes button. At the bottom
of the Shapes menu, click New Drawing Canvas to insert a drawing canvas and
display the Format tool tab for drawings.
2
On the Format tool tab, in the Insert Shapes group, click the Shapes button, and
then in the Block Arrows category, click the first shape in the second row (Curved
Right Arrow).
3
Point to the upper-left corner of the drawing canvas, and then drag down and to
the right to draw an arrow about 1.5 inches tall and 1.5 inches wide. When you finish
drawing, the arrow is selected, as indicated by the handles around it.
TIP To draw a shape with equal height and width, such as a square or circle, hold
down the Shift key while you drag, and then release the mouse button before releasing the Shift key.
4
In the Size group, set the Height and Width to precisely 1.5”.
182 Chapter 5 Add simple graphic elements
You can drag handles to rotate the arrow, change its size, and change its shape.
5
Hold down the Ctrl key and drag the arrow shape to the upper-right corner of the
drawing canvas. First release the mouse button and then release the Ctrl key to
create a copy of the arrow shape.
6
In the Arrange group, click the Rotate Objects button, and then click Flip Horizontal
to rotate the copy of the arrow so that it points to the left.
7
In the Insert Shapes group, click the Draw Text Box button, and drag to draw a text
box between the arrows. In the text box, enter What goes around comes around.
Now we’ll group the shapes together and apply formatting to the group and its individual elements.
8
With the text box still selected, hold down the Shift key, and then click the left arrow
and the right arrow to select all three shapes. Handles around each shape indicate
that they are all selected individually.
9
In the Arrange group, click the Group Objects button, and then click Group to group
the three shapes as one object.
One set of handles appears around a grouped object.
Drawing and modifying shapes 183
5
10
In the Shape Styles group, click the More button to expand the Shape Styles gallery,
and then click the third thumbnail in the last row (Intense Effect – Orange, Accent 2)
to apply the style to all the grouped shapes.
11
Select the text in the text box. Use the commands on the Home tab, in the Font
group, to format the text as 18-point Bold Comic Sans MS. In the Paragraph group,
click the Center button. Then click the page outside of the drawing canvas to release
the selection and display the results.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+E to center the paragraph. For more information
about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end of this book.
You can format a grouped object as a whole, or format individual shapes within the object.
12
Click the shape to select it. On the Format tool tab, in the Size group, click the
Width down arrow until the drawing canvas is as narrow as it can be without the
text wrapping to a third line.
13
Point to the sizing handle in the middle of the bottom border of the drawing canvas
frame, and drag upward until the drawing canvas is just tall enough to contain the
grouped shape.
14
Drag the sizing handle in the middle of the right border of the drawing canvas to the
left until the drawing canvas is just wide enough to contain the grouped shape.
15
With the drawing canvas selected, in the Shape Styles group, click the Shape Fill
arrow, and then click the third swatch in the top row of the Theme Colors palette,
(Gray-25%, Background 2).
16
Click the Shape Fill arrow again, click Gradient, and then in the Variations category,
click the second thumbnail in the second row (From Center).
17
Click the Shape Outline arrow, and then click the third swatch in the orange column
of the Theme Colors palette (Orange, Accent 2, Lighter 60%).
18
Click outside of the drawing canvas to display your completed creation.
184 Chapter 5 Add simple graphic elements
You can format the drawing canvas or leave it blank.
TIP If you were creating this object in the context of a document that contained text,
you would now use the commands in the Arrange group to position and wrap text
around the shape. For information about text wrapping, see “Arranging objects on
the page” in Chapter 10, “Organize and arrange content.”
+
CLEAN UP Close the document, saving it if you want to.
5
Adding WordArt text
WordArt provides a method for applying a series of effects to text with one click. The 15
default WordArt styles included with Word 2013 combine outlines, fills, shadows, reflections, glow effects, beveled edges, and three-dimensional rotation to create text that really
gets your attention. You can apply a default WordArt style, modify the effects of that style,
or build a combination of effects from scratch.
WordArt differs from simple formatting in that text formatted as WordArt becomes an object that you can position anywhere on a page. Although the WordArt object is attached
to the paragraph that contained the cursor when you created it, you can move it independently of the text, even positioning it in front of the text if you want.
To convert existing text into WordArt, select the text, click the Insert WordArt button in
the Text group on the Insert tab, and then click a text style in the WordArt gallery. (The
WordArt text styles are the same as the text effects available in the Text Effects gallery in
the Font group on the Home tab.).
To insert a new WordArt object, click the Insert WordArt button, click the text style you
want, and then enter your text in the text box that appears. You can edit the text, adjust
the character formatting in the usual ways, and change the text style of a WordArt object
at any time.
Adding WordArt text 185
SEE ALSO For information about character formatting, see “Manually changing the look of
characters” in Chapter 3, “Modify the structure and appearance of text.” For information
about text effects, see “Applying styles to text” in the same chapter.
When a WordArt object is selected, the Format tool tab appears on the ribbon. You can use
the commands on this tab to further format the WordArt object. For example, you can add
effects such as shadows and depth to create a three-dimensional appearance, change the
fill and outline colors, and change the text direction and alignment. You can also position
the WordArt object in any of several predefined locations on the page, as well as specify
how other text should wrap around the object.
TIP Don’t go too wild with WordArt formatting. Many WordArt styles and text effects
require quite a bit of trial and error to produce a tidy effect.
In this exercise, you’ll insert a new WordArt object, modify it, and then position it on the
page. Then you’ll change the way it relates to the text on the page.
SET UP You need the Announcement document located in the Chapter05 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click the Insert WordArt button, and in the
gallery, click the last thumbnail in the second row (Fill – Olive Green, Accent 3,
Sharp Bevel) to insert a generic WordArt object with that text effect at the cursor.
The full text effect isn’t visible until you click away from the text.
TIP The object anchor and Layout Options button are visible whenever a WordArt
object is selected. You can ignore them for now.
186 Chapter 5 Add simple graphic elements
SEE ALSO For information about anchoring objects, see “Arranging objects on the
page” in Chapter 10, “Organize and arrange content.”
2
Select Your text here, and then enter The Room Planner.
TIP WordArt objects can accommodate multiple lines. Simply press Enter if you want
to start a new line.
3
Click the border of the WordArt object to select it, and then change the zoom level
to display the whole page in the program window.
4
On the Format tool tab, in the Arrange group, click the Position button to display
the available text wrapping options.
5
You control the position of the WordArt object in relation to the surrounding text.
5
Point to each thumbnail in turn to preview where that option will place the WordArt
object. Then in the With Text Wrapping area, click the second thumbnail in the
second row (Position in Middle Center with Square Text Wrapping) to move the
WordArt object to that location on the page.
6
In the Arrange group, click the Wrap Text button to display the Wrap Text menu.
Adding WordArt text 187
You can control the text wrapping independently of the position of the WordArt object.
7
8
Point to each option in turn to preview its effects, and then click Tight.
In the Arrange group, click the Wrap Text button, and then click More Layout
Options to display the Text Wrapping page of the Layout dialog box.
If you know what kind of text wrapping you want, you can select it on this page of the dialog
box, but you can’t preview it.
9
In the Distance from text area, change the Left and Right settings to 0.3”, and then
click OK. The text outside the box is no longer encroaching on the box.
188 Chapter 5 Add simple graphic elements
10
On the Format tool tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the More button to expand
the Shape Styles gallery. Then click the fourth thumbnail in the fourth row (Subtle
Effect – Olive Green, Accent 3).
11
Press Ctrl+Home to display the formatted WordArt object.
5
This simple text banner is a stylish alternative to a traditional title.
12
+
If you want, experiment with combinations of the styles and formatting available on
the Format tab. For example, you might want to try some of the Text Effects options,
such as the path and warp effects available in the Transform gallery.
CLEAN UP Close the Announcement document, saving your changes if you want to.
Adding WordArt text 189
Formatting the first letter of a paragraph
as a drop cap
Many books, magazines, and reports begin the first paragraph of a section or chapter
by using an enlarged, decorative capital letter. Called a dropped capital, or simply a drop
cap, this effect can be an easy way to give a document a finished, professional look.
When you format a paragraph to start with a drop cap, Word inserts the first letter
of the paragraph in a text box and formats its height and font in accordance with the
Drop Cap options.
By default, the letter is the same font face as the rest of the paragraph and the height of three lines
of text.
Word 2013 has two basic drop-cap styles:
▪▪ Dropped The letter is embedded in the original paragraph.
▪▪ In margin The letter occupies its own column, and the remaining paragraph text
is moved to the right.
To format the first letter of a paragraph as a drop cap:
1 Click anywhere in the paragraph.
2 On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click the Add a Drop Cap button and then click
the drop cap style you want to apply.
To change the font, height, or distance between the drop cap and the paragraph text,
click Drop Cap Options on the Drop Cap menu, and then format the options in the
Drop Cap dialog box.
If you want to apply the drop cap format to more than the first letter of the paragraph, add the drop cap to the paragraph, click to the right of the letter in the text
box, and enter the rest of the word or text that you want to make stand out. If you do
this, don’t forget to delete the word from the beginning of the paragraph!
190 Chapter 5 Add simple graphic elements
Inserting symbols
Some documents require characters not found on a standard keyboard. These characters might include the copyright (©) or registered trademark (®) symbols, currency
symbols (such as € or £), Greek letters, or letters with accent marks. Or you might want
to add arrows (such as ì or ë) or graphic icons (such as ( or Q). Word gives you easy access to a huge array of symbols that you can easily insert into any document.
Like graphics, symbols can add visual information or eye appeal to a document. How­
ever, they are different from graphics in that they are characters associated with a
particular font.
TIP You can insert some common symbols by typing a keyboard combination. For
example, if you enter two consecutive dashes followed by a word and a space, Word
changes the two dashes to a professional-looking em-dash—like this one. (This symbol gets its name from the fact that it was originally the width of the character m.) To
use these keyboard shortcuts, display the Backstage view, click Options, and on the
Proofing page of the Word Options dialog box, click AutoCorrect Options. On the
AutoCorrect page of the AutoCorrect dialog box, ensure that the Replace Text As You
Type check box is selected, and then select or clear check boxes in the Replace Text As
You Type area of the AutoFormat As You Type page. You can review many of the available shortcuts on the Special Characters page of the Symbol dialog box.
Key points
▪▪ You can insert illustrations created with most graphics programs, as well as digital
photos, into a Word document.
▪▪ A background color, texture, pattern, or picture can really give a document pizzazz,
but be careful that it doesn’t overwhelm the text.
▪▪ Word comes with predefined building blocks that quickly add graphic elements to a
document.
▪▪ By using WordArt, you can easily add fancy text to a document and then format and
position it for the best effect.
Key points 191
5
Chapter at a glance
Preview Preview and adjust page layout,
page 194
Control Control what appears on each page,
page 200
Prepare Distribute Prepare documents for electronic
distribution, page 206
Print and send documents,
page 212
Preview, print, and
distribute documents
6
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Preview and adjust page layout.
Control what appears on each page.
Prepare documents for electronic distribution.
Print and send documents.
When you finish developing a document, you’ll often want to distribute either a printed
version or an electronic version. Before committing the document to paper, you should
check that the pages are efficiently laid out and that there are no glaring problems, such
as headings that print on separate pages from their text. Microsoft Word 2013 provides
several tools you can use to manipulate how much text appears on each page and to control page layout. When you are ready to print, you can control precisely how many copies
and what parts of your document appear on paper.
If you intend to distribute your document electronically, Word provides tools for ensuring that the document doesn’t contain unresolved revisions, hidden text, or identifying
information that you might not want to send out. It also provides tools for indicating that
a document is final and ready to distribute, and makes it easy to send the document by
using email.
In this chapter, you’ll first preview a document and make some adjustments to improve its
presentation. Then you’ll look at the options available for controlling page breaks and learn
about problems that might occur. You’ll inspect a document for confidential information
and finalize it for electronic distribution. Finally, you’ll print and email a document.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter06 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
193
Previewing and adjusting page layout
Working on your document in the default Print Layout view means that you always know
how the document content will appear on the printed page. While you’re working in the
document, you can use the commands in the Page Setup group on the Page Layout tab to
adjust the margins and the direction of the page (the page orientation) to best suit your content and delivery method. If you’re planning to deliver the document at a page size other
than the default, you can format the document to display and print correctly by changing
the paper size.
Although the layout of each page is visible in Print Layout view, it’s also a good idea to preview the whole document before you print it. This gives you more of a high-level overview
of the document than when you’re working directly in the content. Previewing is essential
for multipage documents but is helpful even for one-page documents. You can preview a
document by displaying the Print page of the Backstage view and then page through the
document displayed in the right pane. This view shows exactly how each page of the document will look when printed on the specified printer.
The Print page of the Backstage view.
194 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
If you don’t like what appears in the preview pane of the Print page, you don’t have to leave
the Backstage view to make adjustments. The left pane of the Print page provides access to
many of the commands that are available in the Page Setup group on the Page Layout tab,
allowing you to change the following document settings while previewing their effect on
the printed page:
▪▪ Orientation You can switch the direction in which a page is laid out on the paper.
The default orientation is Portrait, in which the page is taller than it is wide. You can
set the orientation to Landscape, in which the page is wider than it is tall.
▪▪ Paper size You can switch to one of the sizes available for the selected printer by
making a selection from a list.
▪▪ Margins Changing the margins of a document changes where information can
appear on each page. You can select one of Word’s predefined sets of top, bottom,
left, and right margins, or set custom margins.
TIP All the pages of a document have the same orientation and margins unless you
divide the document into sections. Then each section can have independent orientation and margin settings. For more information about sections, see “Controlling what
appears on each page” later in this chapter.
To configure multiple print layout settings in one place, or to configure settings for only
specific sections of the document, click Page Setup on the Print page (or click the Page
Setup dialog box launcher on the Page Layout tab) to open the Page Setup dialog box, in
which you can configure additional options.
SEE ALSO We work with the Page Setup dialog box in the next exercise.
When you have the settings as you want them, click the large Print button at the top of the
Print page to send the document to the printer.
Previewing and adjusting page layout 195
6
In this exercise, you’ll preview a document, change the orientation, and adjust the margins.
SET UP You need the InfoSheetA document located in the Chapter06 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
IMPORTANT The exercises in this chapter require that you have a printer installed. On a default
installation of Windows 8 or Windows 7 and Office 2013, the Fax, Microsoft XPS Document Writer,
and Send To OneNote 2013 options will appear in your Printers list. You can complete the following
exercise by using one of those options or an actual local or network printer connection.
1
Display the Backstage view, and in the left pane, click the Print page tab to display
the print options and the document preview. Notice that the page navigator below
the preview pane indicates that the document will print on two pages, and the pre­
view pane does not display the shaded background of the document because the
shading will not be printed.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+P to display the Print page of the Backstage view.
For more information about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end
of this book.
2
In the lower-right corner of the preview pane, click the Zoom Out button until the
two pages of the document are displayed side by side in the preview pane.
You can select a specific zoom level or number of pages to display.
196 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
TIP If you want to preview a multipage document as it will look when printed on
both sides of the page and bound, add a blank page or a cover page to the beginning of the document before previewing it.
3
In the Settings area of the Print page, click Normal Margins to display the Margins
menu. This is the same menu that appears when you click the Margins button in the
Page Setup group on the Page Layout tab.
6
You can select from predefined margin settings, or you can set your own.
4
On the Margins menu, click Wide. Notice that the change is immediately reflected
in the preview pane, and the page navigator indicates that the document now has
three pages.
5
In the page navigator, click the Next Page button two times to display the new
third page.
6
At the bottom of the left pane of the Print page, click the Page Setup link to display
the Margins page of the Page Setup dialog box. Notice that selecting Wide margins
on the Print page set the Left and Right margins to 2 inches.
Previewing and adjusting page layout 197
7
In the Orientation area, click Landscape. Notice that the settings in the Margins area
change so that Top and Bottom are now set to 2 inches and Left and Right are set to
1 inch. This change is also reflected in the Preview area of the dialog box.
8
In the Multiple pages list, click Mirror margins to indicate that you want to set
margins for facing pages. Notice that the Preview area changes to display two
pages and the Left and Right margin labels change to Inside and Outside.
9
In the Margins area, click or type to set the Inside margin to 2”.
The Mirror Margins setting is a good choice when you plan to print and
bind a double-sided document.
198 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
10
In the Page Setup dialog box, click the Paper tab and then the Layout tab, and
notice the available options on those pages. Then click OK to return to the Print
page of the Backstage view. In the Settings area and preview pane, notice the
effect of the changes that you made in the Page Setup dialog box.
6
You can significantly change the appearance of a document while preparing it for print.
11
Experiment with other print settings to see what is available for your installed printer.
+
CLEAN UP Close the InfoSheetA document, saving your changes if you want to.
TIP By default, hidden text does not print with the document. If you want to print the
hidden text as well as the non-hidden text, select the Print Hidden Text check box in
the Printing Options area of the Display page of the Word Options dialog box.
Previewing and adjusting page layout 199
Controlling what appears on each page
When a document includes more content than will fit between its top and bottom margins,
Word creates a new page by inserting a soft page break (a page break that moves if the
preceding content changes). If you want to break a page in a place other than where Word
would normally break it, you can insert a manual page break in one of three ways:
▪▪ Click Page Break in the Pages group on the Insert tab.
▪▪ Click Breaks in the Page Setup group on the Page Layout tab, and then click Page.
▪▪ Press Ctrl+Enter.
TIP As you edit the content of a document, Word changes the location of the soft page
breaks, but not of any manual page breaks that you insert.
If a paragraph breaks so that most of it appears on one page but its last line appears at the
top of the next page, the line is called a widow. If a paragraph breaks so that its first line appears at the bottom of one page and the rest of the paragraph appears on the next page,
the line is called an orphan. These single lines of text can make a document hard to read, so
by default, Word specifies that a minimum of two lines should appear at the top and bottom of each page. As with so many other aspects of the program, however, you have control over this setting. On the Line And Page Breaks page of the Paragraph dialog box, you
can specify whether widows and orphans are controlled or permitted. You can also change
the following options:
▪▪ Keep with next This option controls whether Word will break a page between the
paragraph and the following paragraph.
▪▪ Keep lines together This option controls whether Word will break a page within
the paragraph.
▪▪ Page break before This option controls whether Word will break a page before
the paragraph.
TIP You can apply these options to individual paragraphs, or you can incorporate them
into the styles you define for document elements such as headings. For information about
styles, see “Creating custom styles and templates” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more
efficiently.”
When you want to format part of a document differently from the rest, for example with
page layout settings that are different from the surrounding text, you do so by inserting
section breaks above and below it. A common example of this is when you need to print a
200 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
wide table on a page with a Landscape orientation within a report that has a Portrait page
orientation.
TIP Formatting selected text in columns automatically inserts section breaks. For more
information, see “Presenting information in columns” in Chapter 4, “Organize information
in columns and tables.”
You insert a section break by clicking Breaks in the Page Setup group on the Page Layout
tab and then selecting from the following section types:
▪▪ Next Page Starts the following section on the next page
▪▪ Continuous Starts a new section without affecting page breaks
▪▪ Even Page Starts the following section on the next even-numbered page
▪▪ Odd Page Starts the following section on the next odd-numbered page
When hidden formatting marks are displayed, a section break appears in Print Layout view
as a double-dotted line from the preceding paragraph mark to the margin, with the words
Section Break and the type of section break in the middle of the line.
TIP To remove a page or section break, click at the left end of the break, or select the
break, and then press the Delete key.
In this exercise, you’ll insert page and section breaks and ensure that the pages break in
logical places.
SET UP You need the OfficeInfo document located in the Chapter06 practice file folder
to complete this exercise. Open the document, display formatting marks, and then follow
the steps.
1
Scroll through the document, noticing any awkward page breaks, such as a topic or
list that starts close to the bottom of a page.
TIP If you drag the scroll box in the scroll bar, Word displays the current page
number in a ScreenTip.
First we’ll configure some common settings for all the document elements.
2
On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click the Select button, and then click
Select All.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+A to select all content in the document.
Controlling what appears on each page 201
6
3
Click the Paragraph dialog box launcher, and then in the Paragraph dialog box,
click the Line and Page Breaks tab. Because different settings have been applied
to different paragraphs in the document, all the check boxes contain small black
squares.
Filled check boxes indicate that the setting is not the same for all selected content.
4
Double-click each check box to clear it. (Clicking once inserts a check mark; clicking
twice clears it.)
5
Click the Keep lines together check box twice to select it, and then click OK to
ensure that none of the paragraphs will be broken across two pages. Then press
Home to release the selection and return to the beginning of the document.
202 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
The small black square to the left of each paragraph indicates that the Keep Lines Together
option is selected for that paragraph.
Now we’ll adjust the way content breaks across individual pages.
6
Click to position the cursor at the left end of the Warehouse heading (be careful
not to click the triangle that collapses the content below the heading).
7
On the Insert tab, in the Pages group, click the Page Break button to move the
Warehouse heading and the following text to the next page.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+Enter to insert a page break.
8
Near the bottom of page 2, select To order stationery and the eight list items that
follow, and then display the Line and Page Breaks page of the Paragraph dialog box.
9
In the Pagination area, leave the Keep lines together check box selected, select the
Keep with next check box, and then click OK to move the list introduction and steps
to the beginning of the next page with the remainder of the list.
TIP By selecting Keep With Next instead of inserting a page break, you allow the
content to move from page to page as long as it stays with the following paragraph.
10
In the middle of page 3, select all the bulleted list items. On the Page Layout tab, in
the Page Setup group, click the Columns button, and then click Two to enclose the
bulleted list items inside section breaks and put all the list items on one page.
Controlling what appears on each page 203
6
TIP By this point you have probably noticed that it’s important to set manual page
breaks and layout options from the beginning of a document to the end, because
each change you make affects the content from that point forward.
11
At the bottom of page 5 and top of page 6, select the heading What is the payment
method? and the paragraph and first three bulleted list items that follow the heading.
12
Display the Line and Page Breaks page of the Paragraph dialog box, select the Keep
with next check box, and then click OK to move the heading and table introduction to
the beginning of the next page.
13
At the bottom of page 6, click at the left end of the Shipping Quick Reference
heading.
14
On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click the Breaks button, and then
below the Section Breaks heading, click Next Page to create a new section.
The heading and table move to the next page, after the section break indicator.
15
Display page 7 and ensure that the cursor is in the Shipping Quick Reference head­
ing. On the Page Layout tab, in the Page Setup group, click the Margins button and
then click Wide to make the table narrower to better fit its content.
204 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
Finally, we’ll configure the header and footer in accordance with the changes we’ve
made to the content.
16
On the Insert tab, in the Header & Footer group, click the Header button, and then
click Edit Header.
Notice that on the Header & Footer Tools Design tab, in the Navigation group, the
Link to Previous button is selected. This indicates that this section has inherited the
header and footer settings of the preceding section. Because the preceding section
has no header or footer on its first page, this one doesn’t either.
SEE ALSO For more information about headers and footers, see “Inserting preformatted document parts” in Chapter 9, “Add visual elements.”
17
On the Design tool tab, in the Options group, clear the Different First Page check
box to add the header to this page.
6
You might have to adjust the header and footer settings after creating a new section.
18
+
Click the Close Header and Footer button.
CLEAN UP Close the OfficeInfo document, saving your changes if you want to.
Controlling what appears on each page 205
Preparing documents for
electronic distribution
When a document is complete, you can distribute it in two ways: printed on paper or electronically. When you distribute a printed document, only the printed information is visible
to the reader. When you distribute a document electronically, you should ensure that no
confidential information is attached to the file and that it can be viewed by the people to
whom you are sending it.
Many documents go through several revisions, and some are scrutinized by multiple reviewers. During this development process, documents can accumulate information that you
might not want in the final version, such as the names of people who worked on the document, the time spent working on the document, and comments that reviewers have added
to the file. There might also be hidden tracked changes. This extraneous information is not
a concern if the final version is to be delivered as a printout. However, it has become very
common to deliver documents electronically, making this information available to anyone
who wants to read it.
Some of the information that is attached to the document is available with the document
properties on the Info page of the Backstage view. You can change or remove some types
of information from this page and more from either the Document Panel or the Properties
dialog box. However, Word provides a tool called the Document Inspector that automates
the process of finding and removing all extraneous and potentially confidential information.
After you run the Document Inspector, a summary of its search results is displayed, and you
have the option of removing all the items found in each category.
IMPORTANT By default, Word 2013 is configured to remove certain personal properties when
saving a document. If you want to change this setting, display the Trust Center page of the Word
Options dialog box, click Trust Center Settings, and then on the Privacy Options page of the Trust
Center dialog box, clear the Remove Personal Information From File Properties On Save check box.
Then click OK in each of the open dialog boxes to save the setting.
Word also includes two other finalizing tools:
▪▪ Accessibility Checker Identifies document elements and formatting that might be
difficult for people with certain kinds of disabilities to read or for assistive devices
such as screen readers to access
▪▪ Compatibility Checker Identifies formatting and features not supported in earlier
versions of Word
206 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
After you remove extraneous information and overcome accessibility and compatibility
issues, you can mark a document as final, so that other people know that they should
not make changes to this released document.
In this exercise, you’ll inspect a document, remove confidential information, and mark it
as final.
SET UP You need the InfoSheetB document located in the Chapter06 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
Display the Backstage view, which opens by default to the Info page. The Properties
section lists properties that have been saved with the file. Some of the information,
including the name of the author, was attached to the file by Word. Other informa­
tion, such as the title, was added by a user.
6
Some of the properties attached to the sample document.
Preparing documents for electronic distribution 207
2
Click the Properties button, and then in the list, click Advanced Properties to open
the Properties dialog box for this document. On the General page of the dialog box
are properties maintained by Word.
3
Click the Summary tab to display additional identifying information on this page.
Properties such as these are specifically attached to a document.
TIP To make a document easier to find, you can add tags in the Properties area of
the Info page or keywords in the Properties dialog box.
4
5
Click Cancel to close the Properties dialog box.
In the Inspect Document area of the Info page, click the Check for Issues button,
and then click Inspect Document to open the Document Inspector dialog box,
listing the items that will be checked.
TROUBLESHOOTING If Word prompts you to save changes to the file, click Yes.
6
Without changing the default selections in the Document Inspector dialog box, click
Inspect to view the Document Inspector report on the presence of the properties
you viewed earlier, as well as headers and footers, and possibly custom XML data.
208 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
6
Not visible in the image are the results for Invisible Content and Hidden Text; neither was found.
7
8
To the right of Document Properties and Personal Information, click Remove All.
If custom XML data was found, click the Remove All button in that section.
IMPORTANT Do not click the Remove All button to the right of Headers, Footers, And
Watermarks. You can choose to retain content identified by the Document Inspector if you
know that it is appropriate for distribution.
9
In the Document Inspector dialog box, click Reinspect, and then click Inspect to
verify the removal of the properties and XML data.
10
Close the Document Inspector dialog box and display the Info page of the
Backstage view. Notice that the Properties area displays only properties related
to the file, and not those that are attached to the document.
11
In the Protect Document area of the Info page, click the Protect Document button,
and then click Mark As Final. A message tells you that the document will be marked
as final and then saved.
Preparing documents for electronic distribution 209
12
In the message box, click OK. A message tells you that the document has been
marked as final, the status property has been set to Final, and typing, editing
commands, and proofing marks are turned off.
13
In the message box, click OK. The document title bar indicates that the document is
read-only (no changes can be saved), and the Protect Document area indicates that
the file has been marked as final.
The Info page reminds people that the file is final.
14
Click the Return button (the arrow) above the Backstage view page tabs to return
to the document. Notice that only the ribbon tabs are visible; the commands are
hidden.
15
Click the Insert tab to temporarily expand it, and notice that all the buttons are
inactive (dimmed). Then click away from the tab to contract it. Word displays an
information bar, notifying you that the document has been marked as final.
The information bar discourages people from making casual changes.
TIP If you really want to make changes to the document, you can click the Edit Any-
way button on the information bar to remove the Final designation and read-only
protection from the file.
+
CLEAN UP Close the InfoSheetB document, saving your changes if you want to.
210 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
Digitally signing documents
When you create a document that will be circulated to other people in electronic form
(by sending the file in an email message or posting it for other people to access), you
might want to attach a digital signature, which is an electronic stamp of authentication. The digital signature confirms the origin of the document and indicates that no
one has tampered with the document since it was signed. The digital signature remains valid until changes are made to the document.
To add a digital signature to a Word document:
1 O
n the Info page of the Backstage view, click the Protect Document button, and
then click Add a Digital Signature to open the Sign dialog box.
TROUBLESHOOTING If a digital ID is not installed on your computer, the Get A
Digital ID message box will open. You can click Yes in the message box to connect
to the Microsoft website and from there to a Microsoft partner site from which
you can get a digital ID.
2 In the Commitment Type list, click the entry to indicate whether you created,
approved, or created and approved the document.
3 In the Purpose for signing this document box, enter the reason that you are
attaching the digital signature to the document.
4 To attach specific details to your digital signature, click the Details button and
enter your name, title, and the address of the document production location in
the Additional Signing Information dialog box. Then click OK.
5 To display additional information about the document you’re signing and the source
information stored with the signature, click the See additional information link.
6 When you finish providing and reviewing signature information, click Sign. If Word
prompts you to verify that you want to use the current digital certificate, click Yes.
The document is marked as final, the status property is set to Final, and typing,
editing commands, and proofing marks are turned off. Flags on the Info page indicate that the document has been signed. Anyone who wants to edit the document
must first acknowledge and dismiss the digital signature.
Preparing documents for electronic distribution 211
6
Printing and sending documents
When you’re ready to distribute your document to other people, you can do so either by
printing it on paper or by sending it electronically. You can also distribute the document in
other formats, present it online, or post it to a blog. We discuss those options in Chapter 11,
“Create documents for use outside of Word.”
When you are ready to print a document, you display the Print page of the Backstage view,
and then, to print one copy on the current printer with the settings shown, you simply click
the Print button.
TIP You can add the Quick Print button to the Quick Access Toolbar and then print a document with the default settings by simply clicking the button. For more information, see
“Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more efficiently.”
From the Settings area of the Print page, you can specify what part of the document is printed and whether markup (tracked changes) is indicated in the printed document. In addition,
you have the option of printing the following information instead of the document content:
▪▪ Document properties
▪▪ Tracked changes
▪▪ Styles
▪▪ AutoText entries
▪▪ Custom shortcut keys
You can choose to print a multipage document on one or both sides of the paper. If your
printer supports double-sided printing, you have the option of flipping the double-sided
page on the long edge or the short edge (depending on how you plan to bind and turn the
document pages).
IMPORTANT Some of the settings on the Print page of the Backstage view are dependent on the
functionality supported by your printer. These settings may vary when you select a different device
in the Printer list.
You can choose to print multiple copies of a document and whether to print collated pages
(all pages of each copy together) or uncollated pages (all copies of each page together).
Finally, you have the option of specifying the number of pages to print per sheet of paper,
up to 16. You can use this option to print a booklet with two pages per sheet that will be
folded in the middle. You might also use this option to save paper when you’re printing a
212 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
long document, but bear in mind that as the number of pages per sheet increases, the size
of the content printed on the page decreases.
TIP If your printer has multiple paper trays or a manual paper feeder, you can select the
paper source you want to use, on the Paper page of the Page Setup dialog box.
If you prefer to send the document electronically, and you have configured Microsoft
Outlook 2013 to connect to an email account, you can do so directly from within Word.
You can send the document as a Word file, or if you want to ensure that the document
content is displayed to the recipient exactly as you intend, you can send it as a PDF file or
an XPS file. If you have a subscription to an online fax service, you can also send the document over the Internet to a fax machine. The beauty of all these options is that you can
perform them directly from within Word without starting another program, using another
device, or even getting up from your chair.
6
If your file is saved on a Microsoft SkyDrive or Microsoft SharePoint site, the Send A Link option will also
be available.
Printing and sending documents 213
IMPORTANT To use the Email sharing option, you must have Outlook installed and configured on
your computer. If you’re running another email program, this option will be available on the Share
page of the Backstage view but might not generate an email message.
Clicking Send As Attachment opens a message window with the current document already
attached as a .docx file. All you have to do is enter the email addresses of anyone you want
to receive the message and its attachment. If you want, you can modify the subject line,
which contains the name of the document you’re sending.
Similarly, you can click Send As PDF or Send As XPS to attach a version of the document
saved in the corresponding file format.
In addition to sending a document as an email attachment from within Word, if you have
signed up with an Internet fax service provider, you can send the document as a fax.
Although the exact terms vary from one provider to another, these services let you send
and receive faxes from your computer without needing a fax machine or dedicated fax line.
After establishing an Internet fax service account, you can send the current document as
a fax by clicking Send As Internet Fax on the Share page. You then follow the procedure
specified by your fax service provider.
TIP If you do not sign up with an Internet fax service provider before clicking Send As Inter-
net Fax, a message box appears. Clicking OK opens a webpage where you can choose a fax
service provider.
In this exercise, you’ll first become familiar with the printer options. You’ll print part of a
document and send the document as an email message attachment. Then you’ll send a PDF
version of the document as an email message attachment.
SET UP You need the InfoSheetC document located in the Chapter06 practice file
folder, and an active printer connection, to complete this exercise. You must also have
configured Outlook to connect to your email account. Open the document, and then
follow the steps.
1
Display the Print page of the Backstage view. Notice that this is a two-page
document. The colored document background is not displayed in the preview
pane, because it will not be printed.
2
In the Printer area, click the active printer to display the list of installed printers.
214 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
6
Programs to which you can print, such as Microsoft OneNote, might be installed here as well
as local and network printers.
TIP You can manage these programs and printers from the Devices And Printers
control panel item.
3
In the Printer list, click the printer to which you want to send the document. Notice
that the options available on the Print page might change when you select a differ­
ent printer.
4
Point to the Information icon in the upper-right corner of the Printer area, or to the
selected printer name, to display a ScreenTip that contains printer status information.
Printing and sending documents 215
The printer status information includes the installed driver and connection information.
5
In the Settings area, click Print All Pages, and then scroll through the list to review
the options for printing specific parts of the document, or document information.
You can choose to print all or part of a document, or to print information that is
stored with the document.
216 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
6
7
In the list, click Custom Print, and then in the Pages box, enter 2.
In the Copies box at the top of the page, enter 2. Then click the Print button to print
two copies of the second page of the document on the selected printer and return to
the document.
Now let’s send the document as an email message attachment.
8
Display the Share page of the Backstage view. In the Share area, click Email, and
then in the Email area, click Send as Attachment to open a message window.
TROUBLESHOOTING If Outlook isn’t already running, Word starts it before generat-
ing the email message. Enter your password if you are prompted to do so.
6
Word enters the name of the document in the Subject line and attaches the document to the
message.
SEE ALSO For information about the many fabulous features of Outlook 2013, refer
to Microsoft Outlook 2013 Step by Step by Joan Lambert and Joyce Cox (Microsoft
Press, 2013).
Printing and sending documents 217
9
In the To box, enter your own email address. Then in the message header, click the
Send button to send the message to yourself.
TIP When working in the message window, you are working in Outlook, not in Word.
You can attach other files to the email message, set message options, and format the
message content just as you would in an email message you create from scratch.
Finally, let’s send a PDF version of the document as an email message attachment.
10
Display the Share page of the Backstage view. In the Share area, click Email, and
then in the Email area, click Send as PDF to open a message window.
Word creates a PDF version of the document and attaches it to the message without saving it to
your hard drive.
11
In the To box, enter your own email address. Then in the message header, click the
Send button to send the message to yourself.
+
CLEAN UP Close the InfoSheetC document.
218 Chapter 6 Preview, print, and distribute documents
Key points
▪▪ You should always preview a document before printing it. You can efficiently preview
a document and perform most page layout commands from the Print page of the
Backstage view.
▪▪ You can use line break options, page breaks, and section breaks to ensure that document content is readable.
▪▪ Before distributing a document electronically, you can use the Document Inspector to
remove information that you don’t want other people to see. You can use the Accessibility Checker and Compatibility Checker to ensure that your document content is
available to recipients who aren’t using the same system as you.
▪▪ You can print a document to a local or network printer, and configure the printer
settings, from the Print page of the Backstage view.
▪▪ You can send a document as an attachment to an email message from the Share page
of the Backstage view. When sending a document, you can send the original document file or, if you want to ensure that the document is displayed to recipients exactly
as you have laid it out, you can have Word create and send a PDF file or XPS file.
Key points 219
6
Document
enhancements
7 Insert and modify diagrams
223
8 Insert and modify charts
245
9 Add visual elements
265
10 Organize and arrange content
297
11 Create documents for use outside of Word 321
Chapter at a glance
Create Create diagrams,
page 224
Illustrate Create picture diagrams,
page 239
Modify Modify diagrams,
page 231
Insert and modify
diagrams
7
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Create diagrams.
Modify diagrams.
Create picture diagrams.
Diagrams are graphics that convey information. Business documents often include diagrams
to clarify concepts, describe processes, and show hierarchical relationships. Microsoft Word
2013 includes a powerful diagramming feature called SmartArt that you can use to create
diagrams directly in your documents. By using ready-made yet dynamic diagram templates,
you can produce sophisticated results tailored to your needs.
SmartArt diagrams can illustrate many different types of concepts. Although graphic in nature, SmartArt diagrams are merely visual containers for information stored as bulleted lists.
You can also incorporate pictures and other images to create truly spectacular, yet divinely
professional, diagrams.
In this chapter, you’ll insert a diagram into a document and specify its size and position.
Then you’ll change the diagram’s layout, visual style, and color theme. Finally, you’ll use a
diagram to arrange pictures in a document.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter07 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
223
Creating diagrams
When you need your document to clearly illustrate a concept such as a process, cycle, hierarchy, or relationship, the powerful SmartArt Graphics tool is available to help you create a
dynamic, visually appealing diagram. By using predefined sets of sophisticated formatting,
you can almost effortlessly put together any of the following diagrams:
▪▪ List These diagrams visually represent lists of related or independent information—
for example, a list of items needed to complete a task, including pictures of the items.
▪▪ Process These diagrams visually describe the ordered set of steps that are required
to complete a task—for example, the steps for getting a project approved.
▪▪ Cycle These diagrams represent a circular sequence of steps, tasks, or events, or the
relationship of a set of steps, tasks, or events to a central, core element—for example,
the looping process for continually improving a product based on customer feedback.
▪▪ Hierarchy These diagrams illustrate the structure of an organization or entity—
for example, the top-level management structure of a company.
▪▪ Relationship These diagrams show convergent, divergent, overlapping, merging,
or containment elements—for example, how using similar methods to organize your
email, calendar, and contacts can improve your productivity.
▪▪ Matrix These diagrams show the relationship of components to a whole—for
example, the product teams in a department.
▪▪ Pyramid These diagrams illustrate proportional or interconnected relationships—
for example, the amount of time that should ideally be spent on different phases of
a project.
▪▪ Picture These diagrams rely on pictures instead of text to create one of the other
types of diagrams—for example, a process picture diagram with photographs showing the recession of glaciers in Glacier National Park. Picture diagrams are a subset of
the other categories but are also available from their own category so that you can
easily locate diagram layouts that support images.
To create a SmartArt diagram in Word 2013, you begin by selecting the type of diagram
you want to create from the Choose A SmartArt Graphic dialog box. The categories are not
mutually exclusive, meaning that some diagrams appear in more than one category.
224 Chapter 7 Insert and modify diagrams
Word 2013 includes more SmartArt templates than previous versions of Word.
After you choose a layout, Word inserts the basic diagram into the document and displays
the associated list format in the Text pane, into which you can enter information. You can
enter more or less information than is required by the original diagram; most diagrams support a range of entries (although a few are formatted to support only a specific number of
entries). You can insert and modify text either directly in the diagram shapes or in the associated Text pane. Depending on the diagram type, the text appears in or adjacent to its
shapes.
In this exercise, you’ll create a simple diagram, add text, adjust the diagram size, and specify
the diagram’s position in relation to the document text and page margins.
SET UP You need the ServiceA document located in the Chapter07 practice file folder
to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
2
Click to position the cursor at the left end of the Gather Information heading.
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click the SmartArt button to display all
the available SmartArt graphic layouts in the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+N+M to open the Choose A SmartArt Graphic
dialog box. For more information about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end of this book.
Creating diagrams 225
7
3
In the left pane, click each diagram category in turn to display only the available
layouts of that type in the center pane.
4
In the left pane, click Process. Then in the center pane, click each process diagram
layout in turn to view an example, along with a description of what the diagram best
conveys, in the right pane. While you are exploring, imagine the types of data that
you might diagram by using the various layouts.
Diagrams that include spaces for pictures have “Picture” in the layout name.
TIP The diagram element colors shown in the preview pane are representational
only. SmartArt diagrams that you insert into a document will take on the current
theme colors of that document.
5
When you finish exploring, click the second thumbnail in the seventh row (Vertical
Process), and then click OK to insert the process diagram at the cursor.
TIP Depending on your screen resolution, there might be a description of the Verti-
cal Process diagram at the bottom of the Text pane. If your Text pane looks like the
one in our graphic, you can point to Vertical Process to display the description in a
ScreenTip.
TROUBLESHOOTING If the Text pane is not open, click the chevron on the left side of
the diagram frame to open it. You can also display and hide the Text pane by clicking
the Text Pane button in the Create Graphic group on the Design tool tab.
226 Chapter 7 Insert and modify diagrams
Three text placeholders appear in the diagram shapes and in the adjacent Text pane, where the
text placeholders are formatted as a bulleted list.
Now we’ll enter content into the diagram.
6
With the cursor in the first bulleted item in the Text pane, enter the following:
Gather inform­ation. Then press the Down Arrow key to move the cursor to the
next place­holder. Notice that as you enter letters in the bulleted list, they appear in
the corresponding diagram shape.
TROUBLESHOOTING Be sure to press the Down Arrow key. If you press the Enter key,
you’ll add a new bullet, and if you press the Tab key, you’ll change the current firstlevel bullet into a second-level bullet.
7
Enter Set up team in the second bulleted list item, press the Down Arrow key, and
then enter Plan project in the third bulleted list item.
TIP For a clean look, don’t enter any punctuation at the end of the text in diagram
shapes.
Creating diagrams 227
7
8
With the cursor at the end of the third bulleted item in the Text pane, press Enter to
extend the bulleted list and add a new shape to the diagram. Then enter Meet with
department. Notice that the diagram shapes adjust to accommodate the new entry,
and the text in all the shapes resizes so that the longest entry fits.
You can easily add more shapes and levels to the diagram.
9
In the Text pane, click the Close button. Notice that the diagram is awkwardly
located and surrounded by a lot of white space.
Next we’ll resize the diagram and specify how text flows around it.
10
On the right side of the diagram frame, point to the sizing handle (the square), and
when the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow, drag to the left until the frame
is approximately as wide as the shapes within the diagram.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you drag further to the left, the diagram shapes resize to fit
the new space. If this happens, drag a bit back to the right. The final width should be
approximately 2.5 inches.
TIP You can also resize the diagram frame by selecting it and then entering the size
you want in the Height and Width boxes in the Size group on the Format tool tab.
11
When you release the mouse button, the Layout Options button appears to the right
of the diagram frame. Click the Layout Options button to expand the menu.
228 Chapter 7 Insert and modify diagrams
The diagram is anchored to the Gather Information heading and moves with it.
12
On the Layout Options menu, in the With Text Wrapping area, click the first
thumbnail (Square) to move the text that follows the graphic to its right side.
TIP Layout options are also available from the Wrap Text menu in the Arrange group
on the Format tool tab. For information about text wrapping, see “Arranging objects
on the page” in Chapter 10, “Organize and arrange content.”
13
On the Layout Options menu, click the See more link.
Options on this page control where the diagram appears relative to other document elements.
Creating diagrams 229
7
14
On the Position page of the Layout dialog box, in the Horizontal area, click
Alignment. Then click the Alignment arrow, and in the list, click Right. Leave the
relative to setting as Column.
15
In the Vertical area, click Alignment. Leave the Alignment setting as Top, and
change the relative to setting to Line.
16
Click OK and then click away from the diagram to display the results. The diagram
now sits neatly to the right of the text, to support the content without interrupting
its flow.
You can align and size the diagram to fit your needs.
+
CLEAN UP Close the ServiceA document, saving your changes if you want to.
230 Chapter 7 Insert and modify diagrams
Modifying diagrams
After you create a diagram and add the text you want to display in it, you might find that
the diagram layout you originally selected doesn’t precisely meet your needs. You can easily
change to a different diagram layout without losing any of the information you entered in
the diagram. If a particular layout doesn’t support the amount of information that is associated with the diagram, the extra text will be hidden but not deleted and will be available
when you choose another layout that does support that amount of text.
When you have the layout you want to use, you can add and remove shapes and edit the
text of the diagram by making changes in the Text pane. You can also customize the diagram by using the options on the SmartArt Tools tabs.
You can make changes such as the following by using the commands on the Design
tool tab:
▪▪ Add shading and three-dimensional effects to all the shapes in a diagram.
▪▪ Change the color scheme.
▪▪ Add shapes and change their hierarchy.
TIP You can remove a shape and its text by selecting it in the diagram or in the
Text pane and then pressing the Delete key. You can also rearrange shapes by
dragging them.
You can customize individual shapes in the following ways by using the commands on the
Format tool tab:
▪▪ Change an individual shape—for example, you can change a square into a star.
▪▪ Apply a built-in shape style.
▪▪ Change the color, outline, or effect of a shape.
▪▪ Change the style of the shape’s text.
The Live Preview feature displays the effects of these changes before you apply them. If you
apply changes and then decide you preferred the original version, you can click the Reset
Graphic button in the Reset group on the Design tool tab to return to the unaltered diagram layout.
Modifying diagrams 231
7
In this exercise, you’ll change a diagram’s layout, style, and colors. Then you’ll change the
shape and color of one of its elements and customize copies of the diagram.
SET UP You need the ServiceB document located in the Chapter07 practice file folder
to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
Scroll through the document and change the zoom level if necessary so that the
diagram is visible in the lower-right corner of the program window.
2
Click a blank area inside the diagram frame (not one of the shapes) to activate the
diagram and the associated tool tabs.
TROUBLESHOOTING Be sure to click a blank area away from any shapes. If handles
appear around a shape in the diagram, that shape is selected, either for editing or for
manipulation, instead of the diagram as a whole.
3
On the Design tool tab, in the Layouts group, click the More button to expand the
Layouts gallery. This view of the gallery displays only the available Process diagram
layouts because the current diagram layout is from the Process category.
You can easily switch to another layout in the same category.
232 Chapter 7 Insert and modify diagrams
TIP If a gallery has a sizing handle (three dots) in its lower-right corner, as this one
does, you can drag the handle upward to reduce the height of the gallery. You can
then display more of the document and the gallery at the same time.
4
Point to each thumbnail in the Layouts gallery to preview the diagram with that
layout. Because changing the layout does not change the width of the diagram
frame, some of the horizontal layouts create a very small diagram. Notice that some
of the layouts (such as those in the last row of the gallery) treat the diagram entries
differently than others, and some don’t support all seven entries.
5
In the Layouts gallery, click the third thumbnail in the fifth row (Basic Bending
Process) to change the diagram to two columns with arrows indicating the
process flow.
7
The Basic Bending Process diagram.
6
Point to the sizing handle on the left side of the diagram frame (the left edge of the
Text Pane button), and when the pointer changes to a two-headed arrow, drag the
frame to the left until the diagram occupies about half the page width. When you
release the mouse button, the shapes in the diagram expand to fill the resized frame.
7
Drag the sizing handle on the bottom of the diagram frame up so that the diagram
ends just above the Questions for Department Reps heading.
Modifying diagrams 233
The resized diagram.
8
On the Design tool tab, in the SmartArt Styles group, click the More button to
expand the SmartArt Styles gallery.
You can apply two-dimensional or three-dimensional styles.
234 Chapter 7 Insert and modify diagrams
9
In the gallery, point to each style, noticing the changes to your diagram. Then in the
3-D area, click the third thumbnail in the first row (Cartoon).
10
In the SmartArt Styles group, click the Change Colors button to display a gallery of
color variations based on the current document theme colors.
7
SmartArt graphics use theme colors to ensure that they blend in with the document.
11
Preview a few color combinations, and then in the Colorful area, click the second
thumbnail (Colorful Range - Accent Colors 2 to 3) to apply the selected color range
to the diagram shapes. Then click away from the diagram to display the results.
Modifying diagrams 235
Applying a style and changing the colors gives the diagram a modern look.
Now that we’ve applied a unified color scheme to the diagram, we’ll emphasize an
individual shape by changing its characteristics.
12
In the upper-left corner of the diagram, click the Gather information shape (not its
text) to select it.
13
On the Format tool tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the Shape Fill button, and
then in the Standard Colors palette, click the first color swatch (Dark Red) to change
the color of the selected diagram shape.
14
In the Shape Styles group, click the Shape Effects button, click Glow, and then in the
Glow Variations area, click the first thumbnail in the third row (Orange, 11pt glow,
Accent color 1). Click away from the diagram to display the results.
236 Chapter 7 Insert and modify diagrams
The shape that corresponds with the heading to the left of the diagram
is now accentuated with a different shape and color.
Next we’ll make unique versions of the diagram corresponding to the steps of the
illustrated process.
15
Click a blank area of the diagram to select it. Then on the Home tab, in the Clipboard
group, click the Copy button.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+C to copy the active element.
16
Scroll to page 2, click to the left of the Set up team heading, and in the Clipboard
group, click the Paste button to paste a copy of the diagram into the document.
17
On the Layout Options menu, click the See more link to display the Position tab of
the Layout dialog box. Set the horizontal alignment to Right relative to Column and
the vertical alignment to Top relative to Line. Then click OK.
18
Select the Gather information shape (not its text). In the Shape Styles group, click
the Shape Fill button, and then in the Theme Colors palette, click the first color
swatch under the maroon swatch (Dark Red, Accent 2, Lighter 80%).
TIP In step 11 we chose the Accent Colors 2 To 3 color scheme. The color specified in
step 18 is a lighter shade of the selected starting color.
TROUBLESHOOTING Although the color we chose in step 13 and the Accent 2 color
of this theme are both named Dark Red, they are not the same color. Be sure to use
the Standard Colors palette for step 13 and the Theme Colors palette for step 18.
Modifying diagrams 237
7
19
On the Shape Effects menu, click Glow, and then click the No Glow thumbnail.
The shape corresponding to the previous heading is now muted to show that it has
already been discussed.
20
Click the Set up team shape (not its text), and repeat steps 13 and 14 to highlight the
shape that corresponds to the adjacent topic.
The highlighted shape reflects the heading to the left, and the previous topic is a muted color.
21
If you want, repeat steps 15 through 20 to insert a customized copy of the diagram
adjacent to each of the remaining headings in the Process section.
TIP Sometimes headings appear too close together, or a heading might appear too
close to the bottom of the page, to accommodate a series of diagrams neatly. In that
case, insert a page break before each heading to move it to a new page before inserting the diagram.
+
CLEAN UP Close the ServiceB document, saving your changes if you want to.
238 Chapter 7 Insert and modify diagrams
Creating picture diagrams
The SmartArt Graphics tool that comes with Word 2013 includes diagram layouts that are
specifically designed to hold pictures. You can use these diagrams for business uses such
as creating organization charts with pictures, names, and titles, or for personal uses such as
creating a page of family photographs.
In this exercise, you’ll create a page of photographs. You’ll size and position the photographs and then enter and format accompanying captions.
SET UP You need the Neighborhood document and the Garden, Park, Pond, and
Woods pictures located in the Chapter07 practice file folder to complete this exercise.
Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
On the View tab, click the One Page button to display the entire document in the
program window.
2
Click anywhere in the Enjoy the Neighborhood! heading, and then press the Down
Arrow key to position the cursor in the blank paragraph below the heading.
3
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click the SmartArt button. In the left
pane of the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, click Picture. Then in the middle
pane, double-click the first thumbnail in the first row (Accented Picture) to insert the
template for the selected diagram at the cursor.
The Accented Picture diagram, ready for you to enter pictures and captions.
Creating picture diagrams 239
7
4
Click a blank area inside the diagram frame to select the diagram. On the Format tool
tab, click the Size group button and set the Height to 5.75” and the Width to 9” to
change the size of the frame.
TIP You don’t have to enter the inch marks; Word will add them for you. After you
enter a Size setting, press Enter or click outside the box to implement the change.
5
Click a blank area of the biggest shape to select it. Display the Size settings and set
the Height to 5” and the Width to 8” to change the size of the shape. Then drag the
shape down and to the left until it sits in the lower-left corner of the diagram frame.
6
Click a blank area of the top circle, press and hold the Ctrl key, and then click the
middle and bottom circles. In the Size settings, click the arrows in the Height and
Width boxes to increase both settings to 1.7”.
TROUBLESHOOTING Don’t enter the sizes; use the arrows. Sometimes the shapes
don’t hold precise measurements when you enter them directly.
7
With the three circles selected, drag them to the right edge of the frame. Press the
arrow keys on the keyboard for more precise positioning if necessary.
The picture placeholders have been sized and positioned to fit the available space.
240 Chapter 7 Insert and modify diagrams
8
In the large diagram shape, click the Insert Picture icon to open the Insert Pictures
window. Notice that you can insert pictures from a variety of sources.
The Insert Pictures window provides access to local and online resources.
9
In the From a file area, click Browse. In the Insert Picture dialog box, navigate to the
Chapter07 practice file folder, and then double-click the Park picture.
10
Repeat steps 8 and 9 to insert the Garden picture in the top circle, the Pond picture
in the middle circle, and the Woods picture in the bottom circle.
11
Click a blank area of the diagram to select it, and then on the Design tool tab, in the
Create Graphic group, click the Text Pane button. Notice that the Text pane displays
a thumbnail of each picture next to the bullet point representing the text in that
shape.
12
In the Text pane, replace the placeholder bullet points with Park, Garden, Pond, and
Woods to enter the captions on the diagram in the position and format specified by
the diagram template.
Creating picture diagrams 241
7
The pictures now have captions, although they’re a bit clunky.
13
Click any entry in the Text pane. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select,
and then click Select All to select all the labels.
14
On the Home tab, in the Font group, click the Text Effects and Typography button
and then click the first thumbnail in the third row of the gallery (Fill – Black, Text 1,
Outline - Background 1, Hard Shadow - Background 1).
15
16
17
In the Font group, in the Font list, click Candara, and in the Font Size list, click 36.
In the Paragraph group, click the Center button. Then close the Text pane.
Make any additional changes to the document that you’d like to create a balanced
look. We set a custom left margin of 1.25” and added a shadow effect to each of the
shapes.
242 Chapter 7 Insert and modify diagrams
The final picture diagram.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Neighborhood document, saving your changes if you want to.
Key points
▪▪ You can easily create a sophisticated diagram to convey a process or the relationship
between hierarchical elements.
▪▪ Diagrams are dynamic illustrations that you can customize to produce precisely the
effect you are looking for.
▪▪ You can use a picture diagram to neatly lay out pictures on a page.
Key points 243
7
Chapter at a glance
Insert Insert charts,
page 246
Use Use existing data in charts,
page 259
Modify Modify charts,
page 250
8
Insert and modify charts
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Insert charts.
Modify charts.
Use existing data in charts.
You’ll often find it helpful to reinforce the argument you are making in a document with
facts and figures. When it’s more important for your audience to understand trends than
identify precise values, you can use a chart to present numerical information in visual ways.
You can create simple or elaborate charts from data that is stored in a Microsoft Excel 2013
workbook. If your final deliverable is a document rather than a workbook, you can create a chart in Excel and insert it into the document, or you can create a chart from within
Microsoft Word 2013 and either enter new data or reference existing data. The chart takes
on the visual formatting associated with the design template that is attached to the document and blends in with the rest of the document content.
In this chapter, you’ll add a chart to a document and modify its appearance by changing its
chart type, style, and layout, as well as the color of some elements. Then you’ll recreate the
chart by plotting data stored in an existing Excel worksheet.
IMPORTANT The exercises in this chapter assume that you have Excel 2013 installed on your
computer. If you do not have this version of Excel, the steps in the exercises won’t work as described.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter08 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
245
Inserting charts
When you create a new chart from within a Word document, Word and Excel work together
to provide some pretty fancy functionality. A generic chart appears in the document, and a
worksheet containing the sample data opens in Excel. You can then edit the sample data to
create the chart that you want. You don’t have to save the Excel file; Word maintains its data
with the document and it is available to you whenever you want to update it.
A sample chart plotted from the data in its associated Excel worksheet.
TIP You can open the worksheet associated with a chart by clicking the chart and then
clicking the Edit Data button in the Data group on the Design tool tab.
The Excel worksheet is composed of rows and columns of cells that contain values, which in
charting terminology are called data points. Collectively, a set of data points is called a data
series. As with Word tables, each worksheet cell is identified by an address consisting of its
column letter and row number—for example, A2 is the first cell in the second row. A range
246 Chapter 8 Insert and modify charts
of cells is identified by the address of the cell in the upper-left corner and the address of the
cell in the lower-right corner, separated by a colon—for example, A2:D5 is the range of cells
from the first cell in the second row to the fourth cell in the fifth row.
To customize the chart, you replace the sample data in the Excel worksheet with your own
data. Because the Excel worksheet is linked to the chart, when you change the values in the
worksheet, the chart changes as well. To enter a value in a cell, you click the cell to select it,
or move to the cell by pressing the Tab key or arrow keys, and then enter the data. You can
select an entire column by clicking the column header—the shaded box containing a letter
at the top of each column—and an entire row by clicking the row header—the shaded box
containing a number to the left of each row. You can select the entire worksheet by clicking
the Select All button—the box at the junction of the column and row headers.
In this exercise, you’ll insert a generic chart into a document, replace the sample data in the
associated worksheet, and then group the data appropriately.
SET UP You need the CottageA document located in the Chapter08 practice file folder
to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
2
Press Ctrl+End to move to the end of the document.
On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click the Chart button.
8
In the Insert Chart dialog box, you can select from several chart types and their variations.
3
In the left pane of the Insert Chart dialog box, click each of the categories to review
the types of charts you can create in Word. Then return to the Column category.
Inserting charts 247
4
In the gallery at the top of the right pane, click the fourth thumbnail (3-D Clustered
Column) to preview that chart type, and then click OK to insert the generic threedimensional clustered column chart at the end of the document and open the
associated Excel worksheet.
5
Click the Select All button in the upper-left corner of the Excel worksheet, and
then press the Delete key to delete the sample data in the worksheet, so that the
worksheet is blank. The columns in the sample chart in the document disappear,
leaving only the colored guides.
6
Click the second cell in row 1 (cell B1), enter March, and then press the Tab key to
enter the heading (in the worksheet and on the chart) and move to the next cell.
7
In cells C1 through E1, enter June, September, and December, pressing Tab after
each entry to move to the next cell. When you enter December, notice that it is
outside of the colored guides and does not appear on the chart in the document.
8
Point to the blue handle in the lower-right corner of cell D5, and when the pointer
changes to a diagonal double-headed arrow, drag it one cell to the right and one cell
up so that the chart data is defined as cells A1:E4.
TIP If you were entering a sequential list of months, you could enter January and
then drag the fill handle in the lower-right corner of the cell to the right to fill subsequent cells in the same row with the names of the months.
9
Click cell A2, enter Minimum, and then press the Enter key.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Enter to move down in the column (or to the beginning
of a data entry series) or Shift+Enter to move up. Press Tab to move to the right in
the same row or Shift+Tab to move to the left. For more information about keyboard
shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end of this book.
10
In cells A3 and A4, enter Average and Maximum.
The row and column headings for your chart.
248 Chapter 8 Insert and modify charts
11
Point to the border between the headers of columns A and B, and when the pointer
changes to a double-headed arrow, double-click to adjust the width of the column to
the left of the border to fit the entries in the column.
12
Select columns B through E by dragging through their headers. Then point to the
border between any two selected columns, and double-click to adjust the width of all
the selected columns to fit their cell entries.
13
In cell B2, enter 37, and press Tab. Notice that a corresponding column appears in
the chart.
14
In cells C2 through E2, enter 54, 53, and 29, pressing Tab to move from cell to cell.
After you enter the last number, press Enter. Notice that cell B3 becomes active.
15
Enter the following data into the chart worksheet, noticing as you enter data that the
chart columns and scale change to reflect the data:
3
4
B
C
D
E
47
56
67
80
66
70
35
41
8
The data series in the columns (the months) are plotted by the categories in the rows (Minimum,
Average, and Maximum).
Inserting charts 249
16
In the Chart in Microsoft Word window, click the Close button. Notice that the
temperatures on the chart are grouped by category rather than by month.
17
In the document, click a blank area of the chart to select it. Then on the Design tool
tab, in the Data group, click Switch Row/Column to group the temperatures more
logically by month.
18
On the chart, click Chart Title to select that element, enter Washington
Temperatures, and then click a blank area of the page to display the results.
It was simple to create this impressive chart directly in Word.
+
CLEAN UP Close the CottageA document, saving your changes if you want to.
Modifying charts
If you find that a chart doesn’t adequately depict the most important characteristics of your
data, you can easily change the chart type. Word has ten types of charts, each with twodimensional and three-dimensional variations. The most common chart types include:
▪▪ Column These charts show how values change over time.
▪▪ Line These charts show erratic changes in values over time.
▪▪ Pie These charts show how parts relate to the whole.
▪▪ Bar These charts show the values of several items at one point in time.
250 Chapter 8 Insert and modify charts
Having settled on the most appropriate chart type, you can modify the chart as a whole or
change any of its elements, such as the following:
▪▪ Chart area This is the entire area within the chart frame.
▪▪ Plot area This is the rectangular area bordered by the axes.
▪▪ Axes These are the lines along which the data is plotted. The x-axis shows the cat-
egories, and the y-axis shows the data series, or values. (Three-dimensional charts also
have a z-axis.)
▪▪ Labels These identify the data along each axis.
▪▪ Data markers These graphically represent each data point in each data series.
▪▪ Legend This is a key that identifies the data series.
▪▪ Chart title This title identifies the chart purpose and frequently takes the form of a
short explanation of the data displayed.
8
The main elements of a chart.
Modifying charts 251
To modify a specific element, you first select it by clicking it, or by clicking its name in the
Chart Elements box in the Current Selection group on the Format tool tab. You can then
modify the element by clicking the buttons on the Design and Format tool tabs.
If you make extensive modifications, you can save the customized chart as a template so
that you can plot similar data in the future without having to repeat all the changes.
In this exercise, you’ll modify the appearance of a chart, and then save it as a template.
SET UP You need the CottageB document located in the Chapter08 practice file folder
to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
Scroll to the end of the document to display the chart. Click the chart area to activate
it and display the Chart Tools tabs.
TROUBLESHOOTING Be sure to click a blank area inside the chart frame. Clicking any
of the chart elements will activate that element, not the chart as a whole.
First we’ll change the chart type and style.
2
On the Design tool tab, in the Type group, click the Change Chart Type button to
open the Change Chart Type dialog box displaying the thumbnail of the current
chart type, 3-D Clustered Column.
3
In the category list, click Line. Then in the gallery at the top of the right pane,
double-click the fourth thumbnail (Line with Markers) to change the column chart
to a line chart, which depicts data by using colored lines instead of columns.
The temperature data plotted as a line chart.
252 Chapter 8 Insert and modify charts
4
In the document, to the right of the chart, click the Chart Styles button. Notice that
you can choose Style or Color at the top of the window that opens to display a
gallery of options.
You can quickly switch to a different chart area or data marker style for the same chart type.
TIP You can also access the available styles from the Chart Styles gallery by clicking
the More button in the Chart Styles group.
5
In the Style gallery, point to each of the thumbnails to preview that chart style in the
document. Then click the second thumbnail (Style 2) to change the data markers to
circles displaying the actual data points.
Now we’ll change the color of the plot area and data series.
6
In the Chart Styles pane, click Color to display the Colorful and Monochromatic
palettes of color options based on the current theme. Scroll through the gallery
and notice that the Monochromatic palette offers color gradients that go from
dark to light and from light to dark, so you can use a color effect that is appropri­
ate to your data.
7
At the bottom of the Monochromatic palette, click the light-to-dark purple gradient
(Color 15). Then click the Chart Styles button to close the gallery.
Modifying charts 253
8
8
Point to an area of the chart between the axes that contains the data markers, and
when a ScreenTip indicates that you are pointing to the plot area, click to select it.
9
On the Format tool tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the Shape Fill arrow, and
then in the Theme Colors palette, click the first swatch under the orange swatch
(Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 80%) to distinguish the plot area from the rest of the
chart.
TIP To change several aspects of the plot area, right-click the area and then click For-
mat Plot Area to open the Format Plot Area pane, from which you can change the fill
and border and apply shadow, glow, soft-edge, and three-dimensional effects.
10
At the top of the Current Selection group, click the Chart Elements arrow to display
a list of the elements of the current chart.
You can select a chart element by clicking it in the chart or by selecting it from the list.
254 Chapter 8 Insert and modify charts
11
In the Chart Elements list, click Series “Maximum” to select the data points of the
top line on the chart.
12
In the Current Selection group, click the Format Selection button to display the
Series Options page of the Format Data Series pane.
The Format Data Series pane displays the formatting options for whatever chart element is
selected.
13
At the top of the Format Data Series pane, click the Fill and Line button (the bucket)
to display the Line options.
14
Click the Outline color button, and then in the Standard Colors palette, click the
Green swatch.
15
Near the top of the pane, click Marker to display the Marker Options, Fill, and
Border categories.
16
In the Fill category, click Solid Fill. Click the Fill Color button, and then in the
Standard Colors palette, click the Green swatch.
Modifying charts 255
8
The Maximum temperature data series is now represented by the color green, both on the chart
and in the legend.
17
Close the Format Data Series pane and click a blank part of the chart area to release
the data series. Then to the right of the chart, click the Chart Elements button.
Next, we’ll change the chart elements that are displayed.
18
In the Chart Elements list, clear the Data Labels, Gridlines, and Legend check boxes
to remove those elements from the chart. Then select the Axis Titles and Data Table
check boxes, and click the arrow that appears to the right of Data Table to verify that
the With Legend Keys option is selected.
TIP You can display specific sets of chart elements by choosing a preformatted layout
from the Quick Layouts gallery on the Design tool tab.
256 Chapter 8 Insert and modify charts
You can display or hide chart elements from this list.
19
Click the Chart Elements button to close the list. You’ve completely changed the
presentation of your data with only a few clicks.
When you don’t have a lot of data, displaying a datasheet can clarify without adding clutter.
Modifying charts 257
8
20
In the chart, click the Axis Title placeholder on the left to select it, and then enter
Degrees F to replace the placeholder text. Then replace the Axis Title placeholder
on the bottom with Month. Notice that you can replace the text even though only
the placeholder, and not the text, is selected.
Finally, we’ll save the chart element as a template.
21
Right-click the chart area and then click Save As Template button to open the Save
Chart Template dialog box and display the contents of your Charts folder, which is a
subfolder of your Templates folder.
TROUBLESHOOTING If the Charts folder is not displayed in the Address bar, navigate
to the C:\Users\<user name>\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\Templates\Charts folder.
22
23
Enter My Temperature Chart in the File name box, and then click Save.
On the Design tool tab, in the Type group, click the Change Chart Type button, and
then in the left pane of the Change Chart Type dialog box, click Templates to verify
that your customized chart is now available as a template.
In the future, you can click the custom template to create a chart with the same layout and
formatting.
258 Chapter 8 Insert and modify charts
24
In the Change Chart Type dialog box, click Cancel to close the dialog box without
creating a new chart.
+
CLEAN UP Close the CottageB document, saving your changes if you want to.
Using existing data in charts
If the data you want to plot as a chart in Word already exists in a Microsoft Access database,
an Excel worksheet, or a Word table, you can copy the data from its source program and
paste it into the chart worksheet.
In this exercise, you’ll copy data stored in an Excel worksheet into a chart’s worksheet and
then expand the plotted data range so that the new data appears in the chart.
SET UP You need the CottageC document and the Temperature workbook located in
the Chapter08 practice file folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and
then follow the steps.
1
Scroll to the end of the document to display the chart, and then click a blank part of
the chart area to display the Chart Tools tabs.
2
On the Design tool tab, in the Data group, click the Edit Data arrow and then in the
list click Edit Data in Excel 2013 to display the chart data in an Excel worksheet.
3
In the Excel window, display the Open page of the Backstage view. In the left pane of
the Open page, click Computer, and then in the right pane, click the Browse button.
In the Open dialog box, navigate to the Chapter08 practice file folder, and doubleclick the Temperature workbook to open it in a new Excel window.
4
In the Temperature workbook, on the View tab, in the Window group, click the
Arrange All button. Then in the Arrange Windows dialog box, click Horizontal, and
click OK to arrange the Temperature worksheet above the chart data worksheet so
that both are visible at the same time.
Using existing data in charts 259
8
Displaying two worksheets at the same time makes it easy to copy data between them.
5
In the Temperature workbook, position the worksheet to display both cell B4 and
cell M7. Click cell B4, hold down the Shift key, and then click cell M7 to select the
range B4:M7.
6
In the Temperature workbook, on the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the
Copy button.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+C to copy the selected content to the Microsoft
Office Clipboard.
7
Click the title bar of the Chart in Microsoft Word workbook to activate it, click cell
B1, and then on the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the Paste button to
paste the copied data into the chart data worksheet.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+V to paste the most recent contents from the
Clipboard.
260 Chapter 8 Insert and modify charts
The copied data will be plotted in the chart.
8
Close the Temperature workbook. Maximize the chart workbook and click cell A1 to
release the selection. Now you need to specify that the new data should be included
in the chart.
9
Switch to the CottageC document and click a blank part of the chart area. On the
Design tool tab, in the Data group, click the Select Data button to activate the chart
worksheet and open the Select Data Source dialog box. Drag the Select Data Source
dialog box so that the worksheet data is visible.
TIP You can also import data into your chart from a text file, webpage, or other external source, such as Microsoft SQL Server. To import data, first display the associated
Excel worksheet. Then on the Excel Data tab, in the Get External Data group, click the
button for your data source, and navigate to the source. For more information, refer
to Excel Help.
Using existing data in charts 261
8
You can enter a data range in the dialog box or select the data on the worksheet.
10
Drag on the worksheet to select cells A1:M4, or edit the range in the Chart data
range box to read =Sheet1!$A$1:$M$4 to tell Excel to use the values in A1:M4 on
Sheet1 of the associated worksheet. (The $ symbols ensure that only that range of
cells will be used as the source of the chart’s data. Sheet1 is the name defined for the
worksheet on the sheet tab at the bottom of the Excel program window.)
11
In the Select Data Source dialog box, click OK, and then close the chart worksheet
to display the updated chart. Notice that you are not prompted to save the chart
worksheet as a file.
262 Chapter 8 Insert and modify charts
The chart depicts a range of temperatures throughout the year.
+
CLEAN UP Close the CottageC document, saving your changes if you want to.
Key points
▪▪ A chart is often the most efficient way to present numeric data with at-a-glance
clarity.
▪▪ You can select the type of chart and change the appearance of its elements until it
clearly conveys key information.
▪▪ Existing data in a Word table, Excel workbook, Access database, or other structured
source can easily be copied and pasted into the associated chart worksheet, eliminating time-consuming typing.
Key points 263
8
Chapter at a glance
Decorate Change a document’s background,
page 266
Mark Add watermarks,
page 272
Reuse Calculate Insert preformatted document parts,
page 276
Build equations,
page 288
9
Add visual elements
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Change a document’s background.
Add watermarks.
Insert preformatted document parts.
Build equations.
We have looked at some of the more common graphic elements you can add to a document, such as pictures, diagrams, and charts. These elements reinforce concepts or make a
document more attention grabbing or visually appealing. You can also improve the appearance of a document by using other types of visual elements, such as the following:
▪▪ Backgrounds You can apply a variety of backgrounds to the pages of your document, including plain colors, gradients, textures, patterns, and pictures.
▪▪ Watermarks You can provide information without distracting from the document
content by adding text or graphic watermarks to the page background of a document.
▪▪ Building blocks You can draw attention to specific information and add graphic
appeal by incorporating ready-made graphic building blocks (also called Quick Parts)
into a document. These building blocks are combinations of drawing objects (and
sometimes pictures) in a variety of formatting styles that you can select to insert elements such as cover pages, quotations pulled from the text (called pull quotes), and
sidebars. You can also create your own building blocks.
In this chapter, you’ll first experiment with page backgrounds, and then create text and
picture watermarks. You’ll add three types of building blocks to a document. Finally, you’ll
build a simple equation.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter09 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
265
Changing a document’s background
Whether you’re creating a document that will be printed, viewed on a computer, or published on the Internet and viewed in a web browser, you can make your document stand
out by adding a background color, texture, picture, or border to the document pages.
SEE ALSO For information about creating documents for the web, see “Creating and modi-
fying web documents” in Chapter 11, “Create documents for use outside of Word.”
When it comes to backgrounds, the trick is to not overdo it. The effects should be subtle
enough that they do not interfere with the text or other elements on the page or make the
document difficult to read.
In this exercise, you’ll first apply a solid background color to every page. Then you’ll create a
two-color gradient across the pages. You’ll fill the pages with one of the textures that comes
with Word and then fill them with a picture. Finally, you’ll put a border around every page.
SET UP You need the MarbleFloor picture located in the Chapter09 practice file folder
to complete this exercise. Open a blank document, turn off the rulers and formatting
marks, and then follow the steps.
1
On the View tab, in the Zoom group, click the One Page button to display the whole
page in the program window.
2
On the Design tab, in the Page Background group, click the Page Color button. On
the Page Color menu, in the Theme Colors palette, click the second swatch under
the main green swatch (Green, Accent 6, Lighter 60%) to change the document
background to the selected color.
3
4
On the Page Color menu, click Fill Effects to open the Fill Effects dialog box.
In the Colors area, select the Two colors option. Leave Color 1 set to green. Click
the Color 2 arrow, and in the Theme Colors palette, click the third swatch under the
main orange swatch (Orange, Accent 2, Lighter 40%). The Variants and Sample
areas change to show various combinations of the two colors.
266 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
5
In the Shading styles area, click each option in turn and observe the effects in the
Variants and Sample areas. Notice that some shading styles have only two variants.
Then click Diagonal down.
6
In the Variants area, click the lower-left option to preview its effect. Then click OK to
change the document background to match the sample.
You can configure fill effects with multiple colors and in a variety of directions.
Now let’s format the page background with a texture fill.
7
Redisplay the Fill Effects dialog box. Click the Texture tab to display the 24 texture fill
options that come with Word.
8
Scroll through the gallery to familiarize yourself with the available textures. Click the
first texture swatch in the second row (Water droplets), and then click OK to format
the page background with the texture. Notice that the texture swatch has been
configured to repeat seamlessly across the page.
Changing a document’s background 267
9
The page with the Water Droplets texture applied to the background.
Next, let’s format the page background with a picture fill.
9
Redisplay the Fill Effects dialog box. First click the Pattern tab to view the available
pattern fill options. Then click the Picture tab, and click the Select Picture button to
open the Insert Pictures dialog box.
You can select a background picture from your computer, network location, or an online source.
268 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
TIP You can insert background pictures from the Texture tab or from the Picture tab
with slightly different results. Inserting an image from the Texture tab adds it to the
Texture gallery.
10
In the From a file area of the Insert Pictures dialog box, click Browse. In the Select
Picture dialog box that opens, browse to the Chapter09 practice file folder and
double-click the MarbleFloor image. Then in the Fill Effects dialog box, click OK to
change the page background to display a blurred picture of the marble floor in the
Doge’s Palace in Venice.
9
The page with the MarbleFloor picture applied to the background.
TIP Word fills the page with as much of the picture as will fit. If one copy of the picture does not completely fill the page, Word inserts another copy, effectively “tiling”
the image. If the picture is particularly large, only a portion of it will be visible.
Finally, let’s add a border to the page.
Changing a document’s background 269
11
In the Page Background group, click the Page Borders button to display the Page
Border page of the Borders and Shading dialog box.
The Page Border page is identical to the Borders page from which you format paragraph
borders, except that an Art option is available for page borders.
12
In the Setting area of the Borders and Shading dialog box, click Box. Then click the
Color arrow, and in the Theme Colors palette, click the fourth swatch under the main
gold swatch, (Gold, Accent 4, Darker 25%).
13
Scroll through the Style list, clicking any line style option you like to apply it to the
page in the Preview pane. When you find a style you like, click OK. We chose a triple
border near the bottom of the list.
270 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
The blank page with a border applied on top of the background picture.
14
On the Insert tab, in the Pages group, click Page Break, and then scroll to display the
new second page. Notice that the background options are applied to all pages of the
document.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+Enter to insert a page break. For more information
about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end of this book.
+
CLEAN UP Close the document, saving it if you want to.
Changing a document’s background 271
9
Adding watermarks
A watermark is a faint text or graphic image that appears on the page behind the main
content of a document. A common use of a text watermark is to indicate a status such as
DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL. When you want to dress up the pages of your document without
distracting attention from the main text, you might consider displaying a graphic watermark, such as a company logo or an image that subtly reinforces your message. Watermarks
are visible in printed and online documents, but because they are faint, they don’t interfere
with the readers’ ability to view a document’s main text.
In this exercise, you’ll add text and graphic watermarks to a document.
SET UP You need the AuthorsDraft document and the OTSI-Logo image located in the
Chapter09 practice file folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then
follow the steps.
1
On the Design tab, in the Page Background group, click the Watermark button to
display the Watermark menu.
You can use a predefined watermark or click Custom Watermark to define your own.
272 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
2
Scroll through the watermark galleries, noticing the available options. Clicking any
of these options inserts the specified watermark in light gray on every page of the
current document.
3
At the bottom of the menu, click Custom Watermark to open the Printed Watermark
dialog box. Then click Text watermark.
In this dialog box, you can specify a custom picture or text watermark.
4
5
6
Click the Text arrow, and then in the list, click DRAFT.
Click the Color arrow, and then in the Theme Colors palette, click the main purple
swatch (Purple, Accent 4).
With the Semitransparent check box and Diagonal layout option selected, click OK
to insert the watermark diagonally across the page and close the dialog box.
TIP Watermarks are so named because the process of creating one on an actual
sheet of paper is done by using water. A well-created watermark appears to be more
part of the paper than of the content.
Adding watermarks 273
9
The text watermark is faint enough that the document text is still legible, but bold enough to be
noticed.
Next let’s insert a picture watermark.
7
Redisplay the Printed Watermark dialog box. Click Picture watermark, and then click
Select Picture to open the Insert Pictures dialog box.
8
In the From a file area of the Insert Pictures dialog box, click Browse. In the Insert
Picture dialog box that opens, browse to the Chapter09 practice file folder and
double-click the OTSI-Logo image to insert the image’s file path in the Printed
Watermark dialog box.
9
In the Printed Watermark dialog box, click the Scale arrow and then, in the list,
click 200%.
10
With the Washout check box selected, click Apply to insert the watermark in the
document but leave the dialog box open. Drag the dialog box by its title bar until
the watermark is displayed.
274 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
You can adjust the size of a picture watermark, but you can’t change its angle.
Let’s make the watermark larger.
11
In the Printed Watermark dialog box, click in the Scale box, drag to select 200%, and
enter 400% to replace the existing setting. Then click OK to change the watermark
size and close the dialog box.
9
The picture watermark adds visual interest without obscuring the text.
+
CLEAN UP Close the AuthorsDraft document, saving your changes if you want to.
Adding watermarks 275
Inserting preformatted document parts
To simplify the creation of professional-looking text elements, Word 2013 comes with
ready-made visual representations of text, known as building blocks, which are available
from various groups on the Insert tab. You can insert the following types of building blocks:
▪▪ Cover page You can quickly add a formatted cover page to a longer document such
as a report by selecting a style from the Cover Page gallery. The cover page includes
text placeholders for elements such as a title so that you can customize the page to
reflect the content of the document.
TIP You can quickly insert a blank page anywhere in a document—even in the
middle of a paragraph—by positioning the cursor and then clicking the Blank
Page button in the Pages group on the Insert tab.
▪▪ Header and footer You can display information on every page of a document in re-
gions at the top and bottom of a page by selecting a style from the Header or Footer
gallery. Word displays dotted borders to indicate the header and footer areas, and
displays a Design tool tab on the ribbon. You can enter and format information in the
header and footer by using the same techniques you do in the document body and
also by using commands on the Design tool tab. You can have a different header and
footer on the first page of a document and different headers and footers on odd and
even pages.
TIP If your document contains section breaks, each successive section inherits the
headers and footers of the preceding section unless you break the link between the
two sections. You can then create a different header and footer for the current section. For information about sections, see “Controlling what appears on each page” in
Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute documents.”
▪▪ Page number You can quickly add headers and footers that include only page numbers and require no customization by selecting the style you want from one of the
Page Number galleries.
▪▪ Text box To reinforce key concepts and also alleviate the monotony of page after
page of plain text, you can insert text boxes such as sidebars and quote boxes by selecting a style from the Text Box gallery. The formatted text box includes placeholder
text that you replace with your own.
276 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
If you frequently use a specific element in your documents, such as a formatted titlesubtitle-author arrangement at the beginning of reports, you can define it as a custom
building block. It is then available from the Quick Parts gallery.
SEE ALSO For information about saving frequently used text as a building block, see
“Creating custom building blocks” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more efficiently.”
You can display information about the available building blocks by clicking the Quick Parts
button in the Text group on the Insert tab and then clicking Building Blocks Organizer.
9
The Building Blocks Organizer dialog box includes personalized options and built-in options for
design elements such as headers, footers, page numbers, tables, text boxes, and watermarks.
TROUBLESHOOTING If the screen resolution of your display is such that the Quick Parts but-
ton is displayed as a large button, it is labeled Quick Parts. If the button is displayed as a
small, unlabeled button, its ScreenTip is Explore Quick Parts. For simplicity, we refer to it in
this book as the Quick Parts button.
Inserting preformatted document parts 277
The left pane of the Building Blocks Organizer dialog box displays a complete list of all the
building blocks available on your computer. Clicking a building block in the left pane displays a preview in the right pane, along with its description and behavior.
TIP The Building Blocks list on your computer includes AutoText entries for your user name
and initials. To change either of these entries, update your information on the General page
of the Word Options dialog box.
Initially the building blocks are organized by type, as reflected in the Gallery column. If you
want to insert building blocks of the same design in a document, you might want to sort
the list alphabetically by design name, by clicking the Name column heading. For example,
a cover page, footer, header, quote box, and sidebar are all available with the Whisp design.
Some elements, such as bibliographies, equations, tables of contents, tables, and watermarks, are not part of a design family and have their own unique names.
In the lower-left corner of the Building Blocks Organizer dialog box, you can click Edit
Properties to display a dialog box containing all the information about a selected building
block in a more readable format. You can change the properties associated with any building block in this dialog box (but be cautious about changing the properties assigned to the
building blocks that came with Word; you might accidentally render them unusable).
The Modify Building Block dialog box.
You can delete the selected building block from the list (and from the Building Blocks global
template) by clicking Delete at the bottom of the Building Blocks Organizer dialog box, and
you can insert a selected building block into the document by clicking Insert.
SEE ALSO For information about global templates, see “Creating custom styles and
templates” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word more efficiently.”
278 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
In this exercise, you’ll add a cover page, header, and footer to a document. You’ll also insert
a quote box and a sidebar, and save the customized sidebar as a building block.
SET UP You need the Flyer document located in the Chapter09 practice file folder
to complete this exercise. Open the document, set the zoom level to display the entire
page, and then follow the steps.
1
Ensure that the cursor is at the top of the document. On the Insert tab, in the Pages
group, click the Cover Page button to display the gallery of available cover pages.
9
The thumbnails show the designs of the available cover pages.
TROUBLESHOOTING You might have different cover page thumbnails than we show
here. We’ve created this exercise by using document elements that we think will be
available to all readers. If the specified element isn’t available on your computer,
substitute another.
2
Scroll through the Cover Page gallery to display the available options, and then
click Semaphore to insert the cover page at the beginning of the document. Notice
that the cover page includes placeholders for the date, title, subtitle, author name,
company name, and company address.
Inserting preformatted document parts 279
The selected cover page is ready for you to provide document-specific information.
TIP If any of the required information is already saved with the properties of the doc-
ument into which you’re inserting the cover page, Word inserts the saved information
instead of the placeholders. For information about document properties, see “Preparing documents for electronic distribution” in Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute
documents.”
3
Click the Date placeholder, click the arrow that appears, and then in the calendar
control that appears, click Today.
4
Click the Document title placeholder, and then enter Simple Room Design. Notice
as you enter the text that it appears on the page in capital letters. This is due to the
character formatting applied to the style.
280 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
5
Click the Document subtitle placeholder, and enter Using the Room Planner
tool. Notice that this text appears on the page in small caps—all the letters look like
capital letters, but the actual capital letters are taller than the others.
6
Click the Author name placeholder, and begin entering your name. Partway through,
Word should recognize your name from the user name information stored with the
program and display a ScreenTip containing your completed name.
When you begin entering your name, Word recognizes you.
7
Enter the rest of your name, or if the ScreenTip appears, press Enter to have Word
insert it for you. Then display the Info page of the Backstage view, and notice
that some of the information you entered on the cover page is now visible in the
Properties area.
9
Entering information in fields in the document populates the document properties.
Inserting preformatted document parts 281
8
At the bottom of the Properties area, click the Show All Properties link to display
more properties. In the expanded list of properties, point to the text to the right of
Company and click in the box that appears. Then enter the name of your company or
organization (if you don’t have one, you can use Graphic Design Institute).
9
Click the Back arrow above the page tabs to return to the cover page. Notice that
the company name you entered in the Properties area now appears in place of the
Company Name placeholder.
TIP You are not restricted to the default contents of the cover page building block;
you can change it in any way that you want to. Think of it as a convenient starting
point.
10
Select the Company Address placeholder, and then press Delete to remove it from
the cover page.
The completed cover page, including information that is now saved with the document
properties.
282 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
Now let’s add headers and footers to the document. We’ll use two different headers
designed for odd pages and even pages, and their coordinating footers, so that when
the document is printed double-sided, the headers and footers will always appear on
the outside edges of the paper.
11
Scroll to the second page. Select and delete the heading Simple Room Design,
because its function is now fulfilled by the document title on the cover page.
12
With the cursor at the beginning of page 2, on the Insert tab, in the Header & Footer
group, click the Header button. Scroll through the Header gallery, and then click the
Facet (Even Page) header to add it to the page. Notice that although you’re on the
second page of the file, the header displays page number 1. This is because the cover
page is counted separately from the document pages.
TIP You can mix different headers, footers, and document themes to create a document that has the look and feel you want.
13
Investigate the configuration options available on the Design tool tab. In the Options
group, select the Different Odd & Even Pages check box, and notice that the header
label changes from Header to Odd Page Header.
9
The header label helps you determine which kind of header to use.
TIP In step 13, we inserted an even page header on the second page of the docu-
ment, but Word now indicates that it is an odd page, because it is page number 1 of
the document following the cover page. However, if we print the document doublesided, the even page header will align appropriately on the outside edge of the paper
when we turn the pages.
Inserting preformatted document parts 283
14
In the Navigation group, click the Next button to move to the header area at the top
of the page 3. In the Header gallery, click the Facet (Odd Page) thumbnail to insert
the header. Again, the seemingly incorrect page number 2 appears in the header
because the document content is numbered separately from the cover page.
TIP To use a numbering scheme other than arabic numerals, to number pages by
chapter, or to control the starting number, click the Page Number button in the
Header & Footer group, and then click Format Page Numbers. In the Page Number
Format dialog box, you can select from several page numbering formats and options.
15
In the Navigation group, click the Go to Footer button to move the cursor to the
footer area at the bottom of the last page of the document. In the Header & Footer
group, click the Footer button, and then in the gallery, click the Facet (Odd Page)
thumbnail to insert the footer and the associated document properties.
Headers and footers can include any information you want to display, including graphics.
284 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
16
In the Navigation group, click the Previous button to move to the footer area of the
second page. In the Footer gallery, click the Facet (Even Page) thumbnail to insert
the footer and the associated document properties. Then in the Close group, click the
Close Header and Footer button.
All pages of the document other than the cover page now have a header and footer.
Next, let’s add a quote box to emphasize a specific phrase in the document.
17
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click the Quick Parts button, and then click
Building Blocks Organizer to open the Building Blocks Organizer dialog box shown
at the beginning of this topic.
18
Scroll through the Building blocks list, previewing a few of the building blocks.
Click the Name column heading, double-click the separator to the right of the
Name column heading so that all the names are visible, and then scroll through the
list again. Notice that page elements of the same theme are coordinated.
19
In the Building blocks list, click Semaphore Quote, and notice its position on the
page shown in the preview pane. Then click Insert to insert the quote box in the
same position on the document page and display the Drawing Tools Format tool
tab, from which you can format the quote box contents.
9
Placeholder text in the quote box tells how to enter text and move the quote box on the page.
20
Change the zoom level of the document to 100% so that the text is legible. Select and
copy the last sentence of the fourth paragraph of the document (Go with what you
love…). Then click the placeholder in the quote box to select the placeholder text.
Inserting preformatted document parts 285
Drawing text boxes
If none of the predefined text-box building blocks meet your needs, you can draw
and format your own text box. On the Insert tab, click Text Box, and then click Draw
Text Box to activate the drawing tool. Click and drag to draw a box of the approximate
size you want anywhere on the page. You can immediately start typing at the blinking
cursor, and you can format the text the way you would any other text. You can format
the text box shape, outline, fill, and other properties by using the commands on the
Drawing Tools Format tab. Click inside a text box to edit and format the text; click the
text box frame to format the text box.
When a text box has a solid border, you can reposition it by dragging it to another
location or pressing the arrow keys, rotate it by dragging the rotate handle, and
change its size by dragging the size handles around its frame.
You can link text boxes so that text flows from one to the next. To do so:
1 Ensure that the second text box is empty.
2 Click the first text box.
3 On the Format tool tab, in the Text group, click Create Link. The pointer shape
changes to a pitcher.
4 Point to the second text box, and when the pointer changes to a pouring pitcher,
click once.
Text boxes are not accessible to adaptive technologies, so if you want to ensure that a
text reading program can access the content of your document, do not use a text box.
21
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the Paste arrow. Point to each of the
Paste Options buttons to display a preview of the copied text in the quote box, and
then click the Keep Text Only button to replace the placeholder text but retain its
formatting. Notice that the quote box automatically resizes to fit its new contents.
SEE ALSO For more information about text boxes, see the sidebar “Drawing text
boxes” later in this chapter.
22
Change the zoom level to display the whole page in the program window. Then scroll
to the last page of the document, and click anywhere on the page.
286 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
23
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click the Text Box button, scroll through the
gallery, and click the Facet Sidebar (Left) thumbnail to insert the sidebar on the
opposite side of the page from the header and footer content.
9
This sidebar consists of multiple overlapping text boxes and shapes.
24
25
26
Change the zoom level of the document to 100% so that the text is legible.
With the Sidebar Title placeholder active, enter Ordering Information.
At the beginning of the last paragraph of the document, delete NOTE: (including the
colon and following space). Then select the remainder of the paragraph, and cut the
selected content to the Clipboard.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+X to cut the selected content to the Clipboard.
Inserting preformatted document parts 287
27
In the sidebar, click the sidebar content placeholder (not the sidebar title) to select
the placeholder text. Then repeat step 21 to paste the text from the Clipboard into
the sidebar and retain the sidebar formatting.
The pasted text takes on the formatting assigned to the text box.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Flyer document, saving your changes if you want to.
Building equations
You can insert mathematical symbols, such as π (pi) or ∑ (sigma, or summation), the same
way you would insert any other symbol. But you can also create entire mathematical equations in a document. You can insert some predefined equations, including the Quadratic
Formula, the Binomial Theorem, and the Pythagorean Theorem, into a document with a few
clicks. If you need something other than these standard equations, you can build your own
equations by using a library of mathematical symbols.
SEE ALSO For information about symbols, see the sidebar “Inserting symbols” in Chapter 5,
“Add simple graphic elements.”
Equations are different from graphics in that they are accurately rendered mathematical
formulas that appear in the document as fields. However, they are similar to graphics in
that they can be displayed in line with the surrounding text or in their own space with text
above and below them.
288 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
You can insert an equation from a gallery or by entering it into a box, by doing one of the
following from the Symbols group on the Insert tab:
▪▪ Clicking the Equation arrow displays a gallery of commonly used equations and a
menu of related commands. You can insert an equation from the gallery by clicking
it, search for other predefined equations by clicking More Equations from Office.com,
or start to build your own equation by clicking Insert New Equation.
9
Clicking a predefined equation inserts it into the document at the cursor.
▪▪ Clicking the Equation button inserts a field in which you can build or enter an equa-
tion, and also displays the Design tool tab for equations. This tab provides access to
mathematical symbols and structures such as fractions and radicals. Clicking the Tools
dialog box launcher on the Design tool tab displays the Equation Options dialog box.
Building equations 289
In the Equation Options dialog box, you can set many options that govern the appearance of
equation expressions in a document.
After building an equation, you can add it to the Equation gallery so that it is readily available the next time you need it.
In this exercise, you’ll build a simple equation for calculating a per-person price for a fishing
trip, and you’ll add the equation to the Equation gallery.
SET UP You need the Welcome document located in the Chapter09 practice file folder
to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
2
Press Ctrl+End to move to the end of the document.
On the Insert tab, in the Symbols group, click the Equation button to insert an
equation field into the document.
290 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
3
Enter (p-3)* in the equation field.
TIP The asterisk represents a multiplication symbol.
4
On the Design tool tab, in the Structures group, click the Fraction button to display
the Fraction gallery.
This gallery provides structures for forming fractions.
5
In the Fraction category, click the first thumbnail in the first row (Stacked Fraction)
to insert structured placeholders for a simple fraction in the equation field.
You can replace the placeholders within the fraction structure with alphanumeric characters or
symbols.
6
Click the top box in the fraction structure, and enter b. Then click the bottom box,
and enter 3.
Building equations 291
9
7
Click the blank area to the right of the equation field. Then press the Spacebar, and
enter where p is the total number of people and b is the base cost. (Include
the period.) This equation subtracts 3 from the total number of people and multiplies
the result by a per-person amount to calculate the cost for each additional person.
Word has taken care of formatting the equation so that it looks professional.
8
Click the equation, click the Equation Options arrow that appears, and click Change
to Display to set the equation off from the surrounding text. Then click away from
the equation to display the result.
The variables in the equation are automatically formatted as italic.
9
Click the equation, click the Equation Options arrow, and then click Save as New
Equation to open the Create New Building Block dialog box.
The equation is entered in the Name box.
SEE ALSO For more information about building blocks, see “Starting, entering text in,
and saving documents” in Chapter 2, “Enter, edit, and proofread text.”
292 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
10
11
In the Name box, replace the equation with Additional people cost. Then click OK.
Click away from the equation field to release the selection. Then on the Insert tab,
in the Symbols group, click the Equation arrow, and scroll to the bottom of the
Equation gallery to display your custom equation.
9
Custom equations appear in the General area of the Equation gallery.
12
Press the Esc key to close the gallery without making a selection.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Welcome document, saving your changes if you want to. When
you exit Word, remember to click Don’t Save when you are asked whether you want to
save changes to the Building Block template.
Building equations 293
Setting mathematical AutoCorrect options
If you frequently create documents that contain mathematical formulas, you don’t
have to insert mathematical symbols by using the ribbon buttons. Instead, you can
enter a predefined combination of characters and have Word automatically replace
it with a corresponding math symbol. For example, if you enter \infty in an equation
field, Word replaces the characters with the infinity symbol (∞).
This replacement is performed by the Math AutoCorrect feature. You can view all
the predefined mathematical symbol descriptions by clicking the Math AutoCorrect
button in the Equation Options dialog box, or by clicking AutoCorrect Options on
the Proofing page of the Word Options dialog box, and then clicking the Math
AutoCorrect tab.
The Math AutoCorrect feature simplifies the process of inserting mathematical symbols.
TIP You can create custom Math AutoCorrect entries in the same way you create text
AutoCorrect entries. For information, see “Correcting spelling and grammatical errors”
in Chapter 2, “Enter, edit, and proofread text.”
294 Chapter 9 Add visual elements
Key points
▪▪ A background color, texture, pattern, or picture can really give a document pizzazz,
but be careful that it doesn’t overwhelm the text.
▪▪ By using a watermark, you can flag every page of a document with a faint word, such
as “Confidential,” or a faint picture. Watermarks appear behind the text of the document, so the text can still be read.
▪▪ Word comes with predefined building blocks that you can use to quickly add graphic
elements to a document.
▪▪ You can construct complex math equations in your documents and have Word display
them in traditional math formats.
9
Key points 295
Chapter at a glance
Organize Reorganize document outlines,
page 298
Contain Use tables to control page layout,
page 315
Arrange Arrange objects on the page,
page 304
Organize and arrange
content
10
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Reorganize document outlines.
Arrange objects on the page.
Use tables to control page layout.
Microsoft Word 2013 provides the following tools for organizing and arranging your
document’s content:
▪▪ Outlining tools You can use these tools to control the organization of the content
in a styled document. In Outline view, you can reorganize content by moving it or by
promoting or demoting it.
▪▪ Object arranging tools You can use these tools to control the layout of objects on
the page. You can precisely position objects and control their alignment and stacking
order.
▪▪ Nested tables You can use a table to control the positions of blocks of information
on the page. For example, a table with two columns and two rows can hold a set of
four paragraphs, four bulleted lists, or four tables in a format in which they can be
easily compared.
In this chapter, you’ll first reorganize a document by working with its outline. Then you’ll
modify the text wrapping, position, and stacking order of multiple pictures in a document.
Finally, you’ll create a table to hold nested tables of information.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter10 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
297
Reorganizing document outlines
When you create a document that contains headings, you can format the headings by applying built-in heading styles that define not only formatting but also outline levels. Then it
is easy to view and organize the document in Outline view. In this view, you can hide all the
body text and display only the headings at and above a particular level. You can also re­
arrange the sections of a document by moving their headings.
SEE ALSO For information about formatting headings by using styles, see “Applying styles
to text” in Chapter 3, “Modify the structure and appearance of text.” For general information about styles, see “Creating custom styles and templates” in Chapter 16, “Work in Word
more efficiently.”
When you view a document in Outline view, the document is displayed with a hierarchical
structure, and the Outlining tab appears on the ribbon.
A styled document, displayed in Outline view.
The indentations and symbols used in Outline view to indicate the level of a heading or
paragraph in the document’s structure don’t appear in the document in other views or
when you print it. To easily reference paragraph styles while working in Outline view, you
can display the style area pane to the left of the document. This pane is available only in
Draft and Outline views. By default, the style area pane is 0 inches wide, which effectively
closes it. We find it useful to have the style area pane open while working in Outline view.
You can set the width of the style area pane on the Advanced page of the Word Options
dialog box.
298 Chapter 10 Organize and arrange content
You can use commands in the Outline Tools group of the Outlining tab to do the following:
▪▪ Display only the headings at a specific level and above.
▪▪ Promote or demote headings or body text by changing their level.
▪▪ Move headings and their text up or down in the document.
TIP You can click the buttons in the Master Document group to create a master document
with subdocuments that you can then display or hide. The topic of master documents and
subdocuments is beyond the scope of this book. For information, refer to Word Help.
When working in Print Layout view, you can display a hierarchical structure of the document headings in the Navigation pane. You can reorganize document content by dragging
headings in the Navigation pane, and promote, demote, or remove sections by using commands on the Navigation pane shortcut menu. You can also display only specific heading
levels in the Navigation pane by clicking that option on the shortcut menu.
In this exercise, you’ll display a document in Outline view, display the style area pane, promote and demote headings, move sections, and expand and collapse the outline. Then
you’ll look at similar functionality that is available in the Navigation pane.
SET UP You need the OfficeProcedures document located in the Chapter10 practice
file folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
On the View tab, in the Views group, click Outline to display the document in
Outline view, with the Outlining tab at the left end of the ribbon. Notice that the
Outlining tab is not differentiated by a colored heading as tool tabs are, because it
is always available when you are in Outline view (not only when a specific type of
content is selected).
2
In the Backstage view, click the Options page tab to open the Word Options
dialog box.
3
In the Word Options dialog box, click the Advanced page tab. Scroll to the Display
area (about halfway down the page), and change the Style area pane width in Draft
and Outline views setting to 1”. Then click OK to return to the document.
4
On the Outlining tab, in the Outline Tools group, point to each of the unlabeled
buttons to familiarize yourself with its name and purpose.
5
In the Outline Tools group, click the Show Level arrow, and then in the list, click
Level 1 to collapse the document to display only first-level headings.
Reorganizing document outlines 299
10
The plus sign to the left of each heading indicates that the heading has subheadings.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+Shift+1 to display only first-level headings. For
more information about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end
of this book.
6
7
In the document, click anywhere in the Accounting heading.
In the Outline Tools group, click the Expand button to expand only the Accounting
section to display its level 2 subheadings.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+Shift++ to expand a section.
8
In the Outline Tools group, click the Demote button to change the Accounting
heading to a level 2 heading. Notice that it is now at the same level as its former
subheadings.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+Shift+Right Arrow to demote a heading.
The minus sign to the left of the Accounting heading indicates that it has no subheadings.
300 Chapter 10 Organize and arrange content
9
10
On the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Undo button to return the Accounting
heading to level 1.
In the Outline Tools group, click the Collapse button to display only level 1 headings.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+Shift+- to collapse a heading.
11
Click the Demote button to revert the Accounting heading to level 2. Then click
the Expand button to expand the Accounting section. Because its subheadings were
hidden when you demoted the heading, the subheadings have also been demoted,
to level 3, to maintain the hierarchy within the section.
The style of the Accounting heading changes to Heading 2, and the style of its subheadings
changes to Heading 3.
12
Click the Collapse button to hide the subheadings of the Accounting section, and
then in the Outline Tools group, click the Promote button to change Accounting
back to a level 1 heading.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+Shift+Left Arrow to promote a heading.
13
Press Ctrl+Home to move to the beginning of the document. In the Outline Tools
group, in the Show Level list, click Level 2 to display all level 1 and level 2 headings
in the document.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+Shift+2 to display all first-level and second-level
headings.
Reorganizing document outlines 301
10
14
Click the plus sign to the left of the Shipping heading to select all the content in that
section, and then in the Outline Tools group, click the Move Up button four times to
move the Shipping heading and its subheadings above the Accounting heading.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+Shift+Up Arrow to move a selected section upward
in an outline.
Clicking the plus sign adjacent to a heading selects all the headings and text in that section.
15
Press Ctrl+Home to release the selection, and then in the Outline Tools group, in the
Show Level list, click All Levels. You can now scroll through the document to review
the effects of the reorganization.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+Shift+A to display all levels.
16
In the Close group, click the Close Outline View button to display the reorganized
document in Print Layout view.
302 Chapter 10 Organize and arrange content
Now we’ll look at ways of reorganizing a document within the Navigation pane.
17
On the View tab, in the Show group, select the Navigation Pane check box. Notice
that the Navigation pane reflects the changes you made to the document structure.
18
In the Navigation pane, drag the Accounting heading up and drop it immediately
above the Shipping heading (a bold line indicates the drop location) to move the
Accounting section back to its original location.
19
In the Navigation pane, right-click any heading to display a menu of actions you can
perform directly in the Navigation pane.
10
You can work with a document in the Navigation pane in much the same way you can in
Outline view.
20
+
Experiment with the commands available on the Navigation pane shortcut menu.
CLEAN UP Close the OfficeProcedures document, saving your changes if you want to.
Reorganizing document outlines 303
Arranging objects on the page
You have already learned basic ways to control how text wraps around an object, such as a
picture, and to position an object on the page. However, sometimes things don’t work out
quite the way you expect them to, especially when you are dealing with multiple objects.
TIP In the exercise for this chapter, you work with photographs, but the concepts discussed
here also apply to other graphic objects, such as clip art images, diagrams, and shapes.
When you choose a text wrapping option other than In Line With Text, you can specify that
an object be positioned in one of two ways:
▪▪ Absolutely This option positions the object at a distance you set from a margin,
page, paragraph, or line.
▪▪ Relatively This type of positioning is determined by the relationship of the object to
a margin or page.
You can take the guesswork out of setting an object’s position by choosing one of nine predefined position options from the Position gallery. These options all implement square text
wrapping in a specific location relative to the margins of the page.
If you use one of the position options to locate an object, you can still move the object
manually by dragging it to another position on the page. Often it is easier to drag objects
into position if you display an onscreen grid to align against. You can also use alignment
commands to align objects with the margins and with each other.
Changing the document text after you position an object might upset the arrangement of
content on the page. You can specify whether an object should move with its related text or
remain anchored in its position. You can also specify whether the object should be allowed
to overlap other objects.
If you insert several objects and then position them so that they overlap, they are said to
be “stacked.” The stacking order (which object appears on top of which) is initially determined by the order in which you inserted the objects, but it can also be determined by
other factors such as the type of text wrapping assigned to each object. Provided all the
objects have the same kind of text wrapping, you can change their order by selecting an
object and clicking the Bring Forward or Send Backward button in the Arrange group to
304 Chapter 10 Organize and arrange content
move the object to the top or bottom of the stack. If you click either button’s arrow and
then click Bring Forward or Send Backward, the object moves forward or backward in the
stack one position at a time.
After you arrange objects on the page, you can use the Selection And Visibility pane to hide
and show them so that you can judge each object’s contribution to the whole.
In this exercise, you’ll modify the text wrapping, position, and stacking order of pictures that
have already been inserted into a document. Then you’ll hide one of the pictures.
SET UP You need the BambooInfo document located in the Chapter10 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document in Print Layout view, and then
follow the steps.
1
Click the first picture on the page to select it, and then click the Layout Options
button that appears.
10
From the Layout Options menu, you can quickly format the position of an object without
accessing the ribbon.
Arranging objects on the page 305
2
In the With Text Wrapping area of the Layout Options menu, click the second icon
(Tight). Notice that the options at the bottom of the menu become available and the
Move with text option is selected.
3
At the bottom of the Layout Options menu, click the See more link to display the
Position page of the Layout dialog box.
TIP You can also open the Layout dialog box from the Format tool tab for Pictures
by clicking the Position arrow in the Arrange group and then clicking More Layout
Options.
The settings here are linked to the text wrapping option you chose..
4
In the Layout dialog box, click the Text Wrapping tab. Notice that the settings reflect
the selection you made on the Layout Options menu.
306 Chapter 10 Organize and arrange content
More exact positioning can be done by configuring the settings on this page.
5
In the Distance from text area, set both Left and Right to 0.3”. Then click OK.
10
The text wraps to the right of the picture, with the specified amount of white space between the
picture and the text.
Arranging objects on the page 307
6
Click anywhere in the first line of text, press the Home key, and then press Enter to
insert a blank paragraph below the document title.
The picture moves down with the paragraph to which it is attached.
7
On the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Undo button to remove the blank paragraph.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+Z to undo the most recent action.
8
Click the picture to select it. Then on the Format tool tab, in the Arrange group, click
the Position button to display the Position gallery.
The Position gallery offers several preconfigured text wrapping options.
308 Chapter 10 Organize and arrange content
9
In the Position gallery, point to each thumbnail in turn to display a live preview of its
effects on the position of the picture. Then in the With Text Wrapping category, click
the first thumbnail in the first row (Position in Top Left with Square Text Wrapping)
to move the picture to the upper-left corner of the document.
The picture is now aligned with the top and left page margins.
10
In the document title, click to position the cursor to the left of Beautiful, and then
press Enter to insert a blank paragraph above the title. Notice that the picture does
not move down with the title.
11
Click the picture, and then click the Layout Options button that appears. Notice that
the Fix position on the page option is now selected instead of the Move with text
option. The picture is no longer anchored to the paragraph.
12
At the bottom of the Layout Options menu, click the See more link to display the
Position page of the Layout dialog box. Notice that the Horizontal and Vertical
settings have changed to Alignment and relative to Margin.
TIP When pictures have a text wrapping setting other than In Line With Text, you can
use the options on the Align menu to align multiple objects horizontally or vertically.
You can also distribute selected objects equally between the first and last objects in
the selection. Understanding how these options work takes practice. It is a good idea
to test various settings with multiple objects to review the results. Remember, the
Undo button is your ally!
Arranging objects on the page 309
10
The picture is now anchored to the margins.
13
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without making any changes.
Now we’ll format the second picture.
14
Click the second bamboo picture, display the Position gallery, and in the With
Text Wrapping category, click the third thumbnail in the first row (Position in Top
Right with Square Text Wrapping) to send the picture to the upper-right corner
of the page.
TIP Selecting one of the predefined Position options is a quick way of both setting
text wrapping and breaking the relationship of the picture with the text.
15
On the Format tool tab, in the Arrange group, click the Align Objects button to
display the Align menu.
310 Chapter 10 Organize and arrange content
The Align menu provides easy access to all the alignment options.
16
On the Align menu, click Grid Settings to open the Grid and Guides dialog box.
10
You can specify the location and functionality of the onscreen alignment guides and grid.
Arranging objects on the page 311
17
In the Grid settings area, set both Horizontal spacing and Vertical spacing to 0.25”.
In the Show grid area, select the Display gridlines on screen check box. Then click
OK to fill the text column with a grid of quarter-inch squares.
18
Drag the selected picture down and to the left until it sits three squares from the top
margin and three squares from the left margin, overlapping the first picture. Notice
as you drag that the picture snaps to the grid.
TIP To move a picture without snapping to the grid, hold down the Ctrl key while
pressing an arrow key. The picture moves in tiny increments.
19
Click the third picture in the document, click the Layout Options button that appears,
and click the first thumbnail in the With Text Wrapping category (Square). Drag the
picture up and to the right until it sits six squares from the top margin and six squares
from the left margin, overlapping the second picture. The text wraps on both sides of
the picture, which makes it quite difficult to read (even if the grid weren’t there).
Using the predefined alignment options doesn’t always produce the results you want.
20
With the third picture selected, press and hold the Ctrl key, and then click the first
and second pictures to select them also.
21
On the Format tool tab, in the Arrange group, click Wrap Text, and then click More
Layout Options to display the Text Wrapping page of the Layout dialog box.
22
In the Wrapping style area, click Tight. In the Wrap Text area, click Right only. In the
Distance from text area, set both Left and Right to 0.3”. Then click OK to rewrap the
text to the right of and below the group of pictures.
312 Chapter 10 Organize and arrange content
You can apply alignment options to multiple objects at the same time.
23
Click away from the pictures and then click only the second picture. In the Arrange
group, click Bring Forward to position the selected picture on top of the others.
24
In the Arrange group, click the Align Objects button, and click View Gridlines to turn
them off. Then click away from the picture to display the results.
10
The final result is artistic and elegant.
Now we’ll experiment with the Selection pane.
Arranging objects on the page 313
25
Click the third picture to activate the Format tool tab. In the Arrange group, click the
Selection Pane button to open the Selection pane, which identifies the three objects
on this page. The eye icon to the right of each picture indicates that it is currently
visible on the page.
You can manage objects from the Selection pane.
26
At the top of the Selection pane, click the Hide All button to hide the pictures in
the document. The eye icons change to small horizontal lines to indicate that the
pictures are hidden. Notice that the text in the document flows naturally as though
the pictures weren’t there.
27
Click the bar icons adjacent to Picture 1 and Picture 2 to redisplay only those
pictures.
314 Chapter 10 Organize and arrange content
Hiding a picture reformats the document content as though the picture doesn’t exist.
28
Close the Selection pane.
+
CLEAN UP Close the BambooInfo document, saving your changes if you want to.
Using tables to control page layout
Most people are accustomed to thinking of a table as a means of displaying data in a quick,
easy-to-grasp format. But tables can also serve to organize content in creative ways. For
example, suppose you want to display two tables next to each other. The simplest way to do
this is to first create a page-width table that has only one row and two columns, and then
insert one of the tables you want to display in the first cell and the other table in the second
cell. When the outer table borders are hidden, these nested tables appear side by side.
10
These headings and tables are nested within the cells of a one-row, two-column table.
As with regular tables, you can create a nested table in one of three ways:
▪▪ From scratch
▪▪ By formatting existing information
▪▪ By inserting Microsoft Excel data
Using tables to control page layout 315
And just like with other tables, you can format a nested table either manually or by using
one of the ready-made table styles.
TIP You can use tables to organize a mixture of elements such as text, tables, charts, and
diagrams. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Organize information in columns and
tables.”
If you are designing your document with accessibility in mind, be aware that screen readers
and other assistive devices access the content linearly—from left to right, row by row—
whereas you might expect a person looking at the table to read its content from top to
bottom, column by column. Some screen readers have a table reading mode that can help
to ameliorate this problem, so if you’re arranging content by using a simple table layout,
this won’t present as much of an issue (although the content meaning might still be less
clear than when presented in normal text or in a list). If you create a fancy table layout that
includes cells of varying heights and widths, with some merged cells and some split cells,
it’s likely that the screen reader will access and deliver the content out of order. Keep this in
mind if you’re intending to deliver your content in an electronic format, and certainly if your
organization is required to adhere to accessibility standards.
In this exercise, you’ll first create a table, and then you will nest and format two tables within the original table.
SET UP You need the Loan workbook, the DeliveryTruckPurchase document, and the
LoanComparisons document located in the Chapter10 practice file folder to complete
this exercise. Open the Loan workbook in Excel, and open the DeliveryTruckPurchase
document in Word. Then open the LoanComparisons document, and follow the steps.
1
2
Press Ctrl+End to position the cursor at the end of the document.
On the Insert tab, in the Tables group, click the Table button. In the Insert Table
gallery, click the second box in the first row (2x1 Table) to insert a two-column
page-width table in the document.
316 Chapter 10 Organize and arrange content
You can arrange content side by side within this basic table structure.
3
On the View tab, in the Window group, click the Switch Windows button, and then
click DeliveryTruckPurchase.
4
Scroll to the bottom of the page, and click anywhere in the Payment Schedule table.
On the Layout tool tab, in the Table group, click Select, and then click Select Table.
5
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the Copy button to copy the selected
table to the Microsoft Office Clipboard.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+C to copy the selected content to the Clipboard.
6
Switch to the LoanComparisons document, right-click the left table cell, and then
below Paste Options, click the Nest Table button to insert the table you copied into
the cell and adjust the height of the container table to fit the nested table.
7
On the Windows Taskbar, click the Microsoft Excel button and then, if necessary,
click the Loan workbook. On Sheet 1 of the Loan workbook, select cells A1:B8, and
then copy the selected cells to the Clipboard.
8
Switch back to the LoanComparisons document, click the right table cell, and
then on the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the Paste button to insert the
worksheet data as a nested table in the cell.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+V to paste the most recently copied content from
the Clipboard.
Using tables to control page layout 317
10
Nested tables inserted from a Word document and an Excel worksheet.
9
Point to the container table, and then click the table selector that appears just out­
side of its upper-left corner to select the table. (Be sure you select the container table
and not the nested table.)
10
On the Design tool tab, in the Borders group, click the Borders arrow, and then click
No Border to remove the borders from the container cells.
11
Click anywhere in the left table, click the table selector that appears, and then press
Ctrl+Spacebar to clear the formatting brought over from the original table source.
12
On the Design tool tab, in the Table Style Options group, ensure that the Header
Row and Total Row check boxes are selected, and clear the other check boxes.
13
In the Table Styles gallery, click the thumbnail of the table style you want to apply to
the nested table. (We used Grid Table 5 Dark – Accent 1.)
14
Repeat steps 11 through 13 to format the right table, perhaps using a similar table
style with a different color. (We used Grid Table 5 Dark – Accent 6.) Then click away
from the tables to display the results.
Although invisible, the container table provides the structure to display these two tables.
+
CLEAN UP Close the LoanComparisons document, saving your changes if you want
to. Then close the DeliveryTruckPurchase document and the Loan workbook.
318 Chapter 10 Organize and arrange content
Key points
▪▪ If you take the time to apply heading styles to a document, you can use the
document’s outline to rearrange its sections, either in Outline view or in the
Navigation pane.
▪▪ You can position an object in relation to the text that surrounds it and in relation
to other objects on the page.
▪▪ By using tables in creative ways, you can place information in non-linear arrangements for easy comparison or analysis.
10
Key points 319
Chapter at a glance
Save Save Word documents in other formats,
page 322
Design Design accessible documents,
page 329
Create Publish Create and modify web documents,
page 333
Create and publish blog posts,
page 342
Create documents for
use outside of Word
11
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Save Word documents in other formats.
Design accessible documents.
Create and modify web documents.
Create and publish blog posts.
You can distribute documents that you create in Microsoft Word 2013 in several ways.
You can print a hard copy of the document and give it to someone, provide an electronic
copy of the file to someone, present the document online, or post its contents to a blog.
Although Word is a “word-processing program” it also provides you with the tools you
need to share your words with the world!
In Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute documents,” we looked at the processes of preparing a document for printing or electronic distribution, printing a document, and sharing
a document file. In this chapter we’ll look at the ways in which you can distribute information from a Word document in other formats or to people who are not running Word 2013.
We’ll also discuss some of the design decisions you might want to consider to ensure that
your document content is accessible to people with disabilities and to electronic readers.
Sometimes you’ll create a document in Word 2013 and then want to send it to someone
who doesn’t have Word 2013 installed on his or her computer. You can save a document
created by using Word 2013 in several other file formats.
If you plan to distribute a document electronically but want to ensure that the document
appears exactly the same to the recipients as it does to you, you can save the document in
Portable Document Format (PDF) or XML Paper Specification (XPS) format. When people
view or print the PDF or XPS file, no matter what computer or what printer they use, the
pages appear just as they do when printed from your computer on your printer.
321
One way of distributing the information in your documents is by converting them to webpages and posting them online for people to read. The Internet has become a major part
of our everyday lives. We use it to research topics, shop, check the news, and find out how
our favorite sports team is doing. It’s also a great publishing tool if you are trying to reach a
broad audience. For example, your organization might want to publish an online newsletter
to provide information while advertising its goods or services. Or if you have a blog (short
for web log), you can use the built-in Word tools to create and post articles.
In this chapter, you’ll first save a document in a different file format. You’ll experiment with
the new PDF-editing functionality. Then you’ll preview a document in Web Layout view,
save the document as a webpage, and make any adjustments necessary for optimum pres­
entation in a web browser. Finally, you’ll learn how to use Word to create a blog post.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter11 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
Saving Word documents in other formats
When you save a Word document, the default file format is the Word 2013 .docx format.
Although the file extension is the same, Word 2013 recognizes a difference between .docx
files saved in Word 2013 and .docx files saved in Word 2010 or Word 2007. A Word 2013
.docx file can be opened and edited in Word 2010 or Word 2007 on a computer running
Windows, or in Word 2011 or Word 2008 on a Mac, but if it is saved in one of those programs, the next time you open it in Word 2013 it will be displayed in Compatibility View.
A .docx file can’t be opened in Word 2003 or an earlier version of Word unless the person
using that version of Word installs the Microsoft Office Compatibility Pack for Word, Excel,
and PowerPoint File Formats, which is available for free from the Microsoft Download
Center at download.microsoft.com. If you want to ensure that recipients running older versions of Word can open and edit a file that you create in Word 2013, you can save the file in
the .doc format, as a Word 97-2003 Document.
322 Chapter 11 Create documents for use outside of Word
You can save Word documents in many different formats.
If you are looking for a file format that is more exotic than those listed on the Export page,
click Save As Another File Type and then click the Save As button. In the Save As dialog box,
you can choose from an extensive list of additional file formats, including Word MacroEnabled Document, Word Macro-Enabled Template, Word XML Document, Web Page,
Word 97-2003 Template, Word 2003 XML Document, Strict Open XML Document, and
Works 6-9 Document.
If you want to save a Word document in a format that can be opened by the widest variety
of programs (including text editors that are installed with most operating systems), use one
of these two formats:
▪▪ Rich Text Format (*.rtf) This format preserves the document’s formatting.
▪▪ Plain Text (*.txt) This format preserves only the document’s text.
Saving Word documents in other formats 323
11
If you want people to be able to view a document exactly as it appears on your screen, use
one of these two formats:
▪▪ PDF (.pdf) This format is preferred by commercial printing facilities. Recipients can
display the file in the free Microsoft Reader or Adobe Reader programs, and can display and edit the file in Word 2013 or Adobe Acrobat.
▪▪ XPS (.xps) This format precisely renders all fonts, images, and colors. Recipients can
display the file in the free Microsoft Reader program or the free XPS Viewer program.
TIP Another way to create a PDF file or XPS file is by selecting that option when sending
the document by email. For more information, see “Printing and sending documents” in
Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute documents.”
Editing a PDF file in Word
An exciting feature of Word 2013 is the ability to edit PDF files by using all the standard Word proofing tools. To open a PDF file in Word, do one of the following:
▪▪ In File Explorer, right-click the file, click Open, and then click Word (Desktop).
TIP In Windows 8, File Explorer has replaced Windows Explorer. Throughout this
book, we refer to this browsing utility by its Windows 8 name. If your computer
is running Windows 7 or an earlier version of Windows, use Windows Explorer
instead.
▪▪ In Word, display the Open page of the Backstage view, navigate to the file loca-
tion, click the file, and then click Open. (In the Open dialog box, PDF files now fall
into the category of Word Documents.)
Word converts the file to an editable Word document. If the file contains complicated
formatting and layout, the Word version of the document might not be a perfect replica of the PDF, but most simple files convert quite cleanly.
324 Chapter 11 Create documents for use outside of Word
The PDF and XPS formats are designed to deliver documents as electronic representations
of the way they appear when printed. Both types of files can easily be sent by email to
many recipients and can be made available on a webpage for downloading by anyone who
wants them. However, the files are no longer Word documents. A PDF file can be converted
to the editable Word format. An XPS file cannot be opened, viewed, or edited in Word.
When you save a Word document in PDF or XPS format, you can optimize the file size of
the document for your intended distribution method—the larger Standard file size is better for printing, whereas the Minimum file size is suitable for online publishing. You can also
configure the following options:
▪▪ Specify the pages to include in the PDF or XPS file.
▪▪ Include or exclude comments and tracked changes in a PDF file.
▪▪ Include or exclude non-printing elements such as bookmarks and properties.
▪▪ Select compliance, font embedding, and encryption options in a PDF file.
In this exercise, you’ll save one page of a multipage document in PDF format. Then you’ll
edit the PDF file in Word.
SET UP You need the ParkingRules document located in the Chapter11 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
Scroll through the document and notice that it consists of 13 sections on 9 pages.
Display page 3, and notice that it contains only section 6. Click anywhere on page 3
to make that the active page.
2
Display the Export page of the Backstage view. With Create PDF/XPS Document
selected in the left pane, click the Create PDF/XPS button.
3
In the Publish as PDF or XPS dialog box, verify that the Chapter11 practice file
folder appears in the Address bar and PDF appears in the Save as Type box. With
the Standard option selected in the Optimize for area, click the Options button to
open the Options dialog box.
Saving Word documents in other formats 325
11
You can choose from these options to tailor the PDF file to your needs.
4
In the Page range area, click Current page. In the Include non-printing information
area, clear the Document properties check box. Then click OK.
5
Back in the Publish as PDF or XPS dialog box, notice that the Open file after
publishing check box is selected by default. In the File name box, enter My Rules.
Then click Publish to save the document in PDF format and open it in Microsoft
Reader or your default PDF viewer.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you don’t have a PDF viewer installed, don’t worry; we’re
going to open the file in Word next.
326 Chapter 11 Create documents for use outside of Word
11
The file opens in your default PDF viewer.
6
Notice that the PDF file contains the same content as page 3 of the original Word
document. Then close the file and return to the ParkingRules document.
Saving Word documents in other formats 327
7
On the Open page of the Backstage view, navigate to the Chapter11 practice file
folder. Notice that the My Rules PDF file now appears in the folder with the Word
documents.
The icon that represents the default PDF viewer on your computer will precede the PDF
file name.
Now let’s open the PDF file in Word.
8
In the Open dialog box, click the My Rules file, and then click Open. Word displays a
message box that provides information about the conversion process.
If you don’t want this message box to appear again, select the check box before clicking OK.
9
In the message box, click OK to complete the conversion process and open the
converted file in Word.
328 Chapter 11 Create documents for use outside of Word
The file contains the same content as the original.
10
Scroll through the file in Word. Notice that it contains the same content as page 3 of
the original Word document. However, it is now more than one page in length, and
some of the formatting is not the same as in the original document or the PDF.
+
CLEAN UP Close the My Rules and ParkingRules documents without saving your
changes.
Designing accessible documents
Whenever you create a document that will be distributed electronically, particularly if it
will be displayed as a webpage, think about whether its content will be accessible to all the
people you want to reach. For example, consider the following:
▪▪ Not all people will display the document in Word 2013 or in the same web browser in
which you preview it.
Designing accessible documents 329
11
▪▪ Some people might set their default web browser font sizes larger than usual, or
display their web browser content at an increased zoom level.
▪▪ Some people can’t differentiate changes in color. Others might have their computers
configured to display a high-contrast color scheme that changes the default colors of
text so they can read it better.
▪▪ People with visual impairments might use an assistive device such as a screen reader
to “read” content to them from the document or webpage.
▪▪ Web browsers might be configured to not display certain page elements.
▪▪ A slow connection might prevent the display of large images.
If you intend to publish the document on a public webpage, consider also whether the
terms that your prospective viewers might search for are accessible to search engines.
There are some things you can do to make a document display more uniformly on screen
(or on paper) and be more accessible to assistive devices and Internet search engines:
▪▪ Use styles to format content, rather than applying manual formatting. People can
then apply a style set with large, legible fonts and high-contrast colors so the content
scales to a size that is easier for them to read on screen. In addition, when you use
heading styles, your viewers can easily display a document outline and navigate to
specific locations in the document.
▪▪ Similarly, when specifying colors, use the theme colors so that they perform appro­
priately when viewers choose high-contrast themes.
▪▪ If your content includes graphics, add a caption to each image and provide alternative text (frequently referred to as alt text) that provides a written description of the
image in the image properties. The alt text is displayed in place of the image when
the image can’t be displayed on screen. Also, wrap text around images by using the
In Line With Text setting, so that images do not interrupt text.
SEE ALSO For more information about alt text, see “Inserting and modifying pictures”
in Chapter 5, “Add simple graphic elements.”
▪▪ Do not use watermarks or specify background colors, patterns, or images that might
interfere with the readability of the document content.
▪▪ Present information in text paragraphs rather than in text boxes. Content in text
boxes might not be accessible to screen readers.
330 Chapter 11 Create documents for use outside of Word
▪▪ To ensure that your content is accessed in the correct order, present it in text para-
graphs rather than in tabbed lists or tables. If you must present information in a table,
use the standard table formats—don’t “draw” the table manually, merge or split cells,
or nest tables. Variances in the table might cause assistive devices to incorrectly interpret the content. If your table will span multiple pages, select the option to repeat
the header row so that the headers are both visible and accessible to assistive devices.
Add alt text and captions to tables in the event that they are incorrectly displayed or
interpreted. Avoid using tables to arrange content on pages, because assistive devices
might access the content in an order other than you intend.
▪▪ When formatting hyperlinks, provide ScreenTip text.
SEE ALSO For information about creating ScreenTips for hyperlinks, see “Linking to
external resources” in Chapter 12, “Link to information and content.”
To determine whether your document meets standard accessibility requirements, display
the Info page of the Backstage view, click the Check For Issues button, and then click Check
Accessibility to run the Accessibility Checker.
11
The Accessibility Checker locates content that might cause accessibility issues.
Designing accessible documents 331
This tool checks for many common accessibility issues and provides explanations and recommendations for fixing them. You can leave the Accessibility Checker open while you
work—its contents will automatically update to indicate the current issues. After you run
the Accessibility Checker, information about document content issues is also shown in the
Inspect Document area of the Info page of the Backstage view.
Content issues displayed in the Inspect Document area.
SEE ALSO For more information about designing documents for accessibility, run the
Accessibility Checker and then click the Read More link at the bottom of the Accessibility
Checker pane.
332 Chapter 11 Create documents for use outside of Word
Creating and modifying web documents
You don’t need to be a web designer to create a webpage. From within Word 2013, you can
view a document in Web Layout view as it will appear on screen, make any necessary adjustments in Word, and then save the document as a webpage, as easily as you would save
it in any other format. During the process of saving the webpage, you can assign a page
title that will appear in the title bar of the viewer’s web browser.
When you save a document as a webpage, Word converts the styles and formatting in
the document to HTML codes, which are called tags. These tags tell a web browser how to
display the document. During the conversion, some of the document’s formatting might
be changed or ignored because it is not supported by all web browsers. If that is the case,
Word alerts you and gives you the option of stopping the conversion process so that you
can make adjustments to the formatting to make it more compatible.
TIP In the Web Options dialog box, you can specify which browsers you anticipate will be
used to view your webpages. You can also have Word make any features that are incompatible with the specified browsers unavailable .
You can save a document as a webpage in any of three formats:
▪▪ Single File Web Page This is the default format for saving a document as a web-
page. This format embeds all the information necessary to render the webpage in one
MIME-encapsulated aggregate HTML (.mhtml) file that can be distributed via email.
▪▪ Web Page This format saves the webpage as an .htm file with a folder of supporting
files that ensure the page is rendered exactly as you want it.
▪▪ Web Page, Filtered This format removes any Office-specific tags from the file and
significantly reduces the size of the web document and its accompanying folder of
supporting files. However, it can also radically change the look of the document. For
example, it might change a shaded background to a solid color, making the resulting
page difficult to read.
After you save a document as a webpage, it is no longer a Word document. However, you
can still open, view, and edit the webpage in Word, just as you would a normal document.
(You can also open and edit HTML-format webpages created in other programs.) Making
changes can be as basic as replacing text and adjusting alignment, or as advanced as moving and inserting graphics. When you finish modifying the webpage, you can resave it as a
webpage, or save it as a regular Word document.
Creating and modifying web documents 333
11
In this exercise, you’ll check that Word is set up to create web documents that are optimized
for display in Windows Internet Explorer 6 or a later version of Internet Explorer. You’ll
preview a document in Web Layout view and make adjustments necessary for online pres­
entation. Finally, you’ll save the document as a webpage, preview the webpage, open the
webpage in Word to make some modifications, and then save and view your changes.
SET UP You need the WebPlanner document located in the Chapter11 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. You also need a web browser. We’ve used Windows
Internet Explorer 10; the steps might be different for other browsers and versions.
Open the document, and set the zoom level to 100%. Then follow the steps.
1
Scroll through the document to observe the current layout, and then open the Word
Options dialog box and click the Advanced page tab.
2
In the General area of the Advanced page, click the Web Options button to display
the Browsers page of the Web Options dialog box.
The Browsers page of the Web Options dialog box.
3
Click the People who view this Web page will be using arrow to view the list
of browser configurations for which you will configure content. In the list, click
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or later. Then in the Options area, ensure that all
five check boxes are selected.
334 Chapter 11 Create documents for use outside of Word
4
View the other pages of the Web Options dialog box to familiarize yourself with the
kinds of settings available for your webpages. On the Pictures page, notice that you
can specify the screen size for which you are configuring content—by default, it is
set to your current screen resolution, but you can choose another screen resolution
if you want to (1024 × 768 is an achievable minimum on most modern computer
displays).
5
Click OK once to close the Web Options dialog box, and again to close the Word
Options dialog box.
6
On the View Shortcuts toolbar in the lower-right corner of the screen, click the Web
Layout button to display the page as it will appear in a web browser. Notice that the
page margins are ignored, and the subtitle wraps onto the same line as the WordArt
depiction of the company name.
11
In Web Layout view, the document content fills the screen.
7
Click anywhere in the Wide World Importers WordArt, click the Layout Options
button that appears, and then click the In Line with Text icon to move the subtitle
below the WordArt.
Creating and modifying web documents 335
Positioning objects in line with text prevents them from interfering with other text or objects.
8
Display the hidden formatting marks, and scroll through the document further, if
necessary. In the middle of the document, notice that a manual page break and blank
paragraph mark force a large gap after the sixth paragraph of the document body.
9
Delete the page break and paragraph mark, and then scroll to the end of the docu­
ment. Notice that the Ordering Information sidebar sits alone, and the graphic on
which the sidebar heading is displayed covers part of the sidebar text.
The sidebar, which really added zing to the page in Print Layout view, doesn’t display gracefully
in Web Layout view.
336 Chapter 11 Create documents for use outside of Word
10
Hide the formatting marks. Click at the end of the last paragraph of text, press
Enter, enter Ordering Information, and then press Enter to create a new blank
paragraph.
11
Click anywhere on the outer edge of the sidebar to activate the container box,
click the Layout Options button that appears, and then click the In Line with Text
thumbnail to make all the sidebar text visible. In the sidebar, drag to select the
paragraph of text.
12
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the Copy button to copy the text
from the sidebar to the Microsoft Office Clipboard, and then position the cursor in
the new blank paragraph above the sidebar and click the Paste button to insert the
text in the new location. Click the Paste Options button that appears just below the
pasted text, and then on the Paste Options menu, click the Keep Text Only button.
The Paste Options menu, which appears below the inserted text, offers some of the same
options that are available from the Paste menu in the Clipboard group on the Home tab.
Having moved the sidebar content out into the document, we no longer need the
sidebar.
13
Click the outer edge of the sidebar to select it, and then press Delete to remove it
from the document.
14
Click anywhere in the Ordering Information paragraph. On the Home tab, in the
Style gallery, click the Heading 1 thumbnail to format the heading and add it to
the structural elements of the document.
Now let’s insert a hyperlink to the heading so that webpage viewers can easily
access it.
Creating and modifying web documents 337
11
15
Scroll to the fourth paragraph of text and select the phrase purchase a Room Planner.
On the Insert menu, in the Links group, click Hyperlink to open the Insert Hyperlink
dialog box.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+K to open the Insert Hyperlink dialog box. For
more information about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard Shortcuts” at the end
of this book.
16
In the Link to list, click Place in This Document. In the Select a place in this
document pane, click Ordering Information. Then click the ScreenTip button.
Adding a ScreenTip to hyperlinks is a best practice for accessibility purposes.
17
In the ScreenTip text box, enter Display ordering information. Then click OK in
the Set Hyperlink ScreenTip dialog box, and again in the Insert Hyperlink dialog
box to insert the hyperlink in the document.
Notice that the content would be easier to read if the text lines were shorter. You
can accomplish this by indenting the paragraphs.
18
On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click the Select button, and then click
Select All.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+A to select all content in the document.
19
On the Page Layout tab, in the Indent area of the Paragraph group, enter 1.25 in
the Left box, enter 1.25 in the Right box, and then click anywhere in the document.
Notice that this leaves the quote box no longer aligns with the text.
338 Chapter 11 Create documents for use outside of Word
Increasing the margins decreases the width of the text area.
20
Click anywhere in the quote box, and click the Layout Options button that appears.
On the Layout Options menu, click the In Line with Text thumbnail to position the
quote box at the beginning of the Take a look paragraph.
21
Click to position the cursor between the quote box and the word Take, and press
Enter to place the quote box on its own line.
Now that all the page elements display nicely, let’s save the document as a webpage.
22
Display the Save As page of the Backstage view, and click the Chapter11 practice file
folder to open the Save As dialog box.
Creating and modifying web documents 339
11
23
In the File name box, replace the suggested file name with MyWebPage (avoid
spaces in webpage file names). In the Save as type list, click Single File Web Page.
Then click the Change Title button to open the Enter Text dialog box.
You can provide a page title that displays on the title bar in a web browser.
24
In the Page title box, enter Room Planner. Then click OK in the Enter Text dialog
box, and Save in the Save As dialog box to create the webpage.
25
Do not close the Word document. Start File Explorer, and navigate to the Chapter11
practice file folder. The folder now contains a file named MyWebPage.
26
Double-click the MyWebPage file to display it in your default web browser. Notice
that the page title is shown on the web browser tab. Notice also that the WordArt
and the gradient background of the quote box do not display correctly.
340 Chapter 11 Create documents for use outside of Word
The web document looks almost the same in a web browser as it did in Web Layout view.
27
Point to the underlined text purchase a Room Planner, and notice that the ScreenTip
appears. Then click the link to move to the Ordering Information section of the page.
28
Do not close the web browser window. Switch to the MyWebPage file in Word. Click
the Wide World Importers WordArt object to select it, and then press Delete. Enter
Wide World Importers in its place. Then select the text, click the Font Color arrow
on the Mini Toolbar, and click the top orange swatch in the Theme Colors palette
(Orange, Accent 1). Then in the Font Size list, click 36.
29
Click the quote box to select it. On the Format tool tab, in the Shape Styles group,
click the Shape Fill button, and then click the top blue swatch in the Theme Colors
palette (Ice Blue, Background 2).
30
In the Backstage view or on the Quick Access Toolbar, click Save. Switch back to
the web browser window, and click the Refresh button to display the effects of your
changes.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press F5 to refresh the Internet Explorer window.
Creating and modifying web documents 341
11
You can easily make changes to the webpage and preview the results.
+
CLEAN UP Close your web browser and File Explorer. Then close the MyWebPage file.
Creating and publishing blog posts
Blogs used to be personal websites—online spaces where individuals expressed their opinions about anything and everything. With the evolution of social sites such as Facebook and
MySpace, blogs are now less likely to be personal online diaries intended for a limited audience, such as the author’s family or circle of friends, and are more likely to serve a promotional purpose. For example, they might provide news and information about an industry.
Or they might offer commentary on a specific subject, such as a genre of music, a political
point of view, a medical condition, or local news. Blogs may be created by individuals, or
they may be part of the communication stream from a company to its customers.
Blog content consists of posts that can include text, images, and links to related blogs, webpages, and other media. You can create blog posts through your online blog provider, or
you can create them in Word 2013 and publish them from Word when you’re ready to. A
benefit of creating a blog post in Word is that you can work offline and at your leisure, and
use the Word proofing tools to ensure that your content is ready for prime time.
342 Chapter 11 Create documents for use outside of Word
You can create a blog post within the Blog Post template, or in any Word document. If you
use the Blog Post template, you can manage the content and publishing process from within the document, by using the tools available on the Blog Post ribbon tab.
In the Blog Post template, the ribbon displays only the specialized Blog Post tab and the Insert tab.
If you don’t use the Blog Post template, you can still publish the document contents to your
blog by clicking Post To Blog on the Share page of the Backstage view.
If you have already set up a blog account with a blog service provider, you can register your
account with Word the first time you create a blog post. If you haven’t yet set up a blog account, you’ll need to register with a service provider before you can publish your first post.
Thereafter, Word uses your registered account information when you create or publish a
blog post.
Key points
▪▪ You can save a document in a file format that allows it to be opened in other programs.
▪▪ To ensure that a document appears as you intend it to when recipients view it, you
can distribute the document as a PDF or XPS file.
▪▪ You can edit PDF files in Word 2013.
▪▪ When you are creating a document, there are many simple actions you can take to
ensure that it meets accessibility requirements. You can use the Accessibility Checker
to identify document elements that commonly affect accessibility.
▪▪ A Word document can easily be converted to a webpage. You can review how it will
look in a web browser, and edit the webpage by using Word.
▪▪ You can easily create and publish blog posts by using Word.
Key points 343
11
Additional
techniques
12 Link to information and content
347
13 Reference content and content sources
373
14 Work with mail merge
403
15 Collaborate on documents
429
16 Work in Word more efficiently
453
Chapter at a glance
Link Link to external resources,
page 348
Embed Embed linked objects,
page 353
Bookmark Display Insert and link to bookmarks,
page 360
Display document information in fields,
page 365
Link to information
and content
12
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Link to external resources.
Embed linked objects.
Insert and link to bookmarks.
Display document information in fields.
Sometimes the information you want to convey in a document already exists in another
location—either external to the document or elsewhere within the document. Rather than
repeating the information or simply telling the reader where to find it, you can insert a link
to the information in its original location. The reader can click the link to move to that location or to access the external resource.
If the external resource is a picture, slide, or other image that might be updated frequently,
you can embed an updateable version of the image that is linked to the image storage location. Then each time you open the document, Word can check for an updated version of
the image.
If the information you want to present is saved as a document property, you can insert a
field that displays the property. Then if the property is updated, the document content
replicates the change.
Microsoft Word 2013 has several tools that help you to link to or display information:
▪▪ Hyperlinks To help a reader move to a location in the same file, in another file, or on
a webpage, you can add links from text or graphics to the target location.
▪▪ Bookmarks You can quickly return to a specific location in a document by inserting
a bookmark. You can jump to a bookmarked location by selecting it from a list, and
you can help a reader find information by inserting hyperlinks or cross-references to
bookmarks.
347
▪▪ Cross-references To help a reader move to a related location in a document, you
can insert a cross-reference. Then if the text at the location changes, you can tell
Word to update the cross-reference to reflect the change.
▪▪ Fields Instead of entering information that is associated with a document, you can
have Word insert it for you in a field. Then if the information changes, you can simply
update the field to ensure that the information is current.
In this chapter, you’ll first insert two different kinds of hyperlinks. You’ll embed linked objects in a document and then update the external objects so that changes are reflected.
Then you’ll create and modify bookmarks and cross-references. Finally, you’ll insert three
different types of fields.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter12 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
Linking to external resources
Like webpages, Word documents can include hyperlinks that provide a quick way to
perform tasks such as the following:
▪▪ Open another document
▪▪ Link to a website
▪▪ Download a file
▪▪ Send an email message
You insert hyperlinks into a Word document by displaying the Insert Hyperlink dialog box,
specifying the type of link you want to create, and then entering an appropriate destination
for that type of link.
While creating a hyperlink to a document or a webpage, called the target, you can specify
whether the target information should appear in the same window or frame as the active document or in a new one. You can also make a particular setting the default for all
hyperlinks.
Within a document, hyperlinks appear underlined and in the color specified for hyperlinks
by the document’s theme. You can jump to the target of the hyperlink by holding down
348 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
the Ctrl key and clicking the link. After you click the hyperlink, its color changes to the color
specified for followed hyperlinks.
To edit or remove a hyperlink, you can select it and click Hyperlink in the Links group on
the Insert tab or you can right-click the selection and then click the appropriate command.
In this exercise, you’ll insert and test a hyperlink to a different document. Then you’ll insert,
modify, and test a hyperlink that opens an email message window.
SET UP You need the VisitorGuide and Conductors documents located in the
Chapter12 practice file folder to complete this exercise. You also need to have an
email program configured on your computer. Open the VisitorGuide document,
and then follow the steps.
1
In the second sentence of the second paragraph, select series of outstanding
conductors. On the Insert tab, click the Links group button if necessary, and then
in the Links group, click the Hyperlink button to open the Insert Hyperlink dialog
box. Notice that on the Link to bar, Existing File or Web Page is selected.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+K to open the Insert Hyperlink dialog box. For
more information about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end
of this book.
12
You can select the target type in the Link To bar.
TROUBLESHOOTING If the contents of the Chapter12 folder are not shown, ensure
that Existing File Or Web Page is selected on the Link To bar, then click the Look In
arrow, and navigate to the Chapter12 practice file folder.
Linking to external resources 349
2
In the list of file names, click (don’t double-click) the Conductors document, and then
click the Target Frame button to open the Set Target Frame dialog box. Notice that
Page Default (none) is selected as the frame in which the document will open.
In the Set Target Frame dialog box, you can change the window
in which the hyperlink target will be displayed.
3
In the Select the frame where you want the document to appear list, click New
window. Then click OK.
4
Click OK to close the Insert Hyperlink dialog box and insert a hyperlink from the
selected text in the VisitorGuide document to the Conductors document. The
hyperlink is indicated by an underline and the color assigned to hyperlinks by the
document’s theme.
5
Point to the hyperlink to display a ScreenTip indicating the hyperlink target.
The ScreenTip shows the path to the Conductors document and instructions for following
the link.
6
Hold down the Ctrl key, and then click the hyperlink to open the Conductors
document in a new window.
7
On the View tab, in the Window group, click the Switch Windows button, and
then click VisitorGuide. Notice that the color of the hyperlink in the VisitorGuide
document has changed to indicate that you have followed this link to its target.
Now let’s create an email hyperlink.
350 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
8
In the last line of the document, select email us, and then on the Insert tab, in the
Links group, click the Hyperlink button.
9
In the Insert Hyperlink dialog box, in the Link to bar, click E-mail Address. Notice
that the dialog box changes so you can enter the information appropriate for an
email hyperlink.
If you have previously inserted a hyperlink to an email address, it will appear in the Recently
Used list, and you can easily use it again.
10
In the E-mail address box, enter [email protected] Notice that when
you begin entering text in the E-mail address box, Word inserts mailto: in front of
the address you enter. When a reader clicks the link, Word will start his or her default
email program and open a new email message window.
11
In the Subject box, enter Symphony question to automatically enter this text in the
Subject box of the new email message window.
12
Click OK to insert the email hyperlink in the document. Notice that the hyperlinked
text is again indicated by an underline and its assigned color. Pointing to it displays
information about the recipient and subject in a ScreenTip.
13
Right-click the email us hyperlink, and then click Edit Hyperlink to open the
Edit Hyperlink dialog box with the current destination for this link in the E-mail
Address box.
14
In the upper-right corner of the dialog box, click the ScreenTip button to open the
Set Hyperlink ScreenTip dialog box.
Linking to external resources 351
12
You can specify the text you want for the ScreenTip that appears when someone
points to the hyperlink.
15
16
17
In the ScreenTip text box, enter Send message to Margie’s Travel. Then click OK.
In the Edit Hyperlink dialog box, click OK to update the hyperlink.
Point to the hyperlink to display the custom ScreenTip.
You can provide informative ScreenTips for all kinds of hyperlinks.
18
Hold down Ctrl, and click the email us hyperlink to open a message window.
TROUBLESHOOTING If your email program isn’t already running, clicking the hyper-
link will cause it to start. If you have multiple email programs or profiles installed, you
might be prompted to select the one you want to use.
SEE ALSO For information about the many fabulous features of Outlook 2013, refer
to Microsoft Outlook 2013 Step by Step by Joan Lambert and Joyce Cox (Microsoft
Press, 2013).
352 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
The specified email address has been inserted in the To box, and the specified description
appears in the Subject box.
19
Close the message window, clicking No when asked whether you want to save the
changes. Notice that the email hyperlink text is now the color that is assigned to
followed hyperlinks by the document’s theme.
+
CLEAN UP Close the VisitorGuide document and the Conductors document, saving
your changes if you want to.
Embedding linked objects
In earlier chapters, we embedded images and tables within document content to support,
reinforce, and decorate the content. Embedding content directly in a document places a
static (unchanging) copy of the object in the document. If you know that a document will
change, you can link to it as we did in the previous exercise. Sometimes, though, you might
want to display the contents of an external object that you know might change. Rather than
embedding a static copy of the content and then updating it manually whenever it changes,
you can embed a linked copy and then refresh the links to ensure that the most recent content is shown. When you embed a linked copy, you can either display the full content of the
embedded object so that readers can review it in the document, or provide an icon that
readers click to review the content in the original program.
Embedding linked objects 353
12
You can embed links to many types of files, including Microsoft Excel workbooks, Microsoft
PowerPoint presentations, Word documents, graphics, and PDF files. Some links work a bit
differently from others—for example, linking to a document displays the content in a resizable object that you can update from the shortcut menu, whereas linking to a PowerPoint
presentation displays the first slide; you can play the presentation from the shortcut menu.
Before you distribute a document that contains linked elements to people who don’t have
access to those elements—for example, if the link is to a graphic that resides on your organ­
ization’s internal server and you are sending the document to an outside recipient—it is
a good idea to either disconnect the links (referred to as breaking the links), configure the
links for manual update, or lock the links so they don’t update. Otherwise, each time the
recipients open the document, Word will try to automatically update the links, but won’t
be able to connect to the linked elements.
In this exercise, you’ll embed and link to the content of a PowerPoint presentation and a
Word document and embed an icon linked to the document. You’ll test all the links, and
then disconnect the links.
SET UP You need the Symphony and Conductors documents, and the Conductors
presentation, located in the Chapter12 practice file folder, to complete this exercise.
Open the Symphony document, and then follow the steps.
1
Position the cursor at the beginning of the third paragraph, which starts with Since
its inception.
First we’ll embed and link to a PowerPoint presentation.
2
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click the Object arrow, and then click Object. In
the Object dialog box, click the Create from File tab.
TIP From the Create New page of the Object dialog box, you can insert a new work-
sheet, chart, presentation, slide, document, or other object into a document. You can
then populate the object content by editing the inserted object.
354 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
From this page you can insert the contents of a file or create a link to the file.
3
On the Create from File page of the dialog box, click the Browse button to open
the Browse dialog box. If the Browse dialog box doesn’t already display the con­
tents of the Chapter12 practice file folder, navigate to that folder. Then click the
Conductors presentation, and click Insert to enter the path to the presentation in
the File name box.
4
Select the Link to file check box, and then click OK to insert the linked presentation
at the cursor. The linked presentation appears to be just another embedded image.
5
Click the linked presentation to select it. Notice that no tool tab appears on the
ribbon for the linked object.
TIP When you select a graphic object, the tools for formatting the object are usually
available on a tool tab; that is not the case for linked objects. Instead, the formatting
options are available from the shortcut menu.
6
Right-click the linked presentation to display the shortcut menu and tools.
Embedding linked objects 355
12
You can crop the inserted object, apply borders and shading, and format the display of the
object.
We’re not working on formatting objects in this chapter, so we won’t apply any formatting as part of this exercise, but feel free to experiment with the options if you
want to.
7
On the shortcut menu, click Linked Presentation Object, and then click Show Link to
run the slide show. When the first slide appears, click it to move to the second slide,
click again to complete the slide show, and click a third time to exit the slide show
and return to the document.
Now we’ll embed and link to a document.
8
Position the cursor at the beginning of the fourth paragraph, which starts with In
December.
9
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click the Object button, and then in the dialog
box, click the Create from File tab.
10
Click the Browse button, and then in the Browse dialog box, double-click the
Conductors document.
11
On the Create from File page of the Object dialog box, select the Link to file check
box, and then click OK to insert the content of the linked document at the cursor.
The linked document content appears to be an embedded image of a table.
12
Click the linked document once to select it.
356 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
The linked document object occupies the entire width of the page.
13
Double-click the linked document to open it in Word. The title bar indicates that
you’re opening the original document.
TIP If you do not select Link To File in the Object dialog box, Word inserts a static
copy of the document content rather than a link to the live file. Double-clicking the
inserted content or icon then opens a copy of the file, rather than the original file.
Let’s make a quick, obvious change to the document so we can test the results of
refreshing the link.
14
In the Conductors document, on the Design tab, in the Document Formatting
group, click Themes and then click Celestial to change the fonts and colors used
in the table. Save and close the Conductors document to return to the Symphony
document. Notice that the table in the Symphony document is still green.
15
Right-click the linked document, and then click Update Link to refresh the embedded
image of the linked document’s content and display the purple version of the table.
Now we’ll insert an icon linked to the same file.
16
Press Ctrl+End to position the cursor at the end of the document. Repeat steps 9
and 10 to insert the path to the Conductors document in the File name box on the
Create from File page of the Object dialog box.
Embedding linked objects 357
12
17
Select the Link to file check box and the Display as icon check box. The icon that will
be shown in the document appears in the dialog box. Click the Change Icon button
that appears below the icon to display the icon options for this file type.
You can display the icon and text that are most appropriate for your purpose.
18
In the Change Icon dialog box, scroll through the Icon list and notice the icons you
can use to indicate the document type to a reader. Then click the last icon in the list.
19
In the Caption box, replace the file name and extension with Display a timeline of
conductors. Then click OK twice to close both dialog boxes and insert the icon and
caption at the cursor.
A meaningful caption helps readers know what will happen when they double-click the icon.
20
Point to the icon and notice that it does not display a ScreenTip as a hyperlink would.
Then double-click the icon to open the Conductors document.
358 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
21
Make changes to the Conductors document, then save and close it and update the
links, if you want to. When you finish experimenting, right-click the icon you inserted
in step 19, click Linked Document Object, and then click Links.
From the Links dialog box, you can manage existing linked objects.
22
Notice the various actions you can take with each of the linked objects. Click the first
link (the presentation), then hold down the Shift key and click the last link to select all
three linked objects.
23
In the Update method for selected link area, select the Locked check box to lock
the links so that they do not update.
The benefit of locking the links rather than breaking them is that if at a later time you
want to reconnect to the linked objects and update them in the document, you can.
24
Click OK in the Links dialog box. Then right-click the embedded icon and notice that
the Update Link command on the shortcut menu is unavailable.
TIP To turn off automatic updating but enable the Update Link command, select the
Manual Update method.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Symphony document, saving your changes if you want to.
Embedding linked objects 359
12
Inserting and linking to bookmarks
Word provides two tools that you can use to jump easily to designated places within the
same document:
▪▪ Bookmarks Whether the document you are reading was created by you or by
someone else, you can insert bookmarks to flag information to which you might
want to return later. Like a physical bookmark, a Word bookmark marks a specific
named place in a document. After inserting a bookmark, you can quickly jump to it
by displaying the Bookmark dialog box, clicking the bookmark you want to locate,
and then clicking Go To.
TIP Another way to move to a bookmark is to display the Go To page of the Find
And Replace dialog box, click Bookmark in the Go To What list, and then select the
bookmark you want from the Enter Bookmark Name list.
▪▪ Cross-references You use cross-references to quickly move readers to associated
information elsewhere in the document. You can create cross-references to headings,
figures and tables, numbered items, footnotes and endnotes, and equations—Word
automatically creates pointers for all of these. You can also create cross-references to
manually inserted bookmarks. If you delete or modify an item you have designated as
the target of a cross-reference, you must manually update the cross-reference.
SEE ALSO For information about using hyperlinks to jump to other locations, see “Linking to
external resources” earlier in this chapter. For information about using the Navigation pane
to jump to any paragraph styled as a heading, see “Viewing documents in different ways” in
Chapter 1, “Explore Microsoft Word 2013.”
In this exercise, you’ll insert and navigate to bookmarks. You’ll also create a cross-reference,
edit the referenced item, and then update the cross-reference.
SET UP You need the RulesBookmarks document located in the Chapter12 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click the Find arrow (not the button). In the
Find list, click Go To to display the Go To page of the Find and Replace dialog box.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+G to display the Go To page of the Find And
Replace dialog box.
360 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
You can select the type of element and the specific element to which you want to jump.
2
With Page selected in the Go to what list, enter 5 in the Enter page number box.
Then click Go To, and click Close.
3
If necessary, click to position the cursor to the left of the 10. Building Maintenance
heading. Then on the Insert tab, in the Links group, click the Bookmark button to
open the Bookmark dialog box.
12
You create and manage bookmarks in this dialog box.
4
In the Bookmark name box, enter Maintenance. Then click Add to close the
Bookmark dialog box and insert a bookmark named Maintenance into the
document. The bookmark is not currently visible (even if you display hidden
characters).
Inserting and linking to bookmarks 361
5
In section 10.3, select the six bulleted list items. Open the Bookmark dialog box,
enter LimitedCommon in the Bookmark name box, and click Add.
TROUBLESHOOTING Bookmark names cannot contain spaces. If you enter a space
and then a character, the Add button becomes inactive. To name bookmarks with
multiple words, either run the words together and capitalize each word, or replace
the spaces with underscores for readability.
6
Press the Home key to release the selection. Then display the Advanced page of
the Word Options dialog box, and in the Show Document Content area, select the
Show Bookmarks check box.
The only way to display bookmarks in the document content is by changing this setting.
7
In the Word Options dialog box, click OK. Notice that the location of the bookmark
you inserted without selecting text is identified by a large, gray I-beam. The location
of the bookmark you inserted after selecting the bulleted list items is identified by
gray square brackets around the selection.
362 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
The identifiers for the two types of bookmarks.
8
Press Ctrl+Home to move to the beginning of the document. Then display the Go To
page of the Find and Replace dialog box.
9
In the Go to what list, click Bookmark to change the dialog box so that you can
specify the bookmark you want to jump to. Notice that the Enter bookmark name
list displays the name of the bookmark that comes first alphabetically.
The bookmarks you created are accessible on the Go To page.
10
In the Enter bookmark name list, click Maintenance, and then click Go To to move
to the bookmark. Notice that the dialog box remains open so that you can move
among bookmarks if you want to.
Next we’ll insert a cross-reference to a document section.
Inserting and linking to bookmarks 363
12
11
In the Go to what list, click Heading, and then in the Enter heading number box,
enter 4. Click Go To and then click Close to move to section 4.
TIP You can also jump to a bookmark by displaying the Bookmark dialog box, click-
ing the bookmark you want, and then clicking Go To. In the Bookmark dialog box,
you can sort the bookmarks alphabetically or in the order in which they are located.
To delete a bookmark, click its name, and then click Delete.
12
Click at the end of the 4.2 paragraph. Press the Spacebar, enter See also section,
and then press the Spacebar again.
13
On the Insert tab, in the Links group, click the Cross-reference button to open the
Cross-reference dialog box, where you can specify the type of item you want to
reference and what you want the cross-reference inserted in the document to say.
14
In the Reference type list, click Heading to display all the headings in this document.
Word can identify the headings in a document only if you have applied heading styles.
15
With Heading text selected in the Insert reference to list, click 6. Parking and
Vehicles in the For which heading list. Then click Insert, and click Close to insert the
heading text in the document. Although it’s not obvious, the text has been inserted
as a field.
16
Point to the inserted heading text to display a ScreenTip containing information
about the cross-reference target; in this case, Current Document. Hold down the
Ctrl key, and then click the cross-reference to move to the section 6 heading.
364 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
17
18
In the heading, delete and Vehicles.
Scroll up to section 4.2 and click (don’t press the Ctrl key) 6. Parking and Vehicles to
select the cross-reference field.
TROUBLESHOOTING Click the field; don’t try to select the text.
19
Right-click the selected cross-reference, and then click Update Field to delete the
words and Vehicles from the end of the cross-reference.
The cross-reference reflects the change you made to the target heading.
20
Hold down Ctrl, and click the cross-reference to jump to the associated heading.
+
CLEAN UP Turn off the display of bookmark identifiers by displaying the Advanced
page of the Word Options dialog box and clearing the Show Bookmarks check box in the
Show Document Content area. Then close the RulesBookmarks document, saving your
changes if you want to.
Displaying document information in fields
When you insert a hyperlink into a document, you are actually inserting a Hyperlink field. A
field is a placeholder that tells Word to supply specified information or to perform a specified action in a specified way.
Word inserts fields to control certain processes, such as the creation of a table of contents
or the merging of a form letter with a data source. You can use fields to insert information
that can be updated with the click of a button if the information changes. You can’t enter a
field in your document; instead, you must tell Word to insert the field you want. You do this
by clicking the Quick Parts button in the Text group on the Insert tab and then clicking Field
to display the Field dialog box.
Displaying document information in fields 365
12
The Field dialog box provides a comprehensive list of all the available fields. In this dialog box, you can
also set options that refine the field.
Each field consists of a set of curly braces containing the field name and any required or
­optional instructions or settings. These settings, called switches, refine the results of the
field—for example, by formatting it in a particular way. When you insert a field from the
Field dialog box, you can click Field Codes in the lower-left corner of the dialog box to display the field’s syntax. Selecting a field and then clicking Options in the lower-left corner
displays the Field Options dialog box, in which you can add general and specific optional
settings to the field code. Different fields have different field options—some have only
­general options, whereas others have multiple types of switches.
Inserting some types of fields requires advanced knowledge of the fields and how to control them. However, some fields are very easy. For example, to insert today’s date or the current time in a document, you simply click the Date & Time button (the ScreenTip says Insert
Date and Time) in the Text group on the Insert tab to display the Date And Time dialog box
and select the format you want to use. To insert the information as regular text, click OK. If
you want to be able to update the date or time, insert the information as a field by selecting the Update Automatically check box. Word then inserts a field matching the format you
selected and retrieves the date or time from your computer’s internal calendar or clock.
TIP After Word inserts the field, the field results are shown; for example if you insert a File-
Size field, the size of the file is shown. To display the field code that tells Word to insert the
file size, either click the field to select it and press Alt+F9, or right-click the field and click
Toggle Field Codes.
366 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
Descriptions in the Field and Field Options dialog boxes guide you in defining the field.
TIP You can insert other types of date and time fields, such as a PrintDate field or an EditTime field. Insert a date or time field in the usual way, right-click the field, and then click
Edit Field to display the Field dialog box. Then change the Categories setting to Date And
Time, and in the Field Names list, click the field you want. (Clicking a field in the list displays
a brief description, so it is easy to choose the one you want.) When you click OK, the information corresponding to the field type you specified is shown in the document.
By default, date and time fields are updated every time you open a document. You can prevent this by selecting the field and pressing Ctrl+F11 to lock the field; press Ctrl+Shift+F11
to unlock it again. If a field is not locked, you can click it and then click the Update button
that appears above it or press the F9 key to update it with the most current information.
Another type of field you might want to insert in a document—for example, in its header
or footer—is one that contains a document property, such as the author, title, or last modification date. This type of information is easily inserted by clicking the Quick Parts button,
pointing to Document Property, and then clicking the property you want. If you insert the
field and then you edit the contents of the field in the document, the change is carried over
to the list of properties displayed on the Info page in Backstage view.
SEE ALSO For information about document properties, see “Preparing documents for elec-
tronic distribution” in Chapter 6, “Preview, print, and distribute documents.”
Displaying document information in fields 367
12
In this exercise, you’ll insert a field that displays the current date and time in the footer of a
document, and you’ll update the field. Then you’ll insert a field that displays the Title property, and you’ll change the property by changing the field. You’ll also add the file name.
Finally, you’ll convert the current date and time to the date and time when the document
was last saved.
SET UP You need the ProceduresFields document located in the Chapter12 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, display formatting marks, and then
follow the steps.
1
On the Insert tab, in the Header & Footer group, click the Footer button, and then
click Edit Footer to dim the primary content and display the footer area at the
bottom of the first page of the document.
2
With the cursor in the blank paragraph of the footer, on the Design tool tab, in the
Insert group, click the Date & Time button to open the Date and Time dialog box.
You can specify the date and/or time format you want.
3
In the Available formats list, click the first format that includes both the date and
the time.
4
Select the Update automatically check box, and then click OK to insert the current
date and time in the selected format in the document footer.
368 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
5
Press the Tab key. On the Design tool tab, in the Insert group, click the Quick Parts
button, click Document Property, and then click Title to insert a field for the Title
property of the document.
The Title property of this document is currently blank.
6
With the Title property active, enter Office Procedures. Then press the Right
Arrow key to release the selection.
7
Display the Info page of the Backstage view. Notice that in the Properties area, the
Title property has been set to Office Procedures.
The Title property on the Info page reflects the change you made in the document footer.
8
9
Above the top of the page tabs, click the Back arrow to return to the document.
With the cursor at the end of the document title in the footer, press the Tab key,
enter File name: (including the colon), and press the Spacebar.
10
On the Design tool tab, in the Insert group, click the Quick Parts button, and then
click Field to open the Field dialog box.
11
In the Field names list, click FileName. In the Format list, click Lowercase. Then click
OK to insert a lowercase version of the file name at the end of the footer.
12
Save the document. Notice that at the left end of the footer, the date and time still
reflect the moment when you inserted that field.
Displaying document information in fields 369
12
13
Click the Date And Time field, and then click the Update button that appears to
update the time to reflect the current time.
Let’s configure the field to reflect the date and time when the document was last
saved.
14
Right-click the field, and then click Edit Field to open the Field dialog box and display
the properties and options for the current field.
15
In the Categories list, click Date and Time to filter the Field names list to display only
the fields that relate to dates and times.
By default, a document contains four date fields and two time fields.
16
In the Field names list, click SaveDate, and in the Date formats list, click the first
format that combines the date and time (the same format you selected in step 3).
17
Select the Preserve formatting during updates check box, and click OK.
370 Chapter 12 Link to information and content
18
Save the document. Then right-click the field, and click Update Field to update the
time to reflect the most recent save.
The information in this footer is supplied by three fields.
+
CLEAN UP Hide formatting marks, then close the ProceduresFields document, saving
your changes if you want to.
Key points
▪▪ Documents can contain hyperlinks to webpages, files, or email addresses, and crossreferences to locations within a document.
▪▪ Flagging information with a bookmark makes it easy to look up the information later.
▪▪ You can link to documents, presentations, workbooks, and other objects and display
the linked content or an icon linked to the content. Updating the links in the document displays the most recent version of the linked object.
▪▪ You can save information with a document as a property and insert the properties in
fields to display and format the information in a specific way.
12
Key points 371
Chapter at a glance
Footnotes Insert and modify footnotes and endnotes,
page 374
Contents Create and modify tables of contents,
page 378
Indexes Bibliographies Create and modify indexes,
page 388
Add sources and compile bibliographies,
page 394
Reference content and
content sources
13
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Insert and modify footnotes and endnotes.
Create and modify tables of contents.
Create and modify indexes.
Add sources and compile bibliographies.
When you want to ensure that information in a complicated document is readily available
to readers, you can rely on the following Microsoft Word reference tools to do the job:
▪▪ Footnotes and endnotes You can provide supporting information without inter-
rupting the flow of the primary content by inserting the information in footnotes at
the bottom of the relevant pages or endnotes at the end of the document.
▪▪ Table of contents You can provide an overview of the information contained in a
document and help readers locate topics by compiling a table of contents that includes page numbers or hyperlinks to each heading.
▪▪ Index You can help readers locate specific information by inserting index entry fields
within a document and compiling an index of keywords and concepts that directs the
reader to the corresponding page numbers.
▪▪ Information sources and a bibliography You can appropriately attribute information to its source by inserting citations into a document. Word will then compile a
professional bibliography from the citations.
In this chapter, you’ll first insert and modify footnotes and endnotes. You’ll create and
update a table of contents. Then you’ll mark index entries in a document and compile an
index. Finally, you’ll enter source information, insert citations, and compile a bibliography.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter13 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
373
Inserting and modifying
footnotes and endnotes
When you want to make a comment about a statement in a document—for example, to
explain an assumption or cite the source for a different opinion—you can enter the comment as a footnote or an endnote. Doing so inserts a number or symbol called a reference
mark, and your associated comment appears with the same number or symbol, either as a
footnote at the bottom of the page or as an endnote at the end of the document or document section. In most views, footnotes or endnotes are divided from the main text by a
note separator line.
By default, footnote reference marks use the 1, 2, 3 number format, and endnote reference
marks use the i, ii, iii number format.
To change the number format of footnotes or endnotes:
1 On the References tab, click the Footnotes dialog box launcher to open the
Footnote and Endnote dialog box.
You can change the numbering format before or after you create footnotes or endnotes.
374 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
2 In the Location area of the Footnote and Endnote dialog box, click Footnotes or
Endnotes to indicate the element you want to modify.
3 In the Format area, click the Number format arrow, and then click the number
format you want to use.
4 With Whole document shown in the Apply changes to box, click Apply to change
all footnotes or endnotes to the new number format.
In this exercise, you’ll move peripheral information from the body of a document into
endnotes and then convert the endnotes to footnotes.
SET UP You need the BambooInfoA document located in the Chapter13 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
In the first paragraph below the heading Moving to a New Home, select the entire
sentence that begins Grass makes a good mulch.
2
On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the Cut button to move the selection
from the document to the Microsoft Office Clipboard.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+X to move the selected content to the Clipboard.
For more information about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end
of this book.
3
In the second sentence of the paragraph, click to insert the cursor immediately after
the word mulch.
4
On the References tab, in the Footnotes group, click the Insert Endnote button to
create a numbered endnote following the text on page 2.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+Ctrl+F to insert a footnote or Alt+Ctrl+D to insert an
endnote.
5
With the cursor in the endnote area, on the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click
the Paste button to insert the cut sentence as the endnote.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+V to paste the most recently cut or copied content
from the Clipboard.
13
Inserting and modifying footnotes and endnotes 375
Endnotes use a lowercase Roman numeral number format.
6
Scroll up to page 1. Notice that a corresponding number appears in the document at
the location where you had inserted the cursor.
7
In the second paragraph below the heading Staying Healthy, select the text begin­
ning with the word examine and extending through the period at the end of the
paragraph. Cut the selected content to the Clipboard.
8
Below the heading Moving to a New Home, in the sentence that begins To control
spread, click to position the cursor immediately after the word trench. On the
References tab, in the Footnotes group, click the Insert Endnote button to insert a
second endnote.
9
Paste the cut content from the Clipboard into the second footnote, and capitalize the
letter e at the beginning of the new endnote.
10
Scroll to the bottom of page 1 and position the cursor in the selection area to the
left of the paragraph that begins If you dig a trench. Click once or twice to select
the paragraph, and then press Delete to remove the sentence fragment from the
document.
11
At the end of page 1, in the sentence that begins with Bamboo mites, select the text
beginning with the comma after mites and extending through the next comma. Then
press Delete.
376 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
12
In the Footnotes group, click the Insert Endnote button to insert a third endnote.
Enter Do not confuse bamboo mites with spider mites, which can severely
damage plants.
Because the endnotes are not on the same page as their reference marks, readers
must turn the page or scroll to display the related content. Let’s position the notes on
the same page as their reference marks.
13
On page 2, drag to select the three endnotes. Right-click the selection, and then click
Convert to Footnote to change endnotes i, ii, and iii to footnotes 1, 2, and 3.
The footnotes appear on the same page with their reference marks.
14
Scroll to page 2. Notice that footnote 3 appears at the bottom of the page instead of
at the end of the text where the endnote was located.
+
CLEAN UP Close the BambooInfoA document, saving your changes if you want to.
13
Inserting and modifying footnotes and endnotes 377
Creating and modifying tables of contents
When you create a long document that includes headings, such as an annual report or a
catalog that has several sections, you might want to add a table of contents to the beginning of the document to give your readers an overview of the document content and help
them navigate to specific sections. In a document that will be printed, you can indicate with
a page number the page where each heading is located. If the document will be distributed
electronically, you can link each entry in the table of contents to the corresponding heading
in the document so that readers can jump directly to the heading with a click of the mouse.
By default, Word expects to create a table of contents based on paragraphs within the doc­
ument that you have formatted with the standard heading styles: Heading 1, Heading 2,
and so on. (Word can also create a table of contents based on outline levels or on fields that
you have inserted in the document.) When you tell Word to create the table, Word identifies the table of contents entries and inserts the table at the cursor as a single field. You can
modify the elements on which Word bases the table at any time, and update the table with
a single click to reflect your changes.
The table of contents is a field that can be updated.
378 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
SEE ALSO For information about applying styles, see “Applying styles to text” in Chapter 3,
“Modify the structure and appearance of text.”
The Table Of Contents controls are available from the References tab. In the Table Of
Contents gallery, you can select from three standard table options:
▪▪ Automatic Table 1 This option inserts a table of contents that has the heading
Contents and includes all text styled as Heading 1, Heading 2, or Heading 3.
▪▪ Automatic Table 2 This option inserts a table of contents that has the heading
Table of Contents and includes all text styled as Heading 1, Heading 2, or Heading 3.
▪▪ Manual Table This option inserts a table of contents that has the heading Table of
Contents and includes placeholders that are not linked to the document content.
The formatting of the entries in a table of contents is controlled by nine levels of built-in
TOC styles (TOC 1, TOC 2, and so on). By default, Word uses the styles that are assigned in
the template attached to the document. If you want to use a different style, instead of clicking one of the three options in the Table Of Contents gallery, you can click Custom Table
Of Contents below the gallery to display the Table Of Contents dialog box, where you can
choose from several formats, such as Classic, Fancy, and Simple.
After you create a table of contents, you can format it manually by selecting text and then
applying character or paragraph formatting or styles.
If you change a heading in the document or if edits to the text change the page breaks, the
easiest way to update the table of contents is to click the Update Table button and have
Word do the work for you. You have the option of updating only the page numbers, or if
you have changed, added, or deleted headings, you can update (re-create) the entire table.
In this exercise, you’ll first insert a simple table of contents for a document based on heading styles, and then create a custom table of contents. You’ll alter the document by changing
page breaks, and then you’ll update the table of contents to reflect your changes.
SET UP You need the ProceduresContents document located in the Chapter13 practice
file folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
Click to position the cursor at the left end of the General Administration heading.
On the References tab, in the Table of Contents group, click the Table of Contents
button to display the Table of Contents menu.
Creating and modifying tables of contents 379
13
The colors and fonts in the gallery reflect the document theme.
2
In the Table of Contents gallery, click Automatic Table 1. Then press Ctrl+Home to
return to the beginning of the document and display the inserted table of contents.
Each heading level is assigned its own TOC style.
Now we’ll create a custom table of contents.
380 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
3
4
On the Table of Contents menu, click Remove Table of Contents.
5
In the new paragraph, enter Table of Contents. Select the new paragraph, and then
on the Mini Toolbar, click the Bold button.
6
Press the Right Arrow key to position the cursor at the left end of the General
Administration heading. On the Insert tab, in the Pages group, click the Page
Break button. Then press the Up Arrow key to position the cursor at the left end
of the empty page-break paragraph.
Click at the right end of the Office Procedures title, and then press Enter to start a
new paragraph.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+Enter to insert a page break.
7
On the References tab, in the Table of Contents group, click the Table of Contents
button, and then on the menu, below the gallery, click Custom Table of Contents to
open the Table of Contents dialog box.
13
The dialog box displays previews of the table of contents formatting in documents that are
prepared for print or online delivery.
Creating and modifying tables of contents 381
8
In the General area of the Table of Contents page, click the Formats arrow. Notice
that you can choose from Classic, Distinctive, Fancy, Modern, Formal, and Simple
formats. In the list, click Classic. The samples in the Print Preview and Web Preview
boxes immediately reflect the format change.
TIP The TOC styles reflect the document theme and are based on the Body font of
the theme. Each style has specific indent and spacing settings. If you create a table of
contents based on the document template, you can customize the TOC styles during
the creation process. With Formats set to From Template in the General area of the
Table Of Contents dialog box, click Modify. The Style dialog box opens, displaying the
nine TOC styles. You can modify the font, paragraph, tabs, border, and other formatting of these styles the same way you would modify any other style. For information about creating styles, see “Creating custom styles and templates” in Chapter 16,
“Work in Word more efficiently.”
9
10
In the Tab leader list, click the underscore leader option. Then click OK to insert the
modified table of contents.
Point to any entry in the table of contents.
Hyperlink navigation functionality is built into the table of contents.
SEE ALSO For more information about linking to other parts of a document, see “Inserting and linking to bookmarks” in Chapter 12, “Link to information and content.”
11
Press and hold the Ctrl key, and notice that the pointer changes to a hand. Click
any entry in the table of contents to move directly to that heading. Then press
Ctrl+Home to return to the beginning of the document.
382 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
12
Display formatting marks, and then scroll to page 2. Click in the selection area to the
left of the page break, and then press the Delete key to delete the page break and
move the Facilities heading to page 2.
13
Click at the end of Facilities, press the Spacebar, and then enter Information to
make the heading similar to the one that comes before it.
14
Scroll to the next manual page break, on page 3, and delete it to move the Ordering
Stationery and Supplies heading to that page.
15
Delete the manual page break on page 5 to move the Shipping heading to that
page, and then delete the manual page break on page 6 to move the Processing
Orders heading to that page.
16
Press Ctrl+Home to return to the beginning of the document. Click anywhere in the
table to select it (do not press the Ctrl key).
TIP The table of contents is contained in one large field, and clicking anywhere in it
selects the entire field. For information about fields, see “Displaying document information in fields” in Chapter 12, “Link to information and content.”
17
On the References tab, in the Table of Contents group, click the Update Table
button to open the Update Table of Contents dialog box.
13
If headings or page breaks change, you can easily update the table of contents.
Creating and modifying tables of contents 383
18
In the dialog box, click the Update entire table option, and then click OK to update
the headings and page numbers displayed in the table of contents.
19
Drag in the selection area to select all the lines of text in the table of contents.
TROUBLESHOOTING You need to drag to select the actual text of the table of
contents, not just click to select the field.
20
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Line and Paragraph Spacing
button, and click Remove Space Before Paragraph to remove the extra vertical space
in the table of contents. Then press Ctrl+Home to release the selection and display
the results.
The styles and indentation in the table reflect the heading levels in the document.
+
CLEAN UP Close the ProceduresContents document, saving your changes if you
want to.
384 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
Tables of authorities
If a legal document contains items such as regulations, cases, and statutes that are
identified as legal citations, you can tell Word to create a table of authorities. In the
table, citations are categorized as cases, statutes, rules, treatises, regulations, or other
authorities.
Word uses the citations to create this type of table the same way it uses headings to
create a table of contents and captions to create a table of figures. You must insert a
citation for each legal reference you want to include, and then generate the table.
To create a table of authorities:
1 Select the legal reference that you want to mark with a citation. On the References
tab, in the Table of Authorities group, click the Mark Citation button to open the
Mark Citation dialog box.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+Shift+I to open the Mark Citation dialog box.
2 In the Short citation box, edit the citation to reflect the way you want it to appear
in the table.
3 The default category is Cases. If you want to change the category, display the
Category list, and click the category that applies to the citation.
4 To mark one citation, click Mark. To mark all citations that match the selected
citation, click Mark All. Word inserts hidden field codes in the document that
identify the citation.
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each legal reference you want to mark.
TIP You can leave the Mark Citation dialog box open to facilitate the marking of
citations.
After you insert all the citations, create the table of authorities.
6 Position the cursor where you want to insert the table of authorities, and then on
the References tab, in the Table of Authorities group, click the Insert Table of
Authorities button to open the Table of Authorities dialog box.
7 In the Category list, click the category of citations that you want to appear in the
table, or click All to include all categories.
8 Select formatting options for the table, and then click OK to insert the table of
authorities.
Creating and modifying tables of contents 385
13
Tables of figures
If a document includes figures or tables, you can easily create a table of figures so that
readers can locate and quickly navigate to them.
A table of figures generated for this chapter.
A table of figures is built from the tools in the Captions group on the References tab
of the ribbon. You must insert a caption for each figure or table you want to include,
and then generate the table.
To create a table of figures:
1 Select the first figure or table you want to caption. On the References tab, in the
Captions group, click the Insert Caption button to open the Caption dialog box.
TIP The number 1 in the Caption box is a field that reflects the graphic’s position
in the figure sequence. This number is automatically updated when you add or
delete captions.
386 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
You can accept or modify the default caption.
2 If you want to change the label shown in the Caption box (the default is Figure), in
the Label list, click Table or Equation; or click New Label, enter the label you want,
and then click OK.
3 In the Caption box, click to the right of the label and number, press the Spacebar,
enter the caption, and then click OK to add the caption to the document. Alternatively, you can add only the label as the caption, and then edit the caption in the
Word document.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each figure or table you want to include in the table
of figures.
After you insert all the captions, create the table of figures.
5 Position the cursor where you want to insert the table of figures, and then on the
References tab, in the Captions group, click Insert Table of Figures to open the Table of Figures dialog box, which looks similar to the Table of Contents dialog box.
6 If you want to display a different label in the table of figures than in the actual caption, or not display the label at all, make your selection in the Caption Label list.
7 If you want to create the table of figures using a format other than the default for
the template, click the format you want in the Formats list.
8 Select any additional options you want, and then click OK to insert the table of
figures.
Creating and modifying tables of contents 387
13
Creating and modifying indexes
To help readers find specific concepts and terms that they might not be able to readily locate by looking at a table of contents, you can include an index at the end of a document.
Word creates an index by compiling an alphabetical listing with page numbers based on
index entry fields that you mark in the document. As with a table of contents, an index is
inserted as a single field.
TIP You don’t need to create indexes for documents that will be distributed electronically,
because readers can use the Navigation pane to findthe information they need. For more
information, see “Finding and replacing text” in Chapter 2, “Enter, edit, and proofread text.”
In the index, an entry might apply to a word or phrase that appears on one page or is discussed on several pages. The entry might have related subentries. For example, in the index
to this book, the main index entry text effects might have below it the subentries applying
and live preview of. An index might also include cross-reference entries that direct readers
to related entries. For example, the main index entry text wrapping breaks might be crossreferenced to line breaks. You can use cross references to direct readers to index terms they
might not think of when looking for specific information.
To insert an index entry field into the document, you select the text you want to mark, and
click the Mark Entry button in the Index group on the References tab. In the Mark Index
Entry dialog box that opens, you can do the following:
▪▪ Use the selected text as is, modify the entry, or add a subentry.
▪▪ Format the entry—for example, to make it appear bold or italic in the index—by
right-clicking it, clicking Font, and then clicking the options you want; or by using
keyboard shortcuts.
▪▪ Designate the entry as a cross-reference, one-page entry, or page-range entry.
▪▪ Specify the formatting of this entry’s page number.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Alt+Shift+X to open the Mark Index Entry dialog box.
After you set the options in the dialog box the way you want them, you can insert an index
entry field adjacent to the selected text by clicking Mark, or adjacent to every occurrence
of the selected text in the document by clicking Mark All. The Mark Index Entry dialog box
remains open to simplify the process of inserting multiple index entry fields, so you don’t
have to click the Mark Entry button for each new entry. You can move the dialog box off to
the side so that it doesn’t block the text you’re working with.
388 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
TIP When building an index, you should choose the text you mark carefully, bearing in
mind the terms that readers are likely to look up. For example, one reader might expect to
find information about cell phones by looking under cell, whereas another might look under
mobile, another under phones, and another under telephones. A good index will include all
four entries.
Index entry fields are formatted as hidden; they are not visible unless you display formatting marks and hidden characters. When the index entry field is visible, it appears in the
document enclosed in quotation marks within a set of braces, with the designator XE and a
dotted underline.
To create an index based on the index entries in a document, you position the cursor where
you want the index to appear and then click the Insert Index button in the Index group on
the References tab. The Index dialog box opens, and you can then specify the following:
▪▪ Whether the index formatting should use styles from the current template or
be based on one of four predefined formats that you can preview in the Print
Preview box.
▪▪ Whether page numbers should be right-aligned, and if so, whether they should have
dotted, dashed, or solid tab leaders.
▪▪ Whether the index should be indented, with each subentry on a separate line below
its main entry, or run-in, with subentries on the same line as the main entries.
▪▪ The number of columns you want.
When you click OK in the Index dialog box, Word calculates the page numbers of all the
entries and subentries, consolidates them, and inserts the index as one field in the specified
format at the specified location in the document.
TIP If you make changes to a document that affect index entries or page numbering, you
can update the index by clicking it and then clicking the Update Index button in the Index
group on the References tab. You can also right-click the index and then click Update Field.
You can edit the text of the index generated from the entries, but the changes you make
are not permanent; regenerating the index restores the original entries. It is more efficient
to edit the text within the quotation marks in the index entry fields. To delete an index entry, you select the entire hidden field and then press the Delete key. You can move and copy
index entries by using the techniques you would use for regular text.
TIP Dragging through any part of an index entry field that includes one of the enclosing
braces selects the entire field.
Creating and modifying indexes 389
13
In this exercise, you’ll first mark a few index entries and a cross-reference entry. Then you’ll
create and format an index, delete an index entry from the document, and update the
index.
SET UP You need the RulesIndex document located in the Chapter13 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, display hidden text, and then
follow the steps.
1
In the first bulleted list item, select the word Declaration. Then on the References
tab, in the Index group, click the Mark Entry button to open the Mark Index Entry
dialog box. Notice that the selected word has already been entered in the Main
entry box.
2
Drag the dialog box by its title bar to the upper-right corner of the screen. Then, in
the dialog box, click Mark All to insert index entry fields adjacent to every occurrence
of the word Declaration in the document.
TIP If this document contained instances of the word declaration starting with a low-
ercase d, those would not be marked with index entries, because their capitalization
does not match the selected word.
You can edit, format, add a subentry to, and otherwise adjust the index entry in this dialog box.
3
In the first bulleted list item, select the word Bylaws. Click the title bar of the Mark
Index Entry dialog box to activate the dialog box and enter the selected text in the
Main entry box. Then click Mark All.
4
In section 2.1, select the word professional. Click the dialog box title bar to activate
the dialog box and enter the selected text in the Main entry box. In the Main entry
box, click at the right end of professional, press the Spacebar, enter businesses, and
then click Mark.
390 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
5
In section 2.1, select and mark administrative businesses. Without leaving the dialog
box, delete the word administrative from the Main entry box, and then click Mark to
add a third index entry to the paragraph.
6
In section 2.4, select the words hobby shop. Click the dialog box title bar, and in the
Main entry box, add an s to shop to make it shops. Then click Mark. Repeat this
step to mark carpenter shop (as carpenter shops) and add a third index entry in the
paragraph for shops.
TIP Index entries will appear in the index exactly as they appear in the Mark Index
Entry dialog box. For consistency, make all nouns lowercase and plural except proper
nouns and those of which only one exists.
7
In section 4.3, select the word garage, change the entry in the Mark Index Entry
dialog box to garages, and click Mark All. Without leaving the dialog box, in the
Options area, select the Cross-reference option. Notice that the cursor moves to the
space after the word See in the adjacent box.
8
Without moving the cursor, enter also parking. Select the word also, press Ctrl+I
to make it italic, and then click Mark to insert a cross-reference to the parking index
entry adjacent to the word garage.
The cross-references in the document reflect your entries in the Mark Index Entry dialog box.
9
In section 7.2, select the words Common Area, and click the dialog box title bar. Enter
landscaping in the Subentry box, and click Mark to insert an index entry with the
entry and subentry separated by a colon.
Creating and modifying indexes 391
13
10
In section 8.2, mark the words Common Area with a subentry of alterations. Then
close the Mark Index Entry dialog box.
Now we’ll generate the index from the index entries.
11
Press Ctrl+End to move to the end of the document, press Enter to create a new
paragraph, and then press Ctrl+Enter to insert a page break and move the cursor to
the top of the new page.
12
13
In the new paragraph, enter Index, and press Enter.
14
15
Select the Index paragraph. On the Mini Toolbar, click the Styles button and then
click the Heading 1 thumbnail.
Press the Right Arrow key to move to the empty paragraph.
On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Show/Hide ¶ button to hide
formatting marks, fields, and content that is formatted as hidden.
IMPORTANT When hidden content is visible, the document might not be paginated
correctly. Always turn off the display of formatting marks and hidden characters before
creating an index.
16
On the References tab, in the Index group, click the Insert Index button to open the
Index dialog box.
You can configure the settings in this dialog box to tailor the look of the index.
392 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
17
Change the Columns setting to 1. In the Formats list, click Fancy. Then click OK to
compile a short index based on the index entries you just marked.
This index is formatted in one column with the page numbers adjacent to their index entries.
TIP You can experiment with the available index options by clicking Insert Index, se-
lecting other column and formatting options, clicking OK, and then clicking Yes when
Word asks whether you’d like to replace the index.
18
Display formatting marks and hidden characters so that you can see the index entry
fields in the document, and then scroll up to section 4.3.
Let’s delete the cross-reference entry from this section, because we don’t have an
index entry for parking.
19
Select the entire cross-reference entry following garage, and press the Delete key.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you find it hard to select only this entry, try pointing to the
right of the closing brace ( } ) and dragging slightly to the left.
20
Press Ctrl+End to move to the end of the document, and then click anywhere in the
index to select its field.
21
Hide formatting marks and hidden characters. Then on the References tab, in the
Index group, click the Update Index button to remove the deleted cross-reference.
+
CLEAN UP Close the RulesIndex document, saving your changes if you want to.
Creating and modifying indexes 393
13
Adding sources and
compiling bibliographies
Many types of documents that you create might require a bibliography that lists the sources
of the information that appears or is referenced in the document. You can use the Source
Manager to help you keep track of sources you use while researching a document, and to
ensure that you reference them in the proper format. Whether your sources are books,
­periodicals, websites, or interviews, you can record details about them and then select a
common style guide, such as the Chicago Manual of Style, to have Word automatically list
your sources in that style guide’s standard format.
There are two ways to cite sources:
▪▪ You can enter all the sources into the Source Manager and then insert citations from
the Source Manager into the document.
▪▪ You can create sources as you need to insert citations.
No matter which method you use to enter the source information, Word stores the sources
in a separate file on your computer’s hard disk so that you can cite them in any document
you create. You can view this Master List and select which sources will be available to the
current document from the Source Manager dialog box.
After you enter citations in a document, you can easily compile their sources into one of
two types of lists by clicking the Bibliography button in the Citations & Bibliography group
on the References tab, and then clicking Bibliography, References, or Works Cited on the
Bibliography menu to insert the source list with that heading. Alternatively, you can click
Insert Bibliography at the bottom of the menu to insert the source list without a heading. The type of bibliography you use is usually specified by the organization or person for
whom you are preparing the document, such as your company, your instructor, or the publication in which you intend to publish the document.
When you compile a bibliography, Word inserts it at the cursor as one field. You can edit
the text of a bibliography, but if the source information changes, it is more efficient to
edit the source in the Source Manager and then update the bibliography the same way
you would update a table of contents or index.
394 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
TIP You can update a bibliography by clicking the bibliography and then clicking the
Update Citations And Bibliography button that appears above the field. If you used the
Insert Bibliography command to compile the source list, the Update Citations And Bibliography button does not appear when you click the field. In that case, you can update the
bibliography by right-clicking anywhere in the field and then clicking Update Field.
In this exercise, you’ll enter information for a couple of sources, insert citations for existing sources, add a new source, compile a bibliography, and then change the bibliography
format.
SET UP You need the BambooInfoB and BambooBibliography documents located
in the Chapter13 practice file folder to complete this exercise. Open the BambooInfoB
document, and then follow the steps.
1
On the References tab, in the Citations & Bibliography group, click the Style arrow,
and then click Chicago to specify that any sources you create and citations you insert
will be formatted according to the Chicago Manual of Style rules.
2
In the Citations & Bibliography group, click the Manage Sources button to open the
Source Manager dialog box.
The Source Manager accumulates sources from all documents, so if other documents already
contain citations, their source information might appear here.
3
In the Source Manager dialog box, click New to open the Create Source dialog box.
Notice that Book is selected in the Type of Source list.
Now let’s create a source for a book. (This isn’t a real book; we’re making it up.)
Adding sources and compiling bibliographies 395
13
4
In the Bibliography Fields for Chicago area, enter Nelson, Jeremy in the Author
box, Big Bad Bamboo in the Title box, 2013 in the Year box, and Litware, Inc. in
the Publisher box.
Word creates a tag name based on the author’s last name and the book’s year of publication.
5
Click OK to add the book to the Source Manager. Notice that it appears in the
Master List and in the Current List, which is the list of sources that can be used
in this document.
Next, let’s create a source for a book that has multiple authors.
6
In the Source Manager dialog box, click New, and then in the Create Source dialog
box, click Edit to open the Edit Name dialog box.
If a source has more than one author, create a multiple-name entity from this dialog box.
396 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
7
In the Add name area, enter Miller in the Last box, enter Lisa in the First box, and
then click Add to enter Miller, Lisa in the Names box.
8
To specify a co-author, enter Miller in the Last box, enter Harry in the First box,
click Add, and then click OK.
9
In the Create Source dialog box, enter Bamboo, Family Style in the Title box,
2012 in the Year box, and Lucerne Publishing in the Publisher box. Then click OK
to add the new source to the Master List and the Current List.
10
11
In the Source Manager dialog box, click Close.
Open the BambooBibliography document, and on the References tab, in the Cita­
tions & Bibliography group, click Manage Sources to open the Source Manager
dialog box. Notice that the two sources you created in the BambooInfoB document
appear in the Master List but not in the Current List, meaning that they are not
available for use in this document.
You can select the sources in the Master List that you want to be available for a particular
document.
12
With the Miller source selected in the Master List box, click Copy to copy that source
to the Current List box so that it is available in this document. Then copy the Nelson
source to the Current List box, and click Close.
13
In the last line of the first paragraph after the heading, click to position the cursor
immediately to the right of Big Bad Bamboo. In the Citations & Bibliography group,
click the Insert Citation button to display the list of available sources.
Adding sources and compiling bibliographies 397
13
Only the sources from the Current List appear on the Insert Citation menu.
14
On the Insert Citation menu, click Nelson, Jeremy to insert the source in the
document.
15
Repeat steps 13 and 14 to insert a Miller and Miller source reference after the
Bamboo, Family Style book title.
Now let’s create a source for a webpage.
16
In the same paragraph, click immediately to the right of Entire books. In the Cita­
tions & Bibliography group, click the Insert Citation button, and then in the list,
click Add New Source to open the familiar Create Source dialog box.
17
18
In the Type of Source list, click Web site.
In the Name of Web Page box, enter American Bamboo Society. In the
Year box, enter 2010. In the URL box, enter www.americanbamboo.org/
BooksOnBamboo.html. Then click OK to insert the source in parentheses
at the insertion point.
398 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
Information stored in the Source Manager is used to create the citations in the specified format
(in this case, the Chicago Manual of Style, Fifteenth Edition format).
19
In the Citations & Bibliography group, click the Manage Sources button. In the
Source Manager dialog box, the new source appears in both the Master List and
the Current List.
Check marks precede all three sources in the Current List box to indicate that the sources have
been cited in the current document.
20
Close the Source Manager dialog box, and then press Ctrl+End to move to the end
of the document.
Adding sources and compiling bibliographies 399
13
21
In the Citations & Bibliography group, click Bibliography to display the
Biblio­graphy menu.
You can choose from three built-in styles or insert a bibliography with no heading.
22
In the Built-In category, click Bibliography to insert a bibliography containing all the
citations in the document in alphabetical order.
A bibliography formatted to meet the specifications of the Chicago Manual of Style Fifteenth
Edition.
400 Chapter 13 Reference content and content sources
23
In the Citations & Bibliography group, display the Style list, and click APA to
reformat the bibliography and citations to meet the style specifications of the
Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association, Sixth Edition.
It’s easy to reformat sources and citations to meet different style specifications.
TIP You don’t have to select the bibliography to apply this change; you can do it
from anywhere in the document.
+
CLEAN UP Close the BambooInfoB and BambooBibliography documents, saving your
changes if you want to.
Key points
▪▪ You can move peripheral information from the body of a document to footnotes at
the bottom of each page or endnotes at the end of the document.
▪▪ A table of contents provides an overview of the topics covered in a document and
lets readers navigate quickly to a topic.
▪▪ After marking index entries for key concepts, words, and phrases, you can use the
Insert Index command to tell Word to compile an index.
▪▪ Word can keep track of sources and compile a bibliography of cited sources based on
the style of your choosing.
13
Key points 401
Chapter at a glance
Prepare Prepare main documents,
page 411
Merge Merge main documents and data sources,
page 415
Send Create Send personalized email messages to
multiple recipients, page 419
Create and print labels,
page 423
Work with mail merge
14
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Prepare data sources.
Prepare main documents.
Merge main documents and data sources.
Send personalized email messages to multiple recipients.
Create and print labels.
Many organizations communicate with their customers or members by means of letters,
newsletters, and promotional pieces that are sent to everyone on a mailing list. The easiest
way to generate a set of documents that are identical except for certain information—such
as the name, address, and greeting of a letter—is to use a process called mail merge. If you
have a list of potential recipients stored in a consistent format, you can use the mail merge
process to easily produce a set of documents, email messages, or mailing labels.
The mail merge process combines static information stored in one document with variable
information stored in another document, as follows:
▪▪ Main document This document contains the static text that will appear in all the
merged documents. It also contains placeholders—called merge fields—that display
the variable information.
▪▪ Data source This is a structured document, such as a Microsoft Word table, Excel
worksheet, Access database table, or Outlook contact list, that contains sets of information—called records—in a predictable format. You can use an existing data source,
or you can create a new one as part of the mail merge process.
You can use the Mail Merge wizard to merge a main document with a data source in easy
steps. The first step is to select the document type, which can be a letter, an email message,
envelopes, labels, or a directory. The type you select determines the subsequent steps. When
you have some experience with mail merge, you can manually merge documents, to create a
personalized item for each record in the data source.
403
You can merge the main document and data source into a new document, with each
merged document separated from the next by a page break. You can then personalize
the merged documents before printing them, and you can save the document for later
use. If you don’t need to edit or save the merged documents, you can merge the main
document and data source directly to the printer or to an email message.
In this chapter, you’ll use the Mail Merge wizard in Word 2013 to guide you through the
process of creating a form letter. You’ll select a data source, add a record to it, sort it, and
filter it. You’ll then add merge fields for an address and greeting line to an existing form letter, preview the merged data, exclude recipients from the merge, merge the letters into a
new document, and save the merged file. You’ll also set up and send a merged email message. Finally, you’ll create and print mailing labels.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter14 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
Preparing data sources
The first step in the mail merge process is to either specify an existing data source or create one. The data source consists of a matrix of rows and columns. Each row contains one
record, such as the complete name and address of a customer, and each column contains a
particular type of information—called a field—such as the first name of all the customers.
In the first row of the data source, each field is identified by its column heading—called a
field name.
The data source stores information in a structured way.
TIP Because the field names are also used as the merge fields in the main document, they
cannot contain spaces. To make the field names readable with no spaces, capitalize each
word, as in PostalCode, or replace the spaces with underscores, as in Last_Name.
404 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
If the data source contains many records and it changes frequently, you might want to
create it in a program designed for working with large amounts of data, such as Excel or
Access. You can also use the contacts list from Outlook. If the data source contains only a
few records and it won’t be updated often, you can create it in Word, either as a table or
as a list with each field separated by a tab. Or you can create it as part of the mail merge
process.
What if you want to create merge documents for only a subset of the data in the data
source? For example, you might have mail-order customers from all over the United States
but want to send an announcement about a store sale only to customers with addresses in
your state. After you specify the data source, you can do the following:
▪▪ Filter the data source to create merged documents for only some of its data.
▪▪ Create a query (a set of selection criteria) to extract only the information you’re
interested in—for example, all the postal codes for your state.
▪▪ Sort the data source—for example, in postal code order for a bulk mailing.
When you use a filter or a query, all the data remains in the data source, but only the data
that meets your specifications is used for the mail merge.
In this exercise, you’ll open a document that you want to send to multiple people (the main
document) and use the Mail Merge wizard to select the list of recipients (the data source).
After you add information for a new recipient (a record) to the data source, you’ll sort and
filter it.
IMPORTANT We will work through the mail merge process in the exercises in this topic and in
the two following topics. You must complete the exercises in sequence. Be sure to read the Set Up
paragraphs of each exercise closely to ensure that you can successfully complete the exercises.
SET UP You need the AnniversaryLetter document and CustomerList workbook
located in the Chapter14 practice file folder to complete this exercise. Open the
Anniversary­Letter document, and then follow the steps.
1
On the Mailings tab, in the Start Mail Merge group, click the Start Mail Merge
button, and then click Step-by-Step Mail Merge Wizard to open the Mail
Merge pane.
14
Preparing data sources 405
You can create a mail merge letter from a source document in six steps.
2
With Letters selected as the document type, at the bottom of the Mail Merge pane,
click Next: Starting document.
Step 2 of the wizard requires you to select a starting document. We will use the
currently active document.
3
With Use the current document selected in the Step 2 pane, click Next: Select
recipients.
Step 3 of the wizard requires you to select a data source. We will use the
CustomerList workbook.
4
With Use an existing list selected in the Step 3 pane, click Browse to open the Select
Data Source dialog box.
5
Navigate to the Chapter14 practice file folder, and double-click the CustomerList
workbook to open the Select Table dialog box. Notice that the workbook contains
only one table.
406 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
If a workbook contains multiple tables, you must select the one that contains the mail merge
data.
6
With Customers$ selected in the Select Table dialog box, click OK to open the Mail
Merge Recipients dialog box.
The dialog box displays all the records contained in the data source.
14
Now we’ll modify the data source.
Preparing data sources 407
7
In the Data Source box, click CustomerList.xlsx, and then click Edit to open the Edit
Data Source dialog box.
You can modify the source data before performing the mail merge operation.
8
Click the New Entry button, and then enter the following information, pressing Tab
to move from field to field:
FirstName
Max
LastName
Stevens
Address1 678 Pine St.
City
Agriculture
State
WA
PostalCode
10003
TIP You can add multiple records by clicking New Entry after you enter each record.
9
Click OK, and then click Yes to update the recipient list. Notice that the new record
appears below the original records in the Mail Merge Recipients dialog box.
408 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
Now we’ll modify the order in which the mail merge process accesses the data source
records.
10
In the Refine recipient list area, click Sort to display the Sort Records page of the
Filter and Sort dialog box.
11
Click the Sort by arrow to display the sort criteria, which are the same as the field
names in the selected data source.
You can sort the records by up to three fields, each in ascending or descending order.
12
Scroll to the bottom of the Sort by list, and click PostalCode. Then with Ascending
selected, click OK to return to the Mail Merge Recipients dialog box, which now
displays the recipients in order by postal code.
TIP You can also sort data in the Mail Merge Recipients dialog box by clicking the
arrow to the right of the field you want to sort on and then clicking Sort Ascending
or Sort Descending.
13
Scroll to the right end of the recipients list, and verify that the records are sorted in
ascending order by the PostalCode field. Then in the Refine recipient list area, click
Filter to display the Filter Records page of the Filter and Sort dialog box.
TIP You can also open the Filter And Sort dialog box by clicking the arrow to the
right of any field name and then clicking Advanced.
14
Preparing data sources 409
14
In the Field list, click State to display the default Equal To criterion in the Comparison
box. In the Compare to box, enter WA (the postal abbreviation for Washington).
You can choose to merge only records that match specific criteria.
15
In the Filter and Sort dialog box, click OK to filter the source data to use only
residents of the state of Washington in ascending PostalCode order.
The records for customers who do not live in Washington are hidden and will be excluded from
the merge process.
16
Click OK to close the Mail Merge Recipients dialog box and complete step 3 of the
Mail Merge wizard.
+
CLEAN UP Save the AnniversaryLetter document as MyLetter, and leave it open for
the next exercise.
410 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
Using an Outlook contacts list as a data source
Using information from an Outlook contacts list as the data source for the merge
process requires a few extra steps in the Mail Merge wizard.
To use Outlook information as the data source for a form letter:
1 In step 3 of the Mail Merge wizard, in the Select Recipients area, click Select from
Outlook contacts, and then click Choose Contacts Folder.
2 If you are prompted to select an Outlook profile, click the one you want to use,
and then click OK to open the Select Contacts dialog box.
3 In the Select a Contact Folder to Import list, click the folder you want to use,
and then click OK to open the Mail Merge Recipients dialog box and display
your Outlook contacts.
4 In the contacts table, clear the check boxes of any contacts you want to exclude
from the merge process, or sort and filter the list to display the contacts you want
to include in the desired order.
5 Click OK.
You can then continue with the next steps in the merge process, as explained in the
next topic, “Preparing main documents.”
Preparing main documents
One type of main document commonly used in the mail merge process is a form letter. This
type of document typically contains merge fields for the name and address of each recipient along with text that is the same in all the letters. In the form letter, each merge field is
enclosed in « and » characters, which are called chevrons—for example, «AddressBlock».
If you have already written the letter, you can insert the merge fields during the merge
process; if you haven’t written the letter, you can write it as part of the process. Either way,
you first enter the text that will be common to all the letters and then insert the merge
fields that will be replaced by the variable information from the data source.
TIP If you need to stop before you finish the merge process, you can save the form letter to
retain the work you have done so far. You can then open the form letter and resume from
where you left off. Because you have specified a data source for the form letter, you will be
asked to confirm that you want to reattach the same data source.
Preparing main documents 411
14
You can insert merge fields in two ways:
▪▪ From the Mail Merge pane in step 4 of the Mail Merge wizard
▪▪ By clicking buttons in the Write & Insert Fields group on the Mailings tab
Either way, clicking Address Block or Greeting Line opens a dialog box in which you can
refine the fields’ settings, whereas clicking individual fields inserts them with their default
settings.
You can insert a merge field anywhere in the main document.
TIP To save the form letter without any mail merge information, click Start Mail Merge in
the Start Mail Merge group on the Mailings tab, and then click Normal Word Document.
In this exercise, you’ll modify an existing form letter by adding merge fields for a standard
address, an informal greeting line, and the recipient’s first name.
SET UP This exercise uses the MyLetter document to which you attached the
Customer­List table as the data source in the previous exercise. With the document
open, follow the steps.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you didn’t complete the previous exercise, you should do so now.
If you closed the document at the end of the previous exercise, open it and click Yes when
Word asks whether you want to attach the data source to the document. Then click the
Start Mail Merge button in the Start Mail Merge group on the Mailings tab, and click Stepby-Step Mail Merge Wizard to display the Step 3 pane.
1
2
At the bottom of the Mail Merge pane, click Next: Write your letter.
3
Position the cursor in the first empty left-aligned paragraph. Then, in the Mail Merge
pane, click Address block to open the Insert Address Block dialog box.
In the document, display hidden formatting marks and notice the empty paragraphs
above the body of the letter.
412 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
You can refine the format of the fields that make up the Address Block merge field.
4
Click OK to accept the default settings and insert the «AddressBlock» merge field
into the document. When you merge the form letter with the data source, Word
will substitute the individual name and address elements for this merge field.
We’ll begin the letter with a personalized greeting.
5
Press the Enter key twice, and then in the Mail Merge pane, click Greeting line to
open the Insert Greeting Line dialog box.
You can specify the greeting you want to use in the merged letters.
Preparing main documents 413
14
6
7
In the list displaying formats for the recipient name, click Joshua.
In the Preview area, click the Next button three times to view the greeting line for
each of the recipients in the linked data source. Then click OK to close the Insert
Greeting Line dialog box and insert the «GreetingLine» merge field into the docu­
ment. When you merge the form letter with the data source, Word will replace this
merge field with the word Dear and a space, followed by the information in the
FirstName field, followed by a comma.
Now we’ll personalize the letter content.
8
Click to position the insertion point at the beginning of the third paragraph of the
letter, which begins with For even greater savings. Then in the Mail Merge pane,
click More items to open the Insert Merge Field dialog box.
You can insert individual fields from the data source.
9
10
With Database Fields selected in the Insert area, and FirstName selected in the
Fields box, click Insert, and then click Close. Notice that the «FirstName» merge
field has been inserted at the beginning of the third paragraph.
Without moving the cursor, enter a comma and press the Spacebar. Then change
For to for.
The form letter is now ready for merging.
414 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
The form letter contains three merge fields.
+
CLEAN UP Save the MyLetter document, and leave it open for the next exercise.
Merging main documents and data sources
After you specify the data source you want to use and enter merge fields in the main document, you can preview the merged documents and then perform the actual merge. You
can further filter the source data during the preview process. When you’re ready, you can
either send the merged documents directly to the printer or you can merge them into a
new document. If you merge to a new document, you have another chance to review and,
if necessary, edit the merged documents before sending them to the printer.
In this exercise, you’ll preview merged letters, exclude recipients from the merge, merge the
letters into a new document, and then save the merged file.
14
Merging main documents and data sources 415
SET UP This exercise uses the MyLetter document that you prepared in the
previous exercises. With the document open, follow the steps.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you didn’t complete the previous exercise, you should do so now.
If you closed the document at the end of the previous exercise, open it and click Yes when
Word asks whether you want to attach the data source to the document. Click the Start Mail
Merge button in the Start Mail Merge group on the Mailings tab, and click Step-by-Step
Mail Merge Wizard to display the Step 3 pane.
1
2
In the Mail Merge pane, click Next until the Step 5 pane is displayed.
Hide formatting marks and, if necessary, adjust the view until the address block,
greeting line, and third paragraph are all displayed at the same time. Word displays a
preview of how the personalized letter will look when merged with the data source.
You can preview how the personalized letters will look before you proceed with the merge.
3
In the Preview your letters area of the Mail Merge pane, click the Previous Record
button three times to preview all the letters.
TIP You can also preview the next or previous documents by clicking the Next Rec­
ord or Previous Record button in the Preview Results group on the Mailings tab. You
can jump to the first merged document by clicking the First Record button or to the
last merged document by clicking the Last Record button.
416 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
4
To exclude the displayed recipient (Garth Fort) from the merge, click the Exclude this
recipient button in the Make changes area of the Mail Merge pane.
Now we’ll tidy up the address block by modifying the paragraph formatting of the
merge field.
5
In the document, drag to select all three lines of the address block. Then on the
Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click the Line and Paragraph Spacing button,
and click Remove Space After Paragraph to move the address lines together.
6
Click away from the selection and preview the letters again. Then at the bottom of
the Mail Merge pane, click Next: Complete the merge.
7
In the Merge area of the Mail Merge pane, click Edit individual letters to open the
Merge to New Document dialog box.
You can choose to merge only some of the currently selected records.
8
With the All option selected, click OK to create a document named Letters1 that
contains a personalized copy of the form letter for each of the selected records.
9
If necessary, click the Print Layout button on the View Shortcuts toolbar to display
the letters as individual pages.
10
On the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Save button to open the Save As dialog box
so that you can save the new document with a more specific name.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+S to save files. For more information about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end of this book.
11
Navigate to the Chapter14 practice file folder, enter My Merged Letters in the File
name box, and then click Save to save the new document in the specified folder.
+
CLEAN UP Close the My Merged Letters document. Then close the MyLetter
document, saving your changes if you want to.
Merging main documents and data sources 417
14
Printing envelopes
You can print an envelope based on an address in a document. To do so, follow these
steps:
1 In the document, select the lines of the address. (Do not select any blank lines
above or below the address.)
2 On the Mailings tab, in the Create group, click the Envelopes button to open the
Envelopes and Labels dialog box.
You can edit the delivery address and enter a return address.
TIP You can save time by storing the return address with your user information. In
the General area of the Advanced page of the Word Options dialog box, enter the
return address in the Mailing Address box, and click OK. The address then appears
by default as the return address in the Envelopes And Labels dialog box. If you
want to use envelopes with a preprinted return address, you must select the Omit
check box to avoid duplication.
3 Size 10 is the default envelope size. If you want to select a different envelope size,
click Options, make your selection, and then click OK.
418 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
In the Envelope Options dialog box, you can also specify the feed method (horizontally or vertically and face up or face down), and the font and font size of both
the address and the return address.
If you have electronic postage software installed on your computer, you can
include electronic postage.
4 Insert an envelope in the printer, and then click Print.
Alternatively, you can click Add To Document to have Word insert the address in the
format required for an envelope on a separate page at the beginning of the current
document.
Sending personalized email messages
to multiple recipients
When you want to send the same information to all the people on a list—for example, all
your customers, or all the members of a club or your family—you don’t have to print letters
and physically mail them. Instead, you can use mail merge to create a personalized email
message for each person in a data source. As with a form letter that will be printed, you can
either use the Mail Merge wizard or use the buttons on the Mailings tab to insert merge
fields into the form message. These merge fields will be replaced with information from the
specified data source.
If you are using the wizard, be sure to click E-mail Messages in step 1. If you are not using
the wizard, you can specify the list of email addresses you want to send the message to by
clicking the Select Recipients button in the Start Mail Merge group on the Mailings tab. In
either case, you have three options:
▪▪ Create an entirely new list of recipients by entering their contact information.
▪▪ Use an existing list of recipients stored outside of Outlook.
▪▪ Select recipients from an Outlook contacts list.
You can quickly add merge fields to a form message by using the buttons in the Write &
Insert Fields group. Many email messages need only a greeting line. Because email messages tend to be less formal than printed letters, you might want to start the messages with
a custom greeting rather than one of the predefined greeting options (Dear and To).
Sending personalized email messages to multiple recipients 419
14
In this exercise, you’ll open an existing form message, create a short mailing list, add a
custom greeting line merge field, and then complete the merge.
SET UP You need the ThankYouEmail document located in the Chapter14 practice
file folder to complete this exercise. You also need to have an email account configured
in Outlook if you want to send the messages. Open the document, and then follow the
steps.
1
On the Mailings tab, in the Start Mail Merge group, click the Select Recipients
button, and then in the list, click Type a New List to open the New Address List
dialog box.
You can create a data source as part of the mail merge process.
2
Click to position the cursor in the First Name field. Enter Andrea, press the
Tab key, enter Dunker in the Last Name field, and press Tab until you reach
the E-mail Address field (the last field in the table). Then enter [email protected]
consolidatedmessenger.com.
3
Click New Entry, and then add Judy Lew, with the email address [email protected]
lucernepublishing.com.
TIP If you have several email addresses to add to the list, you can press Tab in the
last field of the last entry, instead of clicking New Entry each time.
420 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
4
Repeat step 3 to add Ben Miller, with the email address [email protected],
and then click OK to open the Save Address List dialog box, which is very similar to
the Save As dialog box.
5
Navigate to the Chapter14 practice file folder, enter My Email Data Source in the
File name box, and then click Save to save the data source in the specified location
as a database.
Now we’ll insert the merge field in the main document.
6
Position the cursor at the beginning of the ThankYouEmail document. On the
Mailings tab, in the Write & Insert Fields group, click the Greeting Line button to
open the Insert Greeting Line dialog box.
7
In the first box in the Greeting line format area, drag to select Dear and then enter
Hello followed by a comma and a space. In the second list, click Joshua. In the third
list, click : (the colon).
8
In the Preview area, click the Next button twice to preview the greetings as they will
appear in the email messages.
9
Click the First button to return to the first record, and then click OK to insert the
«GreetingLine» merge field at the top of the form message.
If you want to edit the custom greeting, right-click the merge field and then click Edit
Greeting Line.
Sending personalized email messages to multiple recipients 421
14
10
On the Mailings tab, in the Preview Results group, click the Preview Results button
to display a preview of the first message. Click the Next Record button twice to
preview the messages for other recipients. Then click the Preview Results button
again to turn off the preview.
11
In the Write & Insert Fields group, click the Highlight Merge Fields button to
identify the merge fields in the document with a gray highlight. There is only one
merge field in this document.
Finally, we’ll merge the data source and main document directly to email messages.
12
In the Finish group, click the Finish & Merge button, and then in the list, click Send
Email Messages to open the Merge to E-mail dialog box.
You set up the email message header information and format in this dialog box.
13
In the Message options area, verify that Email_Address is selected in the To list,
enter Welcome to Wide World Importers! in the Subject line box, and verify
that HTML is selected in the Mail format list.
14
Click OK in the dialog box to send the email messages, or click Cancel to not
send them.
TIP Your email program might require that you log in or manually send the mes-
sages. If you are using Outlook, a copy of each sent message appears in your Outlook
Sent Items folder. If you plan to send a large number of messages, you might want to
turn off the saving of sent messages.
422 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
If you send the messages, you can locate them in your Sent Items folder.
+
CLEAN UP Close the ThankYouEmail document, saving your changes if you want to.
Creating and printing labels
Most organizations keep information about their customers or clients in a worksheet or
data­base that can be used for several purposes. For example, the address information might
be used to send billing statements, form letters, and brochures. It might also be used to
print sheets of mailing labels that can be attached to items such as packages and catalogs.
To create sheets of mailing labels, you first prepare the data source and then prepare the
main document by selecting the brand and style of labels you plan to use. Word creates a
table with cells the size of the labels on a page the size of the label sheet, so that each rec­
ord will print on one label on the sheet. You insert merge fields into the first cell as a template for all the other cells. When you merge the main document and the data source, you
can print the labels or create a new label document that you can use whenever you want to
send something to the same set of recipients.
Creating and printing labels 423
14
In this exercise, you’ll create mailing labels. and then print the labels to proofread them.
SET UP You need the CustomerList workbook located in the Chapter14 practice file
folder to complete this exercise. You also need an active printer connection if you want
to print the labels. Open a new, blank document, display formatting marks, and then follow the steps.
1
On the Mailings tab, in the Start Mail Merge group, click the Start Mail Merge
button, and then click Step-by-Step Mail Merge Wizard.
2
3
In the Mail Merge pane, click Labels, and then click Next: Starting document.
With Change document layout selected in the Step 2 pane, click Label options to
open the Label Options dialog box.
Every label is different. You need to specify the print method, the manufacturer and/or type, and
the product number so that Word can set up the labels correctly.
4
In the Label information area, ensure that the Label vendors setting is Microsoft.
TIP When you create and print labels, purchase the label blanks that fit your size
requirements, and then select the vendor and product number of those labels in
the Label Information area. If the label vendor and product number you need aren’t
already available in the lists, click the Find Updates On Office.com link to download
other available label configurations.
5
In the Product number box, select the second 30 Per Page setting, which has labels
with a Height of 1” and a Width of 2.63”. Then click OK to insert a table that fills the
first page of the main document.
424 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
TROUBLESHOOTING The results are visible only when formatting marks are displayed.
Word creates a 30-cell table that meets the label specifications.
6
At the bottom of the Mail Merge pane, click Next: Select recipients.
7
With Use an existing list selected, click Browse, navigate to the Chapter14 practice
file folder, double-click the CustomerList workbook, and then in the Select Table
dialog box, click OK.
SEE ALSO For more information about selecting, sorting, and filtering recipients, see
“Preparing data sources” earlier in this chapter.
8
In the Mail Merge Recipients dialog box, click OK to insert a «Next Record» merge
field in all the cells in the main document other than the first cell.
9
At the bottom of the Mail Merge pane, click Next: Arrange your labels, and then
ensure that the left edge of the main document is visible.
10
With the cursor positioned in the first cell, click Address block in the Merge your
labels area of the Mail Merge pane.
Creating and printing labels 425
14
11
In the Insert Address Block dialog box, click OK to accept the default settings to
insert an «AddressBlock» merge field into the first cell.
The merge fields in the first cell of the table will be used as a template for all the other cells.
SEE ALSO For more information about modifying merge fields, see “Preparing main
documents” earlier in this chapter.
12
In the Replicate labels area of the Mail Merge pane, click Update all labels to copy
the «AddressBlock» merge field to the other cells.
13
At the bottom of the Mail Merge pane, click Next: Preview your labels to display the
data source content in place of the merge fields.
The six labels, as they will appear after the merge.
Now we’ll merge the data source and main document into a new document that
contains the labels.
426 Chapter 14 Work with mail merge
14
At the bottom of the Mail Merge pane, click Next: Complete the merge. Then in the
Merge area of the Mail Merge pane, click Print.
You have the opportunity to exclude records from the merge before printing the labels.
15
16
With the All option selected in the Merge to Printer dialog box, click OK.
In the Print dialog box, verify that the name of the printer you want to use to print
the labels appears in the Name box, and then click OK to print the labels. The labels
are printed on regular paper on the printer you selected. If you want to print on label
sheets, insert the sheets in the printer’s paper tray or manual feed location before
clicking OK in the Print dialog box.
+
CLEAN UP Close the label document, saving it if you want to.
Key points
▪▪ The mail merge process works by combining static information in a main document
with variable information in a data source.
▪▪ The main document can be any type of document, such as a letter, email message,
envelope or label template, or a directory or catalog.
▪▪ The data source is organized into sets of information, called records, with each record
containing the same items, called fields.
▪▪ You insert placeholders, called merge fields, into the main document to tell Word
where to merge items from the data source.
▪▪ You don’t have to use all the records in a data source for a mail merge. You can filter
the data and exclude specific records.
▪▪ You can send the mail merged results directly to your printer, to email, or to a new
document that you can edit and save.
Key points 427
14
Chapter at a glance
Comment Add and review comments,
page 430
Track Track and manage document changes,
page 434
Protect Control Password-protect documents,
page 442
Control changes,
page 446
Collaborate on
documents
15
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Add and review comments.
Track and manage document changes.
Compare and merge documents.
Password-protect documents.
Control changes.
Coauthor documents.
In today’s workplace, many documents are developed collaboratively by a team of people
or undergo a review process of some sort. You might be the lead author of some documents that are reviewed by your colleagues and managers, and you might be a reviewer
of other documents. With Microsoft Word 2013, you can easily collaborate on the development of documents.
These days, most documents are reviewed on the screen rather than on paper printouts.
With Word, it’s easy to edit documents on-screen without losing track of the original text,
and it’s easy to accept or reject changes. You can also make comments, ask questions, and
respond to comments made by others. If you send a document out for review and then
receive several copies with changes and suggestions back from different people, you can
merge the different versions into one file to simplify the process of reviewing and accepting
or rejecting changes.
Even better, if your organization uses Microsoft SharePoint for collaboration, multiple people
can work in a document that is stored on the SharePoint site at the same time. When you
are creating a large document that requires input from several people, this method of collaboration can really save time.
Sometimes you’ll want other people to review a document but not change it. You can prevent other people from making changes to a document by assigning a password to it. You
can also specify that only certain people are allowed to make changes, and what types of
formatting and content changes are allowed.
429
In this chapter, you’ll first review, add, delete, and hide comments in a document. You’ll
track changes that you make to a document, and then accept and reject changes. You’ll
have Word compare and merge three versions of the same document. Then you’ll set and
remove a password and set up editing and formatting restrictions. Finally, we’ll discuss how
multiple people can work simultaneously in a document that is saved on a SharePoint site.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter15 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
Adding and reviewing comments
When reviewing a document, you can insert notes, called comments, to ask questions,
make suggestions, or explain edits. To ensure that all the reviewing tools are available, review documents in Print Layout view. To insert a comment, you select the text to which you
want the comment to refer, click the New Comment button in the Comments group on the
Review tab, and enter what you want to say in the Comments balloon that appears. Word
automatically adds your name to the comment.
Comments are displayed differently depending on the Display For Review setting you
choose. Word 2013 has three Display For Review settings: Simple Markup (the default), All
Markup, and No Markup. When all markup is shown, Word displays a balloon in the markup
area outside the right margin next to the line of text that has the comment. You can display
comments in several ways:
▪▪ Pointing to a balloon highlights the comments on that line in the color associated
with that particular comment’s author.
▪▪ Clicking the balloon displays the comments on that line.
▪▪ Right-clicking highlighted text and then clicking Edit Comment displays only the
comment for that text.
You can work with comments in the following ways:
▪▪ To review comments, scroll through the document, or click the Next or Previous
button in the Comments group to jump from balloon to balloon.
▪▪ To edit a comment, click the balloon and use normal editing techniques.
430 Chapter 15 Collaborate on documents
▪▪ To delete a comment, click its balloon and then click the Delete button in the
Comments group or right-click the balloon and then click Delete Comment.
▪▪ To respond to a comment, you can simply add text to the existing comment balloon,
or in Word 2013 you can now click the response icon in the balloon and then enter
your additional comments. Note that if you use the second method, your responses
will be displayed in a separate comment balloon to reviewers who use earlier versions
of Word.
▪▪ If the complete text of a comment isn’t visible in its balloon, view it in its entirety by
clicking the Reviewing Pane button to display the Revisions pane. To change the size
of the pane, point to its border, and when the pointer changes to a double-headed
arrow, drag the border. To close the Revisions pane, click its Close button, or click the
Reviewing Pane button again.
TIP In addition to displaying comments, the Revisions pane displays all the editing
and formatting changes made to a document in Track Changes, with the number of
each type of change summarized at the top of the pane. For information about Track
Changes, see the next topic in this chapter.
▪▪ Turn off the display of comment balloons by clicking the Show Markup button in the
Tracking group and then clicking Comments.
▪▪ If multiple people have reviewed a document and you want to display only the comments of a specific person, click the Show Markup button, click Reviewers, and then
click the name of any reviewer whose comments you don’t want to display.
In this exercise, you’ll show and review comments in a document, add and respond to
comments, delete one that is no longer needed, and then hide the remaining comments.
SET UP You need the CompetitiveAnalysisA document located in the Chapter15 prac-
tice file folder to complete this exercise. Display the document in Print Layout view, and
then follow the steps.
1
On the Review tab, in the Tracking group, ensure that the Display for Review box
displays Simple Markup. If comment balloons are not visible next to the paragraph
and table in the document, click the Show Markup button, and if Comments does
not have a check mark to its left in the list, click it.
2
On the Review tab, in the Comments group, click the Next button to display the first
instance of commented text in the document.
Adding and reviewing comments 431
15
In Simple Markup view, only the active comment balloon is expanded.
TIP If a document contains both comments and tracked changes, clicking the Next or
Previous button in the Changes group on the Review tab moves sequentially among
both elements, whereas clicking the Next or Previous button in the Comments group
moves only among comments.
3
4
In the Comments group, click the Next button to display the next comment.
5
In the table, point to Adequate to display a ScreenTip with information about who
inserted the comment and when.
In the Tracking group, in the Display for Review list, click All Markup to display the
full comments in the markup area.
In All Markup view, all comments are displayed in the markup area.
6
In the last column of the same row, select the words some good, and then in the
Comments group, click the New Comment button to highlight the selection and
display a new balloon in the markup area.
7
In the comment balloon, enter They carry the new Ultra line.
432 Chapter 15 Collaborate on documents
8
In the markup area, click the comment balloon linked to the word com­pe­ti­tors, and
then in the Comments group, click the Delete button.
Next we’ll experiment with another view of comments and use two different techniques to respond to comments.
9
In the Tracking group, click the Reviewing Pane button to open the Revisions pane
on the left side of the program window.
The Revisions pane shows the two remaining comments. If the document contained other
revisions, they would also be shown here.
TIP You can click the Reviewing Pane arrow and then click Reviewing Pane Horizontal
to display the pane across the bottom of the page.
10
In the Revisions pane, click at the right end of the second comment, press Enter,
enter your initials and a colon (:), press the Spacebar, and then enter Ultra products
are available by special order only to add the new text to the original comment.
11
Click the Close button in the upper-right corner of the Revisions pane. Then position
the document so the right edges of the comment balloons are displayed.
12
Point to the comment balloon associated with Adequate, and then click the Reply to
Comment button that appears in the upper-right corner of the balloon to insert a
response within the comment.
The response comment is labeled with your name.
Adding and reviewing comments 433
15
13
In the response comment, enter If you had been a real customer, would you
have left?
Lastly, we’ll hide the comments.
14
In the Tracking group, in the Show Markup list, click Comments to hide the
comments in the document.
+
CLEAN UP Close the CompetitiveAnalysisA document, saving your changes if you
want to.
Tracking and managing document changes
When two or more people collaborate on a document, one person usually creates and
“owns” the document and the others review it, adding or revising content to make it more
accurate, logical, or readable. In Word, reviewers can turn on the Track Changes feature so
that the revisions they make to the document are recorded without the original text being
lost. (Note that turning on Track Changes affects only the active document, not any other
documents that might also be open.)
To turn on Track Changes, you click the Track Changes button in the Tracking group on the
Review tab. You then edit the text as usual.
TIP If you want to know whether Track Changes is turned on when the Review tab is not
displayed, right-click the status bar and then click Track Changes on the Customize Status
Bar menu. Word then adds a Track Changes button to the status bar that you can click to
turn the feature on and off.
By default, your revisions appear in a different color from the original text, as follows:
▪▪ Insertions are inserted in the text in your assigned color. Insertions are underlined,
and deletions are crossed out (the formatting is called strikethrough).
▪▪ Formatting changes appear in balloons in the markup area.
▪▪ All changes are marked in the left margin by a vertical line.
▪▪ You can display deletions in balloons instead of in the text, and you can display
formatting changes in the text instead of in balloons. Simply click the Show Markup
button in the Tracking group on the Review tab, click Balloons, and then click the
options you want.
434 Chapter 15 Collaborate on documents
15
You can specify whether you want revisions to be displayed in the text or in balloons.
TIP The colors used for revisions are controlled by the settings in the Track Changes
Options dialog box, which you can display by clicking the Tracking dialog box launcher.
You can display a ScreenTip identifying the name of the reviewer who made a specific
change, and when the change was made, by pointing to a revision or balloon. The reviewer
name is taken from the user information stored with the user account. You can change the
stored user information for your user account from the Word Options dialog box, which you
can open either from the Backstage view or by clicking the Tracking dialog box launcher
and clicking Change User Name in the Track Changes Options dialog box.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you’re signed in to Word with a Microsoft account, Word tracks revi-
sions by the name associated with your Microsoft account. Changing your user information
affects revision tracking only when you aren’t signed in with a Microsoft account.
By using the commands available on the Review tab, you can work with revisions in the
following ways:
▪▪ To track changes without showing them on the screen, hide the revisions by clicking
the Display for Review arrow in the Tracking group and clicking No Markup in the
list. To display the revisions again, click All Markup in the Display for Review list. You
can also display the original version, with or without revisions.
▪▪ When revisions are visible in the document, select which types of revisions you want
to display from the Show Markup list in the Tracking group—for example, you can
display only comments or only insertions and deletions. You can also display or hide
the revisions of specific reviewers from this list.
▪▪ Move forward or backward from one revision or comment to another by clicking the
Next or Previous button in the Changes group.
Tracking and managing document changes 435
▪▪ Incorporate a selected change into the document and move to the next change by
clicking the Accept button in the Changes group. Click the Reject button to remove
the selected change, restore the original text, and move to the next change.
TIP You can also right-click the change and then click Accept or Reject.
▪▪ Accept or reject all the changes in a block of text, such as a paragraph, by selecting
the block and clicking the Accept or Reject button.
▪▪ Accept all the changes in the document by clicking the Accept arrow and then clicking Accept All Changes. Reject all the changes at once by clicking the Reject arrow
and then clicking Reject All Changes.
▪▪ Accept or reject only certain types of changes or changes from a specific reviewer
by displaying only the changes you want to accept or reject, clicking the Accept or
Reject arrow, and then clicking Accept All Changes Shown or Reject All Changes
Shown in the list.
In this exercise, you’ll turn on change tracking, edit the document, and accept and reject
changes.
SET UP You need the CompetitiveAnalysisB document located in the Chapter15 prac-
tice file folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
On the Review tab, in the Tracking group, click the Track Changes button (not its
arrow). Notice that the button color changes to blue to indicate that Track Changes
is turned on. Any changes that you make now will be indicated in the document as
revisions.
KEYBOARD SHORTCUT Press Ctrl+Shift+E to turn on change tracking. For more information about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the end of this book.
2
In the Display for Review list, click All Markup. In the Show Markup list, click
Balloons, and ensure that Show Only Comments and Formatting in Balloons is
selected.
3
Display the table. In the Prices column of the Fabrikam row, in the phrase Some
much lower, double-click the word much, and then press the Delete key. Notice
that Word indicates with strikethrough formatting that you deleted the word.
4
In the Service column of the Fabrikam row, position the insertion point after the
word Adequate, press the Spacebar, and then enter but slow to insert the new
text in the same color as the deletion.
436 Chapter 15 Collaborate on documents
5
In the Quality column of the Northwind Traders row, select the word Poor, and then
enter Substandard to show this one change as both a deletion and an insertion.
Then point to the deleted word Poor to display an informative ScreenTip.
15
A vertical line in the left margin draws your attention to revisions. Revision ScreenTips display
information about the change.
Let’s look at a few other views of tracked changes.
6
In the Tracking group, click Show Markup, click Balloons, and then click Show
Revisions in Balloons to remove the deletions from the text and display them in
the right margin.
The text is less cluttered if you display deletions in balloons.
7
In the Tracking group, click Show Markup, click Balloons, and then click Show All
Revisions Inline to restore the inline revision indicators and remove the balloons.
8
In the Tracking group, in the Display for Review list, click No Markup to hide
the revisions and display the document as it would appear if all the changes were
accepted.
9
In the Display for Review list, click Simple Markup to indicate the presence of
tracked changes only by displaying user-specific color-coded vertical lines in the
left margin.
Now we’ll review and process the tracked changes.
Tracking and managing document changes 437
10
In the Display for Review list, click All Markup to redisplay the tracked changes.
Then press Ctrl+Home to move to the beginning of the document.
11
In the Changes group, click the Next button to select the first change in the
document—the deleted word much. Then click the Accept button (not its arrow)
to accept the change, remove the revision and associated balloon, and move to
the next change (but slow).
12
In the Changes group, click the Reject button (not its arrow) to remove the inserted
text, and because there are no more changes in this row of the table, to also remove
the adjacent vertical bar from the left margin, and then move to the next change
(Substandard).
TIP You can click the Accept or Reject arrow to display a menu of actions associated
with the command, including not moving to the next change, processing all changes
of that type, and turning off change tracking after processing the change.
13
In the Changes group, click the Accept button to implement the deletion, and
then click the same button again to implement the insertion. Word then displays
a message box telling you that there are no more changes in the document.
14
15
Click OK to close the message box.
In the Tracking group, click the Track Changes button to stop tracking changes
made to the active document.
+
CLEAN UP Change the balloon setting to the one you like best. Then close the
CompetitiveAnalysisB document, saving your changes if you want to.
Comparing and merging documents
Sometimes you might want to compare several versions of the same document. For example, if you have sent a document out for review by colleagues, you might want to compare
their edited versions with the original document.
Instead of comparing multiple open documents visually, you can tell Word to compare the
documents and merge the changes into one document. Even if the changes were not made
with Track Changes turned on, they are recorded in the merged document as revisions.
From within that one document, you can view all the changes from all the reviewers or view
only those from a specific reviewer.
438 Chapter 15 Collaborate on documents
In this exercise, you’ll first merge three versions of the same document. You’ll then evaluate
and resolve the differences between the versions.
SET UP You need the Service, ServiceCP, and ServiceTA documents located in the
Chapter15 practice file folder to complete this exercise. Open the Service document,
and then follow the steps.
1
On the Review tab, click the Compare group button if necessary, and then in the
Compare group, click Combine to open the Combine Documents dialog box.
TIP Click the Compare option to the differences between two documents in a third
document. The documents being compared are not changed.
You select the two documents you want to combine in this dialog box.
2
In the Original document list, click Service. Then enter your name in the Label
unmarked changes with box.
TROUBLESHOOTING If the Service document doesn’t appear in the list, click the
Browse button to the right of the list, navigate to the Chapter15 practice file folder,
and then double-click the file.
3
In the Revised document list, click ServiceCP. Ensure that Chris Preston appears in
the associated Label unmarked changes with box.
4
If the dialog box isn’t already expanded, click the More button in the lower-left
corner of the dialog box. Then in the Comparison settings area, verify that all the
check boxes are selected.
5
In the Show changes area, ensure that Original document is selected below Show
changes in. Then click OK to compare the two documents and mark the differences
in a merged version of the document, which is displayed in the center pane. The
Revisions pane is displayed on the left, and the two documents being compared are
displayed on the right.
Comparing and merging documents 439
15
The document in the center pane combines the changes from the two documents on the right,
and the Revisions pane provides details about the changes.
TROUBLESHOOTING If the Revisions pane is not open, click the Reviewing Pane button
in the Tracking group on the Review tab. If the source documents are not displayed,
click the Compare button, click Show Source Documents, and then click Show Both.
TIP If you compare documents that contain conflicting formatting, a message box
will ask you to confirm which document’s formatting should be used.
Now we’ll compare a third version of the document to the first two versions.
6
With the first two combined documents displayed, click Combine in the Compare
group to display the Combine Documents dialog box.
440 Chapter 15 Collaborate on documents
7
In the Original document list, click Service. In the Revised document list, click
ServiceTA and ensure that Terry Adams appears in the associated Label un­marked
changes with box. Then click OK to add the changes from the ServiceTA version of
the document to those of the other two versions.
8
In the center pane, scroll through the document to review all the revisions, and then
in the Revisions pane, scroll through the individual revisions.
9
In the Tracking group, click the Show Markup button, click Specific People, and then
click Chris Preston to remove the change tracking markup from the revisions made in
the ServiceCP document.
10
In the Show Markup list, click Specific People, and then click All Reviewers to
redisplay all the revisions.
Before accepting changes in the document, we must resolve conflicting changes.
11
In the Revisions pane, below Chris Preston Deleted, right-click January and then
click Accept Deletion. Click any other changes in the Revisions pane to display that
location in the three document panes.
12
Click to position the cursor in the document in the center pane. In the Changes
group, click the Accept arrow, and then in the list, click Accept All Changes.
13
Close the Revisions pane, and then close the two windows on the right side of the
screen.
TIP The next time you combine documents, the Revisions pane and the source win-
dows will be closed. You can open the Revisions pane by clicking the Reviewing Pane
button in the Tracking group on the Review tab, and you can open the source windows by clicking Show Source Documents in the Compare list and then clicking the
option you want.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Service document, saving your changes if you want to.
Comparing and merging documents 441
15
Managing document versions
Word automatically saves a temporary copy of your open documents every 10 minutes. Autosaved versions of the document are displayed in the Manage Versions area
of the Info page of the Backstage view. You can work with documents in this area in
the following ways:
▪▪ You can display previous versions of a document by clicking the version you want
to display.
▪▪ You can identify changes between versions by clicking the Compare button on the
yellow information bar at the top of the previous version of the file.
▪▪ You can roll back to a previous document version by clicking the Revert button on
the information bar.
▪▪ You can display autosaved versions of all documents by clicking the Manage
Versions button.
You can change the autosave frequency on the Save page of the Word Options
dialog box.
Password-protecting documents
Sometimes, you might want only certain people to be able to open and change a document. The easiest way to exercise this control is to assign a password to protect the
document. Word then requires that the password be entered correctly before it will
­allow the document to be opened and changed.
You can assign a password to a document from the Info page of the Backstage view or
when saving the document. Word offers two levels of password protection:
▪▪ Unencrypted The document is saved in such a way that only people who know the
password can open it, make changes, and save the file. People who don’t know the
password can open a read-only version. If they make changes and want to save them,
they have to save the document with a different name or in a different location, preserving the original.
▪▪ Encrypted The document is saved in such as way that people who do not know the
password cannot open it at all.
442 Chapter 15 Collaborate on documents
In this exercise, you’ll set an unencrypted password for a document and then test the document’s security by entering an incorrect password. You’ll open a read-only version of the
document and then reopen it with the correct password. You’ll remove the unencrypted
password protection from the document and then set an encrypted password.
SET UP You need the Loans document located in the Chapter15 practice file folder to
complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
Display the Save As page of the Backstage view, and in the Current Folder area, click
the Chapter15 practice file folder.
2
In the Save As dialog box that opens, change the name in the File name box to My
Loans.
3
At the bottom of the dialog box, click Tools, and then in the list, click General
Options to open the General Options dialog box.
Assigning a password to open a document encrypts the document; assigning a password to
modify the document does not encrypt it.
Password-protecting documents 443
15
TIP If you want people to be able to read the document’s contents but you don’t
expect them to change the document, you can select the Read-Only Recommended
check box to tell Word to display a message suggesting that the document be
opened as read-only. Then click OK to close the General Options dialog box without
assigning a password.
4
In the Password to modify box, enter [email protected] Then click OK. Notice that as
you enter the password, dots appear instead of the characters to keep the password
confidential.
IMPORTANT Don’t use common words or phrases as passwords, and don’t use the
same password for multiple documents. After assigning a password, make a note of it in a
safe place. If you forget it, you won’t be able to open the password-protected document.
5
In the Confirm Password dialog box, enter [email protected] in the Reenter password to
modify box, and then click OK to set the password.
6
In the Save As dialog box, click Save to save a copy of the original document that is
protected from change.
7
Close the My Loans document. Then open it from the Chapter15 practice file folder.
Word displays the Password dialog box.
You must enter the password or open the document as read-only.
8
Enter password (all lowercase) in the Password box, and then click OK. Word
displays a message telling you that you entered an incorrect password.
9
Click OK in the message box. Then in the Password dialog box, click Read Only to
open a read-only version of the My Loans document. Notice that Word opens the
document in Read Mode; this is the default view for read-only documents.
10
Close the document, and then reopen it. This time, in the Password dialog box, enter
[email protected], and then click OK to open an editable version of the document.
444 Chapter 15 Collaborate on documents
Now we’ll remove the password protection.
11
Display the Save As page of the Backstage view, and in the Current Folder area, click
the Chapter15 practice file folder. At the bottom of the Save As dialog box, in the
Tools list, click General Options.
12
In the General Options dialog box, select the contents of the Password to modify
box, press Delete, and then click OK.
13
In the Save As dialog box, click Save.
Now we’ll encrypt the document and require a password to open it.
14
Display the Info page of the Backstage view. Click the Protect Document button,
and then click Encrypt with Password to open the Encrypt Document dialog box.
After the password is assigned, you will no longer be able to open the document without it.
15
In the Encrypt Document and Confirm Password dialog boxes, enter [email protected] in
the Password box and click OK.
The protected status of the document is displayed on the Info page of the Backstage view.
Password-protecting documents 445
15
16
Close the My Loans document, saving your changes, and then reopen it. Test the
document’s security by trying to open it with an incorrect password.
17
If you want to remove the password encryption, open the My Loans document by
using the [email protected] password. On the Info page of the Backstage view, in the
Protect Document list, click Encrypt with Password. In the Encrypt Document
dialog box, delete the password from the Password box, and then click OK.
+
CLEAN UP Close the My Loans document, saving your changes if you want to.
Controlling changes
Sometimes you’ll want people to be able to open and view a document but not make
changes to it. Sometimes you’ll want to allow changes, but only of certain types. For example, you can specify that other people can insert comments in the document but not make
changes, or you can require that people track their changes.
To prevent anyone from introducing inconsistent formatting into a document, you can
limit the styles that can be applied. You can select the styles individually, or you can implement the recommended minimum set, which consists of all the styles needed by Word for
features such as tables of contents. (The recommended minimum set doesn’t necessarily
include all the styles used in the document.)
You can protect a document from unauthorized changes by specifying formatting and editing restrictions in the Restrict Editing pane. There are two ways to display this pane:
▪▪ On the Info page of the Backstage view, click the Protect Document button, and
then click Restrict Editing.
▪▪ On the Review tab, in the Protect group, click the Restrict Editing button.
446 Chapter 15 Collaborate on documents
15
You specify the changes that are allowed in the document in this pane.
In this exercise, you’ll set editing and formatting restrictions to selectively allow modifications to a document.
SET UP You need the ProceduresRestricted document located in the Chapter15 prac-
tice file folder to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
2
On the Review tab, in the Protect group, click the Restrict Editing button.
In the Formatting restrictions area of the Restrict Editing pane, select the Limit
formatting to a selection of styles check box, and then click the Settings link to
open the Formatting Restrictions dialog box.
Controlling changes 447
All the available styles are currently allowed.
3
Scroll through the Checked styles are currently allowed list to view the styles in the
template attached to the open document, including styles that are available but not
currently in use.
4
Below the list, click the Recommended Minimum button. Then scroll through the list
again. All the selected styles are designated by the word recommended.
The recommended set does not include some of the styles used in the document, so
we’ll add the other styles to those that are allowed.
5
Toward the top of the list, select the Address check box. Then scroll through the list,
and select the BulletList1 and BulletList2 check boxes.
6
In the Formatting area, select the Block Theme or Scheme switching and the Block
Quick Style Set switching check boxes. Then click OK to implement the restricted set
of styles.
Word displays a message stating that the document might contain formatting or
styles that aren’t allowed.
7
In the message box, click Yes to remove the other formatting and styles. This causes
the telephone number and other indented paragraphs to revert to the Normal style.
448 Chapter 15 Collaborate on documents
8
In the Editing restrictions area of the Restrict Editing pane, select the Allow only
this type of editing in the document check box. Then in the associated list, click
Tracked changes.
9
In the Start enforcement area of the Restrict Editing pane, click Yes, Start Enforcing
Protection to open the Start Enforcing Protection dialog box.
People who don’t know the password can’t turn off the restrictions.
10
Without entering a password, click OK. Notice that the Restrict Editing pane now
provides information about actions permitted while the restrictions are in place.
11
Display the Home tab, and notice that many of the buttons in the Font and
Paragraph groups are unavailable.
12
Display the Review tab, and point to the Track Changes button.
The Track Changes button has been disabled; all changes will be tracked.
Controlling changes 449
15
13
In the document title, double-click the word Office, and enter Operations. Notice
that your change is marked as a revision. Any edits you make will be recorded, and
because the Track Changes button is unavailable, you cannot turn it off.
+
CLEAN UP Close the ProceduresRestricted document, saving your changes if you
want to.
Coauthoring documents
Whether you work for a large organization or a small business, you might need to collaborate with other people on the development of a document. No matter what the circumstances, it can be difficult to keep track of different versions of a document produced
by different people. If you store a document in a shared location such as a Microsoft
SharePoint site, multiple people can use Word to work in the document simultaneously.
After you save a document to a shared location, you can open it and indicate that you want
to edit it, without first checking it out. You can work on the version that is stored on the site
just as you would a document on your computer. When another contributor begins making
changes to the file stored on the site, Word alerts you to that person’s presence by displaying an icon on the taskbar, and a list of people currently editing the document on the Info
page of the Backstage view. You can send an email message or instant message to the
document editors from this location.
Word keeps track of changes that people make in the document and indicates which paragraphs are currently being edited and by whom. You can update your copy of the document to reflect other people’s changes, and share your changes with other people, by
saving the document or clicking the Updates Available notification on the status bar.
Clicking the Number Of Authors Editing status bar indicator displays a list of the people currently
editing the document
Recent changes are indicated by colored text. If each person working in the document tracks
his or her changes, the tracked changes remain available so that the document owner can
accept or reject changes when the team has finished working on the document.
In this way, people can work efficiently on a document whether they are in the same office
building, on the other side of town, or in a different time zone.
450 Chapter 15 Collaborate on documents
Restricting who can do what to documents
If rights management software is installed on your computer, you can control who can
view and work with your documents. If you have this capability, a Restrict Permission
By People option appears in the list displayed when you click the Protect Document
button in the Permissions area of the Info page. Clicking Restrict Permission By People
and then Restricted Access displays the Permission dialog box. In this dialog box, you
can click Restrict Permission To This Document and then allow specific people to perform specific tasks, such as opening, printing, saving, or copying the document. When
this protection is in place, other people cannot perform these tasks. The assigned permissions are stored with the document and apply no matter where the file is stored.
Before you can work on a document to which access has been restricted, you must
verify your credentials with a licensing server. You can then download a use license
that defines the tasks you are authorized to perform with the document. You need
to repeat this process with each restricted document.
Key points
▪▪ You can merge multiple versions of a document so that the changes in all versions are
recorded in one document.
▪▪ You can insert comments in a document to ask questions or explain suggested edits.
▪▪ When you collaborate on a document, you can record the revisions you make to the
document without losing the original text.
▪▪ If only specific people should work on a document, you can protect it with a password. You can also restrict what people can do to it.
▪▪ Multiple people can simultaneously edit a document that is stored on a SharePoint site.
Key points 451
15
Chapter at a glance
Style Create custom styles and templates,
page 454
Build Create custom building blocks,
page 472
Modify Command Change default program options,
page 478
Customize the ribbon,
page 494
Work in Word
more efficiently
16
IN THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
▪▪
Create custom styles and templates.
Create custom building blocks.
Change default program options.
Customize the Quick Access Toolbar.
Customize the ribbon.
If you use Microsoft Word 2013 only occasionally, you might be perfectly happy creating
new documents by using the wide range of tools we have already discussed in this book.
And you might be comfortable with the default working environment options and behindthe-scenes settings. However, if you create a lot of documents of various types, you might
want to streamline the document development process or change aspects of the program
to make it more suitable for the kinds of documents you create.
In this chapter, you’ll learn to create custom styles, templates, and building blocks, which
can greatly enhance document development efficiency. You’ll explore the Word Options
dialog box and experiment with some of the ways in which you can customize the program.
Then you’ll modify the Quick Access Toolbar and the ribbon to put the tools you need for
your daily work at your fingertips.
PRACTICE FILES To complete the exercises in this chapter, you need the practice files
contained in the Chapter16 practice file folder. For more information, see “Download
the practice files” in this book’s Introduction.
453
Creating custom styles and templates
When you want to quickly create an effective, visually coordinated document, you can
build on work that you or your co-workers have already done by saving an existing document with a new name and then customizing it to suit the current purpose. However, if
you frequently create the same type of document, such as a monthly or quarterly report,
one of the most efficient ways to generate the document is to base it on a template that
already contains the text, character and paragraph styles, page formatting, and graphic
elements that you generally use in that type of document.
When it comes to maximizing your efficiency while creating documents in Word, styles and
templates are among the most powerful tools available to you. Entire books have been
written about them; this discussion can only scratch the surface. We’ll talk about templates
first to provide some context; then we’ll discuss styles.
Creating and attaching templates
Although most Word users rarely need to concern themselves with the fact, all Word documents are based on templates. New blank documents are based on the built-in Normal
template, which defines paragraph styles for regular text paragraphs, a title, and different
levels of headings. It also defines a few character styles that you can use to change the look
of selected text. These styles appear in the Styles pane and are also available in the Styles
gallery on the Home tab. You can apply these template styles to format the content in the
document.
SEE ALSO For information about applying styles, see “Applying styles to text” in Chapter 3,
“Modify the structure and appearance of text.”
Depending on the types of documents you create and the organization for which you create them, it might be quite realistic for you to work happily in the Normal template for the
entire length of your word-processing career. However, many other templates are available
when you’re working in Word 2013. Most are for specific types of documents, and many
are pre-populated with text, tables, images, and other content that you can modify to fit
your needs. A few of the templates are installed on your computer with Word. Many more
templates are maintained on the Microsoft Office website, but you can locate and use them
directly from within Word (provided you have an Internet connection). You can create a
document based on one of these templates from the Start screen or from the New page of
the Backstage view.
454 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
16
Featured templates on the New page of the Backstage view when working online.
TIP Featured and Personal appear at the top of the New page only after you configure a
personal templates folder. More information is available later in this topic.
The templates available on the New page vary depending on whether you’re working
online or offline.
▪▪ When you’re working online (that is, when your computer has an active Internet connection, whether or not you’re using it to do anything else), the New page displays
thumbnails of featured templates. These vary based on the season; for example, they
might include holiday-specific or season-specific templates for creating announcements, invitations, and newsletters. The search box at the top of the page is active;
you can enter a search term to display related online templates, or click a category
below the search box to display online templates in that category.
▪▪ When you’re working offline, the New page displays only templates that are stored
on your computer. These include any templates that you have already used, as well
as a selection of letter, newsletter, report, and resume templates. The search box
is unavailable (you can only search the offline templates by scrolling through the
thumbnails on the New page).
Creating custom styles and templates 455
Content on the New page of the Backstage view when working offline.
Word document templates contain elements such as the following:
▪▪ Formatting Most templates contain formatting information, which in addition to
styles can include page layout settings, backgrounds, themes, and other types of formatting. A template that contains only formatting defines the look of the document;
you add your own content.
▪▪ Text Templates can also contain text that you customize for your own purposes.
For example, if you base a new document on an agenda template from Office.com,
the text of the agenda is already in place, and all you have to do is customize it.
Sometimes, a document based on a template displays formatted text placeholders
surrounded by square brackets—for example, [Company Name]—instead of actual
text. You replace a placeholder with your own text by clicking it and then typing the
replacement. If you don’t need a placeholder, you simply delete it.
456 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
▪▪ Graphics, tables, charts, and diagrams Templates can contain ready-made graphic
elements, either for use as is or as placeholders for elements tailored to the specific
document.
▪▪ Building blocks Some templates make custom building blocks, such as headers and
footers or a cover page, available for use with a particular type of document. They
might also include AutoText, such as contact information or standard copyright or
privacy paragraphs.
SEE ALSO For information about working with building blocks, see “Inserting pre­
formatted document parts” in Chapter 9, “Add visual elements,” and “Creating
­custom building blocks” later in this chapter.
▪▪ Custom tabs, commands, and macros Sophisticated templates might include
custom ribbon tabs or toolbars with commands and macros that are specific to the
purposes of the template. A macros is a recorded series of commands that allows a
user to perform a process with the click of a button. The topic of macros is beyond
the scope of this book; for information, refer to Word Help.
TIP Word 2013 template files have one of two file name extensions, depending on
their content. Those that contain macros have the .dotm file name extension; those
that don’t contain macros have the .dotx extension.
When you base a new document on a template, that template is said to be attached to the
document. The styles defined in the attached template appear in the Styles pane so that
you can easily apply them to any content you add to the document. You can change the
document template by attaching a different one. You can also load templates as global
templates to make their contents available in all documents that you work on. Two global
templates are automatically loaded by Word—the Normal template and the Building Blocks
template—but you can load others. For example, your organization might have a Custom
Building Blocks template containing corporate-themed document parts that it wants you to
use in all documents.
TIP If the designation (Compatibility Mode) appears in the title bar when you create a docu-
ment based on a template, it indicates that the template was created in an earlier version
of Word. Usually this will have no effect on your use of the template, but bear in mind that
certain Word functionality is disabled in Compatibility Mode. To upgrade a document to
Word 2013, click the Convert button on the Info page of the Backstage view.
Creating custom styles and templates 457
16
If none of the templates that come with Word or that you download from Office.com meets
your needs, you can create your own template. You can distribute the custom template to
other people as well. By doing so, you can ensure that documents you and your co-workers
create adhere to a specific set of styles or are based on the same content.
Creating a custom template is easy—you simply create a document containing the content, styles, and settings that you want, and then save it as a document template (a .dotx
file) rather than as a document (a .docx file). You can save a custom template with text in it,
which is handy if you create many documents with only slight variations. Or you can delete
the text so that a new document based on the template will open as a blank document with
the set of predefined styles available to apply to whatever content you enter.
You can save a custom template anywhere and then browse to and double-click the file
name to open a new document based on the template. However, if you save the template
in your default Personal Templates folder, it will be available when you click Personal at the
top of the New page of the Backstage view.
TIP In earlier versions of Office, the default Templates location was a hidden folder stored
at C:\Users\<user name>\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\Templates. Word 2013 allows you to
choose your own Personal Templates folder from the Save page of the Backstage view.
In Chapter 3, “Modify the structure and appearance of text,” we discuss how to assign
formats and outline levels to content by applying styles, and how to change the appearance of styled content by using style sets. Although style sets provide a quick and easy
way to change the look of an existing document, there might be times when you want
to attach an entirely different template to a document. For example, you might attach a
company-specific template that contains a defined set of styles permitted in corporate
communications.
You attach a template from the Developer tab, which by default is hidden. To display the
Developer tab, open the Word Options dialog box, display the Customize Ribbon page, and
in the Customize The Ribbon pane displaying the main tabs, select the check box to the left
of Developer.
458 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
To attach a different template to an open document and reset the document styles to the
template styles, follow these steps:
1 On the Developer tab, in the Templates group, click Document Template to display
the Templates page of the Templates and Add-ins dialog box.
16
From this page, you can attach a document template or load a global template.
2 In the Document template area, click Attach to open the Attach Template dialog
box. Navigate to the template you want to attach, and then double-click it to enter
the path to the template in the Document template box.
3 In the Templates and Add-ins dialog box, select the Automatically update document styles check box, and then click OK to attach the new template and update
the document styles.
Creating custom styles and templates 459
If the styles in the new template have the same names as the styles in the original template,
the formatting associated with the styles will change when you attach the new template.
If the styles have different names, you can quickly restyle the document content by using
commands available from the Styles pane. To replace the styles attached to content:
▪▪ In the Styles pane, point to the old style name, click the arrow that appears, and click
Select All. Then click the new style name.
To load a global template and make it available for use:
1 Display the Templates and Add-ins dialog box. In the Global templates and add-ins
area, click Add to open the Add Template dialog box.
2 In the Add Template dialog box, navigate to the template you want to load, and
then double-click it to enter the template name in the Global templates and addins pane. A check mark indicates that the template is active.
3 In the Templates and Add-ins dialog box, click OK.
TIP You can deactivate a global template (but keep it available for future use) by
clearing its check box, and you can unload it by selecting it in the list and clicking
Remove.
Creating and modifying styles
Even if you don’t want to create your own templates, it’s very useful to know how to create
and modify styles. When you apply direct character formatting or paragraph formatting,
you affect only the selected characters or paragraphs. If you change your mind about how
you want to format a particular document element, you have to change the formatting
manually everywhere it is applied. When you format characters or paragraphs by applying a
style, you can change the way all of those characters or paragraphs look simply by changing
the style definition. With one change in one place, you can completely change the look of
the document.
460 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
You already know that when you create a blank document, it is based on the Normal template. Initially, the Normal template displays only a limited number of styles in the Styles
gallery, but in fact it contains styles for just about every element you can think of. Although
they are available, these styles aren’t actually used unless you apply the style or add the
corresponding element to the document. For example, nine paragraph styles are available
for an index, but none of them is used until you create and insert an index in the document.
You can access the unused styles and then manually apply them to characters and paragraphs in these ways:
▪▪ Clicking the Styles dialog box launcher displays the Styles pane. By default, the pane
shows only the recommended styles in the document. Clicking Options at the bottom
of the pane opens the Style Pane Options dialog box.
You can specify which styles should be shown and how.
By selecting All Styles in the Select Styles to Show list and Alphabetical in the Select
How List Is Sorted list, you can display all the available styles (from all templates and
global templates) in alphabetical order. You can then apply a style from the Styles
pane by clicking it. If you prefer to display a preview of each style so that you can
sort through styles visually, you can do so by selecting the Show Preview check box
at the bottom of the pane.
Creating custom styles and templates 461
16
You can display only the style names, or a preview of each style.
TIP Selecting the Show Preview check box displays style names in the formatting as-
signed to the style. Pointing to a style displays its formatting specifications.
▪▪ Clicking Apply Styles at the bottom of the Styles gallery on the Home tab opens the
Apply Styles dialog box. If you don’t have room to display the entire Styles pane, you
can keep theis dialog box open while you work and apply or reapply styles from here.
The Style Name box displays the style applied to the active selection.
462 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
Selecting a different style from the Style Name list applies it to the active paragraph or selected text. The Style Name list displays the same set of styles that are
in the Styles pane; that is, if the pane shows only the styles in use, so does the Style
Name list.
▪▪ Right-clicking a style in the Styles pane, or pointing to the style and clicking the arrow
that appears, and then clicking Add to Style Gallery adds the style to the Styles gallery on the Home tab of the ribbon.
There are three major types of styles, identified in the Styles pane by icons:
▪▪ Paragraph These styles can include any formatting that can be applied to a para-
graph. They can also include character formatting. Paragraph styles are applied to the
entire paragraph containing the cursor. In the Styles pane, a paragraph style is identified by a paragraph mark to the right of its name.
▪▪ Character These styles can include any formatting that can be applied to selected
text. They are applied on top of the character formatting defined for the paragraph
style. Like direct character formatting, character styles are applied to selected text; to
apply them to an entire paragraph, you must select it.
▪▪ Linked These styles are hybrids. If you click in a paragraph and then apply the style,
the style is applied to the entire paragraph like a paragraph style. If you select text
and then apply the style, the style is applied to the selection only.
TIP Two additional style types, Table and List, are reserved for styles for those
document elements.
The simplest way to customize the look of a document is to modify an existing style in one
of the following ways:
▪▪ Apply the style to a paragraph or selected text, and adjust the formatting so that the
paragraph or selection looks the way you want it. Then update the style definition
with the new formatting by right-clicking the style in the Styles gallery, or by clicking the arrow to the right of the style in the Styles pane, and then clicking Update
<style> to Match Selection.
▪▪ Right-click the style in the Styles gallery and click Modify; click the arrow to the right
of the style in the Styles pane; or display the style name in the Apply Styles dialog
box and click Modify. Then in the Modify Style dialog box, change the settings in the
Formatting area to achieve the look you want.
Creating custom styles and templates 463
16
You can adjust the formatting definition of any style by changing the settings in this dialog box.
If you modify the existing styles, you can save the new style definitions as a style set. (Each
new style must have the same name as its corresponding existing style.) Clicking Save As A
New Style Set below the Style Set gallery on the Design tab opens the Save As A New Style
Set dialog box, where you name the set. Without changing the storage location, click Save
to save the style set in the QuickStyles folder. You can then make the style set accessible to
any document by selecting it from the Style Set gallery.
SEE ALSO For information about switching style sets, see “Applying styles to text” in
Chapter 3, “Modify the structure and appearance of text.”
If you want to create a style rather than redefine an existing one, you apply the formatting
you want for the style to a paragraph or selection and then click Create A Style below the
Styles gallery on the Home tab, or click the New Style button at the bottom of the Styles
pane, to open the Create New Style From Formatting dialog box.
464 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
16
The Paragraph Style Preview box displays the formatting applied to the style name.
If you want to refine the definition of the new style, clicking Modify expands the dialog box
so that it resembles the Modify Style dialog box. (You can go directly to the expanded dialog box by clicking the New Style button at the bottom of the Styles pane.) There you can
specify the style name and type and all formatting for the style. If you are building on an
existing style, you can select that style in the Style Based On list and then specify the formatting differences rather than defining the style from scratch. If you are creating the style
as part of a new template, you can make the style part of the template instead of only part
of the current document.
After you create the styles you want, you can remove those you don’t want from the Styles
gallery. by right-clicking the style in the gallery and clicking Remove From Style Gallery.
The styles will still be available in the Styles pane, and you can add them back to the Styles
gallery at any time by clicking the arrow to the right of the style in the pane and then clicking Add To Style Gallery. To remove a style from the Styles pane, click the arrow to the right
of the style, click Delete or Revert To <style>, and then click Yes to confirm the deletion.
TIP The Delete command appears on the menu only for styles that aren’t based on other
styles. The Revert To command appears for styles that are based on other styles. You cannot delete a built-in style, but if you have modified it, you can revert it back to its original
formatting.
In this exercise, you’ll set up a location for personal templates, create a document based
on a predefined Word template, modify the document, and save it as a personal template.
You’ll create a document based on the personal template. Then you’ll modify the styles in
an existing document, create new styles, personalize the Styles gallery, and save the document as a personal template.
SET UP You need the AuthorsBlank document located in the Chapter16 practice file
folder, and an active Internet connection, to complete this exercise. Start Word, but don’t
open the document yet. Just follow the steps.
Creating custom styles and templates 465
1
If you haven’t previously configured a default personal templates folder, display
the Word Options dialog box by clicking Options in the Backstage view. On the
Save page of the Word Options dialog box, in the Default personal templates
location box, enter the path to the folder in which you’d like to store templates that
you create. If you don’t already have a location in mind, copy the Default local file
location path from the box above, and add Templates to the end. Then click OK to
save the setting.
2
On the New page of the Backstage view, below the search box, click the Fax
category to display thumbnails of facsimile message cover sheets.
TIP After you configure a personal templates folder, Featured and Personal appear
at the top of the New page. Clicking these links switches between displaying the featured templates and displaying the contents of your personal templates folder.
3
Scroll through the list, click a template that you like (we chose the Basic Fax Cover
template), and then in the preview window, click Create to download the template,
create a new fax cover page document based on the selected template, and fill in the
information about you that Word has stored.
The fax cover page has placeholders for the text you need to supply.
4
Replace at least one placeholder with your own contact information. (Imagine that
you’re filling in the template with all the information that would be the same for each
fax that you send.) Then make any formatting changes you want.
466 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
5
In the Backstage view, click the Save As page tab. In the left pane of the Save As
page, click Computer, and then in the right pane, click the Browse button to open
the Save As dialog box.
6
In the Save as type list, click Word template. Notice that the folder path in the
Address bar changes to display your default personal templates folder.
7
In the File name box, enter My Fax Template. Then click Save.
The new file name is shown in the title bar, but there is no indication that this is a template
rather than a regular document.
8
9
In the Backstage view, click Close to close the template without quitting Word.
On the New page of the Backstage view, above the thumbnails, click Personal to
display the contents of your personal templates folder.
TIP If you create a lot of your own templates, you can organize them by storing them
in subfolders of your personal templates folder. You can create subfolders either by
browsing to your personal templates folder in File Explorer and clicking the New
Folder button, or by clicking the New Folder button in the Save As dialog box.
Creating custom styles and templates 467
16
The customized template is available when you display personal templates on the New page.
10
In the Personal templates list, click the My Fax Template thumbnail. Notice that
Word creates a new document based on your custom template without displaying
a preview pane.
Now we’ll modify an existing document and save it as a template.
11
Open the AuthorsBlank document from the Chapter16 practice file folder, and
then (if the Styles pane isn’t open) click the Styles dialog box launcher to display
the Styles pane.
12
At the bottom of the Styles pane, click the Options link to open the Style Pane
Options dialog box.
13
In the Select styles to show list, click In current document. In the Select how list
is sorted list, click Alphabetical. Then click OK.
14
In the document, click Select and then Select All in the Editing group, or press
Ctrl+A, to select all the text in the document. With the text selected, set the font
to Tahoma.
15
Select the title and first heading, and change the font color to the first purple swatch
in the Theme Colors gallery (Purple, Accent 4).
468 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
16
Select the first paragraph below the Author1 heading, and set the font size to 12
points.
17
Click anywhere in the About the Authors heading. In the Styles pane, point to (don’t
click) the active Title style, click the arrow that appears, and then click Update Title
to Match Selection to change the font face and font color settings assigned to the
style.
Now let’s change the style so that the color of the line below the title coordinates
with the font color of the title.
18
In the Styles pane, point to Title, click the arrow that appears, and then click Modify
to open the Modify Styles dialog box. In the lower-left corner of the dialog box, click
Format to display a list of formatting elements that can be modified for the style.
You can modify as many aspects of a style as you can of the document text.
Creating custom styles and templates 469
16
19
On the Format menu, click Border to display the Borders page of the Borders and
Shading dialog box. In the Borders and Shading dialog box, click the Color arrow and
then in the Theme Colors palette, click the darkest purple swatch (Purple, Accent 4,
Darker 50%). In the Preview area, click the existing blue border to change its color.
Then click OK in both dialog boxes.
Now let’s update the other styles we changed earlier.
20
Click anywhere in the Author1 heading. In the Styles pane, right-click the active
Heading 1, h1 style, and then click Update Heading 1 to Match Selection. Notice
that the formatting of the other two headings changes to match that of Author1.
(Imagine the time savings of doing this in a document that has two dozen headings!)
21
Click anywhere in the <paragraph1> paragraph, and then update the Normal style
to match the selection and update the remainder of the document content.
Updating a style changes the formatting of any paragraphs to which the style is applied.
470 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
22
Select the last paragraph in the document (the Copyright paragraph). Using the
commands on the Mini Toolbar, change the font size to 9 points, and make the
selection bold, underlined, and purple.
23
With the Copyright paragraph selected, in the Styles group, click the More button
and then on the Styles menu, below the Style gallery, click Create a Style to open
the Create New Style from Formatting dialog box.
24
In the Name box, replace Style1 with Copyright, and then click Modify to expand
the dialog box to display options for modifying the new style.
Because the Style Type is set to Linked, you will be able to apply this style to entire paragraphs
or to only selected text.
25
At the bottom of the expanded dialog box, select the New documents based on
this template option and then click OK to make the new style available to other
documents that you create based on the Normal template.
Creating custom styles and templates 471
16
26
Expand the Styles gallery to verify that the new style appears in the gallery.
The new style in the Styles gallery.
27
Repeat steps 5 through 7 to save the document as a template named My Author
Template in your personal templates folder. Then verify that the template appears
in the Personal area of the New page of the Backstage view.
+
CLEAN UP Close the My Author Template file.
TIP If you want to make changes to the content or formatting that is part of an existing
template, you must open the template file instead of creating a document based on the
template. To edit a template, you can either display the contents of the folder that contains
the template, right-click the template file, and then click Open, or display the Open page of
the Backstage view, navigate to the template location, select the template, and click Open.
Then in the Open dialog box, set the file type to Word Templates, navigate to your Templates folder, and double-click the template.
Creating custom building blocks
A building block is a document element that is saved in the Building Blocks global template. A building block can be as straightforward as a word, or as complicated as a page
full of formatted elements. Many building blocks are provided with Word 2013, including
professionally designed page elements such as cover pages, headers and footers, and sidebars; and content elements such as bibliographies, common equations, Quick Tables, and
watermarks. You can use these building blocks to assemble or enhance a document.
472 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
SEE ALSO For information about working with building blocks to insert document elements
such as cover pages, headers, footers, and page numbers, see “Inserting preformatted document parts” in Chapter 9, “Add visual elements.”
You can save information and document elements that you use frequently as custom building blocks so that you can easily insert them into documents. A custom building block can
be a simple phrase or sentence that you use often, or it can include multiple paragraphs,
formatting, graphics, and so on. You need to create the element exactly as you want it only
one time; then you can save it as a building block and use it confidently wherever you need
it. You insert a custom building block into a document from the Quick Parts gallery on the
Quick Parts menu.
To create a building block, you create and select the item you want to save, click Save
Selection To Quick Parts Gallery on the Quick Parts menu, and assign a name to the build­
ing block. You can then insert the building block at the cursor by entering the building
block name and pressing F3, or by displaying the Quick Parts gallery and clicking the
thumbnail of the building block you want. Or you can insert it elsewhere by right-clicking
the thumbnail in the gallery and then clicking one of the specified locations.
You can insert a custom building block by selecting a location from a list.
IMPORTANT When you exit Word after saving a custom building block, Word prompts you to
save changes to the template in which you stored the building block. If you want the building block
to be available for future documents, click Save; otherwise, click Don’t Save.
In this exercise, you’ll save information as building blocks in a custom category, insert the
building block content in other documents, and then delete the building blocks.
Creating custom building blocks 473
16
SET UP You need the Bamboo and RoomFlyer documents located in the Chapter16
practice file folder to complete this exercise. Open the Bamboo document, and then
follow the steps.
1
2
Select the first four lines of information at the top of the document.
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click the Quick Parts button, and then click Save
Selection to Quick Part Gallery to open the Create New Building Block dialog box.
Word suggests text from the selection as the name of the building block.
3
4
In the Name box, enter Contact Block.
5
In the Create New Building Block dialog box, retain the default selections in the
other fields, and then click OK to add the selection to the Quick Parts gallery and
the Building Blocks template.
6
Open the RoomFlyer document. At the bottom of the right column of the cover
page, click to position the cursor in the empty paragraph that follows Call now to
order!
7
Enter Contact Block , and then press F3 to replace the building block name with the
four lines of text from the Bamboo document. Notice that the color of the company
name changes, from orange to red, to reflect the theme colors of the destination
document.
Click the Category arrow, and then click Create New Category. In the Create New
Category dialog box, enter Company Information in the name box, and then
click OK.
474 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
16
The building block picks up the formatting information from the document into which you
insert it.
8
Display page 3 of the RoomFlyer document. Click the Ordering Information heading
to activate the text box, and then click the text box that forms the sidebar to select it.
On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click the Quick Parts button, and then click Save
Selection to Quick Part Gallery.
9
In the Create New Building Block dialog box, enter Ordering Sidebar in the
Name box, select Company Information from the Category list, enter Sidebar
with ordering information in the Description box, and then click OK.
TIP To save changes to a custom building block, modify the building block in the
document and then save it to the Quick Parts gallery with the same name as the
original, and then click Yes when Word prompts you to indicate whether you want
to redefine the building block.
Now we’ll insert the building block we created in one document into another.
10
Display the Bamboo document. On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click the Quick
Parts button. Notice that both building blocks are now available in the Company
Information category.
Creating custom building blocks 475
The building blocks in the Quick Parts gallery reflect the color scheme of the current document.
TIP The Quick Parts gallery displays only the building blocks you create. The built-in
building blocks are available from other galleries, such as the Cover Page gallery.
11
In the Quick Parts gallery, click Ordering Sidebar to insert the building block content
as a sidebar on the current page. You can now update the information to reflect the
ordering of bamboo furniture rather than the Room Planner.
Custom building blocks make it easy to insert specific text and objects in any document.
12
In the Text group, on the Quick Parts menu, click Building Blocks Organizer. In the
Building Blocks Organizer dialog box, click the Template heading to bring your
custom building blocks to the top of the list. Then click Ordering Sidebar one time
to view the custom building block in the preview pane.
476 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
16
Custom building blocks are stored in the Building Blocks template, and built-in building blocks
are stored in the Built-In Building Blocks template.
TIP Modifying a built-in building block saves a copy of it in the Building Blocks tem-
plate and retains the unchanged original in the Built-In Building Blocks template.
Now we’ll delete the custom building blocks to revert to the default set.
13
In the Building Blocks Organizer dialog box, click the Delete button and then click
Yes when Word prompts you to indicate whether you want to delete the selected
building block.
14
Repeat step 13 to delete the Contact Block building block. Then close the Building
Blocks Organizer dialog box.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Bamboo and RoomFlyer documents, saving your changes if you
want to. If Word prompts you to indicate whether you want to save changes to the Building Blocks template, click Don’t Save.
Creating custom building blocks 477
Changing default program options
In earlier chapters, we mentioned that you can change settings in the Word Options dialog
box to customize the Word environment in various ways. For example, we told you how to
create AutoCorrect entries, how to adjust the save period for AutoRecover information, and
how to recheck the spelling and grammar of a document. After you work with Word for a
while, you might want to refine more settings to tailor the program to the way you work.
Knowing which settings are where in the Word Options dialog box makes the customizing
process more efficient.
In this exercise, you’ll open the Word Options dialog box and explore several of the available pages.
SET UP You don’t need any practice files to complete this exercise. With a blank
­document open, follow the steps.
1
On the Home tab, in the Font group, point to the Bold button to display a ScreenTip
that includes the button name, its keyboard shortcut, and a description of its purpose.
SEE ALSO For information about keyboard shortcuts, see “Keyboard shortcuts” at the
end of this book.
A default ScreenTip.
2
Click the File tab to display the Backstage view, and click Options to display the
General page of the Word Options dialog box.
478 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
16
You can disable features such as the Mini Toolbar and the Live Preview of styles from this page.
3
In the User Interface options area, in the ScreenTip style list, click Don’t show
feature descriptions in ScreenTips.
4
In the Personalize your copy of Microsoft Office area, verify that the User name
and Initials are correct, or change them to the way you want them to appear. In the
Office Background list, click Stars. In the Office Theme list, click Dark Gray.
TIP Changing any of the settings in the Personalize Your Copy Of Microsoft Office
area in any Microsoft Office 2013 program changes it in all the programs.
5
Click OK to close the Word Options dialog box. Notice that the title bar is now a dark
gray color that displays a pattern of stars.
6
In the Font group, point to the Bold button to display the ScreenTip, which now
includes only the button name and its keyboard shortcut.
Changing default program options 479
In the Dark Gray color scheme, the File tab and status bar in all Office 2013 programs are black.
7
In the document, enter I cant spel verry wel. Then press Enter.
The spelling and grammar checking utilities mark three of the words for review,
and the AutoCorrect function changes verry to very.
You can control the functionality that Word uses from the Word Options dialog box.
We’ll leave this text here for now and look at it again later.
8
Open the Word Options dialog box, and click the Display page tab to display
options for adjusting how documents look on the screen and when printed.
The Display page of the Word Options dialog box.
480 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
9
10
In the Always show these formatting marks on the screen area, select the Show all
formatting marks check box.
Click the Proofing page tab to display options for adjusting the AutoCorrect settings
and for refining the spell-checking and grammar-checking processes.
SEE ALSO For information about AutoCorrect and checking spelling, see “Correcting
spelling and grammatical errors” in Chapter 2, “Enter, edit and proofread text.”
The Proofing page of the Word Options dialog box.
11
In the Exceptions for area, select the Hide spelling errors in this document only and
Hide grammar errors in this document only check boxes.
12
Click the Save page tab to display options for saving, editing, and sharing documents.
Changing default program options 481
16
The Save page of the Word Options dialog box.
An important setting to notice on this page is the Save AutoRecover Information Every
setting. By default, Word saves a backup copy of your open documents every 10 minutes. If you are working on important documents, you might want to autosave more
frequently. If Word unexpectedly shuts down, it recovers the most recently saved
version when it next starts, so you can only lose the work you’ve done since the document was last saved (either by you or automatically by Word).
13
In the Save documents area, display the Save files in this format list. Notice the
many formats in which you can save files. Then click away from the list to close it.
TIP If you want to save all documents by default as a certain file type, choose that file
type here. If you want to save only one document in a format that is compatible with
earlier versions of the program, choose that file type in the Save As Type list of the
Save As dialog box.
14
Select the Save to Computer by default check box to have Word choose Computer
as the default location on the Save As page, instead of your Microsoft SkyDrive.
Notice that the Default Personal Templates Location reflects the location you set
earlier in this chapter.
482 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
15
Click the Language page tab to display options for setting the editing, display, Help,
and ScreenTip languages.
As with some of the options that you set on the General page of the Word Options
dialog box, the options you set on the Language page apply to all the Office programs installed on your computer.
16
The Language page of the Word Options dialog box.
16
17
In the Set your ScreenTip language list, click Spanish (Spain) [español].
Click the Advanced page tab to display options related to editing document content;
displaying documents on screen; printing, saving, and sharing documents; and a
variety of others. Although these options are labeled Advanced, they are the ones
you’re most likely to want to adjust to suit the way you work.
Changing default program options 483
The Advanced page of the Word Options dialog box.
18
Take a few minutes to explore all the options on this page, because this is where
you’ll find the fun stuff! There are many important options here, divided into sections
including Editing options; Cut, copy, and paste; Image Size and Quality; Chart;
Show document content; Display; Print; When printing this document; Save;
Preserve fidelity when sharing this document; General; Layout options for; and
Compatibility options for.
TIP The File Locations and Web Options buttons at the bottom of the General area
allow you to change the default locations of various types of files and adjust the
default settings for converting a document to a webpage. For information about
converting a Word document to a webpage, see “Creating and modifying web
­documents” in Chapter 11, “Create documents for use outside of Word.”
Some of the options can be set for the current document (the default) or for all new
documents. These options have a drop-down list in the section title bar.
19
In the Display area, set Show this number of Recent Documents to 6 (the default
number of documents to display is 25). Select the Quickly access this number of
484 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
Recent Documents check box, and set it to 3 (the default is 4). Then set Show this
number of unpinned Recent Folders to 3 (the default is 5).
20
Skipping over the Customize Ribbon, Quick Access Toolbar, and Add-Ins pages,
which we discuss later in this chapter, click the Trust Center page tab to display links
to information about privacy and security.
21
In the Microsoft Word Trust Center area, click Trust Center Settings to open the
Trust Center dialog box. From this dialog box, you can control the actions Word
takes in response to documents that are provided by certain people or companies,
that are saved in certain locations, or that contain ActiveX controls or macros.
The Macro Settings page of the Trust Center dialog box.
22
Review each of the pages of the Trust Center dialog box, because there will very
likely be settings here that you want or need to configure either now or in the future.
Then click Cancel to return to the Word Options dialog box.
23
In the Word Options dialog box, click OK to save the changes you’ve made and
return to the document.
Now let’s review the effects of your changes.
24
On the document page, notice that the formatting marks are visible, and squiggly
underlines no longer indicate possible spelling or grammar errors in the sentence you
entered. Point to the Bold button, and notice that the ScreenTip says Negrita.
Changing default program options 485
16
You can change the ScreenTip language, turn off spelling and grammar checking,
and turn on formatting marks from the Word Options dialog box.
25
Click the File tab to display the Backstage view. Notice that the three documents you
most recently worked on are available from the bottom of the left pane.
26
Click the Open page tab, and notice that the Recent Documents list displays only six
documents.
You can customize the way that files and folders are displayed in the Backstage view.
486 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
27
Click the Save As page tab, and notice that Computer is selected in the left pane,
and the Recent Folders list displays only three folders, plus the My Documents and
Desktop folders (these system folders are always in the list and are not counted
among the unpinned folders).
TIP If you have any pinned folders, they will also be shown. To pin a folder to the list,
point to the folder name and then click the pushpin icon that appears.
28
In the Backstage view, click Options to return to the Word Options dialog box.
Reverse any changes that you don’t want to keep in your working environment, and
then click OK to close the dialog box and save your changes.
TIP We changed the Office background back to No Background and the Office
theme to White so as to not clutter up the screen shots in other exercises. We also
reset the ScreenTip, ScreenTip language, formatting marks, and file and folder display
settings.
+
CLEAN UP Close the document without saving your changes.
Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar
By default, buttons representing the Save, Undo, and Redo commands appear on the Quick
Access Toolbar. If you regularly use a few commands that are scattered on various tabs of
the ribbon and you don’t want to switch between tabs to access the commands, you might
want to add them to the Quick Access Toolbar so that they’re always available to you.
TIP If you have upgraded to Word 2013 from Word 2003 or an earlier version, you might
have identified a few commands that no longer seem to be available. A few old features
have been abandoned, but others that people used only rarely have simply been pushed
off to one side. If you sorely miss one of these sidelined features, you can make it a part of
your Word environment by adding it to the Quick Access Toolbar or to the ribbon. You can
find a list of all the commands that do not appear on the ribbon but that are still available
in Word by displaying the Quick Access Toolbar or Customize Ribbon page of the Word
Options dialog box and then clicking Commands Not In The Ribbon in the Choose Commands From list.
Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar 487
16
There are three ways to add commands to the Quick Access Toolbar:
▪▪ From the Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu that appears when you click the
button at the right end of the Quick Access Toolbar. Some of the most common
commands, including the popular Quick Print command, are available from this list.
▪▪ By right-clicking a command on the ribbon and then clicking Add to Quick Access
Toolbar. You can add any type of command this way; you can even add a drop-down
list of options or gallery of thumbnails.
▪▪ From the Quick Access Toolbar page of the Word Options dialog box. On this page,
you can customize the Quick Access Toolbar in the following ways:
▪▪ You can define a custom Quick Access Toolbar for all documents, or you can
define a custom Quick Access Toolbar for a specific document.
▪▪ You can add any command from any group of any tab, including tool tabs, to
the toolbar.
▪▪ You can display a separator between different types of buttons.
▪▪ You can move commands around on the toolbar until they are in the order
you want.
▪▪ You can reset everything back to the default Quick Access Toolbar configuration.
After you add commands to the Quick Access Toolbar, you can reorganize them and divide
them into groups to simplify the process of locating the command you want.
As you add commands to the Quick Access Toolbar, it expands to accommodate them. If
you add a lot of commands, it might become difficult to view the text in the title bar, or all
the commands on the Quick Access Toolbar might not be visible, defeating the purpose
of adding them. To resolve this problem, you can move the Quick Access Toolbar below
the ribbon by clicking the Customize Quick Access Toolbar button and then clicking Show
Below The Ribbon.
In this exercise, you’ll add commands to the Quick Access Toolbar for all documents, then
organize and test the commands.
488 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
SET UP You need the Agenda document located in the Chapter16 practice file folder
to complete this exercise. Open the document, and then follow the steps.
1
On the Home tab, in the Font group, right-click the Text Highlight Color arrow, and
then click Add to Quick Access Toolbar to add the command and gallery to the
toolbar.
2
At the right end of the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Customize Quick Access
Toolbar button.
The list displays popular commands; check marks indicate those that are currently displayed.
3
On the Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu, click Spelling & Grammar to add
that button to the toolbar.
4
On the Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu, click More Commands to display the
Quick Access Toolbar page of the Word Options dialog box. Available commands
are shown on the left, and the commands currently displayed on the Quick Access
Toolbar are shown on the right.
Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar 489
16
You can filter the available commands by choosing a category from the list on the left.
5
In the Choose commands from list, click File Tab. In the left list, click E-mail as PDF
Attachment. Then click the Add button to add the command to the list on the right.
6
In the Choose commands from list, click View Tab. In the list on the left, double-click
Open the Navigation Pane to add the command to the list on the right.
7
In the Choose commands from list, click Developer Tab. Scroll to the bottom of the
list, and double-click Templates to add the command to the list on the right.
TIP The Developer tab isn’t displayed on the ribbon by default. If you use only one or
two commands from that tab, you can add them to the Quick Access Toolbar rather
than cluttering up the ribbon with an additional tab.
Now we’ll organize the commands on the Quick Access Toolbar.
8
In the list on the right, click Redo. Then at the top of the list on the left, double-click
<Separator> to insert a separator after the selected command.
9
In the list on the right, click Open the Navigation Pane. Click the up arrow to the
right of the list three times to position the command just below the separator. Then
in the list on the left, double-click Separator.
490 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
16
The arrows to the right of the Text Highlight Color and Templates commands indicate that
clicking these buttons on the Quick Access Toolbar will display additional options.
TIP To create a Quick Access Toolbar that is specific to the active document, click the
arrow at the right end of the box below Customize Quick Access Toolbar, and then
click For <name of document>. Then any command you select will be added to that
specific toolbar instead of the toolbar for all documents.
10
Click OK to close the Word Options dialog box. The Quick Access Toolbar now
includes the default buttons and the additional commands you’ve added.
Now we’ll display the Quick Access Toolbar in a more convenient location.
11
On the Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu, click Show Below the Ribbon to
move the Quick Access Toolbar close to the document content.
The customized Quick Access Toolbar is at your service!
Now let’s experience how much more efficient it is to work with commands on the
Quick Access Toolbar rather than the ribbon. You can perform each of these actions
from another area of the user interface, but you can perform them with fewer clicks
from the Quick Access Toolbar.
12
On the Quick Access Toolbar, select the Navigation Pane check box.
Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar 491
13
In the Navigation pane, click Preliminaries. In the document, select the first high­
lighted paragraph, Proof of notice of meeting. On the Quick Access Toolbar, click
the Text Highlight Color arrow, and then click No Color to remove the yellow high­
light from the selection. Notice that the No Color option becomes the default for the
Text Highlight Color button.
14
Select the next highlighted paragraph, and on the Quick Access Toolbar, click the
Text Highlight Color button to remove the yellow highlight from the selection.
15
On the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Spelling & Grammar button to proof the
document; click OK in the message box that appears when the process completes.
16
Experiment with any other Quick Access Toolbar options you want to. Then display
the Quick Access Toolbar page of the Word Options dialog box, click Reset, and
click Reset only Quick Access Toolbar.
17
In the Reset Customizations message box, click Yes to return the Quick Access
Toolbar to its default contents. Then click OK to close the Word Options dialog box.
+
CLEAN UP Close the Navigation pane and move the Quick Access Toolbar above
the ribbon if you want to. Then close the Agenda document, saving your changes if
you want to.
Using add-ins
Add-ins are utilities that add specialized functionality to a program (but aren’t fullfledged programs themselves). Word uses two primary types of add-ins: COM add-ins
and Word add-ins. The first type uses the Component Object Model to create utilities
that extend the functionality of Office programs. The second type includes templates
that incorporate sophisticated functionality such as macros.
There are several sources of add-ins:
▪▪ You can purchase add-ins from third-party vendors—for example, you can purchase an add-in that augments the ability to work with numbers in tables.
▪▪ You can download free add-ins from the Microsoft website or other websites.
▪▪ When you install a third-party program, it might also install an add-in to allow
it to communicate with Office programs. For example, certain non-Microsoft
programs install add-ins that enable the program to send content as an email
message attachment.
492 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
You can view and manage installed add-ins from the Add-Ins page of the Word
Options dialog box.
16
Your Add-Ins page will likely contain different add-ins in the Active, Document Related, and Disabled
categories.
To unload an add-in, click the add-in category in the Manage list and then click Go to
open the Add-Ins dialog box. In the dialog box, clear the check box of the add-in you
want to unload. This removes the add-in from memory but keeps its name in the list.
To permanently remove an add-in from the list, click the add-in name, and then click
Remove. (This completely deletes the add-in, so be sure you want to do so before you
click the button.)
IMPORTANT Be careful when downloading add-ins from websites other than those you
trust. Add-ins are executable files that can easily be used to spread viruses and otherwise
wreak havoc on your computer. For this reason, default settings in the Trust Center intervene
when you attempt to download or run add-ins.
Customizing the Quick Access Toolbar 493
Customizing the ribbon
Even if Word 2013 is the first version of Word you have ever worked with, you will by now
be accustomed to working with commands represented as buttons on the ribbon. The ribbon was designed to make all the commonly used commands visible, so that people could
more easily discover the full potential of the program. But many people use Word to perform the same set of tasks all the time, and for them, the visibility of buttons (or even entire
groups of buttons) that they never use is just another form of clutter.
Would you prefer to display fewer commands, not more? Or would you prefer to display
more specialized groups of commands? Well, you can. Clicking Customize Ribbon in the left
pane of the Word Options dialog box displays the Customize Ribbon page.
The Customize Ribbon page of the Word Options dialog box.
494 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
On this page, you can customize the ribbon in the following ways:
▪▪ You can hide an entire tab.
▪▪ You can remove a group of commands from a tab. (The group is not removed from
the program, only from the tab.)
▪▪ You can move or copy a group of commands to another tab.
▪▪ You can create a custom group on any tab and then add commands to it. (You cannot 16
add commands to a predefined group.)
▪▪ You can create a custom tab. For example, you might want to do this if you use only a
few commands from each tab and you find it inefficient to flip between them.
Don’t be afraid to experiment with the ribbon to come up with the configuration that best
suits the way you work. If at any point you find that your new ribbon is harder to work with
rather than easier, you can easily reset everything back to the default configuration.
IMPORTANT Although customizing the default ribbon content might seem like a great way
of making the program yours, we don’t recommend doing so. A great deal of research has been
done about the way that people use the commands in each program, and the ribbon has been
organized to reflect the results of that research. If you modify the default ribbon settings, you
might end up inadvertently hiding or moving commands that you need. Instead, consider the Quick
Access Toolbar to be the command area that you customize and make your own. If you add all the
commands you use frequently to the Quick Access Toolbar, you can hide the ribbon and have extra
vertical space for document display (this is most convenient when working on a smaller device). Or if
you really want to customize the ribbon, do so by gathering your most frequently used commands
on a custom tab, and leave the others alone.
In this exercise, you’ll add a custom tab to the ribbon, add groups of commands to the tab,
and change the position of the tab on the ribbon. You’ll move groups of commands from
one tab to another, and hide tabs. Then you’ll reset the ribbon to its default state.
SET UP You don’t need any practice files to complete this exercise. With a blank
­document open, follow the steps.
1
With the Home tab active, display the Word Options dialog box, and then click the
Customize Ribbon page tab.
TIP To quickly display the Customize Ribbon page of the Word Options dialog box,
right-click anywhere on the ribbon other than in a gallery, and then click Customize
The Ribbon.
Customizing the ribbon 495
2
On the Customize Ribbon page, click the New Tab button to insert a new custom
tab below the active Home tab in the right pane.
TIP You can clear the check box of any tab other than the File tab to hide that tab.
(You can’t hide the File tab.)
By default, a new custom tab includes an empty custom group.
3
Click New Tab (Custom) and then click the Rename button. In the Rename dialog
box, replace New Tab with My Tab, and then click OK to rename the tab.
4
Click New Group (Custom) and then click the Rename button to open a Rename
dialog box that includes icons.
496 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
16
The icon you choose for your group is displayed on the group button
when the ribbon is not wide enough to display the group.
5
In the Rename dialog box, click an icon that you like (naturally, we chose the happy
face) and replace New Group with My Favorite Commands. Then click OK.
Now we’ll add some commands to the custom group.
6
In the Choose commands from list, click Main Tabs. Then in the list, click the plus
sign adjacent to Review to display the groups that are predefined for this tab, and
click the plus sign adjacent to Proofing to display the commands in that group. In the
Proofing group, click Word Count, and then click Add to add the command to your
custom tab.
7
Expand the Tracking group, expand the Track Changes menu group, and then add
the Track Changes command to your custom tab.
Customizing the ribbon 497
8
Click the Comments group, and then click Add to add the entire group of commands
after the custom group on the new tab. Repeat the process to add the Changes
group to the custom tab.
For the purposes of this exercise, imagine that you have added all the Review tab
commands you will ever use to your custom tab, and you no longer need the
Review tab.
9
In the right pane, clear the Review check box to remove the tab from the ribbon.
Then click the plus sign adjacent to Page Layout to display the groups of commands
on that tab.
Now let’s modify the custom tab contents and position.
10
Drag the Page Setup group upward in the right pane and drop it on your custom
tab, after the Changes group. (A thick black line indicates its progress.) Repeat this
process to move the Paragraph and Arrange groups to follow the Page Setup group.
Then clear the Page Layout check box to hide the now-empty tab.
11
In the right pane, click My Tab. Click the up arrow one time to move your custom tab
above the Home tab in the list.
The order from top to bottom in the pane determines
the order from left to right on the ribbon.
498 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
12
Click OK to close the Word Options dialog box and display the results. My Tab
appears at the left end of the ribbon, immediately following the File tab. The Page
Layout and Review tabs are missing from the ribbon.
13
Click My Tab to display the contents of your custom tab.
16
The custom tab includes your custom group and the groups you added from other sources.
14
If the program window is maximized, restore it. Then drag the right edge of the
window to the left, to narrow the window until the ribbon can no longer display the
groups.
The group icon you chose appears on the group button.
+
15
Display the Customize Ribbon page of the Word Options dialog box. In the lowerright corner, click the Reset button, and then click Reset all customizations. In the
message box asking you to confirm that you want to delete all ribbon and Quick
Access Toolbar customizations, click Yes.
16
Click OK to close the Word Options dialog box.
CLEAN UP Close the document without saving your changes.
Customizing the ribbon 499
Customizing the status bar
You can easily add or remove indicators from the status bar by right-clicking any blank
area of the status bar and then, on the Customize Status Bar menu, clicking the indicator you want to add or remove.
On the Customize Status Bar menu, a check mark indicates a control that is
currently shown or will be shown when related information is available.
500 Chapter 16 Work in Word more efficiently
Key points
▪▪ The Word environment is flexible and can be customized to meet your needs.
▪▪ You can create styles and templates to speed up the work of formatting a document.
Styles and templates ensure that formatting is consistent within a document and
between documents.
▪▪ You don’t have to enter and proof the same text over and over again. Instead, save
the text as a building block and insert it with a few mouse clicks.
▪▪ Most of the settings that control the working environment are available from the
pages of the Word Options dialog box.
▪▪ You can provide one-click access to any Word 2013 command by adding a button for
it to the Quick Access Toolbar, either for all documents or for one document.
▪▪ You can customize the ribbon to put precisely the document development tools you
need at your fingertips.
Key points 501
16
Glossary
accessible content Content that is optimized for
consumers with disabilities and for assistive devices such as electronic readers.
add-in A utility that adds specialized functionality to a program but does not operate as an
independent program.
aspect ratio The ratio of the width of an image
to its height.
attribute An individual item of character formatting, such as size or color, that determines
how text looks.
AutoCorrect A feature that automatically
detects and corrects misspelled words and
incorrect capitalization. You can add your
own AutoCorrect entries.
AutoShape One of a wide array of predrawn
shapes provided by Word to assist you with
­creating more complex pictures.
background The colors, shading, texture, and
graphics, that appear behind the text and objects in a document.
balloon In Print Layout view or Web Layout
view, a box that shows comments and tracked
changes in the margins of a document, making
it easy to review and respond to them.
bar chart A chart with bars that compares the
quantities of two or more items.
blog A frequently updated online journal or column. Blogs are often used to publish personal or
company information in an informal way. Short
for web log.
bookmark A location or section of text that is
electronically marked so that it can be returned
to at a later time. Like a physical bookmark, a
Word bookmark marks a specific location in a
document. You can quickly display a specific
bookmark from the Go To page of the Find And
Replace dialog box.
building block Frequently used text saved in a
gallery, from which it can be inserted quickly
into a document.
caption Descriptive text associated with a figure,
photo, illustration, or screen shot.
category axis The axis used for plotting categories of data in a chart. Also called the x-axis.
cell A box formed by the intersection of a row
and column in a worksheet or a table, in which
you enter information.
cell address The location of a cell, expressed as
its column letter and row number, as in A1.
character formatting Formatting you can apply
to selected typographical characters.
character spacing The distance between characters in a line of text. Can be adjusted by pushing
characters apart (expanding) or squeezing them
together (condensing).
character style A combination of any character
formatting options identified by a style name.
chart area A region in a chart object that is
used to position chart elements, render axes,
and plot data.
chevron A small control or button that indicates
that there are more items than can be displayed
in the allotted space. You click the chevron to display the additional items. Also the « and » characters that surround each merge field in a main
document; also known as guillemet characters.
Click and Type A feature that allows you to
­double-click a blank area of a document to
­position the cursor in that location, with the
­appropriate paragraph alignment already in
place.
clip art Pre-made images that are distributed
without copyright. Usually cartoons, sketches,
illustrations, or photographs.
Glossary 503
Clipboard A storage area shared by all Microsoft
Office programs where cut or copied items are
stored.
desktop publishing A process that creates pages
by combining text and objects, such as tables
and graphics, in a visually appealing way.
column Either the vertical arrangement of text
into one or more side-by-side sections or the
vertical arrangement of cells in a table.
destination file The file into which a linked or
embedded object or mail merge data is inserted.
When you change information in a destination
file, the information is not updated in the source
file. See also source file.
column break A break inserted in the text of a
column to force the text below it to move to the
next column.
column chart A chart that displays data in vertical bars to facilitate data comparison.
comment A note or annotation that an author
or reviewer adds to a document. Word displays
the comment in a balloon in the margin of the
document or in the Reviewing pane.
contextual tab See tool tab.
cross-reference entry An entry in an index that
refers readers to a related entry.
cursor A representation on the screen of the
­input device pointer location.
cycle diagram A diagram that shows a continuous process.
data marker A customizable symbol or shape
that identifies a data point on a chart. Data
markers can be bars, columns, pie or doughnut
slices, dots, and various other shapes and can be
various sizes and colors.
data point An individual value plotted in a chart.
data series Related data points that are plotted
in a chart. One or more data series in a chart can
be plotted. A pie chart has just one data series.
data source A file containing variable information, such as names and addresses, that is
merged with a main document containing static
information.
demoting In an outline, changing a heading to
body text or to a lower heading level; for example, changing from Heading 5 to Heading 6. See
also promoting.
504 Glossary
diagram A graphic in which shapes, text, and
pictures are used to illustrate a process, cycle, or
relationship.
dialog box launcher On the ribbon, a button at
the bottom of some groups that opens a dialog
box with features related to the group.
digital signature Data that binds a sender’s
identity to the information being sent. A digital
signature may be bundled with any message, file,
or other digitally encoded information, or transmitted separately. Digital signatures are used in
public key environments and provide authentication and integrity services.
Document Inspector A tool that automates
the process of detecting and removing all extraneous and confidential information from a
document.
Draft view A document view that displays the
content of a document with a simplified layout.
drag-and-drop editing A way of moving or
copying selected text by dragging it from one
location to another.
dragging A way of moving objects by selecting
them and then, while the selection device is active (for example, while you are holding down
the mouse button), moving the selection to the
new location.
drawing canvas A work area for creating pictures in Word. The drawing canvas keeps the
parts of the picture together, helps you position
the picture, and provides a framelike boundary
between your picture and the text on the page.
drawing object Any graphic you draw or insert
that can be changed and enhanced. Drawing
objects include AutoShapes, curves, lines, and
WordArt.
drop cap An enlarged, decorative capital letter
that appears at the beginning of a paragraph.
embedded object An object that is wholly
inserted into a file. Embedding the object,
rather than simply inserting or pasting its contents, ensures that the object retains its orig­
inal format. If you open the embedded object,
you can edit it with the toolbars and menus
from the program used to create it.
endnote A note that appears at the end of a
section or document and that is referenced by
text in the main body of the document. An endnote consists of two linked parts, a reference
mark within the main body of text and the corresponding text of the note. See also footnote.
Extensible Markup Language (XML) A format
for delivering rich, structured data in a standard,
consistent way. XML tags describe the content
of a document, whereas HTML tags describe
how the document looks. XML is extensible
because it allows designers to create their own
customized tags.
field A placeholder that tells Word to supply
the specified information in the specified way.
Also, the set of information of a specific type
in a data source, such as all the last names in
a contacts list.
field name A first-row cell in a data source that
identifies data in the column below.
file format The structure or organization of data
in a file. The file format of a document is usually
indicated by the file name extension.
filtering Displaying files or records in a data
source that meet certain criteria; for example, filtering a data source so that you display only the
records for people who live in a particular state.
Filtering does not delete files, it simply changes
the view so that you display only the files that
meet your criteria.
font A graphic design applied to a collection
of numbers, symbols, and characters. A font
­describes a certain typeface, which can have
qualities such as size, spacing, and pitch.
font effect An attribute, such as superscript,
small capital letters, or shadow, that can be
­applied to a font.
font size The height (in points) of a collection of
characters, where one point is equal to approximately 1/72 of an inch.
font style The emphasis placed on a font by
­­using formatting such as bold, italic, underline,
or color.
footer One or more lines of text in the bottom
margin area of a page in a document, typically
containing elements such as the page number
and the name of the file. See also header.
footnote A note that appears at the end of a
page that explains, comments on, or provides
references for text in the main body of a document. A footnote consists of two linked parts,
a reference mark within the main body of the
document and the corresponding text of the
note. See also endnote.
formatting See character formatting and paragraph formatting.
formula A sequence of values, cell references,
names, functions, or operators in a cell of a table
or worksheet that together produce a new value.
A formula always begins with an equal sign (=).
gallery A grouping of thumbnails that display
options visually.
graphic Any piece of art used to illustrate or
convey information or to add visual interest to a
document.
grayscale The spectrum (range) of shades of
black in an image.
Glossary 505
gridlines In a table, thin lines that indicate the
cell boundaries. Table gridlines do not print
when you print a document. In a chart, lines
that visually carry the y-axis values across the
plot area.
group On a ribbon tab, an area containing buttons related to a specific document element or
function.
grouping Assembling several objects, such as
shapes, into a single unit so that they act as one
object. Grouped objects can easily be moved,
sized, and formatted.
header A line, or lines, of content in the top
margin area of a page in a document, typically
containing elements such as the title, page number, or name of the author. See also footer.
hierarchy diagram A diagram that illustrates the
structure of an organization or entity.
hyperlink A connection from a hyperlink anchor
such as text or a graphic that you can follow to
display a link target such as a file, a location in a
file, or a website. Text hyperlinks are usually formatted as colored or underlined text, but sometimes the only indication is that when you point
to them, the pointer changes to a hand.
Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) A markup
language that uses tags to mark elements in a
document to indicate how web browsers should
display these elements to the user and how they
should respond to user actions.
hyphenating Splitting a word that would
­otherwise extend beyond the right margin
of the page.
icon A small picture or symbol representing a
command, file type, function, program, or tool.
indent marker A marker on the horizontal ruler
that controls the indentation of text from the left
or right margin of a document.
506 Glossary
index A list of the words and phrases that are
discussed in a printed document, along with the
page numbers they appear on.
index entry A field code that marks specific text
for inclusion in an index. When you mark text as
an index entry, Word inserts an XE (Index Entry)
field formatted as hidden text.
index entry field The XE field, including the
braces ( { } ), that defines an index entry.
justifying Making all lines of text in a paragraph
or column fit the width of the document or column, with even margins on each side.
keyboard shortcut Any combination of keystrokes that can be used to perform a task that
would otherwise require a mouse or other pointing device.
landscape The orientation of a picture or page
where the width is greater than the height.
legend A key in a chart that identifies the colors
and names of the data series or categories that
are used in the chart.
line break A manual break that forces the text
that follows it to the next line. Also called a text
wrapping break.
line graph or line chart A type of chart in which
data points in a series are connected by a line.
link See hyperlink; linked object.
linked object An object that is inserted into a
document but that still exists in the source file.
When information is linked, the document can
be updated automatically if the information in
the original document changes.
list diagram A diagram in which lists of related or independent information are visually
represented.
Live Preview A feature that temporarily displays
the effect of applying a specific format to the
selected document element.
mail merge The process of merging information
into a main document from a data source, such
as an email address book or database, to create
customized documents, such as form letters or
mailing labels.
main document In a mail merge operation in
Word, the document that contains the text and
graphics that are the same for each version of
the merged document.
manual page break A page break inserted to
force subsequent information to appear on the
next page.
margin The blank space outside the printing
area on a page.
matrix diagram A diagram that shows the relationship of components to a whole.
merge field A placeholder in a document that is
replaced with variable information from a data
source during the merge process.
Microsoft Office Clipboard See Clipboard.
Navigation pane A pane that displays an outline
of a document’s headings, or thumbnails of a
document’s pages, and allows you to jump to a
heading or page in the document by clicking it.
Also provides content search capabilities.
nested table A table inserted into a cell of a
table that is being used to arrange information
on a page.
object An item, such as a graphic, video
clip, sound file, or worksheet, that can be inserted into a document and then selected and
modified.
palette A collection of color swatches that you
can click to apply a color to selected text or an
object.
paragraph In word processing, a block of text
that ends when you press the Enter key.
paragraph formatting Formatting that controls
the appearance of a paragraph. Examples include indentation, alignment, line spacing, and
pagination.
paragraph style A combination of character formatting and paragraph formatting that is named
and stored as a set. Applying the style to a paragraph applies all the formatting characteristics at
one time.
path A sequence of folders (directories) that
leads to a specific file or folder. A backslash is
used to separate each folder in a Windows path,
and a forward slash is used to separate each
­directory in an Internet path.
PDF Portable Document Format, a fixed-layout
file format in which the formatting of the document appears the same regardless of the computer on which it is displayed.
picture A photograph, clip art image, illustration, or another type of image created with a
program other than Word.
picture diagram A diagram that uses pictures
to convey information, rather than or in addition
to text.
pie chart A round chart that shows the size of
items in a single data series, proportional to the
sum of the items.
orphan The first line of a paragraph printed by
itself at the bottom of a page.
plot area In a two-dimensional chart, the area
bounded by the axes, including all data series.
In a three-dimensional chart, the area bounded
by the axes, including the data series, category
names, tick-mark labels, and axis titles.
Outline view A view that shows the headings of
a document indented to represent their level in
the document’s structure.
point The unit of measure for expressing the
size of characters in a font, where 72 points
equals 1 inch.
orientation The direction—horizontal or
vertical—in which a page is laid out.
Glossary 507
pointing to Pausing the mouse pointer or other
pointing device over an on-screen element.
Portable Document Format See PDF.
portrait The orientation of a picture or page
where the page is taller than it is wide.
post A message published on a blog, discussion
board, or message board.
Print Layout view A view of a document as it
will appear when printed; for example, items
such as headers, footnotes, columns, and text
boxes appear in their actual positions.
process diagram A diagram that visually represents the ordered set of steps required to complete a task.
promoting In an outline, changing body text to
a heading, or changing a heading to a higherlevel heading. See also demoting.
pull quote Text taken from the body of a document and showcased in a text box to create
­visual interest.
pyramid diagram A diagram that shows
foundation-based relationships.
query Selection criteria for extracting information from a data source.
Quick Access Toolbar A small, customizable
toolbar that displays frequently used commands.
Quick Style A collection of character and paragraph formatting that makes formatting documents and objects easier. Quick Styles appear in
the Quick Styles gallery and are organized into
ready-made Quick Style sets that are designed
to work together to create an attractive and
professional-looking document.
Quick Table A table with sample data that you
can customize.
Read Mode A document view that displays a
document in a simplified window with minimal
controls, at a size that is optimized for reading
508 Glossary
documents on a computer screen. Previously referred to as Full Screen Reading view or Reading
Layout view.
read-only A setting that allows a file to be
read or copied, but not changed or saved. If
you change a read-only file, you can save your
changes only if you give the document a new
name.
record A collection of data about a person, a
place, an event, or some other item. Records are
the logical equivalents of rows in a table.
reference mark The number or symbol displayed in the body of document when you
insert a footnote or endnote.
relationship diagram A diagram that shows
convergent, divergent, overlapping, merging, or
containment elements.
revision A change in a document.
ribbon A user interface design that organizes
commands into logical groups that appear on
separate tabs.
saturation In color management, the purity of a
color’s hue, moving from gray to the pure color.
screen clipping An image of all or part of the
content displayed on a computer screen. Screen
clippings can be captured by using a graphics
capture tool such as the Screen Clipping tool included with Office 2013 programs.
ScreenTip A note that appears on the screen
to provide information about the program interface or certain types of document content,
such as proofing marks and hyperlinks within a
document.
section break A mark you insert to show the end
of a section. A section break stores the section
formatting elements, such as the margins, page
orientation, headers and footers, and sequence
of page numbers.
selecting Highlighting text or activating an
­object so that you can manipulate or edit it in
some way.
subentry An index entry that falls under a more
general heading; for example, Mars and Venus
might be subentries of the index entry planets.
selection area An area in a document’s left
margin in which you can click and drag to
select blocks of text.
switch In a field, a setting that refines the results
of the field; for example, by formatting it in a
particular way.
series axis The optical axis that is perpendicular
to the x-axis and y-axis, usually the “floor.” Also
called the z-axis.
tab A tabbed page on the ribbon that contains
buttons organized in groups.
sizing handle A small circle, square, or set of
dots that appears at the corner or on the side
of a selected object. You drag these handles to
change the size of the object horizontally, vertically, or proportionally.
SmartArt graphic A predefined set of shapes
and text used as a basis for creating a diagram.
soft page break A page break that Word
inserts when the text reaches the bottom
margin of a page.
source file A file that contains information that
is linked, embedded, or merged into a destination file. Updates to source file content are
reflected in the destination file when the data
connection is refreshed.
tab leader A repeating character (usually a dot
or dash) that separates text before the tab from
text or a number after it.
tab stop A location on the horizontal ruler that
indicates how far to indent text or where to begin a column of text.
tabbed list A list that arranges text in simple
columns separated by left, right, centered, or
decimal tab stops.
table One or more rows of cells commonly
used to display numbers and other items for
quick reference and analysis. Items in a table
are organized in rows and columns.
stack A set of graphics that overlap each other.
table of authorities A list of the references in a
legal document, such as references to cases, statutes, and rules, along with the numbers of the
pages on which the references appear.
status bar A program window element, located
at the bottom of the program window, that displays indicators and controls.
table of contents A list of the headings in a
document, along with the numbers of the
pages on which the headings appear.
status bar indicator A notification on the status
bar that displays information related to the current program.
table of figures A list of the captions for pictures, charts, graphs, slides, or other illustrations
in a document, along with the numbers of the
pages on which the captions appear.
style Any kind of formatting that is named and
stored as a set. See also character style, paragraph style, Quick Style, and table style.
style area pane A pane that can be displayed
along the left side of a document on the screen
in Draft or Outline view and that displays
the assigned paragraph style of the adjacent
paragraph.
table style A set of formatting options, such as
font, border style, and row banding, that are applied to a table. The regions of a table, such as
the header row, header column, and data area,
can be variously formatted.
target A file, location, object, or webpage that is
displayed from a link or hyperlink.
Glossary 509
template A file that can contain predefined formatting, layout, text, or graphics, and that serves
as the basis for new documents with a similar
design or purpose.
text box A container that contains text separately from other document content.
text wrapping The way text wraps around an
object on the page.
text wrapping break A manual break that
forces the text that follows it to the next line.
Also known as a line break.
theme A set of unified design elements that
combine color, fonts, and effects to provide a
professional look for a document.
thumbnail A small representation of an item,
such as an image, a page of content, or a set of
formatting, usually obtained by scaling a snapshot of it. Thumbnails are typically used to provide visual identifiers for related items.
tick-mark A small line of measurement, similar
to a division line on a ruler, that intersects an axis
in a chart.
tool tab A tab containing groups of commands
that are pertinent only to a specific type of
document element such as a picture, table, or
text box. Tool tabs appear only when relevant
content is selected.
value axis The axis used for plotting values in a
chart. Also called the y-axis.
View Shortcuts toolbar A toolbar located at the
right end of the status bar that contains tools for
switching between views of document content
and changing the display magnification.
can follow hyperlinks, respond to requests to
download files, and play sound or video files that
are embedded in webpages.
Web Layout view A view of a document as
it will appear in a web browser. In this view, a
document appears as one page (without page
breaks); text and tables wrap to fit the window.
webpage A World Wide Web document. A
webpage typically consists of an HTML file, with
associated files for graphics and scripts, in a particular folder on a particular computer. It is identified by a Uniform Resource Locator (URL).
widow The last line of a paragraph printed by
itself at the top of a page.
wildcard character A keyboard character that
can be used to represent one or many characters
when conducting a search. The question mark (?)
represents a single character, and the asterisk (*)
represents one or more characters.
word processing The writing, editing, and formatting of documents in a program designed for
working primarily with text.
Word Web App An app that you can use to
review and edit a document stored in a shared
location in your web browser.
word wrap The process of breaking lines of text
automatically to stay within the page margins of
a document or within window boundaries.
WordArt object A text object you create with
ready-made effects and to which you can apply
additional formatting options.
x-axis The axis used for plotting categories of
data in a chart. Also called the category axis.
watermark A text or graphic image on the page
behind the main content of a document.
y-axis The axis used for plotting values in a
chart. Also called the value axis.
Web App See Word Web App.
z-axis The optical axis that is perpendicular to
the x-axis and y-axis, usually the “floor.” Also
called the series axis.
web browser Software that interprets HTML
files, formats them into webpages, and displays
them. A web browser, such as Internet Explorer,
510 Glossary
Keyboard shortcuts
Throughout this book, we provide information about how to perform tasks quickly and
­efficiently by using keyboard shortcuts. This section presents information about keyboard
shortcuts that are built in to Microsoft Word 2013 and Microsoft Office 2013, and about
custom keyboard shortcuts.
TIP In the following lists, keys you press at the same time are separated by a plus sign (+),
and keys you press sequentially are separated by a comma (,).
Word 2013 keyboard shortcuts
This section provides a comprehensive list of keyboard shortcuts built into Word 2013. The
list has been excerpted from Word Help and formatted in tables for convenient lookup.
Perform common tasks
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Create a nonbreaking space
Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar
Create a nonbreaking hyphen
Ctrl+Shift+Hyphen
Make letters bold
Ctrl+B
Make letters italic
Ctrl+I
Make letters underlined
Ctrl+U
Decrease font size one value
Ctrl+Shift+<
Increase font size one value
Ctrl+Shift+>
Decrease font size 1 point
Ctrl+[
Increase font size 1 point
Ctrl+]
Remove paragraph or character formatting
Ctrl+Spacebar
Copy the selected text or object
Ctrl+C
Cut the selected text or object
Ctrl+X
Paste text or an object
Ctrl+V
Refine paste action (Paste Special)
Ctrl+Alt+V
Paste formatting only
Ctrl+Shift+V
Keyboard shortcuts 511
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Undo the last action
Ctrl+Z
Redo the last action
Ctrl+Y
Open the Word Count dialog box
Ctrl+Shift+G
Work with documents and webpages
Create, view, and save documents
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Create a new document
Ctrl+N
Open a document
Ctrl+O
Close a document
Ctrl+W
Split the document window
Alt+Ctrl+S
Remove the document window split
Alt+Shift+C or Alt+Ctrl+S
Save a document
Ctrl+S
Find, replace, and browse through text
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Open the Navigation pane (to search the document)
Ctrl+F
Repeat a Find action (after closing the Find And Replace
dialog box)
Alt+Ctrl+Y
Replace text, specific formatting, and special items
Ctrl+H
Go to a page, bookmark, footnote, table, comment, graphic,
or other location
Ctrl+G
Switch between the last four places that you have edited
Alt+Ctrl+Z
Open a list of browse options
Alt+Ctrl+Home
Move to the previous browse object (set in browse options)
Ctrl+Page Up
Move to the next browse object (set in browse options)
Ctrl+Page Down
Switch to another view
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Switch to Print Layout view
Alt+Ctrl+P
Switch to Outline view
Alt+Ctrl+O
Switch to Draft view
Alt+Ctrl+N
512 Keyboard shortcuts
Work in Outline view
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Promote a paragraph
Alt+Shift+Left Arrow
Demote a paragraph
Alt+Shift+Right Arrow
Demote to body text
Ctrl+Shift+N
Move selected paragraphs up
Alt+Shift+Up Arrow
Move selected paragraphs down
Alt+Shift+Down Arrow
Expand text under a heading
Alt+Shift+Plus sign
Collapse text under a heading
Alt+Shift+Minus sign
Expand or collapse all text or headings
Alt+Shift+A
Hide or display character formatting
The slash (/) key on the numeric
keypad
Show the first line of body text or all body text
Alt+Shift+L
Show all headings with the Heading 1 style
Alt+Shift+1
Show all headings up to the Heading n style
Alt+Shift+9
Insert a tab character
Ctrl+Tab
Work in Read Mode
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Go to the beginning of the document
Home
Go to the end of the document
End
Go to page n
n, Enter
Exit Read Mode
Esc
Print and preview documents
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Print a document
Ctrl+P
Display the Print page of the Backstage view
Alt+Ctrl+I
Move around the preview page when zoomed in
Arrow keys
Move by one preview page when zoomed out
Page Up or Page Down
Move to the first preview page when zoomed out
Ctrl+Home
Move to the last preview page when zoomed out
Ctrl+End
Keyboard shortcuts 513
Review documents
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Insert a comment
Alt+Ctrl+M
Turn change tracking on or off
Ctrl+Shift+E
Close the Reviewing pane if it is open
Alt+Shift+C
Work with references, footnotes, and endnotes
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Mark a table of contents entry
Alt+Shift+O
Mark a table of authorities entry (citation)
Alt+Shift+I
Mark an index entry
Alt+Shift+X
Insert a footnote
Alt+Ctrl+F
Insert an endnote
Alt+Ctrl+D
Work with webpages
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Insert a hyperlink
Ctrl+K
Go back one page
Alt+Left Arrow
Go forward one page
Alt+Right Arrow
Refresh
F9
Edit and move text and graphics
Delete text and graphics
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Delete one character to the left
Backspace
Delete one word to the left
Ctrl+Backspace
Delete one character to the right
Delete
Delete one word to the right
Ctrl+Delete
Cut selected content to the Microsoft Office Clipboard
Ctrl+X
Undo the last action
Ctrl+Z
Cut selected content to the Spike
Ctrl+F3
514 Keyboard shortcuts
Copy and move text and graphics
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Open the Clipboard
Press Alt+H to move to the Home
tab, and then press F,O
Copy selected text or graphics to the Clipboard
Ctrl+C
Cut selected text or graphics to the Clipboard
Ctrl+X
Paste the most recent addition or pasted item from the
Clipboard
Ctrl+V
Move text or graphics once
F2 (then move the cursor and press
Enter)
Copy text or graphics once
Shift+F2 (then move the cursor and
press Enter)
When text or an object is selected, open the Create New
Building Block dialog box
Alt+F3
When a building block—for example, a SmartArt graphic—is
selected, display the shortcut menu that is associated with it
Shift+F10
Copy the header or footer used in the previous section of the
document
Alt+Shift+R
Insert special characters
Action
Keyboard shortcut
A field
Ctrl+F9
A line break
Shift+Enter
A page break
Ctrl+Enter
A column break
Ctrl+Shift+Enter
An em dash
Alt+Ctrl+Minus sign
An en dash
Ctrl+Minus sign
An optional hyphen
Ctrl+Hyphen
A nonbreaking hyphen
Ctrl+Shift+Hyphen
A nonbreaking space
Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar
The copyright symbol
Alt+Ctrl+C
The registered trademark symbol
Alt+Ctrl+R
The trademark symbol
Alt+Ctrl+T
An ellipsis
Alt+Ctrl+Period
An AutoText entry
Enter (after the ScreenTip appears)
Keyboard shortcuts 515
Insert characters by using character codes
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Insert the Unicode character for the specified Unicode
(hexadecimal) character code. For example, to insert the euro
currency symbol (€), enter 20AC, and then hold down Alt and
press X
The character code, Alt+X
Find out the Unicode character code for the selected
character
Alt+X
Insert the ANSI character for the specified ANSI (decimal)
character code For example, to insert the euro currency
symbol, hold down Alt and press 0128 on the numeric
keypad
Alt+ the character code (on the
numeric keypad)
Select text and graphics
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Select text and graphics
Hold down Shift and use the arrow
keys to move the cursor
Extend a selection
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Turn extend mode on
F8
Select the nearest character
F8+Left Arrow or Right Arrow
Increase the size of a selection
F8 (press once to select a word,
twice to select a sentence, and
so on)
Reduce the size of a selection
Shift+F8
Turn extend mode off
Esc
Extend a selection one character to the right
Shift+Right Arrow
Extend a selection one character to the left
Shift+Left Arrow
Extend a selection to the end of a word
Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow
Extend a selection to the beginning of a word
Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow
Extend a selection to the end of a line
Shift+End
Extend a selection to the beginning of a line
Shift+Home
Extend a selection one line down
Shift+Down Arrow
Extend a selection one line up
Shift+Up Arrow
Extend a selection to the end of a paragraph
Ctrl+Shift+Down Arrow
516 Keyboard shortcuts
Extend a selection to the beginning of a paragraph
Ctrl+Shift+Up Arrow
Extend a selection one screen down
Shift+Page Down
Extend a selection one screen up
Shift+Page Up
Extend a selection to the beginning of a document
Ctrl+Shift+Home
Extend a selection to the end of a document
Ctrl+Shift+End
Extend a selection to the end of a window
Alt+Ctrl+Shift+Page Down
Extend a selection to include the entire document
Ctrl+A
Select a vertical block of text
Ctrl+Shift+F8, and then use the
arrow keys; press Esc to cancel
Extend a selection to a specific location in a document
F8+arrow keys; press Esc to cancel
Select text and graphics in a table
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Select the next cell’s contents
Tab
Select the preceding cell’s contents
Shift+Tab
Extend a selection to adjacent cells
Hold down Shift and press an arrow key repeatedly
Select a column
Use the arrow keys to move to the column’s top or
bottom cell, and then do one of the following:
▪▪ Press Shift+Alt+Page Down to select the column from
top to bottom
▪▪ Press Shift+Alt+Page Up to select the column from
bottom to top
Extend a selection (or block)
Ctrl+Shift+F8, and then use the arrow keys; press Esc to
cancel selection mode
Select an entire table
Alt+5 on the numeric keypad (with Num Lock off)
Move through documents
Action
Keyboard shortcut
One character to the left
Left Arrow
One character to the right
Right Arrow
One word to the left
Ctrl+Left Arrow
One word to the right
Ctrl+Right Arrow
One paragraph up
Ctrl+Up Arrow
One paragraph down
Ctrl+Down Arrow
One cell to the left (in a table)
Shift+Tab
One cell to the right (in a table)
Tab
Keyboard shortcuts 517
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Up one line
Up Arrow
Down one line
Down Arrow
To the end of a line
End
To the beginning of a line
Home
To the top of the window
Alt+Ctrl+Page Up
To the end of the window
Alt+Ctrl+Page Down
Up one screen (scrolling)
Page Up
Down one screen (scrolling)
Page Down
To the top of the next page
Ctrl+Page Down
To the top of the previous page
Ctrl+Page Up
To the end of a document
Ctrl+End
To the beginning of a document
Ctrl+Home
To a previous revision
Shift+F5
Immediately after opening a document, to the location you
were working in when the document was last closed
Shift+F5
Move around in a table
Action
Keyboard shortcut
To the next cell in a row
Tab
To the previous cell in a row
Shift+Tab
To the first cell in a row
Alt+Home
To the last cell in a row
Alt+End
To the first cell in a column
Alt+Page Up
To the last cell in a column
Alt+Page Down
To the previous row
Up Arrow
To the next row
Down Arrow
Insert characters and move content in tables
Action
Keyboard shortcut
New paragraphs in a cell
Enter
Tab characters in a cell
Ctrl+Tab
Move content up one row
Alt+Shift+Up Arrow
Move content down one row
Alt+Shift+Down Arrow
518 Keyboard shortcuts
Apply character and paragraph formatting
Copy formatting
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Copy formatting from text
Ctrl+Shift+C
Apply copied formatting to text
Ctrl+Shift+V
Change or resize the font
TIP The following keyboard shortcuts do not work in Read Mode.
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Open the Font dialog box to change the font
Ctrl+Shift+F
Increase the font size
Ctrl+Shift+>
Decrease the font size
Ctrl+Shift+<
Increase the font size by 1 point
Ctrl+]
Decrease the font size by 1 point
Ctrl+[
Apply character formats
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Open the Font dialog box to change the formatting of
characters
Ctrl+D
Change the case of letters
Shift+F3
Format all letters as capitals
Ctrl+Shift+A
Apply bold formatting
Ctrl+B
Apply an underline
Ctrl+U
Underline words but not spaces
Ctrl+Shift+W
Double-underline text
Ctrl+Shift+D
Apply hidden text formatting
Ctrl+Shift+H
Apply italic formatting
Ctrl+I
Format letters as small capitals
Ctrl+Shift+K
Apply subscript formatting (automatic spacing)
Ctrl+Equal sign
Apply superscript formatting (automatic spacing)
Ctrl+Shift+Plus sign
Remove manual character formatting
Ctrl+Spacebar
Change the selection to the Symbol font
Ctrl+Shift+Q
Keyboard shortcuts 519
View and copy text formats
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Display nonprinting characters
Ctrl+Shift+8
Review text formatting
Shift+F1 (then click the text with
the formatting you want to review)
Copy formats
Ctrl+Shift+C
Paste formats
Ctrl+Shift+V
Set the line spacing
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Single-space lines
Ctrl+1
Double-space lines
Ctrl+2
Set 1.5-line spacing
Ctrl+5
Add or remove one line space preceding a paragraph
Ctrl+0 (zero)
Align paragraphs
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned
Ctrl+E
Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned
Ctrl+J
Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned
Ctrl+R
Left align a paragraph
Ctrl+L
Indent a paragraph from the left
Ctrl+M
Remove a paragraph indent from the left
Ctrl+Shift+M
Create a hanging indent
Ctrl+T
Reduce a hanging indent
Ctrl+Shift+T
Remove paragraph formatting
Ctrl+Q
Apply paragraph styles
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Open the Apply Styles pane
Ctrl+Shift+S
Open the Styles pane
Alt+Ctrl+Shift+S
Start AutoFormat
Alt+Ctrl+K
Apply the Normal style
Ctrl+Shift+N
520 Keyboard shortcuts
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Apply the Heading 1 style
Alt+Ctrl+1
Apply the Heading 2 style
Alt+Ctrl+2
Apply the Heading 3 style
Alt+Ctrl+3
Close the active Styles pane
Ctrl+Spacebar, C
Work with mail merge and fields
Perform mail merges
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Preview a mail merge
Alt+Shift+K
Merge a document
Alt+Shift+N
Print the merged document
Alt+Shift+M
Edit a mail-merge data document
Alt+Shift+E
Insert a merge field
Alt+Shift+F
Work with fields
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Insert a Date field
Alt+Shift+D
Insert a LIstNum field
Alt+Ctrl+L
Insert a Page field
Alt+Shift+P
Insert a Time field
Alt+Shift+T
Insert an empty field
Ctrl+F9
Update linked information in a Word source document
Ctrl+Shift+F7
Update selected fields
F9
Unlink a field
Ctrl+Shift+F9
Switch between a selected field code and its result
Shift+F9
Switch between all field codes and their results
Alt+F9
Run GoToButton or MacroButton from the field that displays
the field results
Alt+Shift+F9
Go to the next field
F11
Go to the previous field
Shift+F11
Lock a field
Ctrl+F11
Unlock a field
Ctrl+Shift+F11
Keyboard shortcuts 521
Use the Language bar
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Switch between languages or keyboard layouts
Left Alt+Shift
Display a list of correction alternatives
Windows logo key+C
Turn handwriting on or off
Windows logo key +H
Turn Japanese Input Method Editor (IME) on 101 keyboard
on or off
Alt+~
Turn Korean IME on 101 keyboard on or off
Right Alt
Turn Chinese IME on 101 keyboard on or off
Ctrl+Spacebar
TIP The Windows logo key is available on the bottom row of keys on most keyboards.
Perform function key tasks
Function keys
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Get Help or visit Office.com
F1
Move text or graphics
F2
Repeat the last action
F4
Choose the Go To command (Home tab)
F5
Go to the next pane or frame
F6
Choose the Spelling command (Review tab)
F7
Extend a selection
F8
Update the selected fields
F9
Show KeyTips
F10
Go to the next field
F11
Choose the Save As command
F12
Shift+function key
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Start context-sensitive Help or reveal formatting
Shift+F1
Copy text
Shift+F2
522 Keyboard shortcuts
Change the case of letters
Shift+F3
Repeat a Find or Go To action
Shift+F4
Move to the last change
Shift+F5
Go to the previous pane or frame (after pressing F6)
Shift+F6
Choose the Thesaurus command (Review tab, Proofing
group)
Shift+F7
Reduce the size of a selection
Shift+F8
Switch between a field code and its result
Shift+F9
Display a shortcut menu
Shift+F10
Go to the previous field
Shift+F11
Choose the Save command
Shift+F12
Ctrl+function key
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Expand or collapse the ribbon
Ctrl+F1
Choose the Print Preview command
Ctrl+F2
Close the window
Ctrl+F4
Go to the next window
Ctrl+F6
Insert an empty field
Ctrl+F9
Maximize the document window
Ctrl+F10
Lock a field
Ctrl+F11
Choose the Open command
Ctrl+F12
Ctrl+Shift+function key
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Insert the contents of the Spike
Ctrl+Shift+F3
Edit a bookmark
Ctrl+Shift+F5
Go to the previous window
Ctrl+Shift+F6
Update linked information in a Word source document
Ctrl+Shift+F7
Extend a selection or block
Ctrl+Shift+F8, and then press an
arrow key
Unlink a field
Ctrl+Shift+F9
Unlock a field
Ctrl+Shift+F11
Choose the Print command
Ctrl+Shift+F12
Keyboard shortcuts 523
Alt+function key
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Go to the next field
Alt+F1
Create a new building block
Alt+F3
Exit Word
Alt+F4
Restore the program window size
Alt+F5
Move from an open dialog box back to the document, for
dialog boxes that support this behavior
Alt+F6
Find the next misspelling or grammatical error
Alt+F7
Run a macro
Alt+F8
Switch between all field codes and their results
Alt+F9
Display the Selection And Visibility pane
Alt+F10
Display Microsoft Visual Basic code
Alt+F11
Alt+Shift+function key
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Go to the previous field
Alt+Shift+F1
Choose the Save command
Alt+Shift+F2
Display the Research pane
Alt+Shift+F7
Run GoToButton or MacroButton from the field that displays
the field results
Alt+Shift+F9
Display a menu or message for an available action
Alt+Shift+F10
Select the Table Of Contents button when the Table Of
Contents is active
Alt+Shift+F12
Ctrl+Alt+function key
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Display Microsoft System Information
Ctrl+Alt+F1
Choose the Open command
Ctrl+Alt+F2
524 Keyboard shortcuts
Office 2013 keyboard shortcuts
This section provides a comprehensive list of keyboard shortcuts available in all Office 2013
programs, including Word.
Display and use windows
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Switch to the next window
Alt+Tab
Switch to the previous window
Alt+Shift+Tab
Close the active window
Ctrl+W or Ctrl+F4
Restore the size of the active window after you maximize it
Alt+F5
Move to a pane from another pane in the program window
(clockwise direction)
F6 or Shift+F6
If pressing F6 does not display the pane that you want, press
Alt to put the focus on the ribbon, and then press Ctrl+Tab
to move to the pane
Switch to the next open window
Ctrl+F6
Switch to the previous window
Ctrl+Shift+F6
Maximize or restore a selected window
Ctrl+F10
Copy a picture of the screen to the Clipboard
Print Screen
Copy a picture of the selected window to the Clipboard
Alt+Print Screen
Use dialog boxes
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Move to the next option or option group
Tab
Move to the previous option or option group
Shift+Tab
Switch to the next tab in a dialog box
Ctrl+Tab
Switch to the previous tab in a dialog box
Ctrl+Shift+Tab
Move between options in an open drop-down list,
or between options in a group of options
Arrow keys
Perform the action assigned to the selected button;
select or clear the selected check box
Spacebar
Select an option; select or clear a check box
Alt+ the underlined letter
Keyboard shortcuts 525
Open a selected drop-down list
Alt+Down Arrow
Select an option from a drop-down list
First letter of the list option
Close a selected drop-down list; cancel a command and
close a dialog box
Esc
Run the selected command
Enter
Use edit boxes within dialog boxes
An edit box is a blank box in which you enter or paste an entry.
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Move to the beginning of the entry
Home
Move to the end of the entry
End
Move one character to the left or right
Left Arrow or Right Arrow
Move one word to the left
Ctrl+Left Arrow
Move one word to the right
Ctrl+Right Arrow
Select or unselect one character to the left
Shift+Left Arrow
Select or unselect one character to the right
Shift+Right Arrow
Select or unselect one word to the left
Ctrl+Shift+Left Arrow
Select or unselect one word to the right
Ctrl+Shift+Right Arrow
Select from the insertion point to the beginning of the entry
Shift+Home
Select from the insertion point to the end of the entry
Shift+End
Use the Open and Save As dialog boxes
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Open the Open dialog box
Ctrl+F12 or Ctrl+O
Open the Save As dialog box
F12
Open the selected folder or file
Enter
Open the folder one level above the selected folder
Backspace
Delete the selected folder or file
Delete
Display a shortcut menu for a selected item such as a folder
or file
Shift+F10
Move forward through options
Tab
Move back through options
Shift+Tab
Open the Look In list
F4 or Alt+I
Refresh the file list
F5
526 Keyboard shortcuts
Use the Backstage view
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Display the Open page of the Backstage view
Ctrl+O
Display the Save As page of the Backstage view (when
saving a file for the first time)
Ctrl+S
Continue saving an Office file (after giving the file a name
and location)
Ctrl+S
Display the Save As page of the Backstage view (after
initially saving a file)
Alt+F+S
Close the Backstage view
Esc
TIP You can use dialog boxes instead of Backstage view pages by selecting the Don’t Show
The Backstage When Opening Or Saving Files check box on the Save page of the Word
Options dialog box. Set this option in any Office program to enable it in all Office programs.
Navigate the ribbon
1 Press Alt to display the KeyTips over each feature in the current view.
2 Press the letter shown in the KeyTip over the feature that you want to use.
TIP To cancel the action and hide the KeyTips, press Alt.
Change the keyboard focus without using the mouse
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Select the active tab of the ribbon and activate the
access keys
Alt or F10. Press either of these keys
again to move back to the document
and cancel the access keys
Move to another tab of the ribbon
F10 to select the active tab, and then
Left Arrow or Right Arrow
Expand or collapse the ribbon
Ctrl+F1
Display the shortcut menu for the selected item
Shift+F10
Move the focus to select each of the following areas
of the window:
F6
▪▪ Active tab of the ribbon
▪▪ Any open panes
▪▪ Status bar at the bottom of the window
▪▪ Your document
Keyboard shortcuts 527
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Move the focus to each command on the ribbon, forward
Tab or Shift+Tab
or backward, respectively
Move among the items on the ribbon
arrow keys
Activate the selected command or control on the ribbon
Spacebar or Enter
Display the selected menu or gallery on the ribbon
Spacebar or Enter
Activate a command or control on the ribbon so that you
can modify a value
Enter
Finish modifying a value in a control on the ribbon, and
move focus back to the document
Enter
Get help on the selected command or control on the ribbon
F1
Undo and redo actions
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Cancel an action
Esc
Undo an action
Ctrl+Z
Redo or repeat an action
Ctrl+Y
Change or resize the font
TIP The cursor must be inside a text box when you use these shortcuts.
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Change the font
Ctrl+Shift+F
Change the font size
Ctrl+Shift+P
Increase the font size of the selected text
Ctrl+Shift+>
Decrease the font size of the selected text
Ctrl+Shift+<
Change the font
Ctrl+Shift+F
Move around in text or cells
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Move one character to the left
Left Arrow
Move one character to the right
Right Arrow
528 Keyboard shortcuts
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Move one line up
Up Arrow
Move one line down
Down Arrow
Move one word to the left
Ctrl+Left Arrow
Move one word to the right
Ctrl+Right Arrow
Move to the end of a line
End
Move to the beginning of a line
Home
Move up one paragraph
Ctrl+Up Arrow
Move down one paragraph
Ctrl+Down Arrow
Move to the end of a text box
Ctrl+End
Move to the beginning of a text box
Ctrl+Home
Repeat the last Find action
Shift+F4
Move around in and work in tables
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Move to the next cell
Tab
Move to the preceding cell
Shift+Tab
Move to the next row
Down Arrow
Move to the preceding row
Up Arrow
Insert a tab in a cell
Ctrl+Tab
Start a new paragraph
Enter
Add a new row at the bottom of the table
Tab at the end of the last row
Access and use panes and galleries
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Move to a pane from another pane in the program window
F6
When a menu is active, move to a pane
Ctrl+Tab
When a pane is active, select the next or previous option in
the pane
Tab or Shift+Tab
Display the full set of commands on the pane menu
Ctrl+Spacebar
Perform the action assigned to the selected button
Spacebar or Enter
Open a drop-down menu for the selected gallery item
Shift+F10
Select the first or last item in a gallery
Home or End
Keyboard shortcuts 529
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Scroll up or down in the selected gallery list
Page Up or Page Down
Close a pane
Ctrl+Spacebar, C
Open the Clipboard
Alt+H, F, O
Access and use available actions
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Display the shortcut menu for the selected item
Shift+F10
Display the menu or message for an available action or for
the AutoCorrect Options button or the Paste options button
Alt+Shift+F10
Move between options in a menu of available actions
Arrow keys
Perform the action for the selected item on a menu of
available actions
Enter
Close the available actions menu or message
Esc
Find and replace content
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Open the Find dialog box
Ctrl+F
Open the Replace dialog box
Ctrl+H
Repeat the last Find action
Shift+F4
Use the Help window
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Open the Help window
F1
Close the Help window
Alt+F4
Switch between the Help window and the active program
Alt+Tab
Return to the Help table of contents
Alt+Home
Select the next item in the Help window
Tab
Select the previous item in the Help window
Shift+Tab
Perform the action for the selected item
Enter
Select the next hidden text or hyperlink, including Show All
or Hide All at the top of a Help topic
Tab
530 Keyboard shortcuts
Action
Keyboard shortcut
Select the previous hidden text or hyperlink
Shift+Tab
Perform the action for the selected Show All, Hide All,
hidden text, or hyperlink
Enter
Move back to the previous Help topic (Back button)
Alt+Left Arrow or Backspace
Move forward to the next Help topic (Forward button)
Alt+Right Arrow
Scroll small amounts up or down, respectively, within the
currently displayed Help topic
Up Arrow, Down Arrow
Scroll larger amounts up or down, respectively, within the
currently displayed Help topic
Page Up, Page Down
Display a menu of commands for the Help window. This
requires that the Help window have the active focus (click
in the Help window)
Shift+F10
Stop the last action (Stop button)
Esc
Print the current Help topic
Ctrl+P
If the cursor is not in the current Help topic, press F6 and
then press Ctrl+P
In a Table of Contents in tree view, select the next or
previous item, respectively
Up Arrow, Down Arrow
In a Table of Contents in tree view, expand or collapse the
selected item, respectively
Left Arrow, Right Arrow
Creating custom keyboard shortcuts
If a command you use frequently doesn’t have a built-in keyboard shortcut, or if you don’t
like the keyboard shortcut that is assigned to the command, you can create one either in a
specific document or in a template. You can also modify the built-in keyboard shortcuts.
To manage keyboard shortcuts:
1 Display the Customize Ribbon page of the Word Options dialog box.
2 Below the Choose commands from pane, to the right of Keyboard shortcuts, click
the Customize button.
3 In the Customize Keyboard dialog box, select the category containing the command
for which you want to create a keyboard shortcut, and then select the command.
The Current Keys box displays any keyboard shortcut already assigned to the
command.
Keyboard shortcuts 531
4 Click to position the cursor in the Press new shortcut key box, and then press the
key combination you want to use as a keyboard shortcut for the selected command.
In the area below the Current Keys box, Word tells you whether the keyboard shortcut is currently assigned to a command or unassigned.
5 To delete an existing keyboard shortcut to make it available for reassignment, select
it in the Current keys box, and then click the Remove button.
6 To assign an available keyboard shortcut to the selected command, do one of the
following:
▪▪ To save the keyboard shortcut in all documents based on the current template,
verify that the template name is selected in the Save changes in list, and then
click Assign.
▪▪ To save the keyboard shortcut only in the current document, click the document
name in the Save changes in list, and then click Assign.
7 To delete all custom keyboard shortcuts, click Reset All.
The ribbon tabs are listed in the Categories pane on the left, and the commands in the
selected category are listed in the Commands pane on the right.
8 Close the Customize Keyboard dialog box and the Word Options dialog box.
532 Keyboard shortcuts
Index
Numbers
3-D charts, 248
A
Accented Picture diagram, 239
accepting or rejecting changes, 436, 438
in merged documents, 441
accessibility
designing documents for, 329
of tables, 316
Accessibility Checker, 206, 331
accessible content, defined, 503
Account page of the Backstage view, 29, 30
adding
bibliographies, 394
building blocks, 473
commands to Quick Access Toolbar, 12, 487-492
comments, to documents, 430
cover pages, 276, 279
document headers and footers, 283
drop caps, 190
indexes, 388
page numbers, 276
picture diagrams, 239
process diagrams, 226
quote boxes, 285
symbols, 191
tables of authorities, 385
tables of contents, 379
tables of figures, 386
text boxes, 276, 286, 287
watermarks, 272
WordArt, 185, 186
add-ins, 492
defined, 503
downloading and installing, 492
managing, 493
unloading, 493
address lists, creating, 420
addresses, saving in Word, 418
Align menu, 310
aligning
diagrams, 230, 237
objects, in documents, 310
paragraphs, 120, 125
pictures, 175
table cells in Word, 156
text, in columns, 141
text, by using tab stops, 121, 126
alt text for tables, entering, 160
Apply Styles dialog box, 462
arranging windows, 45
artistic effects, applying to pictures, 176
aspect ratio, defined, 503
attaching templates, 457, 459, 466
attributes, defined, 503
author of document, viewing, 207
authorities, tables of. See tables of authorities
AutoCorrect, 86. See also spelling and grammar,
checking
defined, 503
mathematical symbols, inserting by using, 294
options, changing, 87, 480
AutoFormat As You Type, 136
autoformatting options, selecting, 136
automatic save settings, adjusting, 55
AutoRecover, controlling settings for, 55, 482
autosaving documents, 55, 442
AutoShapes, defined, 503
AutoText user name/initials, changing, 278
axes, chart, 251
axes, charts 533
B
backgrounds, 265. See also watermarks
changing, 266
colors, applying, 266
pictures as, applying, 269
Backstage view, 7, 25, 332
Account page, 30
displaying, 11
Info page, 26, 207
New page, 27
Open page, 28
Print page, 194
Save As page, 29
balloons, defined, 503
bar charts, 250, 503
bar tabs, setting, 121
Basic Bending Process diagram, 233
bibliographies
creating, 394
inserting, 394, 400
inserting citations, 397
selecting style guide for, 395, 401
sources, adding, 396
updating, 395, 401
Bing Image Search, 177
blank documents, creating, 55
blog posts, publishing, 342
blogs, defined, 503
blue wavy underlines, 86. See also spelling and
grammar, checking
bolding text, 111
book exercises, adapting for other display settings,
18
Bookmark dialog box, 361
bookmarks, 347
defined, 503
displaying, 362
inserting, 360, 361
jumping to, 363
moving to, 360
naming, 362
borders
page, 270
paragraph, 124, 127
table, 165, 318
534 backgrounds
Borders And Shading dialog box, 124, 270
breaking links to embedded content, 354
breaks
column, 146
line, 119, 125
section, 141
brightness, adjusting for pictures, 174
bringing objects forward, 304, 313
browsers
configuring webpages for, 334
opening webpages in, 340
building blocks, 66, 265
defined, 503
categories for, creating, 474
creating, 472
deleting, 278, 477
displaying, 477
inserting, 475
naming, 474
placeholders, deleting, 282
placeholder text, replacing, 285
previewing, 278, 285
properties, changing, 278
saving, 473, 475
sorting list of, 278
types of, 276
viewing information on, 277
working with, 473
Building Blocks Organizer dialog box, 277
building equations, 288
bullet symbol, changing, 132
bulleted lists
adding items to, 131
creating, 130, 132
customizing, 131
indenting, 134
nesting, 131
removing formatting, 131
sorting, 135
Bullets menu, 132
buttons
adding to Quick Access Toolbar, 488–490
adding to ribbon tabs, 498
arrows on, 13
inactive, 20
ScreenTips for, 12
C
Caption dialog box, 386
captioning picture diagrams, 241
captions
defined, 503
adding for tables of figures, 387
case, text, 117
category axis, defined, 510
cell addresses, 155, 503
cells, defined, 503
cells, table
addresses, 155
deleting, 154
inserting, 153
merging, 154, 156
shading, 166
splitting, 155
cells, worksheet, 246
center tabs, setting, 149
centering paragraphs, 120, 125, 129
Change Icon dialog box, 358
changes, tracking, 434
accepting/rejecting changes, 436, 438
activating, 434, 436
when coauthoring, 450
when comparing documents, 438
displaying certain types of revisions, 435, 437
displaying revisions, 436
hiding revisions, 435, 437
in merged documents, 441
navigating revisions, 435
reviewer name, changing, 435
revision marks in, 434
viewing ScreenTips for, 437
character formatting. See also fonts, modifying
defined, 503
applying, 108
automatically as you type, 136
with bold, 111
with colors, 114, 116
for columnar text, 141
copying, 111
with drop caps, 190
finding and replacing, 130
highlighting text, 116
shadow effects, 114
small caps, applying, 102
styles for, 463
with styles, 94
text case and, 117, 118
with underlining, 110
character spacing, 108
defined, 503
setting, 114
character styles, defined, 503. See also styles
chart area, 251
defined, 503
chart elements, 251
displaying, 256
formatting, 255
hiding, 256
modifying, 252
removing, 256
selecting, 252, 254
charts. See also chart elements
3-D, inserting, 248
activating, 252
color, applying, 253, 255
copying external data to, 259
creating, 246, 247
data sources, selecting, 261
entering data in, 247, 248
formatting, 255, 256
inserting, 246, 247
modifying, 252
pasting data into, 260
placeholder text, replacing, 258
removing elements from, 256
saving, as templates, 258
selecting, 250
styles, applying, 253
switching rows and columns in, 250
three-dimensional, 248
titles, 250, 251
types, 250
types, changing, 252
checking spelling. See spelling and grammar,
checking
checking spelling 535
chevrons, 411
defined, 503
Choose A SmartArt Graphic dialog box, 225
citations. See also bibliographies; tables of authorities
inserting, 397
marking, 385
citing sources, 394, 395
clearing worksheet data, 248
Click And Type
defined, 503
positioning cursor by using, 120
clip art
downloading, 177
inserting, in documents, 170
Clipboard, 61
defined, 504
viewing, 67
closing
documents, 10, 33, 43, 57
panes, 22
Word, 33
coauthoring documents, 6, 7, 450
collaborating on documents
adding/reviewing comments, 430
coauthoring documents, 450
comparing and merging documents, 438
controlling changes, 446
managing document versions, 442
password-protecting documents, 442
rights management, 451
tracking changes, 434
collapsing headings, 99
collapsing the ribbon, 12
color options, setting for pictures, 173
colors
chart, changing, 253, 255
diagram, changing, 235
page, changing, 24, 43
for page backgrounds, 266
table, changing, 166
text. See text colors
for watermarks, 273
column breaks
defined, 504
inserting, 141, 146
536 chevrons
column charts, 250
defined, 504
columns. See also columns, table; columns,
worksheet
defined, 504
assistive device limitations, 140
displaying documents in, 42
formatting text in, 141
hyphenating text in, 145
separating by using vertical lines, 144
setting up, 140, 142
spacing, adjusting, 144
width, setting, 144
columns, table
deleting, 154
first, formatting, 165
inserting, 153
resizing, 154
selecting, 153
width, setting, 159
columns, worksheet
resizing, 249
selecting, 247, 249
Columns dialog box, 144
Columns gallery, 140
Combine Documents dialog box, 439
combining documents. See comparing and merging
documents
commands
adding to Quick Access Toolbar, 488–490
adding to ribbon tabs, 498
comments
defined, 504
adding to documents, 430
deleting, 431, 433
displaying, 430, 431
displaying by reviewer name, 431
editing, 430, 433
hiding, 431, 434
inserting, 432
navigating, 431
replying to, 431, 433
working with, 430
comparing and merging documents, 438
Compatibility Checker, 206
Compatibility mode, 58, 457
confidential information, removing, 206
contextual tabs. See tool tabs
contrast, adjusting for pictures, 174
converting documents to .docx format, 58
Convert Text To Table dialog box, 159
copying
diagrams, 237
pictures, 174
text, 61, 64
text, vs. cutting, 62
text formatting, 111
worksheet data, to Word charts, 260
correcting pictures, 174
cover pages, 276
adding, 279
modifying, 282
properties, viewing, 281
Create New Building Block dialog box, 292, 474
Create New Style From Formatting dialog
box, 471, 464
creating
3-D charts, 248
blank documents, 55
charts, 246, 247
documents, 19, 52
folders, when saving documents, 53, 56
cropping pictures, 172
Cross-Reference dialog box, 364
cross-references, 348
defined, 504
creating, 360
inserting, 364
updating, 365
cursor, 52
defined, 504
moving and placing, 32, 34
positioning, by using Click And Type, 120
custom building blocks, creating, 472
custom styles, creating, 454, 460, 464, 471
custom templates, creating, 458, 467
customizing Word, 30
cutting
text, 61, 65
text, vs. copying, 62
text, in webpages, 337
cycle diagrams, 224
defined, 504
D
data labels, removing, 256
data markers
defined, 504
styles, applying, 253
data points, 246
defined, 504
selecting, 255
data series, 246
defined, 504
formatting, 255
data sources, defined, 504
data sources, chart, 261
data sources, mail merge, 403
creating, 405
creating mailing labels from, 425
email addresses as, 421
filtering and sorting, 405, 409
populating, 408
preparing, 404
selecting, 406
selecting Outlook contacts list as, 411
date and time
in cover pages, adding, 280
inserting, as field, 366, 368
Date And Time dialog box, 368
deactivating global templates, 460
decimal tabs, setting, 121, 127
definitions, looking up, 75
deleting
building block placeholders, 282
building blocks, 278, 477
Clipboard items, 67
comments, 431, 433
diagram shapes, 231
document themes, 107
hyperlinks, 349
index entries, 389, 393
page breaks, 201
password protection, from documents, 446
section breaks, 201
deleting 537
deleting (continued)
styles, 465
tab stops, 121
tables of contents, 381
text, 59, 60, 63
webpage objects, 337
Word table elements, 154
worksheet data, 248
demoting, defined, 504
demoting headings, 300
Design tab, 23
desktop publishing, defined, 504
destination files, defined, 504
diagrams. See also SmartArt diagrams
defined, 504
activating, 232
aligning, 230, 237
colors, applying, 235
copying and pasting, 237
creating, 224
descriptions, viewing, 226
entering text in, 227
layouts, selecting, 232
modifying, 231
picture, 239
positioning, 229, 237
previewing, 231, 233
punctuation in, avoiding, 227
resetting, 231
resizing, 228, 233
shape effects, applying, 236
shapes, adding, 228
shapes, deleting, 231
shapes, resizing, 240
shapes, selecting, 236
styles, applying, 234
wrapping text around, 229
dialog box launcher, defined, 504
dictionaries
adding words to, 91
installing, 81
looking up definitions in, 75
managing, 76
Dictionary pane, 76
digital signatures, defined, 504
538 demoting
display settings, changing, 16
distributing documents electronically, 206
docking panes, 21
document color, changing, 24, 43
document fields
automatic updating, 367
codes, displaying, 366
date and time, inserting, 366, 368
editing, 370
inserting, 365
inserting document properties as, 367
tables of contents as, 383
working with, 366
document headings
collapsing, 99
displaying, 364
displaying by level, 301
moving between, 36
selecting multiple, 99
Document Inspector, 206, 208
defined, 504
document outlines
collapsing headings in, 299
demoting headings, 300
displaying, 43, 299
displaying headings by level in, 301
headings, working with, 299
moving sections in, 302
promoting headings, 301
reorganizing, 298
document properties
inserting as fields, 367
tagging, 208
viewing, 207
document themes, 23
changing, 102
color palettes, assigning, 105
deleting, 107
finding location of, 104
fonts, modifying, 106
saving, 103, 106
setting default, 104
sharing, 104
document views, 14, 37
switching, 13
documents. See also Word; formatting documents
accessibility, designing for, 329
arranging windows, 45
autosaving, 442
backgrounds, changing, 266
borders, applying, 270
closing, 10, 33, 43, 57
coauthoring, 450
collaborating on. See collaborating on documents
columns in, 42
comparing and merging, 438
controlling changes to, 446
converting to .docx format, 58
creating, 52
displaying at page width, 42
displaying single page, 266
electronically distributing, 206
embedding linked objects in, 353
enabling editing, in Protected view, 33
encrypting, 445
fields in, 348
file formats for, 322
footnotes and endnotes, inserting, 374
full screen, expanding to, 10
gridlines, displaying/hiding, 152
headers and footers, inserting, 205, 283, 368
hyperlinks, inserting, 348
indexes, creating, 388
inserting into other documents, 59
mail merging, 403
margins, setting, 195, 197, 204
marking as final, 209
navigating, 32, 34, 40, 89, 101, 360
opening, 19, 27, 31
opening, as read-only, 31
opening earlier versions of, 322
opening, from the Backstage view, 39
opening, from previous Word versions, 58
opening, in Protected view, 31
paper size, selecting, 195
password-protecting, 442
pictures, inserting, 170, 171
previewing, 194, 196
previewing as webpages, 335
printing, 196
properties, viewing, 281
protecting, 209
quote boxes, adding, 285
read-only, opening, 444
read-only, recommending, 444
restricting formatting and editing, 446
rights management, 451
saving, 28, 53, 54
saving as other file types, 57, 323
saving, as PDF files, 324, 325
saving, as plain text, 323
saving, as webpages, 333, 340
saving, as XPS files, 324, 325
saving, automatic settings for, 55
saving a version of, 55
saving copies of, 57
saving in new locations, 53, 56
saving to SkyDrive, 54
screen clippings, inserting, 178
selecting, 60
shapes, inserting, 182
sharing, 6
statistics, viewing, 84
symbols, inserting, 191
tables of authorities, inserting, 385
tables of contents, creating, 378
tables of figures, 386
templates, working with, 19, 457. See also
templates
text boxes, adding, 286, 287
themes. See document themes
tracking changes, 434
translating, 79
versions, working with, 442
video clips, inserting, 177
views. See document views
webpages, creating from, 333
white space, hiding, 40
WordArt, inserting, 185
working with multiple, 38, 45
zooming in and out of, 13, 17, 40
.docx files, 58, 322
Don’t Merge List button, 64
Don’t Merge List button 539
double-sided printing, 212
downloading
add-ins, 492
practice files for book, x
Draft view, 37
defined, 504
switching to, 43
drag-and-drop editing, defined, 504
dragging, defined, 504
dragging and dropping text, 61
drawing canvases
defined, 504
drawing shapes on, 182
drawing objects, 505. See also graphics
drawing shapes, 180
on drawing canvases, 182
with equal height and width, 182
drawing Word tables, 150
drawing text boxes, 286
drop caps
defined, 505
adding, 190
drop shadows, 114
E
ebook edition of book, xii
Edit Data Source dialog box, 408
Edit Name dialog box, 396
editing
comments, 430, 433
document fields, 370
hyperlinks, 349, 351
indexes, 389
mail merge documents, 417
PDF files in Word, 324
pictures in documents, 170
templates, 472
text. See editing text
tools, 51
editing text, 58. See also tracking changes
copying, 64
cutting, 65
cutting vs. copying, 62
540 double-sided printing
deleting, 59
in footnotes and endnotes, 376
inserting, 59
moving and copying, 61
pasting, 64, 67
repeating edits, 62, 99
restricting, 446
selecting, 59
by using keyboard shortcuts, 62
by using smart cut and paste, 64
undoing, 62, 65
in webpages, 337
effects
font, 108, 109
graphic, applying to diagrams, 236
text, 114
email accounts, setting up as Microsoft accounts, 54
email hyperlinks, 351
opening, 352
email messages
previewing mail merge, 422
sending by using mail merge, 419, 420
embedded objects, 353
defined, 505
creating from documents, 356
icons, changing, 358
linking to, 357
locking links to, 359
selecting, 355
updating links to, 357
Encrypt Document dialog box, 445
encrypting documents, 445
endnotes, defined, 505. See also footnotes and
endnotes
entering text, 56
in diagrams, 227
in tabbed lists, 147
in Word tables, 152, 157
Enter Text dialog box, 340
envelopes, printing, 418
Envelopes And Labels dialog box, 418
Equation button, 289
Equation gallery, 293
Equation Options dialog box, 289
equations
building, 288
formatting, 292
inserting from gallery, 289, 291
inserting manually, 289, 290
errata for book, xiii
Excel. See workbooks; worksheets
exiting Word, 33
Extensible Markup Language (XML), defined, 505
extensions. See file name extensions
F
feedback on book, xiii
Field dialog box, 365, 370
field names, defined, 505
Field Options dialog box, 366
fields, document, 348
defined, 505
automatic updating, 367
codes, displaying, 366
date and time, inserting, 366, 368
editing, 370
inserting, 365
inserting document properties as, 367
tables of contents as, 383
working with, 366
figures, tables of. See tables of figures
File Explorer, 31, 324
file formats
defined, 505
.docx, 58, 322
.pdf, 324, 325, 328
.rtf, 323
setting default for saving, 482
.txt, 323
for webpages, 333
in Word, 58
.xps, 325
file name extensions, 56
files, inserting in documents, 59
fill effects, applying to backgrounds, 266
Fill Effects dialog box, 266, 268
Filter And Sort dialog box, 409
filtering
defined, 505
data source for mail merge, 405, 409
finalizing documents, 209
Find And Replace dialog box, 70, 360, 363
Find Options dialog box, 73
finding and replacing formatting, 130
finding and replacing text, 68
navigating results, 72
replacing options, 71, 74
with specific search options, 69, 73
undoing results, 75
fine-tuning text, 75
first-line indent, setting, 119, 125
folders, creating, 53, 56
font colors, 108
Font dialog box, 113
applying character formatting from, 109
font effects, defined, 505
Font group, applying character formatting from, 109
font size, defined, 505
font style, defined, 505
fonts, defined, 505
fonts, modifying, 108, 112
case settings, 118
with colors, 114
with shadow effects, 114
with small caps, 102, 113, 281
with text effects, 109
in themes, 106
as uppercase, 117
footers, defined, 505. See also headers and footers
Footnote And Endnote dialog box, 374
footnotes, defined, 505
footnotes and endnotes
adding text to, 375
converting between, 377
editing text in, 376
inserting, 374, 375
modifying format of, 374
selecting, 377
form email messages, creating, 420
Format Data Series pane, 255
Format Data Series pane 541
Format Painter, copying formatting by using, 111
formatting
chart elements, 255
documents. See formatting documents
equations, 292
indexes, 389, 391, 392
mail merged documents, 417
mailing labels, 424
marks. See formatting marks
options for, previewing, 14
pictures, 175
shapes, 184
symbols, displaying, 63
tables, 161, 164
tables of contents, 379
text. See paragraph formatting;
formatting documents
webpages, 335, 341
WordArt, 186, 188
G
galleries, defined, 505
General Options dialog box, 443
global templates
attaching, 457, 460
deactivating, 460
Go To page of Find And Replace dialog box, 35
grammar, checking. See spelling and grammar,
checking
Grammar pane, 86
graphs. See charts
graphics
defined, 505
aligning, 310
alternate text, including, 330
arranging on page, 304
fixing position on page, 309
hiding all, 314
moving, 304, 312
positioning on page, 309
selecting, 308
wrapping text around, 306
formatting documents
fonts, changing, 106
limiting, when collaborating, 446
with page backgrounds, 266
with page borders, 270
page color, 24, 43
in sections, 200
with styles, 96
with tables, 315
with themes, 102
grayed out buttons, 20
grayscale, defined, 505
green wavy underlines, 86. See also spelling and
grammar, checking
Grid And Guides dialog box, 311
gridlines. See also rulers and gridlines
defined, 506
chart, removing, 256
formatting marks
controlling display of, 481
displaying and hiding, 38, 42, 129
Formatting Restrictions dialog box, 447
Formula dialog box, 158
formulas
defined, 505
adding to Word tables, 158
constructing in Word tables, 155
Fraction gallery, 291
fractions, inserting, 289, 291
full screen documents, 10
functions, adding to Word tables, 155
fuzzy searching, 70
542 Format Painter, copying formatting by using
grouping, defined, 506
grouping objects, 312
grouping shapes, 181, 183
groups, defined, 506
H
hanging indent, setting, 119, 125, 126
headers and footers, 276. See also building blocks
defined, 506
configuring differently for odd/even pages, 283
editing, 284
inserting in documents, 205, 283, 368
headings, document
collapsing, 299
demoting, 300
displaying, 364
displaying by level, 301
moving, 302
promoting, 301
selecting all, 302
working with, 299
Help for Word, 46
hidden characters, displaying and hiding, 38
hiding
buttons on ribbon, 12
comments, 431, 434
rulers and gridlines, 312
text, 38
tracked changes, 435, 437
white space in documents, 40
hierarchy diagrams, 224, 506
highlighting text, 116
Home tab, 12
HTML (Hypertext Markup Language), defined, 506
HTML tags, 333
hyperlinks, 347
deleting, 349
editing, 349, 351
to email addresses, 351, 352
inserting, 338, 348, 349, 365
jumping to target, 348, 350
ScreenTips, adding, 338, 351
ScreenTips, displaying, 350
ScreenTip text, including, 331
target frames, setting, 350
Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), defined, 506
hyphenating text
defined, 506
in columns, 141, 145
defined, 506
setting, 119
indenting paragraphs, 118, 125
in bulleted and numbered lists, 131, 134
in columns, 145
Index dialog box, 392
index entries
defined, 506
deleting, 389, 393
displaying, 389
formatting, 391
inserting fields for, 388
marking, 390
indexes
defined, 506
columns, setting, 393
creating, 388
cross-references in, 388
editing, 389
formatting, 389, 392
marking all instances of words, 390
selecting terms for, 389
styles for, 392
updating, 389, 393
Info page of the Backstage view, 25, 207, 281, 332
Information Rights Management, 451
initials, user, changing, 278, 479
Insert Address Block dialog box, 412
Insert Greeting Line dialog box, 413
Insert Hyperlink dialog box, 349, 351
Insert Merge Field dialog box, 414
Insert Pictures dialog box, 268
Insert Pictures window, 241
Insert tab, 22
Insert Table dialog box, 150
Insert Table gallery, 149
inserting. See also adding
charts, 246, 247
objects, in documents, 354
text, 59
I
icons
defined, 506
for embedded objects, changing, 358
indent markers
inspecting documents, 208
inspecting documents 543
J
jumping to hyperlink target, 348, 350
justifying text, 120, 125
defined, 506
in columns, 141
licenses for use, obtaining, 451
line breaks
defined, 506, 510
creating, 55
inserting, 119, 125
line charts, 250
defined, 506
creating, 252
K
Keep Text Only button, 64
keyboard, navigating documents by using, 32,
511–531
keyboard shortcuts, 511–531
defined, 506
adding symbols by using, 191
custom, creating, 531
editing text by using, 62
Office, listed, 525
Word, listed, 511
line graphs, defined, 506
line spacing, adjusting for pictures, 171
lines, selecting, 60
linked objects, defined, 506
linking objects in documents, 353
linking text boxes, 286
links. See hyperlinks
list diagrams, 224, 506
lists, bulleted and numbered
adding items to, 131
continuing sequence of, 135
creating, 130, 132, 133
customizing, 131
indenting, 134
nesting, 131
removing formatting, 131
sorting, 135
L
Label Options dialog box, 424
labels, chart, 251
removing, 256
lists, tabbed
labels, mail merging. See mail merge
labels, mailing. See mailing labels
landscape orientation
defined, 506
selecting, 195, 198
languages
default translation, changing, 80
setting options for, 483
translating text from/to, 78, 83
Layout dialog box, 230, 306, 309
Layout Options menu, 228, 305, 335
Layout view, switching to, 42
left indent, setting, 119, 125
legal references. See citations
legends, chart, 251
defined, 506
removing, 256
544 jumping to hyperlink target
converting into tables, 151
creating, 147
entering text for, 147
formatting, 148
Live Preview, 14, 506
locking embedded objects, 359
M
macros
controlling settings for, 485
displaying, 13
magnification. See screen magnification; zooming
mail merge
defined, 507
creating mailing labels, 423
data source, 403, 404
excluding recipients from, 417
field names, capitalizing, 404
formatting, 417
greeting lines, inserting, 413
main document, 403
main document, preparing, 411
merge fields, inserting, 412, 414
merging to new document, 417
navigating preview in, 416
Outlook contacts as source for, 411
previewing documents for, 415
previewing email messages for, 422
sending email messages, 419
Mail Merge pane, 405
Mail Merge Recipients dialog box, 407
Mail Merge wizard, creating labels by using, 424
mailing addresses, saving in Word, 418
mailing labels
creating and printing, 423
formatting, 424
merging to printer, 427
previewing, 426
printing, 427
replicating, 426
setting up, 424
Mailings tab, 25
main document (mail merge), 403
defined, 507
editing, 417
merge fields, inserting, 412
preparing, 411
manual page breaks, defined, 507
margins
defined, 507
defining, 118
mirroring, 198
setting, 195, 197, 204
for webpages, setting, 338
Margins list, 197
Mark Index Entry dialog box, 390
marking citations, 385
marking documents as final, 209
marking index entries, 388, 390
markup. See tracking changes
master documents, 299
Master List for sources, 397
matching case when searching, 69, 74
mathematical symbols. See also equations
inserting, 289
inserting by using AutoCorrect, 294
matrix diagrams, 224, 507
maximizing windows, 10, 15
merge fields
defined, 507
inserting, 412
Merge List button, 64
Merge To E-Mail dialog box, 422
Merge To New Document dialog box, 417
Merge To Printer dialog box, 427
merging cells in Word tables, 154, 156
merging documents, 438
Microsoft accounts, setting up, 54
Microsoft Excel. See workbooks; worksheets
Microsoft Office Clipboard. See Clipboard
Microsoft Office Compatibility Pack, 58
Microsoft Word. See Word
Mini Toolbar
applying character formatting from, 108
displaying, 111
Mini Translator, 78
translating text by using, 83
minimizing windows, 10
mirroring margins, 198
Modify Style dialog box, 463, 469
moving
document sections, in Outline view, 302
graphics, 304
objects, in documents, 312
paragraphs, 66
pictures, 174
text, 61
text boxes, 286
Word tables, 154
moving around in documents. See navigating
documents
moving around in documents 545
N
naming
bookmarks, 362
building blocks, 474
navigating
comments, 430, 431
documents. See navigating documents
tables, in Word, 152
tracked changes, 435
worksheets, 248
navigating documents
by using the cursor, 32, 34
jumping to specific page, 360
by using the keyboard, 32, 40
moving to beginning, 89, 101
by scrolling, 31
Navigation pane, 35, 72
defined, 507
displaying, 53, 491
working with, 303
nested tables, defined, 507
nesting tables in Word, 315
New Address List dialog box, 420
new documents, saving, 56
new features of Word 2013, 6
New page of the Backstage view, 26, 467
Normal template, 94, 454, 461
numbered lists
adding items to, 131
continuing sequence of, 135
creating, 130, 133
customizing, 131
indenting, 134
nesting, 131
removing formatting, 131
O
Object dialog box, 354
objects
defined, 507
aligning, 310
arranging on page, 304
bringing forward, 313
546 naming
fixing position on page, 309
grouping, 312
hiding all, 314
inserting in documents, 354
moving, 304, 312
positioning, 335
selecting, 308
snapping to grid, 312
stacking, 304
wrapping text around, 306
Office 2013 background, choosing, 30
Office 365, 4
Office Clipboard, 61
defined, 504
viewing, 67
Office Home & Student 2013 RT, 5
Office theme, 104
changing, 479
offline help, 46
online pictures
finding and downloading, 177
inserting, in documents, 170
Open dialog box, 328
Open page of the Backstage view, 27, 28
opening. See also opening documents
PDF files, in Word, 324, 328
templates, 19
webpages, in browser, 340
Word, 9, 18, 52
worksheets, in Word, 246
opening documents, 19, 27, 31
as read-only, 31
earlier versions of, 322
from the Backstage view, 39
from previous Word versions, 58
in Protected view, 31
Options dialog box (Word), 325
organization of book, ix
orientation. See page orientation
orphans
defined, 507
avoiding, 200
Outline view, 37, 298
defined, 507
displaying, 299
outlines, around content. See borders
outlines, document
collapsing, 99
displaying, 43, 299
headings, collapsing, 299
headings, demoting, 300
headings, displaying by level , 301
headings, promoting 301
headings, working with, 299
moving sections in, 302
reorganizing, 298
Outlook contacts list, as mail merge source, 411
P
page breaks
controlling options for, 200, 202
deleting, 201
inserting, 200, 203
in tables of contents, inserting, 381
widows and orphans, avoiding, 200
page layout with tables, 315
Page Layout tab, 24
page numbers
adding, 276
formatting, 284
viewing in status bar, 13
page orientation, 194
defined, 507
changing, 195
selecting, 198
Page Setup dialog box, 24, 195, 199
page setup, margins, 118
panes
closing, 22
docking, 21
paper size, selecting, 195
Paragraph dialog box, 123, 202
paragraph formatting, 118
defined, 507
background color, 128
borders, applying, 124, 127
for columnar text, 141
with drop caps, 190
finding and replacing, 130
with styles, 94, 463
paragraph marks. See also formatting marks
displaying, 38, 42, 63
hiding, 38, 42
paragraphs. See also text
defined, 507
aligning, 120
background fill, setting, 128
centering, 120, 125, 129
creating, 55
indenting, 118, 125, 145
justifying, 120, 125, 141
keeping with next, 203
moving, 66
selecting, 59, 60, 64
spacing, 122, 127
starting new, 52
styles, 298, 507
Password dialog box, 444
password-protecting documents, 442
opening as read-only, 444
removing passwords, 446
passwords, selecting, 444
Paste Options menu, 337
pasting
from Clipboard, 67
diagrams, 237
text, 61, 64, 67, 83
worksheet data, into Word charts, 260
paths, defined, 507
patterns, applying to document backgrounds, 268
PDF files
defined, 507
editing, in Word, 324
opening, in Word, 324, 328
saving documents as, 324, 325
working with, 325
permissions, restricting, 451
personal information, removing from documents,
209
picture backgrounds, applying, 269
picture diagrams, 224
defined, 507
adding, 239
picture diagrams 547
picture diagrams (continued)
captioning, 241
creating, 239
formatting text in, 242
resizing, 240
shapes, resizing, 240
picture watermarks, 274
pictures. See also graphics
defined, 507
adjusting line spacing for, 171
aligning, 175
artistic effects, applying, 176
color options, setting, 173
copying, 174
correcting, 174
cropping, 172
editing, in documents, 170
formatting, 175
inserting, in documents, 170, 171
moving, 174
online, finding and downloading, 177
online, inserting in documents, 170
resizing, 170, 172
styles, applying, 174
wrapping text around, 172
pie charts, 250, 507
pinning the ribbon, 12
placeholders
deleting, 282
selecting text in, 288
plain text, saving documents as, 323
playing embedded videos, 177
plot area (chart), 251, 507
pointing, defined, 508
points, in font size, 114, 507
populating data source for mail merge, 408
portrait orientation
defined, 508
selecting, 195
Position gallery, 308
positioning
diagrams, 229, 237
objects on page, 304
shapes, 183
WordArt, 187
548 picture watermarks
posts, blog, defined, 508
PowerPoint presentations. See presentations
(PowerPoint)
practice files, downloading and saving, x
prefixes, searching by, 70
preparing main document for mail merge, 411
presentations (PowerPoint), inserting in
documents, 355
previewing
building blocks, 278, 285
diagrams, 231, 233
documents, 194, 196
documents, as webpages, 335
email mail merge, 422
mail merged documents, 415
mailing labels, 426
styles, 21, 461
templates, 52
Print Layout view, 37, 508
Print page of the Backstage view, 194
Printed Watermark dialog box, 273
printing
documents, 196
envelopes, 418
mailing labels, 427
options for, 212
process diagrams, 224
defined, 508
adding, 226
program icon, 10
program options, changing, 478
program window (Word), 10
maximizing, 15
promoting headings, 301
defined, 508
proofreading, importance of, 91
properties, document, viewing, 281
Protected view
enabling editing in, 33
opening documents in, 31
protecting documents, 209
publishing blog posts, 342
publishing documents as PDF/XPS files, 325
pull quotes, defined, 508
pyramid diagrams, 224, 508
Q
queries, defined, 508
Quick Access Toolbar, 10
defined, 508
adding commands to, 12
creating document-specific, 491
customizing, 487
moving, 488, 491
resetting to default appearance, 492
separators, inserting, 490
Quick Layouts gallery, formatting charts by
using, 256
Quick Parts. See also building blocks
button, 277
inserting, 365, 369
gallery, 476
Quick Styles, defined, 508
Quick Tables
defined, 508
creating, 162
gallery, 162, 163
inserting, 162
quote boxes, adding, 285
R
radicals, inserting, 289
ranges
cell, 246
table, 155
Read Mode view, 6, 37
defined, 508
switching to, 42
read-only documents
defined, 508
creating, 209
opening, 31, 444
recommending when collaborating, 444
recent documents
controlling settings for, 484
opening, 27
records, defined, 508
red wavy underlines, 86. See also spelling and
grammar, checking
reference marks, 374, 508
reference materials
bibliographies, creating, 394
footnotes and endnotes, inserting, 374
indexes, creating, 388
tables of authorities, inserting, 385
tables of contents, creating, 378
tables of figures, inserting, 386
References tab, 24
rejecting or accepting changes
in documents, 436, 438
in merged documents, 441
relationship diagrams, 224, 508
relatively positioning objects, 304
releasing selections, 61
Rename dialog box, 496
repeating edits, 62, 99
replacing text, 71, 74. See also finding and
replacing text
replicating mailing labels, 426
replying to comments, 431, 433
research tools, 51
resetting diagrams, 231
resizing
diagrams, 228, 233
picture diagrams, 240
pictures, 170, 172
shapes, 181, 184
text boxes, 286
watermarks, 275
Word tables, 154
worksheet elements, 249
resolution. See screen resolution, changing
restoring down, 10
Restrict Editing pane, 446
restricting document formatting and editing, 446
reverting edits, 62, 65
Review tab, 25
reviewing comments, 430
revision marks. See tracking changes
revisions, defined, 508
Revisions pane, 433, 439
ribbon, 10
collapsing, 12
commands, adding, 498
ribbon 549
ribbon (continued)
commands, displaying, 20
customizing, 494, 495
differences in Word 2013, 487
dynamic nature of, 14
groups, displaying commands in, 15
groups, displaying hidden, 15
pinning, 12
resetting to default appearance, 499
unpinning, 12, 55
width of, 15
ribbon tabs
Design tab, 23
Home tab, 12
Insert tab, 22
Mailings tab, 25
Page Layout tab, 24
References tab, 24
Review tab, 25
Rich Text Format, saving documents as, 323
right indent, setting, 119, 125
right tabs, setting, 149
rights management, 451
rotating shapes, 183
rows, table
changing heading direction, 165
creating, 157
deleting, 154
header, repeating, 160
header and total, formatting, 164
height, setting, 160
inserting, 153
resizing, 154
selecting, 153, 156
rows, worksheet, selecting, 247
.rtf files, saving documents as, 323
ruler
displaying and hiding, 119
setting tab stops by using, 120
rulers and gridlines
displaying and hiding, 38, 42, 312
document and table gridlines, 152
S
saturation, defined, 508
Save As dialog box, 53
Save As page of the Backstage view, 28, 29
saving. See also saving documents
AutoRecover information, 482
building blocks, 473, 475
charts, as templates, 258
custom themes, 106
practice files for book, x
styles, 464
tables, in Quick Tables gallery, 163
templates, 458, 466, 467
themes, 103
saving documents, 28, 53, 54, 56
as other file types, 57, 323
as PDF files, 324, 325
as plain text, 323
as webpages, 333, 340
as XPS files, 324, 325
automatic settings for, 55
copies of, 57
file formats for, 57, 322
in new locations, 53, 56
setting default options for, 482
to SkyDrive, 54
versions of, 55
scaling. See resizing
screen clippings
defined, 508
capturing, 178
inserting in documents, 178
screen magnification, changing, 16
screen resolution, changing, 16
ScreenTips
defined, 508
customizing display of, 479
displaying, 12, 46, 478
scrolling, 31, 34
viewing page numbers when, 201
search tools, 51
searching
for templates, 52
text. See finding and replacing text
550 ribbon tabs
section breaks
defined, 508
deleting, 201
inserting, 201, 204
inserting around columns, 141
sections, document
expanding, 300
formatting separately, 141
Select Data Source dialog box, 261
Select Table dialog box, 406
selecting
defined, 509
all content, 201
chart elements, 252, 254
charts, 250
diagram shapes, 236
document headings, 302
embedded objects, 355
footnotes and endnotes, 377
non-adjacent text, 60
objects, in documents, 308
placeholder text, 288
with selection area, 60
shapes, 181
table elements, 156
tables, 153, 317
tables of contents, 384
text, 59, 63, 143
text, all, 60
worksheet elements, 247, 249
selection area
defined, 509
selecting text, 60
Selection pane, 314
sending email messages by using mail merge, 419
sending objects backward, 304
sentences, selecting, 59. See also text
separators, inserting on Quick Access Toolbar, 490
series axis, defined, 510
Set Hyperlink ScreenTip dialog box, 338, 351
Set Numbering Value dialog box, 132
Set Target Frame dialog box, 350
shading paragraphs, 128
shadow effects, 114
shapes. See also graphics
adding text to, 181, 183
adding to SmartArt diagrams, 228
coloring, 184
deleting from SmartArt diagrams, 231
drawing, 180
drawing with equal height and width, 182
formatting, 184
grouping, 181, 183
inserting in documents, 182
modifying, 181, 184
positioning, 183
resizing, 181, 184
rotating, 183
selecting, 181
selecting in SmartArt diagrams, 236
styles, applying, 184
wrapping text around, 181
shared locations, editing documents in, 450
sharing
documents, 6
document themes, 104
Show/Hide ¶ button, 42
single file webpages, saving documents as, 333
size, font, 108, 112
sizing. See resizing
sizing handles, defined, 509
SkyDrive
accessing, 54
saving files to, 54
small caps fonts, applying, 102, 113, 281
smart guides, 6
SmartArt diagrams
defined, 509
creating, 224
descriptions, viewing, 226
entering text in, 227
layouts, selecting, 225, 232
picture, 239
punctuation, avoiding, 227
resizing, 228, 233
shapes, adding, 228
shapes, deleting, 231
shapes, selecting, 236
SmartArt diagrams 551
SmartArt diagrams (continued)
applying, 94, 461, 468
applying multiple instances of, 99
applying, to pictures, 170
changing style sets, 95
for charts, 253
creating, 454, 460, 464, 471
deleting, 465
for diagrams, 234
displaying, 468
displaying list of, 100
finding and replacing, 130
for fonts, applying, 108
identifying, 463
for indexes, 392
modifying, 463, 469
previewing, 21
for pictures, 174
restricting, when collaborating, 446, 448
saving, 464
for shapes, 184
for tables, 161, 164
for tables of contents, 379, 382
for underlines, 111
updating, 460, 463, 470
viewing, 298
viewing ScreenTips on, 97
styles, applying, 234
wrapping text around, 229
snapping objects to grid, 312
soft page breaks
defined, 509
inserting, 200
sorting
bulleted lists, 132, 135
data sources for mail merge, 405, 409
Word tables, 155
Source Manager dialog box, 395
sources, citing, 394, 395
spaces, displaying and hiding, 42, 63. See also
formatting marks
spacing
columns, 144
lines, for pictures, 171
paragraphs, 122, 127
spelling and grammar, checking, 86
adding words to dictionary, 91
AutoCorrect options, changing, 87, 480
automatically, 86
grammar errors, double-checking, 89
removing squiggly lines from words, 97
replacing misspellings when, 88
Spelling pane, 86
splitting cells in Word tables, 155
stacking objects, 304
stacks, defined, 509
Start Enforcing Protection dialog box, 449
starting screen, 6
starting Word, 9, 18, 52
statistics, document, 84
status bar, 13
defined, 509
customizing, 500
status bar indicator, defined, 509
style area pane
defined, 509
displaying, 298, 299
Style Pane Options dialog box, 461
styles
defined, 509
accessibility design with, 330
552 snapping objects to grid
Styles gallery, 20, 94, 472
Styles pane, 21, 461
adding styles to, 100
subentries, defined, 509
suffixes, file. See file name extensions
suffixes, searching by, 70
support for book, xiii
switches, defined, 509
symbols, inserting in documents, 191
synonyms, looking up, 77, 82
T
tab leaders
defined, 509
setting, in tables of contents, 382
tabbed lists
defined, 509
converting into tables, 151
creating, 147
entering text for, 147
formatting, 148
Table Of Contents dialog box, 381
table styles, defined, 509
Table Styles gallery, 161
tables of authorities
defined, 509
inserting, 385
tables of contents
defined, 509
creating, 378
deleting, 381
formatting, 379
inserting, 379
page breaks, inserting in, 381
selecting, 384
styles for, 379, 382
tab leaders, setting, 382
updating, 379, 383
working with, as field, 383
tables of figures
defined, 509
inserting, 386
tables, Word
accessibility considerations for, 316, 331
aligning cells in, 156
alt text, entering, 160
assistive device limitations, 151
borders, removing, 318
clearing formatting from, 318
column width, setting, 159
converting to or from existing text, 151, 159
creating, 149, 156
creating via Excel worksheets, 151
deleting elements of, 154
drawing directly, 150
entering data in, 152, 157
first column, formatting, 165
formatting, 161, 164
formulas, constructing, 155
gridlines, displaying/hiding, 152
header and total row formatting, 164
headings, changing direction of, 165
inserting, 316
inserting rows or columns, 153
layout, modifying, 160
merging cells in, 154, 156
modifying structure of, 152
moving and sizing, 152, 154, 160
navigating in, 152
nesting, 315
for page layout, 315
performing calculations in, 155
Quick Tables, 162
repeating header row, 160
resizing, 154
saving in Quick Tables gallery, 163
selecting, 153, 317
selecting elements of, 156
shading cells in, 166
sorting data in, 155
splitting cells in, 155
styles, applying, 161, 164, 318
tabs. See formatting marks; tab stops
tabs, ribbon, 11
adding, 496
moving, 498
tab stops
defined, 509
aligning text by using, 121, 126
deleting, 121
displaying and hiding, 38, 42
moving, 121
setting, 120, 126, 147, 149
tab leaders, applying, 121
tags, HTML, 333
targets, defined, 509
templates, 52
defined, 510
attaching, 457, 459, 466
creating, 454, 458, 467
creating documents directly from, 52
creating documents from, 454
editing, 472
elements of, 456
online and offline availability of, 455
opening, 19
previewing, 52
templates 553
templates (continued)
saving, 458, 466, 467
saving charts as, 258
Templates And Add-Ins dialog box, 459
text
aligning, by using tab stops, 121, 126
copying, 61, 64
cutting, 61, 65
cutting vs. copying, 62
deleting, 59, 60, 63
dragging and dropping, 61
editing, 58
entering, 56
finding and replacing, 68
hiding, 38
hyphenating, 141, 145
inserting, 59
moving, 61
pasting, 61, 64, 83
selecting, 59, 60, 63, 143
translating, 78, 83
saving, 103, 106
setting default, 104
sharing, 104
Themes gallery, 102
Thesaurus, looking up words in, 77
Thesaurus pane, 77, 83
three-dimensional charts, 248
thumbnails, 14, 510
tick-marks, defined, 510
tiling background images, 269
time. See date and time
title bar, 10
titles, document, inserting as fields, 369
tool tabs, 12, 510
Touch Mode, 5
tracking changes, 434
accepting/rejecting changes, 436, 438
activating, 434, 436
when coauthoring, 450
when comparing documents, 438
displaying certain types of revisions, 435, 437
displaying revisions, 436
hiding revisions, 435, 437
in merged documents, 441
navigating revisions, 435
reviewer name, changing, 435
revision marks in, 434
viewing ScreenTips for, 437
text boxes
defined, 510
accessibility considerations for, 286, 330
adding, 276, 287
drawing, 286
inserting in shapes, 183
linking, 286
moving, 286
resizing, 286
text colors, applying, 114, 116
text formatting. See character formatting
Text pane, 228
text wrapping. See wrapping text
text wrapping breaks. See line breaks
texture fills, applying, 267
Theme Colors gallery, 105
Theme Fonts gallery, 106
themes, document, 23
defined, 510
changing, 102
color palettes, assigning, 105
deleting, 107
finding location of, 104
fonts, modifying, 106
554 Templates And Add-Ins dialog box
translating text, 78, 83
Translation Language Options dialog box, 80
Trust Center dialog box, 485
.txt files, saving documents as, 323
typos, 51
U
underlining text, 110
undoing edits, 62, 65
unloading add-ins, 493
unpinning the ribbon, 12, 55
Update Table Of Contents dialog box, 383
updating
bibliographies, 395, 401
indexes, 389, 393
styles, 460, 463, 470
tables of contents, 379, 383
upgrading
from Word 2003, 8
from Word 2007, 7
from Word 2010, 6
uppercase fonts, applying, 117
use licenses, obtaining, 451
user interface
Office, 4
Word, 9
user name, changing, 278, 435, 479
V
value axis, defined, 510
versioning, document, 442
video clips
inserting, in documents, 177
working with, 177
View Shortcuts toolbar, defined, 510
View tab, 25
views, document. See document views
visual impairments. See accessibility
W
Watermark menu, 272
watermarks, 265. See also backgrounds
defined, 510
adding, 272
colors, applying, 273
pictures as, applying, 274
resizing, 275
wavy underlines, 86. See also spelling and grammar,
checking
web apps, 5
web browsers. See browsers
Web Layout view, 37, 335
defined, 510
switching to, 43
web logs. See blog posts, publishing
Web Options dialog box, 334
webpages
defined, 510
browser configuration, setting, 334
citing as sources, 398
creating, in Word, 333
deleting objects from, 337
editing text in, 337
file formats for, 333
formatting, 335, 341
hyperlinks, inserting, 338
margins, setting, 338
opening in browser, 340
positioning objects on, 335
previewing documents as, 335
saving documents as, 333, 340
selecting content in, 338
white space, hiding in documents, 40
widows
defined, 510
avoiding, 200
wildcard characters
defined, 510
searching by using, 70
windows, arranging, 45
Windows Explorer, 324
Word. See also documents
customizing, 30
exiting, 33
file format compatibility, 58
getting help with, 46
new features in, 6
RT version, 5
standard desktop installation, 4
starting, 9, 18, 52
upgrading from Word 2003, 8
upgrading from Word 2007, 7
upgrading from Word 2010, 6
user interface, 9
Web App, 5, 54
word choice, tools for, 75
word count
viewing, 84
viewing in status bar, 13
Word Count dialog box, 84
Word documents. See documents
Word documents 555
Word Help window, 47
Word Options dialog box, 30, 362, 478, 489, 494
word processing, 3
X
XML (Extensible Markup Language)
defined, 505
file formats, 58
defined, 510
WordArt
defined, 510
adding to documents, 185
converting text into, 185
formatting, 186, 188
inserting, 185, 186
positioning, 187
wrapping text around, 187
Word Web App, 5, 54
word wrapping, defined, 510
words. See also text
definitions, looking up, 75
selecting, 59, 63
synonyms, finding, 77
workbooks, selecting as mail merge source, 406
worksheets
arranging in windows, 259
copying data to Word charts, 259
data points in, 246
deleting data from, 248
entering data in, 248
inserting in Word tables, 151
navigating in, 248
opening, in Word, 246
selecting, 247
wrapping text
defined, 510
aligning objects and, 309
around diagrams, 229
around objects, 304, 306, 309
around pictures, 172
around shapes, 181
around WordArt, 187
556 Word Help window
XPS files
saving documents as, 324, 325
working with, 325
Z
Zoom button, 196
Zoom dialog box, 41
zooming, in documents, 13, 17, 38, 40
About the authors
Joan Lambert
Joan has worked in the training and certification industry for 16 years.
As President of Online Training Solutions, Inc. (OTSI), Joan is responsible
for guiding the translation of technical information and requirements
into useful, relevant, and measurable training and certification tools.
Joan is a Microsoft Office Certified Master, a Microsoft Certified Appli­
cation Specialist Instructor, a Microsoft Certified Technology Specialist,
a Microsoft Certified Trainer, and the author of more than two dozen
books about Windows and Office (for Windows and Mac). Joan enthusiastically shares her love of technology through her participation in the
creation of books, learning materials, and certification exams. She greatly
enjoys communicating the benefits of new technologies by ­delivering
training and facilitating Microsoft Experience Center events.
Joan currently lives in a nearly perfect small town in Texas with her
daughter, Trinity Preppernau, who proudly assisted with the creation
of the graphics for this book.
Joyce Cox
Joyce has more than 30 years’ experience in the development of training materials about technical subjects for non-technical audiences, and
is the author of dozens of books about Office and Windows technologies. She is the Vice President of OTSI.
As President of and principal author for Online Press, she developed
the Quick Course series of computer training books for beginning and
intermediate adult learners. She was also the first managing editor of
Microsoft Press, an editor for Sybex, and an editor for the University
of California.
The team
This book would not exist without the support of these hard-working members of the OTSI
publishing team:
▪▪ Jan Bednarczuk
▪▪ Rob Carr
▪▪ Susie Carr
▪▪ Jeanne Craver
▪▪ Kathy Krause
▪▪ Marlene Lambert
▪▪ Jaime Odell
▪▪ Jean Trenary
We are especially thankful to the support staff at home who make it possible for our team
members to devote their time and attention to these projects.
Rosemary Caperton provided invaluable support on behalf of Microsoft Learning.
Online Training Solutions, Inc. (OTSI)
OTSI specializes in the design, creation, and production of Office and Windows training
products for information workers and home computer users. For more information about
OTSI, visit:
www.otsi.com
How to
download
your ebook
Thank you for purchasing this Microsoft Press title. Your companion PDF ebook is ready to
download from O’Reilly Media, official distributor of Microsoft Press titles.
®
To download your ebook, go to
http://aka.ms/Word2013sbs/files
and follow the instructions.
Please note: You will be asked to create a
free online account and enter the access
code below.
Your access code:
HNXHZXW
Microsoft Word 2013 Step by Step
Your PDF ebook allows you to:
• Search the full text
• Print
• Copy and paste
Best yet, you will be notified about
free updates to your ebook.
If you ever lose your ebook file, you
can download it again just by logging
in to your account.
Need help? Please contact:
[email protected]
or call 800-889-8969.
Please note: This access code is non-transferable and is void if altered or revised in any way. It may not be
sold or redeemed for cash, credit, or refund.
What do
you think of
this book?
We want to hear from you!
To participate in a brief online survey, please visit:
microsoft.com/learning/booksurvey
Tell us how well this book meets your needs—what works effectively, and what we can
do better. Your feedback will help us continually improve our books and learning
resources for you.
Thank you in advance for your input!
SurvPage_Corp_02.indd 1
5/19/2011 4:18:12 PM
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement